956GB
Image Based Laser Sensor
1
Getting Started
IX-H
2
Installation and
Connection
3
Basic Operation
User’s Manual
4
Settings Navigator
(PC Software)
5
Settings Navigator
Read this manual before use.
After you read this manual,
keep it in a safe place for future reference.
6
Operating/
Adjusting
7
Various Functions
8
Checking settings
and detection history
9
Controlling with
Input/Output Line
10
A
(Scan Mode Setup)
(Line Mode Setup)
Specifications
Status Table,
Troubleshooting
Introduction
Introduction
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.
Symbols
The following symbols alert you to important messages.
Be sure to read these messages carefully.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as
well as property damage.
It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during
operation.
It indicates additional information on proper operation.
It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.
It indicates the reference pages in this manual or the reference pages in separate manuals.
Cautions
(1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited.
(2) The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice.
(3)An utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible. If there are any
mistakes or questions, please contact a KEYENCE office listed in the back of the manual.
(4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit.
(5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced.
DeviceNet and Ethernet/IP are trademarks of ODVA, inc.
CC-Link is a trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
EtherCAT is a trademark of Beckhoff Automation.
Safety Information for IX-H
Safety Information for IX-H
General Precautions
yyThis product is for the purpose of detecting target objects. Do not use this product for the purpose to
protect a human body or a part of human body.
yyThis product is not intended for use as explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in a hazardous
location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.
yyDo not use this product in an application that may cause death, serious injury or serious property damage
should a failure with this product occur, such as nuclear power plants, on aircraft, trains, ships, or
vehicles, used within medical equipment, playground equipment, roller coasters and other rides, etc.
yyIf the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the
equipment may be impaired.
yyYou must perform a sufficient risk assessment for the machine where this product is to be installed prior
to installing this product. Provide appropriate protective fail-safe measures on the machine independent
from this product in case a failure with this product should occur.
yyYou must verify that this product is operating correctly in terms of functionality and performance before
the start and the operation of this product.
yyWe recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage in the event of an assumed
problem occurring.
yyDo not modify this product, or use it in any way other than described in the specification.
yyWhen this product is used in combination with other instruments, functions and performance may be
degraded, depending on the operating conditions and surrounding environment.
yyDo not place the instruments, including peripherals, under the rapid temperature change. It may cause
condensation and may damage instruments or peripherals.
yyRemove the power cable from the power supply if you will not use the IX-H for a long time.
956GB
1
Precautions on Laser Products
Precautions on Laser Products
The IX-H employs a semiconductor laser as the light source.
Items
Description
Model
IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360
Wavelength
FDA(CDRH) Part 1040.10
IEC60825-1
JIS C6802
660 nm
Output
0.95 mW
Laser class
Class II Laser Product
Output
1.6 mW
Laser class
Class 2 Laser Product
Items
Description
Model
IX-360W
Wavelength
660 nm
IEC60825-1
FDA(CDRH) Part 1040.10*
JIS C6802
Output
2.8 mW
Laser class
Class 2 Laser Product
* ‌The laser classification is implemented based on IEC60825-1 in accordance with the requirements of Laser Notice No.
56 of the FDA (CDRH).
Follow the instructions mentioned in this manual. Otherwise, injury to the human body (eyes and skin) may result.
yyUse of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result
in hazardous radiation exposure.
yyDo not disassemble this product. Laser emission from this product is not automatically stopped when it is
disassembled.
yyPrecautions for Class II / 2 Laser Products.
yyDo not stare into the laser beam or its reflection from a mirror-like surface.
yyDo not direct the beam at other people or into areas where people not working with the laser might be
present.
yyBe careful regarding the path of the laser beam. If there is a possibility that an operator may be exposed
to the specular or diffuse reflection of the laser, block the beam by installing a protective enclosure.
yyInstall this product so that the path of the laser beam is not at the same height as the operator’s eyes.
Laser Safety Measures
Laser Beam Warning Light
The LASER indicator light of sensor amplifier is ON when the laser is being emitted, whereas the LASER indicator light is
OFF when the laser is shut-down.
LASER indicator
light
2
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Precautions on Laser Products
Laser Shutdown Input
Set the laser shutdown input to the external input, so that the laser emission can be stopped by turning ON the external
input.
Scan mode: ‌When the laser is shut-down, the trigger will not be received so the laser is not emitted. If the laser shutdown
input is turned ON after the trigger has been received and the scan has been started, the laser will be stopped
after the current detection is finished.
Line mode: The input response time is 32 ms (typ.).
The laser is emitted as the external input is turned OFF.
Scan mode: The trigger will be receiving within 5 ms (typ.).
Line mode: The laser will be emitted within 32 ms (typ.).
For more information about laser shutdown input, refer to the following.
“Input Function” (Page 7-23)
Laser Warning Label
The position and type of warning labels for the laser on this product is listed below.
IX-055, IX-080, IX-150, IX-360
zz
Identification label
(English)
Warning Label (CDRH)
The FDA (CDRH) warning labels are attached to the unit when shipped from the factory. Labels other than the FDA (CDRH)
labels are supplied with the unit. Use the suitable warning label included in the package of this product according to the
countries and/or regions where this product is used.
In this case, it can be affixed on the warning label, which has already been affixed to this product. Attach the other label(s)
to the appropriate locations for the destinations of the product.
Japanese
English
German
French
Simplified Chinese
Do not block the hole on the side of sensor head when attaching the seal.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3
Precautions on Laser Products
IX-360W
zz
Identification label
(English)
Warning Label (IEC)
A IEC (English) warning label is attached to the unit when shipped from the factory. Labels other than the IEC (English)
labels are supplied with the unit. Use the suitable warning label included in the package of this product according to the
countries and/or regions where this product is used.
In this case, it can be affixed on the warning label, which has already been affixed to this product. Attach the other label(s)
to the appropriate locations for the destinations of the product.
Japanese
English
German
French
Simplified Chinese
Safety Precautions on LED Product
The degree of risk of this product is shown below.
Model
Light source
Risk group*
Red LED
Exempt group
IX-055
IX-080
IX-150
IX-360
IX-360W
* LED product is classified as shown below according to IEC 62471.
yyExempted group
yyRisk group 1 (Low-Risk)
yyRisk group 2 (Moderate-Risk)
yyRisk group 3 (High-Risk)
4
: Does not pose any photobiological hazard.
: Does not pose a hazard due to normal behavioral limitations on exposure.
: ‌Does not pose a hazard due to the aversion response to very bright light sources or due to
thermal discomfort.
: May pose a hazard even for momentary or brief exposure.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Important Instructions
Important Instructions
Observe the following precautions to prevent malfunction of the IX Series and to ensure proper
use.
Precautions on use
yyThe power of this product and instruments connected to this product must be turned off when the cable is
installed or removed. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or product damage.
yyUse this product with the correct supply voltage. Failure to do so may cause a product damage.
yyAttach the sensor head on the metal when it is in use.
yyFor instructions
yyDo not turn OFF the power while setting the items or saving the settings. Otherwise, all or part of the
setting data may be lost.
yyDo not let water, dust or oil stick to the emitter / light receiving section. Failure to do so may cause a
malfunction. Clean the emitter / light receiving section by blowing the dust off with clean air. If heavily
soiled, clean it with a soft and alcohol-soaked cloth.
yyWhen this product becomes dirty, do not rub it with benzene or thinner. Doing so may change the color
or shape of the unit.
yyWriting to non-volatile memory when adjusting ZERO/Offset
If ZERO/Offset adjustment with external input is to be performed frequently, set “ZERO/Offset storage” of
the input option to [Disable] to protect the nonvolatile memory of the internal sensor. When the option is
set to [Enable], the nonvolatile memory is guaranteed to write one million times.
yyWarming Up
After turning on the power, leave the device for 15 minutes as is before using it.
The display value may gradually drift because the temperature inside changes right after the power is
turned ON.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5
Important Instructions
Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs
In the following cases, turn the power OFF immediately. Using the IX-H in an abnormal condition could
cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
Contact our office for repair.
yyIf water or debris enters the IX-H.
yyIf the IX-H is dropped or the case is damaged.
yyIf abnormal smoke or odor emanates from the IX-H.
Precautions on installation
To use this product correctly and safely, avoid installing it in the following locations. Failure to do so may
cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
yyOutdoors
yyAltitude above 2000 m
yyLocations that are humid, dusty or poorly ventilated
yyLocations where the temperature is high such as those exposed to direct sunlight
yyLocations where there are flammable or corrosive gases
yyLocations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact
yyLocations where water, oil, or chemicals may splash onto the unit
yyTo improve the anti-noise feature, install the unit following the precautions below. Otherwise, a
malfunction may occur.
yyGround the FG terminal on the sensor amplifier.
yyDo not mount the unit in a cabinet where high-voltage equipment is already installed.
yyMount the unit as far from power lines as possible.
yySeparate the unit as far as possible from the devices that emit strong electric or magnetic field (such as
solenoid or chopper).
yyDo not put the I/O cable in the same pipe together with power cable or high-voltage cable.
yyFor power supply
yyNoise superimposed on the power supply could cause malfunction. Use a stabilized DC power supply
configured with an isolation transformer.
yyWhen using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the frame ground terminal.
yyAttach the sensor head on the metal when it is in use.
yyAttach the sensor amplifier to DIN rail first, then attach the DIN rail on the metal.
yyDevices including this unit are precision components. Do not apply shock or vibration. When shock or
vibration is applied, the measurement value may change.
6
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Precautions on Regulations and Standards
Precautions on Regulations and Standards
CE Marking
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the applicable EU
Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in
the Member State of European Union.
EMC Directive
zz
yyApplicable standard: EN61326-1, Class A
yyMake sure the length of the power cable, I/O cable and Ethernet cable are less than 30 meters long.
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated complies with the
essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance
on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.
CSA Certificate
This product complies with the following CSA and UL standards, and has been certified by CSA.
yyApplicable standard:CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1
UL61010-1
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a product certified by CSA.
yyUse the follwing power supply.
A CSA/UL Listing certified power supply that has Class 2 output as defined by the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) and
National Electrical Code (NEC)
yyConnect the sensor amplifier power supply and I/O connector to the same power supply that has Class 2 output.
yyOver-voltage category I
yyUse this product under pollution degree 3.
yyUse this product at an altitude of 2000 m or less.
yyIndoor use only.
yyAttach the sensor head to metal.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7
Precautions on Regulations and Standards
Software License Agreement
[IX-H1] (hereinafter referred as “This Software”) has the condition for its use that the customer should agree to the
following software license agreement (hereinafter referred as “This Agreement”). This Agreement becomes established by
regarding that all provisions in This Agreement are agreed if the customers use or copy all or a part of This Software.
Article 1 (Permission of usage right)
1. As the conditions of compliance of This Agreement from customers, KEYENCE Corporation (hereinafter referred as “The
Company”) will permit the usage right to the customers on a non-exclusive basis.
2. A customer can install This Software to one computer. Also, the one computer where This Software is installed can be
used by multiple users.
Article 2 (Restriction for duplication)
A customer can duplicate This Software only once for the purpose of retaining the backup of This Software.
Article 3 (Prohibition items)
The following conducts of customers are prohibited pertaining to This Software:
a. Alteration acts such as modifying or adding This Software function.
b. Any reverse engineering acts such as reverse compiling or reverse assembling.
c. Acts of re-sale, transfer, redistribution, usage authorization, rental, lease, and others for This Software and license key
of This Software provided by The Company.
Article 4 (Copyright etc.)
The intellectual property rights relevant to the copyrights etc. of This Software and This Software of this manual will
attribute to The Company.
Article 5 (Exemptions)
The Company will not be liable to the damages on customers or third parties caused by results of using This Software.
Article 6 (Support)
The Company provides technical supports pertaining to the question etc. of This Software from customers in accordance
with This Agreement. However, it does not promise that customers’ purpose can be accomplished by the technical support
provided by The Company.
Article 7 (Agreement termination)
1. This Agreement will be terminated when a customer aborts using This Software by the method of discarding This
Software and its duplication.
2. If a customer breaches any of provisions in This Agreement, The Company may cancel This Agreement on its unilateral
decision. In this case, This Software and its duplication should be returned immediately to The Company or discarded.
3. If there are any damages occurred due to the breach of This Agreement by a customer, the customer will make such a
compensation for The Company.
Article 8 (Governing law)
This Agreement will conform to Japanese laws.
8
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Version of the IX Series
Version of the IX Series
You can download the most recent operation software for the sensor amplifier and the update software for the PC software
for IX Series, IX‑Navigator (IX-H1), from the KEYENCE website.
Please refer to the description on the homepage for the download instructions.
URL : http://www.keyence.com/
Sensor operation software
Version
R2.00.**
Description
The initial version.
This is the version of this document.
Software for the IX series, IX-Navigator (IX-H1)
Version
Description
R1.00.**
The initial version.
R1.01.**
Compatibility with English/German/Chinese (Simplified).
R1.02.**
Compatibility with Italian/French/Spanish.
R2.00.**
This is the version of this document.
Compatibility with IX-H (Japanese, English, Simplified Chinese only).
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
9
Version of the IX Series
MEMO
10
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Structure of This Manual
Structure of This Manual
1
Getting Started
This chapter explains the system configuration and overview of IX-H, package
contents, and names and functions of each part.
2
Installation and
Connection
This chapter explains the procedures for installing and connecting the sensor
and for setting up the PC.
3
Basic Operation
This chapter explains the basic usage of the IX-H and its operation flow.
4
Settings Navigator
(Scan Mode Setup)
This chapter explains how to set scan mode using Settings Navigator.
5
Settings Navigator
(Line Mode Setup)
This chapter explains how to set line mode using Settings Navigator.
6
Operating/Adjusting
7
Various Functions
8
Checking settings and
detection history
This chapter explains the functions and operations of settings and detection
history confirmation.
9
Controlling with Input/
Output Line
This chapter explains how the input and output terminals control each
operation.
10
Specifications
A
Appendices
This chapter explains how to operate and adjust the IX-H.
This chapter explains the detailed features of the IX-H.
This chapter explains specifications and dimensions.
This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
Table of contents
Table of contents
Introduction
Symbols
Cautions
Safety Information for IX-H.................................................. 1
General Precautions........................................................ 1
Precautions on Laser Products........................................... 2
Laser Safety Measures.................................................... 2
Laser Beam Warning Light........................................... 2
Laser Shutdown Input................................................... 3
Laser Warning Label..................................................... 3
Safety Precautions on LED Product................................ 4
Important Instructions.......................................................... 5
Precautions on use.......................................................... 5
Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs......... 6
Precautions on installation............................................... 6
Precautions on Regulations and Standards........................ 7
CE Marking...................................................................... 7
CSA Certificate................................................................. 7
Software License Agreement .......................................... 8
Version of the IX Series....................................................... 9
Sensor operation software............................................... 9
Software for the IX series, IX-Navigator (IX-H1).............. 9
Structure of This Manual................................................... 11
Table of contents............................................................... 12
Chapter 1 Getting Started
System Configuration....................................................... 1-2
Basic configurations of IX-H.......................................... 1-2
Connecting the PC and one sensor........................... 1-2
Connecting the PC and multiple sensors.................. 1-3
Overview of the IX-H........................................................ 1-4
What is the IX-H............................................................ 1-4
Using the PC software............................................... 1-4
Using the control panel (IX-CP50) for IX................... 1-5
Checking the Package Contents...................................... 1-6
Sensor Head................................................................. 1-6
Sensor Amplifier............................................................ 1-6
Option........................................................................... 1-7
Sensor Head/Amplifier cable..................................... 1-7
I/O cable.................................................................... 1-7
Vertical mounting bracket.......................................... 1-7
Transverse mounting bracket.................................... 1-7
Vertical diagonal mounting bracket............................ 1-7
Transverse diagonal mounting bracket...................... 1-7
Adjustable bracket..................................................... 1-7
Communication cables.................................................. 1-8
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)............................ 1-8
L type Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45).................. 1-8
LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45)........................................ 1-8
PC software for the IX Series........................................ 1-8
Name and Function of Each Part..................................... 1-9
Sensor Head................................................................. 1-9
Name and function of each part of the sensor head.... 1-9
Operation of the sensor head indicator light.............. 1-9
Sensor Amplifier.......................................................... 1-10
Name and function of each part of the sensor
amplifier................................................................... 1-10
Operation of the sensor amplifier indicator light...... 1-11
12
Chapter 2 Installation and Connection
Mounting the Sensor........................................................ 2-2
Mounting the Sensor Head........................................... 2-2
Precautions during installation................................... 2-2
Detecting objects near a wall............................. 2-2
„„
Checking the detection range.................................... 2-2
Detection range (scan mode)............................ 2-2
„„
Detection range (line mode; vertical head)........ 2-3
„„
Detection range (line mode; vertical laser)........ 2-3
„„
Mounting the Sensor Head........................................ 2-4
When screws are secured from
„„
the sensor head................................................. 2-4
When screws are secured from
„„
the mounting material........................................ 2-4
When mounting the sensor head diagonally...... 2-4
„„
Attaching the optional mounting bracket................... 2-5
When using the vertical mounting bracket
„„
(OP-88343)........................................................ 2-5
When using the transverse mounting bracket
„„
(OP-88344)........................................................ 2-5
When using the vertical diagonal mounting
„„
bracket (OP-88345)........................................... 2-5
When using the transverse diagonal
„„
mounting bracket (OP-88346)........................... 2-5
When using the adjustable bracket
„„
(OP-88347)........................................................ 2-6
Mounting the Sensor Amplifier...................................... 2-6
Mounting the IX-H2000 (Main).................................. 2-6
Mounting the IX-H2050 (Expansion)......................... 2-7
Cables.............................................................................. 2-8
Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable and
sensor head.................................................................. 2-8
Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable and
sensor amplifier............................................................. 2-8
Connecting the cable to the sensor amplifier................ 2-9
Connecting the Ethernet cable or LAN cable............ 2-9
Connecting the I/O cable (OP-87906)....................... 2-9
Terminal number and wiring color of the I/O
„„
cable (OP-87906)............................................ 2-10
Supplying power to the sensor amplifier.................. 2-11
Using the analog output function............................. 2-11
Connector Specifications......................................... 2-12
Selecting NPN output...................................... 2-12
„„
Selecting PNP output....................................... 2-12
„„
Input/Output Circuit and Electric Specifications.......... 2-13
Input circuit.............................................................. 2-13
No-voltage input
„„
(when NPN output is selected)........................ 2-13
Voltage input (when PNP output is selected).... 2-13
„„
Output circuit........................................................... 2-13
Selecting NPN output...................................... 2-13
„„
Selecting PNP output....................................... 2-13
„„
Analog Output.................................................. 2-14
„„
Connecting the sensor to a PC................................... 2-15
Connecting directly (1 unit)...................................... 2-15
Connecting via a network (Direct Connection
(2 units or more)/Network Connection).................... 2-16
Other connections................................................... 2-17
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Table of contents
Setting up the PC........................................................... 2-18
Required PC Specifications........................................ 2-18
OS........................................................................... 2-18
Hardware................................................................. 2-18
Operating conditions................................................ 2-18
Installing IX-Navigator (IX-H1).................................... 2-19
Installation destination of the software (reference)..... 2-19
Deleting the software (uninstall).................................. 2-20
Changing the PC settings (IP address setting)........... 2-20
For Windows 10....................................................... 2-20
For Windows 7......................................................... 2-21
Chapter 3 Basic Operation
Detection Mode and Judgment Processing...................... 3-2
Overview of detection modes........................................ 3-2
How to select detection modes.................................. 3-2
Scan Mode................................................................ 3-3
Line Mode.................................................................. 3-3
Judgment processing flow............................................ 3-4
Scan Mode................................................................ 3-4
Line Mode.................................................................. 3-5
Overview of Screen and Operation.................................. 3-6
Basic Operation Flow....................................................... 3-8
Operation when the Power is Turned on.......................... 3-9
Operation flow when the power is turned on................. 3-9
Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator
(Direct Connection (1 unit))......................................... 3-10
Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator
(Direct Connection (2 units or more)).......................... 3-11
Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator
(Network Connection)................................................. 3-12
Setting the network address for IX-Navigator.......... 3-12
Searching for a sensor to be connected.................. 3-12
Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address.... 3-13
Operation for initial startup of the sensor.................... 3-14
Operations when replacing the sensor head.............. 3-14
Setting to the Factory Default......................................... 3-15
Initializing the sensor.................................................. 3-15
Basic IX-Navigator Operations....................................... 3-16
Operating the image tool bar...................................... 3-16
Operations when the image is magnified.................... 3-16
Changing display contents.......................................... 3-17
Captured image....................................................... 3-17
Measurement Position............................................. 3-17
Measurement area check........................................ 3-17
Height Display/Height image 1................................ 3-17
Height image 2........................................................ 3-17
Display contents specific to each tool...................... 3-18
Editing the tool window............................................... 3-18
Moving the tool window........................................... 3-19
Changing the size of the tool window...................... 3-19
In scan mode................................................... 3-19
„„
In line mode..................................................... 3-19
„„
Changing the angle of the tool window.................... 3-19
Editing Values............................................................. 3-20
Setting by the slider................................................. 3-20
Setting by the numerical input fields........................ 3-20
Chapter 4Settings Navigator
(Scan Mode Setup)
Settings Navigator............................................................ 4-2
Flow in the Settings Navigator...................................... 4-2
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator....................... 4-3
Starting the Settings Navigator..................................... 4-3
Types of Settings Navigator Images............................. 4-4
Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow............ 4-5
Finishing the Settings Navigator................................... 4-6
Finishing by completing all steps............................... 4-6
Finishing without completing the steps...................... 4-6
1. Detection Setup............................................................ 4-7
Main Screen for Detection Conditions.......................... 4-7
Setting Detection Setup................................................ 4-8
Trigger Options.......................................................... 4-8
Brightness Adjustment............................................... 4-9
Extended Functions................................................. 4-10
Measurement direction.................................... 4-10
„„
Measurement mode......................................... 4-11
„„
Reduce measurement noise............................ 4-11
„„
Measure when Position Adjustment fails......... 4-12
„„
Display outline................................................. 4-12
„„
2. Master Registration.................................................... 4-14
Main Screen for Master Registration.......................... 4-14
Master Registration..................................................... 4-15
Tilt Adjustment......................................................... 4-16
How to Select the Option Settings........................... 4-19
The reference surface is visible on
„„
the master........................................................ 4-19
The reference surface is not visible on
„„
the master........................................................ 4-19
The reference surface is visible on
„„
the master and adjust every detection............. 4-19
3. Tool Settings............................................................... 4-20
Types of tools.............................................................. 4-20
Basic Tools............................................................... 4-21
Step Tool.......................................................... 4-21
„„
Height Tool....................................................... 4-21
„„
Average Height Tool........................................ 4-22
„„
Position Adjustment Tool.................................. 4-22
„„
Advanced Tools....................................................... 4-23
MAX/MIN Tool.................................................. 4-23
„„
Height Area Tool.............................................. 4-23
„„
Pin Height Tool................................................. 4-24
„„
Image Tools............................................................. 4-25
Monochrome Area Tool.................................... 4-25
„„
Width Tool........................................................ 4-25
„„
1-Axis Adjustment Tool.................................... 4-26
„„
2-Axis Adjustment Tool.................................... 4-26
„„
Calculation Tools...................................................... 4-27
Step Calculation Tool....................................... 4-27
„„
Thickness Calculation Tool.............................. 4-28
„„
Main Screen for the Tool settings................................ 4-29
Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool..................................... 4-30
Adding a tool............................................................ 4-30
Editing a tool............................................................ 4-31
Copying a tool.......................................................... 4-31
Deleting a tool.......................................................... 4-32
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
13
Table of contents
Step Tool..................................................................... 4-33
Step tool settings..................................................... 4-33
Extended functions for the step tool........................ 4-35
Measurement Range....................................... 4-35
„„
Rename Tool.................................................... 4-36
„„
2-point Calibration............................................ 4-36
„„
Height Tool.................................................................. 4-39
Setting the height tool.............................................. 4-39
Extended functions for the height tool..................... 4-40
Measurement Range....................................... 4-40
„„
Rename Tool.................................................... 4-41
„„
2-point Calibration............................................ 4-42
„„
Average Height Tool.................................................... 4-46
Setting the Average Height Tool.............................. 4-46
Mask................................................................ 4-50
„„
Sensitivity Adjustment...................................... 4-51
„„
Extended Functions of the Average Height Tool...... 4-52
Measurement Range....................................... 4-52
„„
Tool Name........................................................ 4-53
„„
2-point Calibration............................................ 4-53
„„
Position Adjustment Tool............................................. 4-55
Setting the position adjustment tool......................... 4-55
Extended functions for the position adjustment tool... 4-57
Rotation Range................................................ 4-57
„„
Search Algorithm............................................. 4-57
„„
MAX/MIN Tool............................................................. 4-58
Setting the MAX/MIN tool........................................ 4-58
Mask................................................................ 4-60
„„
Extended functions for the MAX/MIN tool................ 4-62
Measurement Range....................................... 4-62
„„
Rename Tool.................................................... 4-63
„„
2-point Calibration............................................ 4-63
„„
Height Area Tool.......................................................... 4-66
Setting the height area tool...................................... 4-66
Mask................................................................ 4-68
„„
Reference Height Settings............................... 4-69
„„
Direct input of the extraction range.................. 4-70
„„
Upper Limit...................................................... 4-70
„„
Extended functions for the height area tool............. 4-71
Specify Height Range...................................... 4-71
„„
Fixed Reference Area...................................... 4-72
„„
Rename Tool.................................................... 4-72
„„
Pin Height Tool............................................................ 4-73
Setting the Pin Height Tool...................................... 4-73
Reference Height Settings............................... 4-75
„„
Extended Functions of the Pin Height Tool.............. 4-76
Measurement Range....................................... 4-76
„„
Tool Name........................................................ 4-77
„„
Detection Advanced Settings........................... 4-78
„„
Monochrome Area Tool............................................... 4-79
Setting the monochrome area tool.......................... 4-79
Mask................................................................ 4-81
„„
Upper Limit...................................................... 4-82
„„
Extended functions for the monochrome area tool.... 4-83
Advanced Brightness Extraction...................... 4-83
„„
Fixed Reference Area...................................... 4-83
„„
Rename Tool.................................................... 4-85
„„
14
Width Tool................................................................... 4-86
Setting the Width Tool.............................................. 4-86
Mask................................................................ 4-87
„„
Edge Sensitivity Adjustment............................ 4-88
„„
Extended Functions of the Width Tool..................... 4-89
Width Extraction Method.................................. 4-89
„„
Scaling............................................................. 4-90
„„
Tool Name........................................................ 4-91
„„
1-Axis Adjustment Tool................................................ 4-92
Setting the 1-Axis Adjustment Tool.......................... 4-92
Edge Sensitivity Adjustment............................ 4-93
„„
Extended Function of the 1-Axis Adjustment Tool.... 4-93
Edge Detection................................................ 4-93
„„
2-Axis Adjustment Tool................................................ 4-94
Setting the 2-Axis Adjustment Tool.......................... 4-94
Edge Sensitivity Adjustment............................ 4-95
„„
Extended Function of the 2-Axis Adjustment Tool.... 4-96
Edge Detection................................................ 4-96
„„
Angle Correction.............................................. 4-96
„„
Step Calculation Tool.................................................. 4-97
Extended functions for the step calculation tool...... 4-99
Rename Tool.................................................... 4-99
„„
2-point Calibration.......................................... 4-100
„„
Thickness Calculation Tool........................................ 4-103
Setting the thickness calculation tool..................... 4-103
Extended functions for the thickness
calculation tool....................................................... 4-105
Rename Tool.................................................. 4-105
„„
2-point Calibration.......................................... 4-105
„„
4. Output Assignment................................................... 4-107
Main Screen for the Output Assignment................... 4-107
Output Assignment Settings...................................... 4-108
Default value.......................................................... 4-108
Setting the Output Assignment................................. 4-109
Extended functions for the output assignment...... 4-110
Total Status Conditions.................................. 4-110
„„
Trigger Error.................................................. 4-110
„„
ZERO/Offset Error......................................... 4-110
„„
ZERO/Offset Tools..........................................4-111
„„
Analog Output................................................ 4-112
„„
Logic.............................................................. 4-113
„„
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Table of contents
Chapter 5Settings Navigator
(Line Mode Setup)
Settings Navigator............................................................ 5-2
Flow in the Settings Navigator...................................... 5-2
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator....................... 5-3
Starting the Settings Navigator..................................... 5-3
Types of Settings Navigator Images............................. 5-4
Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow............ 5-5
Finishing the Settings Navigator................................... 5-6
Finishing by completing all steps............................... 5-6
Finishing without completing the steps...................... 5-6
1. Detection Setup............................................................ 5-7
Main Screen for Detection Conditions.......................... 5-7
Setting Detection Setup................................................ 5-8
Brightness Adjustment............................................... 5-8
Measurement Adjustment.......................................... 5-9
Extended Functions................................................. 5-11
Timing Input..................................................... 5-11
„„
Adjust Head Tilt................................................ 5-14
„„
Measurement direction.................................... 5-17
„„
Alarm Setting................................................... 5-18
„„
Reduce measurement noise............................ 5-22
„„
Laser Sensitivity Adjustment............................ 5-22
„„
X-Axis median filter.......................................... 5-23
„„
Peak selection................................................. 5-23
„„
Remove ambient influence.............................. 5-24
„„
Measure when Position Adjustment fails......... 5-24
„„
2. Master Registration.................................................... 5-25
Main Screen for Master Registration.......................... 5-25
Master Registration..................................................... 5-26
3. Tool Settings............................................................... 5-27
Types of tools.............................................................. 5-27
Basic Tools............................................................... 5-28
Step Tool.......................................................... 5-28
„„
Height Tool....................................................... 5-28
„„
Position Adjustment Tool.................................. 5-29
„„
Tilt Adjustment Tool.......................................... 5-29
„„
Advanced Tools....................................................... 5-30
Edge Position Tool........................................... 5-30
„„
Width/Diameter Tool........................................ 5-30
„„
Calculation Tools...................................................... 5-31
Step/Width Tool................................................ 5-31
„„
Thickness Tool................................................. 5-32
„„
Main Screen for the Tool settings................................ 5-33
Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool..................................... 5-34
Adding a tool............................................................ 5-34
Editing a tool............................................................ 5-35
Copying a tool.......................................................... 5-35
Deleting a tool.......................................................... 5-36
Step Tool..................................................................... 5-37
Step tool settings..................................................... 5-37
Extended functions for the step tool........................ 5-39
Rename Tool.................................................... 5-39
„„
2-point Calibration............................................ 5-40
„„
Averaging area for MAX/MIN Measurement.... 5-41
„„
Hysteresis........................................................ 5-41
„„
Configuring settings on the Test image.................... 5-42
Height Tool.................................................................. 5-43
Setting the height tool.............................................. 5-43
Extended functions for the height tool..................... 5-45
Rename Tool.................................................... 5-45
„„
2-point Calibration............................................ 5-46
„„
Averaging area for MAX/MIN Measurement.... 5-47
„„
Hysteresis........................................................ 5-47
„„
Configuring settings on the Test image.................... 5-48
Position Adjustment Tool............................................. 5-49
Setting the position adjustment tool......................... 5-49
Tilt Adjustment Tool..................................................... 5-51
Setting the tilt adjustment tool................................. 5-51
Edge Position Tool...................................................... 5-52
Setting the Edge Position Tool................................. 5-52
Extended Function of the Edge Position Tool.......... 5-55
Tool Name........................................................ 5-55
„„
2-point Calibration............................................ 5-56
„„
Hysteresis........................................................ 5-57
„„
Setting on the Test screen....................................... 5-58
Width/Diameter Tool.................................................... 5-59
Setting the Width/Diameter Tool.............................. 5-59
Mask................................................................ 5-62
„„
Extended Functions of the Width/Diameter Tool...... 5-63
Tool Name........................................................ 5-63
„„
Width Extraction Method
„„
(Only when the judgment mode is [Width])...... 5-63
2-point Calibration............................................ 5-64
„„
Hysteresis........................................................ 5-65
„„
Setting on the Test screen....................................... 5-66
Step/Width Tool........................................................... 5-67
Setting the Step/Width Tool..................................... 5-67
Extended Functions for the Step/Width Tool............ 5-69
Rename Tool.................................................... 5-69
„„
2-point Calibration............................................ 5-70
„„
Hysteresis........................................................ 5-71
„„
Configuring settings on the Test image.................... 5-72
Thickness Tool............................................................ 5-73
Setting the Thickness Tool....................................... 5-73
Extended Functions for the Thickness Tool............. 5-75
Rename Tool.................................................... 5-75
„„
2-point Calibration............................................ 5-76
„„
Hysteresis........................................................ 5-77
„„
Configuring settings on the Test image.................... 5-78
4. Output Assignment..................................................... 5-79
Main Screen for the Output Assignment..................... 5-79
Output Assignment Settings........................................ 5-80
Default value............................................................ 5-80
Setting the Output Assignment................................... 5-81
Extended functions for the output assignment........ 5-82
ZERO/Offset Error........................................... 5-82
„„
ZERO/Offset Tools........................................... 5-82
„„
Analog Output.................................................. 5-83
„„
Logic................................................................ 5-84
„„
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
15
Table of contents
Chapter 6 Operating/Adjusting
Starting Operation............................................................ 6-2
Turning on the power and starting operation................ 6-2
Exiting the sensor settings and starting operation........ 6-2
Overview of the Operation Screen................................... 6-3
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen............... 6-4
Run screen.................................................................... 6-4
Tool Information......................................................... 6-6
Switching the Run Screen Display................................ 6-6
Switching screens with a button................................ 6-7
Switching screens with the drop-down list................. 6-7
Selecting the tool.......................................................... 6-8
Changing the displayed captured image....................... 6-8
Switching screens with a button................................ 6-9
Switching screens with the drop-down list................. 6-9
Displaying operating information................................. 6-10
Displaying operating information............................. 6-10
Hiding the operating information.............................. 6-11
Displaying the Limit Adjustment screen...................... 6-11
Displaying the Limit Adjustment screen................... 6-11
Closing the Limit Adjustment screen....................... 6-13
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment............................. 6-13
Performing ZERO/Offset............................................. 6-14
Performing ZERO/Offset.......................................... 6-14
ZERO/Offset when position adjustment fails.... 6-14
„„
Clearing ZERO/Offset.............................................. 6-15
Performing Batch ZERO/Offset............................... 6-15
Batch Clearing ZERO/Offset.................................... 6-15
Stabilizing the Judgment Process.................................. 6-16
Stabilizing measurement............................................. 6-16
Stabilizing tools in scan mode..................................... 6-16
Stabilizing the step and height tools........................ 6-16
Stabilizing the MAX/MIN Tool.................................. 6-16
Stabilizing the Height Area Tool............................... 6-17
Stabilizing the Average Height Tool......................... 6-17
Stabilizing the Pin Height Tool................................. 6-17
Stabilizing the Monochrome Area Tool.................... 6-17
Stabilizing the position adjustment tool................... 6-17
Stabilizing tools in line mode....................................... 6-18
Stabilizing Tools in Line Mode
(Common to All Tools).............................................. 6-18
Stabilizing the step and height tools........................ 6-18
Stabilizing the Edge Position Tool............................ 6-19
Stabilizing the Width/Diameter Tool......................... 6-19
Stabilizing the position adjustment tool................... 6-19
Stabilizing the Tilt Adjustment Tool.......................... 6-19
Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear
image of the target (scan mode)................................. 6-20
Achieving adequate image brightness..................... 6-20
Reducing the shininess of a glossy or metal
surface..................................................................... 6-20
Reducing the effect of ambient light........................ 6-20
Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned target
position (scan mode only)........................................... 6-20
Tool settings............................................................. 6-20
Processing during an operation............................... 6-20
16
Shortening the Processing Time.................................... 6-21
For the processing time.............................................. 6-21
Flow of the internal process..................................... 6-21
Shortening the processing time of each tool............... 6-21
Shortening the processing time of the step and
height tools.............................................................. 6-21
Shortening the Processing Time of the Average
Height Tool............................................................... 6-21
Shortening the processing time of the MAX/MIN
tool........................................................................... 6-22
Shortening the processing time of the height area
tool........................................................................... 6-22
Shortening the Processing Time of the Pin Height
Tool.......................................................................... 6-22
Shortening the processing time of the position
adjustment tool........................................................ 6-23
Shortening the imaging processing time..................... 6-24
Shortening measurement processing time................. 6-24
Chapter 7 Various Functions
Changing the Sensor Displayed on the PC
(Change Connected Sensor Function)............................. 7-2
Changing the sensor to be displayed on a screen........ 7-3
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)................. 7-4
Overview of the program functions............................... 7-4
Things can be performed with the program functions.... 7-4
Preparing the program functions................................... 7-4
Preparation flow......................................................... 7-4
Preparation procedures............................................. 7-5
Switching programs (changing over)............................ 7-5
When switching the program in the main screen
in [Running]............................................................... 7-5
When switching the program by external input.......... 7-6
Displaying the Program Details screen......................... 7-7
Editing a program name................................................ 7-8
Copying a program....................................................... 7-8
Importing a program...................................................... 7-9
Initializing a program................................................... 7-10
Sensor's Detection History
(Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)..... 7-11
Displaying the sensor detection history screen........... 7-11
Displaying from the main screen in [Running]......... 7-11
Displaying from the main screen in [Program]......... 7-12
Loading and viewing saved images............................ 7-12
Save Selected History................................................. 7-13
Saving all images from the image history individually.... 7-14
Backing up the Detection History in a Batch............... 7-15
Clearing the saved images......................................... 7-16
Changing the image history logging conditions.......... 7-16
Adding Date and Time information to the sensor
(function for adding sensor date information)................. 7-17
Overview for Adding Sensor Date Information
Function...................................................................... 7-17
Setting the Adding Sensor Date Information Function.... 7-17
For direct connection (1 unit)................................... 7-17
Direct Connection (2 units or more)/
Network Connection................................................ 7-17
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Table of contents
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images........................ 7-19
Saving the sensor settings and the detection history.... 7-19
Backing up in a batch.............................................. 7-19
Backing up the program individually........................ 7-20
Saving images and screens displayed on the
IX-Navigator individually.......................................... 7-21
Procedure to save images............................... 7-21
„„
Confirming the saving destination of an
„„
image............................................................... 7-21
Changing the destination for saved images..... 7-21
„„
Transferring the backed up settings to the sensor...... 7-22
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor............ 7-23
Input............................................................................ 7-23
Input Function.......................................................... 7-23
Program Switch Method.......................................... 7-24
ZERO/Offset storage............................................... 7-24
Output......................................................................... 7-24
N.O./N.C.................................................................. 7-24
Output Options........................................................ 7-25
Analog Output.......................................................... 7-25
Analog output accuracy................................... 7-25
„„
I/O Monitor.................................................................. 7-26
NPN/PNP.................................................................... 7-27
Main with Exp. unit operations.................................... 7-27
Main/Expansion Simul Input.................................... 7-28
Interference Prevention........................................... 7-28
FTP............................................................................. 7-29
FTP Client Settings.................................................. 7-30
Connection Test............................................... 7-30
„„
Common Settings.................................................... 7-31
Transfer Condition Settings..................................... 7-33
Device......................................................................... 7-38
Environmental.......................................................... 7-38
Device Name................................................... 7-38
„„
Network settings.............................................. 7-38
„„
Security.................................................................... 7-39
Enable the password lock................................ 7-39
„„
Disable the password lock............................... 7-39
„„
Rotating Image 180 deg.......................................... 7-40
Measurement Value Display Unit............................. 7-40
Communication unit (DL) settings........................... 7-40
Data Assignment.............................................. 7-40
„„
Advanced Settings........................................... 7-41
„„
Operation Mode....................................................... 7-43
Initialize/Update.......................................................... 7-44
Initialize Sensor....................................................... 7-44
Update Sensor......................................................... 7-44
Operating from the menu bar......................................... 7-45
[File] menu.................................................................. 7-45
Batch Backup.......................................................... 7-45
Individual Program Backup...................................... 7-45
Transfer Program Settings....................................... 7-45
Exiting...................................................................... 7-45
[View] menu................................................................ 7-45
Current Status......................................................... 7-45
Limit Adjustment...................................................... 7-45
[Sensor] menu............................................................. 7-46
Disconnect............................................................... 7-46
Change Connected Sensor(s)................................. 7-46
Reset Statistics........................................................ 7-46
Initialize Sensor....................................................... 7-46
Update Sensor......................................................... 7-46
[Image] menu.............................................................. 7-47
Zoom....................................................................... 7-47
Reduce (Zoom Out)......................................... 7-47
„„
Enlarge (Zoom In)............................................ 7-47
„„
Fit Window....................................................... 7-47
„„
Trigger..................................................................... 7-47
Timing...................................................................... 7-47
Capture.................................................................... 7-47
Save Image...................................................... 7-47
„„
Show saved image file location....................... 7-47
„„
Change saved image file location.................... 7-47
„„
[Setting] menu............................................................. 7-48
Trigger/Timing Button.............................................. 7-48
Add Time+Date Info................................................. 7-48
Language................................................................. 7-48
[Window] menu........................................................... 7-49
Program Details....................................................... 7-49
Detection History..................................................... 7-49
Backup..................................................................... 7-49
Advanced Sensor Settings...................................... 7-49
[Help] menu................................................................. 7-49
User's Manual.......................................................... 7-49
About....................................................................... 7-49
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
17
Table of contents
Chapter 8Checking Settings and Detection
History
Basic Operation for Checking Settings and
Detection History.............................................................. 8-2
Saving a batch backup file/individual program
backup file..................................................................... 8-2
Starting “Check Settings/Detection History” mode........ 8-2
Exiting “Check Settings/Detection History” mode......... 8-2
Names and Functions of the Screen................................ 8-3
Main Screen for “Check Settings/Detection History”..... 8-3
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode)...................................... 8-4
Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow............ 8-4
1. Detection Conditions................................................. 8-5
Main Screen for Detection Conditions....................... 8-5
2. Master Registration................................................... 8-6
Main Screen for Master Registration......................... 8-6
3. Tool Settings.............................................................. 8-7
Main Screen for the Tool settings.............................. 8-7
4. Output Assignment.................................................... 8-8
Main Screen for the Output Assignment.................... 8-8
Settings Navigator (Line Mode)........................................ 8-9
Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow............ 8-9
1. Detection Conditions............................................... 8-10
Main Screen for Detection Conditions..................... 8-10
2. Master Registration................................................. 8-11
Main Screen for Master Registration....................... 8-11
3. Tool Settings............................................................ 8-12
Main Screen for the Tool settings............................ 8-12
4. Output Assignment.................................................. 8-13
Main Screen for the Output Assignment.................. 8-13
Confirming the Sensor Detection History....................... 8-14
Sensor Detection History Screen................................ 8-14
Operating from the menu bar......................................... 8-15
[File] menu.................................................................. 8-15
Opening file............................................................. 8-15
Save........................................................................ 8-15
Exit Settings/Detection history screen..................... 8-15
Exit........................................................................... 8-15
[Image] menu.............................................................. 8-15
Zoom....................................................................... 8-15
Reduce (Zoom Out)......................................... 8-15
„„
Enlarge (Zoom In)............................................ 8-15
„„
Fit Window....................................................... 8-15
„„
Capture.................................................................... 8-15
Save Image...................................................... 8-15
„„
Show saved image file location....................... 8-16
„„
Change saved image file location.................... 8-16
„„
[Setting] menu............................................................. 8-16
Language................................................................. 8-16
[Window] menu........................................................... 8-16
Program Details....................................................... 8-16
Detection History..................................................... 8-16
Advanced Sensor Settings...................................... 8-16
[Help] menu................................................................. 8-16
User's Manual.......................................................... 8-16
About....................................................................... 8-16
18
Chapter 9 Controlling with Input/Output Line
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers
(Scan Mode)..................................................................... 9-2
External Trigger............................................................. 9-2
Internal Trigger.............................................................. 9-3
Operating in the shortest cycle.................................. 9-3
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Timing Input
(Line Mode)...................................................................... 9-4
Sample Hold................................................................. 9-4
Level operation.......................................................... 9-4
Edge operation.......................................................... 9-5
Peak/Bottom/Peak to Peak Hold................................... 9-6
Level operation.......................................................... 9-6
Edge operation.......................................................... 9-7
Importing the Status Output (Scan Mode)........................ 9-8
Importing the total status/total status NG output........... 9-8
Importing the individual status output of each
detection tool/logic........................................................ 9-9
Changing the timing of the status output.................... 9-10
Canceling One-Shot output..................................... 9-10
Changing Over (Scan Mode).......................................... 9-11
Changing Over (Line Mode)........................................... 9-13
Clearing Errors............................................................... 9-14
Resetting Status............................................................. 9-15
Laser Shutdown/Release............................................... 9-16
Running ZERO/Offset..................................................... 9-17
Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on...... 9-18
Timing Input Response Time (Line Mode)...................... 9-19
Response time (maximum value)............................... 9-19
Sampling frequency: 6 ms....................................... 9-19
Sampling frequency: 11 ms..................................... 9-19
Response Time (Line Mode).......................................... 9-20
Status output response time (maximum value)........... 9-20
Filter: Average, Sampling Period: 6 ms................... 9-20
Filter: Average, Sampling Period: 11 ms.................. 9-20
Filter: Median, Sampling Period: 6 ms..................... 9-21
Filter: Median, Sampling Period: 11 ms................... 9-21
Analog output update frequency................................. 9-21
Analog output response time...................................... 9-21
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Table of contents
Chapter 10 Specifications
Appendices
Specifications................................................................. 10-2
Sensor Head............................................................... 10-2
Detection range........................................................... 10-4
Sensor Amplifier.......................................................... 10-5
IX-Navigator................................................................ 10-7
Dimensions..................................................................... 10-8
Sensor Head............................................................... 10-8
IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360................................... 10-8
IX-360W................................................................... 10-8
With vertical mounting bracket (OP-88343)
(IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360)................................. 10-9
With vertical mounting bracket (OP-88343)
(IX-360W)................................................................ 10-9
With transverse mounting bracket (OP‑88344)
(IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360)................................. 10-9
With transverse mounting bracket (OP‑88344)
(IX-360W).............................................................. 10-10
With vertical diagonal mounting bracket
(OP-88345) (IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360)........... 10-10
With vertical diagonal mounting bracket
(OP-88345) (IX-360W).......................................... 10-11
With transverse diagonal mounting bracket
(OP-88346) (IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360)........... 10-11
With transverse diagonal mounting bracket
(OP-88346) (IX-360W).......................................... 10-12
With vertical diagonal mounting bracket
(OP-88345): Attaching a vertical laser for
line mode............................................................... 10-12
With transverse diagonal mounting bracket
(OP-88346): Attaching a vertical laser for
line mode............................................................... 10-13
With adjustable bracket (OP-88347)
(IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360)............................... 10-14
With adjustable bracket (OP-88347) (IX-360W).... 10-14
Sensor Amplifier........................................................ 10-15
IX-H2000............................................................... 10-15
IX-H2050............................................................... 10-15
When connected.................................................... 10-15
Optional Parts for the Sensor.................................... 10-15
Sensor Head/Amplifier cable................................. 10-15
I/O cable (OP-87906)............................................ 10-15
Vertical mounting bracket (OP-88343).................. 10-16
Transverse mounting bracket (OP-88344)............ 10-16
Vertical diagonal mounting bracket (OP‑88345).... 10-16
Transverse diagonal mounting bracket
(OP‑88346)............................................................ 10-16
Adjustable bracket (OP-88347)............................. 10-16
Communication cables.............................................. 10-17
Ethernet cable....................................................... 10-17
L type Ethernet cable............................................. 10-17
LAN cable.............................................................. 10-17
Mutual interference area........................................... 10-18
Status Table......................................................................A-2
Status table (scan mode)..............................................A-2
Status table (line mode)................................................A-4
Displaying and outputting the status result
(when position adjustment is not used).........................A-6
Displaying and outputting the status result
(when position adjustment is used)...............................A-8
When the tool window does not protrude after
position adjustment is successful..............................A-8
When the tool window does protrude after
position adjustment is successful............................A-10
When position adjustment failed..............................A-12
Matching Rate for the Position Adjustment tool..............A-14
Cut-off process of the matching rate...........................A-14
Troubleshooting..............................................................A-15
Error Messages..............................................................A-17
Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR
indicator light...............................................................A-17
Confirming IX‑Navigator error messages....................A-18
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with
the sensor.......................................................................A-21
Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is
unavailable..................................................................A-21
Remedy when direct connection (2 units or more) is
unavailable..................................................................A-22
Remedy when connection via a network is
unavailable..................................................................A-23
Confirming the status by observing the indicator
light of the sensor........................................................A-26
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light......................A-26
STATUS indicator light.............................................A-26
Other Methods of Confirming a Network Connection....A-27
Confirming the existence of the sensor from
the PC......................................................................A-27
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC...........A-27
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor.....A-27
Confirming the router settings.................................A-28
Confirming the firewall settings................................A-28
Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable....A-29
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch).........A-30
Settings after initialization...........................................A-30
Connecting method after initialization.........................A-30
For direct connection (1 unit/2 units or more)..........A-30
For network connection...........................................A-30
Initializing the network settings...................................A-30
Assignment for IP address 192.168.10.10/11.............A-31
Settings when the IP address is assigned..................A-31
Connection when the IP address 192.168.10.10/11
is assigned..................................................................A-31
For direct connection (1 unit/2 units or more)..........A-31
For network connection...........................................A-31
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
19
Table of contents
List of Factory Settings (Default Values)........................A-32
Scan Mode..................................................................A-32
Sensor Settings: 1 Detection Conditions.................A-32
Sensor Settings: 2 Master Registration...................A-32
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Step]...................A-32
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Height]................A-32
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Average Height]....A-32
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings
[Position Adjustment]...............................................A-33
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [MAX/MIN]...........A-33
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Height Area]........A-33
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Pin Height]..........A-33
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings
[Monochrome Area].................................................A-33
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Width]..................A-34
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings
[1-Axis Adjustment]..................................................A-34
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings
[2-Axis Adjustment]..................................................A-34
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings
[Step Calculation]....................................................A-34
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings
[Thickness Calculation]............................................A-34
Sensor Settings: 4 Output Assignment....................A-35
Line Mode...................................................................A-35
Sensor Settings: 1 Detection Conditions.................A-35
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Step]...................A-35
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Height]................A-36
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings
[Position Adjustment]...............................................A-36
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Edge Position].....A-36
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Width/Diameter]
(Judgment mode: Width).........................................A-36
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Width/Diameter]
(Judgment mode: Diameter)....................................A-37
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Step/Width].........A-37
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Thickness]...........A-37
Sensor Settings: 4 Output Assignment....................A-37
Advanced Sensor Settings..........................................A-38
Input.........................................................................A-38
Output......................................................................A-38
I/O Monitor...............................................................A-38
NPN/PNP.................................................................A-38
Main with Exp. unit operations.................................A-38
FTP..........................................................................A-38
Device Settings........................................................A-38
Index...............................................................................A-40
Copyright notice.............................................................A-47
20
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Chapter
1
1
Getting Started
Getting Started
This chapter explains the system configurations and overview
of IX-H, how to check package contents, and the name and
function of each part.
System Configuration..........................................................1-2
Overview of the IX-H............................................................1-4
Checking the Package Contents.........................................1-6
Name and Function of Each Part........................................1-9
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
1-1
System Configuration
System Configuration
Basic configurations of IX-H
1
Connecting the PC and one sensor
Getting Started
PC software for the IX Series (IX-Navigator)
IX-H1
Sensor head/amplifier cable
OP-87903 (2 m)/OP-87904 (5 m)/
OP-87905 (10 m)/OP-88551 (20 m)
LAN cable
OP-87950 (1m)
OP-87951 (3m)
OP-87952 (5m)
OP-87953 (10m)
24 V DC power
Sensor
amplifier
IX-H2000
Sensor head
IX-055
IX-080
IX-150
IX-360
IX-360W
Photoelectric/proximity
sensor etc.
Sends the signal to
the trigger and timing
input when the target is
detected.
1-2
I/O cable
OP-87906 (3m)
Indicator light/buzzer
etc.
Alarms can be output
by the status output
function.
PLC
PLC can control the
trigger and timing
input and the status
output function,
and can switch the
program number.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
DL Series communication unit
You can control the acquisition of
measurement data, trigger input,
and so on in open field networks.
Data logger
Analog voltage output or
analog current output can
be captured and retained
as a record.
System Configuration
Connecting the PC and multiple sensors
When direct connection (2 units or more) or network connection is selected, a PC with the IX-Navigator software (IX-H1)
installed can connect to a single sensor from a list of multiple sensors.
LAN cable
OP-87950 (1m)
OP-87951 (3m)
OP-87952 (5m)
OP-87953 (10m)
Ethernet switch
Example: NE-Q05
Sensor head/
amplifier cable
for the IX Series
OP-87903 (2m)
OP-87904 (5m)
OP-87905 (10m)
OP-88551 (20m)
Sensor head
IX-055
IX-080
IX-150
IX-360
IX-360W
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
1
Getting Started
PC software for the IX Series (IX-Navigator)
IX-H1
1-3
Overview of the IX-H
Overview of the IX-H
What is the IX-H
1
Getting Started
The IX-H is a laser displacement sensor. This sensor can be included in complicated detection operations such as
detecting the height or height differences of parts to more easily perform these detections.
Initial setup of the operation condition settings require the use of either the IX control panel or PC software, called "IXNavigator".
With either the control panel or the PC software, the sensor is connected via Ethernet so connection with multiple sensors
can be performed.
Using the PC software
The PC software, "IX-Navigator," is equipped with the same functions as the IX control panel.
IX-Navigator functions
yySetting the sensor
yyMonitoring the operation
screen
yySaving and sending
sensor settings
yyViewing the image history
Functions of sensor
yyCamera
yyLight
yyHeight judgment
yyImage judgment
yyI/O
yyGetting detection
history
1-4
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Ethernet switch
Overview of the IX-H
Using the control panel (IX-CP50) for IX
The control panel for IX is a specialized touch screen control panel.
For details of how to operate using the control panel for IX, refer to "IX-H User's Manual (Control Panel)".
Getting Started
Control panel
functions
yySetting the sensor
yyMonitoring the operation
screen
yySaving sensor settings
to USB memory and
sending from USB
memory
yyViewing the image
history.
1
Ethernet switch
Functions of sensor
yyCamera
yyLight
yyHeight judgment
yyImage judgment
yyI/O
yyGetting detection
history
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
1-5
Checking the Package Contents
Checking the Package Contents
The IX-H consists of the models below. Check that all the bundled items below are included with each model before use.
1
Sensor Head
Getting Started
yyIX-055/080/150/360
Sensor head x 1
Laser warning sticker x 1
yyIX-360W
Sensor head x 1
Laser warning sticker x 1
Sensor Amplifier
yyIX-H2000 (Main)
Instruction Manual x 1
yyIX-H2050 (Expansion)
Power supply terminal block
(mounted in the amplifier)
Analog output terminal block
(mounted in the amplifier)
Sensor amplifier (Main) x 1
LAN port cap
(mounted in the amplifier)
1-6
Sensor amplifier (Expansion)
x1
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
End unit x 2
Checking the Package Contents
Option
Sensor Head/Amplifier cable
1
Transverse diagonal mounting bracket
yyOP-88346
Getting Started
yyOP-87903 (2m)
yyOP-87904 (5m)
yyOP-87905 (10m)
yyOP-88551 (20m)
Mounting screw (M4 x L14) x 3
* Double-washer sems screw
Mounting bracket x 1
Sensor head/amplifier cable x 1
Adjustable bracket
I/O cable
yyOP-88347
yyOP-87906 (3m)
Mounting
bracket x 1
I/O cable x 1
Mounting screw
(M4 x L14) x 3
* Double-washer
sems screw
Bracket x 1
Vertical mounting bracket
yyOP-88343
Mounting screw (M4 x L14) x 3
* Double-washer sems screw
Mounting bracket x 1
Transverse mounting bracket
yyOP-88344
Mounting screw (M4 x L14) x 3
* Double-washer sems screw
Mounting bracket x 1
Vertical diagonal mounting bracket
yyOP-88345
Mounting screw (M4 x L14) x 3
* Double-washer sems screw
Mounting bracket x 1
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
1-7
Checking the Package Contents
Communication cables
1
PC software for the IX Series
yyIX-H1
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)
Instruction Manual x 1
Starting Guide x 1
Getting Started
yyOP-87907 (1m)
yyOP-87457 (2m)
yyOP-87458 (5m)
yyOP-87459 (10m)
CD-ROM×1
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1
L type Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)
yyOP-88042 (1m)
yyOP-88043 (2m)
yyOP-88044 (5m)
yyOP-88045 (10m)
L type Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1
LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45)
yyOP-87950 (1m)
yyOP-87951 (3m)
yyOP-87952 (5m)
yyOP-87953 (10m)
LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45) x 1
1-8
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Name and Function of Each Part
Name and Function of Each Part
Sensor Head
Operation of the sensor head indicator light
Name and function of each part of the
sensor head
2
3 4
5
2 Mounting holes
Used for mounting the sensor head.
“Mounting the Sensor Head” (Page 2-2)
3Connector for the sensor head/amplifier cable
The connector can rotate.
Example of rotating
“Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable and
sensor head” (Page 2-8)
4
Light receptor
5
Laser projector
yyGreen (ON).......Comprehensive result is “OK”.
When setting detection conditions, the
target is in the detection range.
yyGreen (Blink).....Under startup or setting in progress.
Operation is stopped. Blinks once a
second.
yyRed (ON)...........Comprehensive result is “NG”.
yyRed (Blink)........An error has occurred. Blinks once a
second.
yy(OFF)................In standby status.
When setting detection conditions,
the target is outside of the detection
range.
The sensor head was replaced (to a
different model).
An incompatible sensor head is
connected.
“LED Blinking” is requested from
the control panel or PC by another
sensor.
yyGreen and .........“LED Blinking” is requested from the
red are
control panel or PC.
blinking
alternately
(four times)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
1-9
Getting Started
1
1 Indicator light
Indicates the operating status of the sensor head.
“Operation of the sensor head indicator light” (Page
1-9)
1
Indicator light
Name and Function of Each Part
Sensor Amplifier
1
Name and function of each part of the
sensor amplifier
Getting Started
IX-H2000
6
1
Connector for the sensor head/amplifier cable
“Cables” (Page 2-8)
2
Indicator light
Indicates the operating status of the sensor.
“Operation of the sensor amplifier indicator light”
(Page 1-11)
3
Ethernet connector
This connector is used to connect this device to the IX
control panel (IX-CP50) or a PC.
“Cables” (Page 2-8)
When the connector is not used, attach the included
LAN port cap. This is not equipped on the IX-H2050.
4
I/O connector
Used for connecting the I/O cable (OP-87906).
5
Analog output terminal block
Outputs the measurement value in analog voltage/
current. This is not equipped on the IX-H2050.
6
Add-on connector
Used for adding the IX-H2050 (Expansion).
“Mounting the IX-H2050 (Expansion)” (Page 2-7)
Protection sheet is attached for shipping.
7
IP reset switch
Used for resetting the IP address assigned to this
sensor amplifier.
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)”
(Page A-30)
8
Add-on connector
Used for connecting the IX-H2000 (Main).
9
Connector on the communications unit
Used for connecting to the communications unit (DL
Series).
The protective cover is attached at the time of shipping.
1
2
3
4
7
5
10
9
IX-H2050
1
8
2
7
4
1-10
10 Power terminal block
Supplies power to the IX-H2000. This is not equipped
on the IX-H2050.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Name and Function of Each Part
Operation of the sensor amplifier indicator
light
3
5
6
four times)
yy(OFF)................Trigger/timing is not input.
1 PWR/ERR
yyGreen (ON).......Operating.
yyGreen (Blink).....Setting processing. Operation is
stopped. Blinks once a second.
yyGreen ...........The sensor head was replaced (to
(Blinking)
a different model). Blinks every two
seconds.
.........“LED Blinking” is requested from the
yyOrange
control panel or PC.
(only blinks
four times)
yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error has occurred.
yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error has occurred.
Blinks once a second.
yy(OFF)................Power is not supplied.
2 OUT
Indicates the comprehensive result.
yyGreen (ON).......Comprehensive result is “OK”.
yyGreen ...........The sensor head was replaced (to
(Blinking)
a different model). Blinks every two
seconds.
.........“LED Blinking” is requested from the
yyOrange
(only blinks
control panel or PC.
four times)
yyRed...................Comprehensive result is “NG”.
yy(OFF)................In standby status until the first
judgment finishes after starting the
operation or after switching the
program number.
4 LASER
Indicates the laser beam state.
yyGreen (ON) ......Laser is emitting.
yyOFF...................Laser is not emitting.
5
STATUS
Indicates the connection status to the control panel or
PC.
yyGreen (ON).......The sensor amplifier is correctly
connected to the control panel or PC.
yyGreen (Blink).....IP address has been retrieved but
the sensor amplifier is not correctly
connected to the control panel or PC.
Blinks once a second.
.........The IP reset switch was held down
yyOrange
(only blinks
and the IP address was reset.
twice)
yyRed (ON)...........The IP address is duplicated.
yy(OFF)................IP address is not assigned. The
sensor amplifier is not correctly
connected to the control panel or PC.
6 LINK/ACT
Indicates the link status with the control panel, PC, or
Ethernet switch.
yyGreen (ON).......Normally linked.
yyGreen (Blink).....Normally linked, and the data is
sending/receiving.
yy(OFF)................Not normally linked.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
1-11
1
Getting Started
1
2
3
4
TRIG/TIM
..........Lights (one-shot) according to input of
yyGreen
(One shot)
the internal or external trigger. When
the trigger delay is in use, the light
turns on (one-shot) when a trigger is
input.
yyGreen (ON) ......Inputting timing.
yyGreen ...........The sensor head was replaced (to
(Blinking)
a different model). Blinks every two
seconds.
.........“LED Blinking” is requested from the
yyOrange
(only blinks
control panel or PC.
Name and Function of Each Part
1
Getting Started
1-12
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Chapter
2
This chapter explains how to mount the sensor, how to set up
the PC, and how to connect the cables.
Installation and
Connection
2
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2-1
Installation and Connection
Mounting the Sensor............................................................2-2
Cables....................................................................................2-8
Setting up the PC................................................................2-18
Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the Sensor
Detecting objects near a wall
„„
yyDo not place the sensor in an environment
that exceeds the sensor's resistance to
the environment, or an environment that
propagates vibration directly to the sensor.
That may cause a damage or malfunction.
yyDo not install the sensor near a device that
generates a magnetic field. That may cause a
damage or malfunction.
2
Installation and Connection
yyThe view and optical axis have individual
differences. Adjust the position by checking
the laser position and the actual image at the
time of installation.
yyPlace the sensor where no ambient light has
effect. Ambient light includes solar light, lights
of other devices, and photoelectric sensors.
Also, be careful when the light intensity of the
ambient light changes. Use a shield to protect
when the location cannot be changed.
yyPlace the sensor where no object can block
the laser beam, LED light, or the field of view
of the sensor.
yyDetection may become unstable due to
inference from laser beams or light if multiple
sensors are placed near each other. Take
measures as described below.
yyUse the interference prevention function.
yyDelay the timing of external trigger inputs in
scan mode.
yyUse a shield to avoid interference.
Make sure that stray light from the laser beam reflected off
a wall or other surface does not affect measurement.
Stray
light
Stray
light
Checking the detection range
The detection range will be different depending on which
IX-H sensor head used. Check the type of sensor head to
be used and its detection range, and place it at the proper
distance.
Detection range (scan mode)
„„
16.4
Precautions during installation
Depending on the shape of the object, blind spots may
occur in the detection range. Make sure that the blind spot
does not affect the measurement.
You can check for blind spots on the master registration
screen. For details about the master registration screen,
refer to the following.
“2. Master Registration” (Page 4-14)
“2. Master Registration” (Page 5-25)
View
Laser emission
range
Target
2-2
Blind spot
14.9
C
B
A
Mounting the Sensor Head
D
G
E
H
F
I
(mm)
IX-055
IX-080
IX-150
IX-360
IX-360W
A
45
62
100
280
280
B
55
80
150
360
360
C
65
98
200
440
440
D
20.5
27
42
49.5
113
E
24.5
34
61.5
63
144
F
28.5
41
81
76.5
176
G
27.5
36.5
56.5
66
150
H
32.5
45.5
82.5
84
192
I
37.5
54.5
108.5
102
234
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Mounting the Sensor
Detection range (line mode; vertical head)
„„
Detection range (line mode; vertical laser)
„„
A
14.9
16.4
14.9
C
B
C
B
A
2
G
J
H
K
I
L
F
E
F
(mm)
IX-055
IX-080
IX-150
IX-360
IX-360W
A
45
62
100
280
280
B
55
80
150
360
360
C
65
98
200
440
440
D
-0.8
0.8
4.3
12.3
-6.8
E
5.5
9.9
23
26.3
12.9
F
11.7
19.1
41.7
40.2
32.5
G
7.2
8.3
11.4
15.3
21.2
H
8.3
10.2
16.2
19.5
26.9
I
9.5
12.1
21.1
23.6
32.5
J
27.5
36.5
56.5
66
150
K
32.5
45.5
82.8
84
192
L
37.5
54.5
108.5
102
234
Note: ‌G, H, and I are the adjustable ranges for the laser
position.
G
D
E
IX-055
IX-080
IX-150
IX-360
IX-360W
A (°)
29.5
24.5
18
8.5
11.8
B
(mm)
30.7
49.9
91.4
276.4
269.3
C
(mm)
50.1
86
193
435.9
427.3
D
(mm)
37.1
39.9
42.4
45.2
74.4
E
(mm)
43.5
47.7
53.4
60.4
106
F
(mm)
27.5
36.5
56.5
66
150
G
(mm)
37.5
54.5
108.5
102
234
Note: ‌D and E are the adjustable ranges for the laser
position.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2-3
Installation and Connection
D
Mounting the Sensor
When mounting the sensor head diagonally
„„
Mounting the Sensor Head
When screws are secured from the sensor
„„
head
2
yyScrew : M3 x 3
yyTightening torque: 0.3 to 0.6 N•m
To use the sensor head with the laser emitting a beam
vertically in line mode, install the sensor head diagonally.
Use the sticker on the sensor head side as a guide to tilt
the sensor head on an angle.
Installation and Connection
Ensure the LASER ANGLE
arrow is pointing directly
downwards.
When screws are secured from the mounting
„„
material
yyScrew: M4 x 3
yyTightening torque: 0.7 to 1.5 N•m
yyScrew hole on the sensor head: M4 female (whose
length of screw engagement should be 3.5 to 10 mm)
yyUsing the vertical diagonal mounting bracket (OP88345) or Transverse diagonal mounting bracket
(OP-88346) makes it easier to adjust the angle.
yyThe laser position can be fine tuned with the
detection condition settings in Settings Navigator.
“Measurement Adjustment” (Page 5-9)
To use the sensor head mounted diagonally,
make sure to select [Laser Vertical] for [Adjust
Head Tilt] in the detection condition settings in
Settings Navigator. The measurement direction
will not be correct if you measure without
selecting [Laser Vertical].
“Adjust Head Tilt” (Page 5-14)
In order for the sensor head to dissipate heat,
attach it to metal.
2-4
When detecting a moving target with Line
Mode, installing the unit with the laser vertical
in relation to the target may enable more stable
detection.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Mounting the Sensor
Sensor head direction and measurement
zz
position
The measurement position of the target changes
depending on the sensor head direction when
measuring in line mode. Make sure to correctly position
and set the sensor head in accordance with the target
to be measured and the measurement details.
Example: Measuring the height of the target
The laser will be emitted diagonally. The measurement
position in the vertical direction for the laser width differs
for the top and bottom of the target.
<Top view>
€
the sensor head is installed with the laser
€When
perpendicular to the target
The laser will be emitted perpendicularly. The
measurement position in the vertical direction for the
laser width is the same for the top and bottom of the
target.
When using the vertical mounting bracket
„„
(OP-88343)
Attach the bracket using the screws attached to OP88343.
yyTightening torque: 0.7 to 1.5 N•m
Mounting
examples
When using the transverse mounting
„„
bracket (OP-88344)
Attach the bracket using the screws attached to OP88344.
yyTightening torque: 0.7 to 1.5 N•m
Mounting
examples
When using the vertical diagonal mounting
„„
bracket (OP-88345)
Used for installing the sensor head on an angle.
Attach the bracket using the screws attached to OP88345.
yyTightening torque: 0.7 to 1.5 N•m
Mounting
examples
When using the transverse diagonal
„„
mounting bracket (OP-88346)
<Top view>
Used for installing the sensor head on an angle.
Attach the bracket using the screws attached to OP88346.
yyTightening torque: 0.7 to 1.5 N•m
Mounting
examples
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2-5
2
Installation and Connection
€
the sensor head is installed horizontally to
€When
the target
Attaching the optional mounting bracket
Mounting the Sensor
When using the adjustable bracket (OP„„
Mounting the Sensor Amplifier
1 Attach the sensor head to the bracket using the
Mounting the IX-H2000 (Main)
88347)
screws attached to OP-88347.
2
yyTightening torque: 0.7 to 1.5 N•m
Mounting
examples
Align the stopper on the middle of the back of the sensor
amplifier with the DIN rail and while pushing the sensor
amplifier in the direction of the arrows (1), tip it in the
direction of the arrows (2).
Installation and Connection
(1)
2 Attach and secure the strut bracket.
yyTightening torque : 5 N·m
Mounting
examples
(2)
When detaching the sensor amplifier, push it upwards in
the opposite direction to the (1) arrow while pulling the top
part toward you.
2-6
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Mounting the Sensor
2 Mount the sensor amplifier IX-H2050 (Expansion
Mounting the IX-H2050 (Expansion)
An expansion unit is used for attaching to the main unit.
One expansion unit can be added to one main unit.
The sensor amplifier for the IX-H (IX-H2000/H2050) and
the sensor amplifier for the IX Series (IX-1000/1050) cannot
be used together.
added) to the DIN rail.
Attach it in the same manner as “Mounting the IXH2000 (Main)” (Page 2-6).
3 Press the expansion unit to the main unit until
you hear the clicking sound.
IX-H2000 (Main)
1 Remove the protection seal from the sensor
amplifier IX-H2000 (Main).
IX-H2050 (Expansion)
4 Attach the end units on both sides of the sensor
amplifier (main and expansion units), and secure
them with two screws on each side.
Protection seal
Screw
IX-H2000 (Main)
Screw
Attach the sensor amplifier to the DIN rail and
then set it on metal.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2
Installation and Connection
yyFor adding an expansion unit, be sure to
mount it to the DIN rail.
yyWhen a sensor amplifier (Expansion) is to
be added, confirm that the power is turned
OFF. If the sensor amplifier is added with the
power ON, the unit may be damaged.
yyBe sure to push the sensor amplifier
(Expansion) into the main unit all the way. If
the sensor amplifier is connected at an angle
or is not push into the main unit firmly, the
device may be damaged.
2-7
Cables
Cables
Connecting the sensor head/amplifier
cable and sensor head
1 Insert the cable into the sensor as shown below.
Adjust the pins and the
pin connection
2
Connecting the sensor head/amplifier
cable and sensor amplifier
1 Insert the cable into the sensor as shown below.
Adjust the pins and
the pin connection
Installation and Connection
2 Turn the screw-on connector in the clockwise
direction to tighten it.
yyTightening torque : 0.8 N•m or lower
2 Turn the screw-on connector in the clockwise
direction to tighten it.
yyTightening torque: 0.4 to 0.8 N•m
To tighten the screw by hand, turn it until the
connector of the cable touches the sensor
head firmly. Then turn it more by about 5°
using a tool such as plyers.
To tighten the screw by hand, turn it until the
connector of the cable touches the sensor
head firmly. Then turn it more by about 5°
using a tool such as plyers.
2-8
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Cables
Connecting the cable to the sensor
amplifier
Connecting the I/O cable (OP-87906)
Connect the cable to the sensor amplifier as shown below.
Align the connectors.
2
Connector for the I/O
cable
Connecting the Ethernet cable or LAN cable
To disconnect the cable, hold the tabs on both sides of the
connector pushed in and pull it out.
Connect the cable to the sensor amplifier as shown below.
To disconnect the cable, pull the cable while holding the tab
on the Ethernet cable pushed in.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2-9
Installation and Connection
Connector for the
Ethernet cable
Cables
Terminal number and wiring color of the I/O cable (OP-87906)
„„
B10 (Black)
2
A10
B10
A1
B1
Installation and Connection
B10
A10
B1
A1
B1 (Brown)
A10 (Black)
A1 (Brown)
Terminal Wiring
No.
color
Name
Assigning
default
value
Description
In scan mode:
External trigger (↑) or
External trigger (↓)
In line mode: Timing
input
A1
Brown
IN1
External
trigger (↑)/
timing
input
A2
Red
IN2
OFF
A3
Orange
IN3
OFF
A4
Yellow
IN4
OFF
A5
Green
IN5
OFF
A6
Blue
IN6
OFF
A7
Purple
IN7
OFF
A8
Gray
IN8
OFF
A9
White
Unused
Unused
A10
Black
Unused
Unused
B1
Brown
OUT1
Total
Status
(N.O.)
B2
Red
OUT2
BUSY
(N.O.)
B3
Orange
OUT3
OFF
B4
Yellow
OUT4
OFF
B5
Green
OUT5
OFF
B6
Blue
OUT6
OFF
B7
Purple
OUT7
OFF
B8
Gray
OUT8
OFF
B9
White
OUT9
OFF
B10
Black
OUT10
OFF
Input assignable
function
yyProgram bit0 to bit4
yyLaser shutdown
yyZERO/Offset
yyReset
(error only)
yyReset
(status only)
yyReset
(status & error)
yyOFF (not used)
The output assignment, N.O./N.C., and input line
assignment can be changed.
“4. Output Assignment” (Page 4-107)
“4. Output Assignment” (Page 5-79)
yyIndividually insulate the unused input-output
cables.
yyFor input cables of this sensor, connect with
non-contact output (transistor output/SSR
output). For contact output (relay output),
incorrect input may occur due to the contact
bouncing.
Unused
Output assignable
function
yyTotal Status
yyTotal Status NG
yyRUN
yyBUSY
yyError
yyPosition
Adjustment
yyTilt Adjustment
yyStatus result of
each tool
(Tool 1 to 16)
yyLogical calculation
result of each tool
(Logic 1 to Logic 8)
yyAlert
yyOFF (not used)
Cable specification : AWG28
2-10
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Cables
Supplying power to the sensor amplifier
The power terminal block is attached on the bottom of the
sensor amplifier IX-H2000 (Main).
The wire for connecting the power should have
a temperature rating of 80°C or higher.
1 Insert the wire to B by pushing A in with a
screwdriver.
Pull the wire out slightly to confirm that it is secured.
The analog output terminal block is attached to the front of
the sensor amplifier IX-H2000 (Main).
The wire for connecting the analog output
should have a temperature rating of 80℃ or
higher.
Follow the instructions mentioned below to
avoid damage caused by bad connections.
yyThe nominal cross-sectional area of the wire
for connecting the analog output should be
0.08 mm2 to 1.3 mm2 (AWG 16 to 28).
yyLength of removing insulation from the wire
should be about 9 mm.
yyThe stripped part of the wire should not be
soldered (pre-soldered).
yyInsert the wires into the power terminal block
all the way.
yyConnect the wires directly to the terminal
block.
yyUse the rod terminal when using the crimptype terminal.
1 Insert the wire to B by pushing A in with a
screwdriver.
Pull the wire out slightly to confirm that it is secured.
B
A
A
yy : Ground
yy0 V : Wire to 0 V of the power supply.
yy24V: Wire to 24 VDC of the power supply.
B
yyOUT: Insert the wire into IN on the analog input device
yy0V: Insert the wire into GND on the analog input
device
0V
OUT
24V
0V
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2-11
2
Installation and Connection
Follow the instructions mentioned below to
avoid damage caused by bad connections.
yyThe nominal cross-sectional area of the wire
for connecting the power should be 0.8 mm2
to 1.3 mm2 (AWG 16 to 18).
yyLength of removing insulation from the wire
should be about 9 mm.
yyThe stripped part of the wire should not be
soldered (pre-soldered).
yyInsert the wires into the power terminal block
all the way.
yyConnect the wires directly to the terminal
block.
yyUse the rod terminal when using the crimptype terminal.
Using the analog output function
Cables
Connector Specifications
Selecting NPN output
„„
When NPN is selected in I/O format
2
24 V line of power terminal
block (24 V DC)
OUT1 to OUT10*
External device
Load
Installation and Connection
DC24V
IN1 to IN8*
(NPN)
0 V line of power terminal block (0 V)
FG of power terminal block
* For the terminal number and wire color, refer to
“Terminal number and wiring color of the I/O cable (OP87906)” (Page 2-10).
Selecting PNP output
„„
When PNP is selected in I/O format
24 V line of power terminal
block (24 V DC)
IN1 to IN8*
External device
(PNP)
DC24V
OUT1 to OUT10*
0 V line of power terminal block
(0 V)
Load
FG of power terminal block
* For the terminal number and wire color, see “Terminal
number and wiring color of the I/O cable (OP-87906)” (Page
2-10).
2-12
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Cables
Input/Output Circuit and Electric
Specifications
Output circuit
Selecting NPN output
„„
Input circuit
No-voltage input (when NPN output is
„„
selected)
OUT1 - OUT10
*
Main circuit
0V
IN1 - IN8
*
* ‌Refer to
“Terminal number and wiring color of the I/O
cable (OP-87906)” (Page 2-10).
Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1 to
OUT10
0V
* ‌Refer to
“Terminal number and wiring color of the I/O
cable (OP-87906)” (Page 2-10).
Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to IN8
Voltage input (when PNP output is selected)
„„
When PNP is selected in I/O format, the circuit becomes
open collector PNP output circuit.
yyMax. rating: 26.4 V, 50 mA
(20 mA when the IX-H2050 (Expansion) is
connected)
yyRemaining voltage: 2V or lower
DC24V
Main circuit
IN1 - IN8
OUT1 - OUT10
*
Load
Main circuit
DC24V
Overcurrent protection circuit
When PNP is selected in I/O format, the circuit becomes
voltage input circuit.
yyInput maximum rating: 26.4 V
yyON voltage: 18 V or higher
yyON current: 2 mA (for 24 V)
yyOFF current: 0.2mA or lower
Selecting PNP output
„„
0V
*
0V
* ‌Refer to
“Terminal number and wiring color of the I/O
cable (OP-87906)” (Page 2-10).
Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to IN8
* ‌Refer to
“Terminal number and wiring color of the I/O
cable (OP-87906)” (Page 2-10).
Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1 to
OUT10
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2-13
2
Installation and Connection
Load
+3.3V
Overcurrent protection circuit
DC24V
DC24V
Brown
Main circuit
When NPN is selected in I/O format, the circuit becomes
no-voltage input circuit. External power supply is not
necessary.
yyON voltage: 2 V or lower
yyOFF current: 0.1 mA or lower
yyON current : 2 mA (short circuit)
When NPN is selected in I/O format, the circuit becomes
open collector NPN output circuit.
yyMax. rating: ‌26.4 V, 50 mA
(20 mA when the IX-H2050 (Expansion) is
connected)
yyRemaining voltage: 1.5 V or lower
Cables
Analog Output
„„
yyAnalog voltage output: 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, -5 to 5 V
yyAnalog current output: 4 to 20 mA
(switching signal)
Installation and Connection
Main circuit
2
Analog current
output circuit
Analog voltage
output circuit
OUT
Analog input
device
0V
Analog output 0 V on this unit and power
supply 0 V are the same internally. Make sure
that a voltage potential difference does not
occur between the common internal terminals
due to a voltage potential difference between
the wires and external devices. Doing so may
damage the device.
2-14
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Cables
Connecting the sensor to a PC
Connecting directly (1 unit)
Connect the sensor amplifier (IX-H2000) to a PC using a LAN cable.
Sensor head
IX-055
IX-080
IX-150
IX-360
IX-360W
2
Sensor amplifier
IX-H2000
Installation and Connection
Sensor head/amplifier cable
OP-87903 (2m)
OP-87904 (5m)
OP-87905 (10m)
OP-88551 (20m)
LAN cable
OP-87950 (1m)
OP-87951 (3m)
OP-87952 (5m)
OP-87953 (10m)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2-15
Cables
Connecting via a network (Direct Connection (2 units or more)/Network Connection)
Connect the LAN cable to the sensor.
Connect the other side of the LAN cable to the Ethernet switch.
Connect the PC and Ethernet switch using the commercially available network cable.
Ethernet switch
2
Installation and Connection
LAN cable
OP-87950 (1m)
OP-87951 (3m)
OP-87952 (5m)
OP-87953 (10m)
Sensor head/amplifier cable
OP-87903 (2m)
OP-87904 (5m)
OP-87905 (10m)
OP-88551 (20m)
Sensor amplifier
IX-H2000
Sensor amplifier (expansion)
IX-H2050
Sensor amplifier (Main)
IX-H2000
Sensor head
IX-055
IX-080
IX-150
IX-360
IX-360W
2-16
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Cables
Other connections
This section shows connection examples for when the IX-H2000 and IX-H2050 are to be connected.
yyIX-H2000: Sensor amplifier (main)
yyIX-H2050: Sensor amplifier (expansion)
yyPC: Personal computer
IX-H IX-H
2050 2000
IX-H IX-H
2050 2000
IX-H IX-H
2050 2000
LAN cable
PC
LAN cable
2
IX-H IX-H
2050 2000
Installation and Connection
Ethernet
cable
IX-H
2000
LAN cable
Ethernet
switch
LAN cable
PC
Up to 16 sensor amplifiers (IX-H2000/IX-H2050) can be searched by
one PC.
You can connect to any sensor amplifier by specifying an IP address.
Do not configure a network loop using the IX-H2000, IX-H2050, PC, and/or an Ethernet switch. If a network
loop is configured, there can be no communication with the PC and IX-H sensor.
In this case, turn the power OFF, release the loop, and turn the power ON again.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2-17
Setting up the PC
Setting up the PC
This section explains how to install/uninstall the PC
Software for the IX Series, IX-Navigator (IX-H1), and how
to set up the PC.
Required PC Specifications
2
Operating conditions
.NET Framework 4.5.2 or above must be installed.
*If .NET Framework 4.5.2 or above is not installed, it will
be installed automatically when IX-H1 is installed.
Installation and Connection
To connect the sensor and PC, the following PC
specifications must be met.
Confirm that the PC to be used satisfies the following
conditions.
OS
One of the following OS’s must be pre-installed.
yyWindows 10.............................Home/Pro/Enterprise
yyWindows 7 (SP1 or higher)......Home Premium/
Professional/Ultimate
Windows 7/10 supports the 32-bit and 64-bit versions.
Supported languages: ‌English, Japanese, German,
Chinese(Simplified), Italian, French,
Spanish
*‌With IX-H2000/IX-H2050
connected, Japanese, English,
and Chinese (Simplified) only are
supported.
Hardware
Interface
Must be equipped with Ethernet (100 BASE-TX).
Processor
yyWindows 7/10.........Must be compliant with the OS system
requirements.
Memory capacity
yyWindows 7/10.........Must be compliant with the OS system
requirements.
Monitor
yyResolution : 1024 × 768 pixel or higher
yyDisplay color : High Color (16bit) or higher
HDD free space required for installation
1 GB or more
2-18
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Setting up the PC
Installing IX-Navigator (IX-H1)
This section describes the procedure for installing the PC
Software for IX Series, IX-Navigator (IX-H1), on a PC.
1 Turn ON the power of the PC and start Windows.
2 Insert the IX-H1 disc into the media drive.
The installation program activates by the auto run
function of the PC, and the InstallShield Wizard screen
opens.
If the installation program does not activate, open the
media drive from the Computer and double-click "setup.
exe".
Installation destination of the application software and the
PDF User's Manual (default settings) are as follows.
Windows 7/10 32-bit version:
C:¥Program Files¥KEYENCE¥IX-Navigator
2
Windows 7/10 64-bit version:
C:¥Program Files (x86)¥KEYENCE¥IX-Navigator
Installation and Connection
yyThis section describes the installation using
Windows 10.
yyExit or finish all other running software before
the installation.
yyLog on with a user who has administrative
privileges.
yyIf the user account control screen appears
during the installation, click the [Yes] button.
yyIf you have logged on with a user account that
does not have administrative privileges, input
a user account with administrative privileges
and the password.
Installation destination of the software
(reference)
Application
yyIX-Navigator.exe: IX-Navigator
Manual
yyIX_Manual_xx.pdf:
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Data saving destination
yyWindows 7/10
Document for the logon user\IX-Navigator
3 Follow the instructions in the window.
4 After the completion window for InstallShield
Wizard is displayed, click the [Finish] button.
5 Remove the installation CD.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2-19
Setting up the PC
Deleting the software (uninstall)
This section describes the procedure for uninstalling the PC
software for the IX Series, IX-Navigator (IX-H1).
yyThis section describes the uninstallation
using Windows 10.
yyIf the user account control screen appears
during the installation in the Windows 10
environment, click the [Yes] button.
yyLog on with a user who has administrative
privileges.
2
Installation and Connection
1 Turn ON the power of the PC and start Windows.
2 Click [Settings] from the start menu.
3 Click [System].
4 Click [Apps & features].
5 Select [IX-Navigator] and click [Uninstall].
Changing the PC settings (IP address
setting)
yyLog on with a user who has administrative
privileges.
yyAuto acquisition of IP address (DHCP server)
cannot be used due to the inability to connect
with the sensor.
For Windows 10
1 Click [Settings] from the start menu.
2 Click [Network & Internet].
3 Click [Change Adapter Options].
4 Right-click the [Ethernet] icon and select
[Properties] from the displayed menu.
5 Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)]
and click the [Properties] button.
6 Select [Use the following IP address] and input
the IP address and subnet mask.
6 After the confirmation dialog is displayed, click
the [Uninstall] button.
When the IX-Navigator is removed from the Programs
and Features screen, the process to uninstall the
software is complete.
: 192.168.10.1
yyIP address
yySubnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
For direct connection, set an arbitrary IP
address (The above is an example). To connect
with the existing network, input the IP address
that was assigned by the network administrator.
7 After setting the IP Address has completed, click
the [OK] button and close all the windows.
2-20
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Setting up the PC
For Windows 7
1 Open the Control Panel.
2 Click ([Network and Internet]) - [Network and
Sharing Center].
2
3 Click [Change adapter settings] on the upper left
on the screen.
Installation and Connection
4 Right-click the [Local Area Connection] icon and
select [Properties] from the displayed menu.
5 Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)]
and click the [Properties] button.
6 Select [Use the following IP address] and input
the IP address and subnet mask.
: 192.168.10.1
yyIP address
yySubnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
For direct connection (1 unit) or direct
connection (2 units or more), set an arbitrary IP
address (The above is an example). To connect
with the existing network, input the IP address
that was assigned by the network administrator.
7 After the setting is completed, click the [OK]
button and close all the windows.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2-21
Setting up the PC
2
Installation and Connection
2-22
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Chapter
3
Basic Operation
This chapter explains the overview of the IX-Navigator screen
and operation of IX Series, basic operation flow, and the
operation when turning on the power for the first time.
In addition, explains how to reset the sensor to the default
factory setting.
3
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3-1
Basic Operation
Detection Mode and Judgment Processing.......................3-2
Overview of Screen and Operation.....................................3-6
Basic Operation Flow...........................................................3-8
Operation when the Power is Turned on............................3-9
Setting to the Factory Default...........................................3-15
Basic IX-Navigator Operations..........................................3-16
Detection Mode and Judgment Processing
Detection Mode and Judgment Processing
Overview of detection modes
This device requires programming through the PC software or control panel to set measurement details for the target.
There are two detection modes for the program settings: Scan Mode and Line Mode.
How to select detection modes
Use the flowchart below to determine which detection mode to use.
3
Measure an immobile target
Measure a moving target
(A still target can also be measured)
Basic Operation
Scan Mode
“Scan Mode” (Page 3-3)
Line Mode
“Line Mode” (Page 3-3)
Processing time is too slow
Line Mode
“Line Mode” (Page 3-3)
3-2
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Detection Mode and Judgment Processing
Scan Mode
This mode detects the surface of an immobile target by scanning it with laser lines. If the target is within the detection
range, this mode can measure height and difference in level. Use this mode if there are multiple measurement points in a
planar direction. You can use position adjustment for detection if there are variations in target positioning. While the laser
is scanning the target, the target needs to be still.
Example: ‌Height measurement
Measures three points of height
Example: ‌Step measurement
Measures the difference in level between two points
3
Basic Operation
Line Mode
This mode measures a target by emitting laser lines. As the laser emission position is fixed, only the height and differences
in level on the line emitted by the laser are measured. This mode is mainly used for targets that are moving, targets for
which a fast measurement speed is required, and to measure long targets.
Example: Measuring the height of a moving target
Example: ‌Measuring the differences in level of targets for which
a fast measurement speed is required
Example: Measuring the differences in level of long targets
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3-3
Detection Mode and Judgment Processing
Judgment processing flow
This section describes the basic judgment processing flow of this device.
Scan Mode
Trigger input
BUSY output
3
Total status
output
Basic Operation
Trigger input
Detection/Imaging
Tool processing
Status output
Save
3-4
Inputs the imaging start signal from a photoelectric switch
or PLC.
In addition, the trigger can be input at a regular interval
with the internal trigger function.
Emits the laser, turns on the LED light, and detects and
images the target by using the CMOS image sensor.
BUSY output turns ON.
The target is scanned according to the tool settings. Up to
16 tools can be set. After misaligned target positions are
corrected with the position adjustment tool, the detection
tool is processed.
Outputs the status result.
When the total status result is OK, the total status OK
output is ON. When the total status result is NG, the total
status NG output is ON. Status results (OK/NG/HI/LO)
can also be output for each tool individually.
After judgment is completed, the BUSY output turns OFF.
Saves the detection history to the memory in the sensor.
Options for saving images include “All” or “NG Only”.
Note: ‌As the memory is volatile, it is deleted when the
power is turned off.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Detection Mode and Judgment Processing
Line Mode
Sampling Frequency
Sampling Frequency
Detection/imaging/judgment
Total status output
Start of sampling
Tool processing
Status output
Save
Standby until the
next sampling cycle
Emits the laser, turns on the LED light, and detects and
images the target by using the CMOS image sensor.
The target is scanned according to the tool settings. Up to
16 tools can be set. After misaligned target positions are
corrected with the position adjustment tool, the detection
tool is processed.
Outputs the status result.
When the total status result is OK, the total status OK
output is ON. When the total status result is NG, the total
status NG output is ON. Status results (OK/NG/HI/LO)
can also be output for each tool individually.
Saves the detection history to the memory in the sensor.
Options for saving images include “All” or “NG Only”.
It becomes the measurement complete signal from timing
input and saves the measurement detection history.
Note: ‌As the memory is volatile, it is deleted when the
power is turned off.
In line mode, measurement automatically repeats at each
sampling cycle.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3-5
3
Basic Operation
Detection/Imaging
Measurement begins at the selected sampling frequency.
The maximum and minimum measurement values can be
held during a specified period using a timing input.
Overview of Screen and Operation
Overview of Screen and Operation
This section explains the screens displayed on and operation of IX-Navigator.
For details of what can be set on each screen and its operation, refer to the applicable sections.
Activation Menu screen
Select the connection method with the sensor or settings and
detection history check function. You can also change the
display language.
“Operation when the Power is Turned on” (Page 3-9)
Program Details Screen
Check the master image or edit the program name.
“Things can be performed with the program functions”
(Page 7-4)
3
Basic Operation
(A)
Main screen in [Running]
Perform imaging and judgment
based on the program settings.
“Overview of the Operation
Screen” (Page 6-3)
Main screen in [Program]
Make changes to the program or sensor settings, or view
the image history.
Current Status
Displays operation data.
“Displaying operating
information” (Page 6-10)
3-6
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Limit Adjustment
Adjusts the threshold.
Information is also
displayed by tool.
“Displaying the Limit
Adjustment screen” (Page
6-11)
Overview of Screen and Operation
Sensor Detection History
View the sensor’s image history.
“Sensor’s Detection History (Confirming the
Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 7-11)
Backing up and sending data
Backs up the sensor settings and
sends settings to the sensor.
“Saving the Sensor Settings and
Images” (Page 7-19)
3
Basic Operation
Advanced Sensor Settings
Change the advanced settings for the
sensor.
“Setting the Advanced Information of
the Sensor” (Page 7-23)
Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup)
Sets condition to judge a target.
“Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)” (Page 4-1)
“Chapter 5 Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)” (Page 5-1)
Checking settings and detection history
A backup file (*.ixa) can be used to check the
settings and detection history.
“Chapter 8 Checking Settings and Detection
History” (Page 8-1)
(A)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3-7
Basic Operation Flow
Basic Operation Flow
Installing, connecting, and wiring the sensor
Mount the sensor, and then connect and wire the cable.
Also install the IX-Navigator.
“Chapter 2 Installation and Connection” (Page 2-1)
Turning on the power
3
Turn on the power of the sensor, and then perform the initial start-up process.
“Operation when the Power is Turned on” (Page 3-9)
Basic Operation
Settings Navigator
Creates the program to be used for operation.
Setting the detection mode
Set the detection mode for the program.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)/”Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-3)
STEP 1. Setting detection setup
Set the image conditions used to measure the target.
“1. Detection Setup” (Page 4-7)/”1. Detection Setup” (Page 5-7)
STEP 2. Registration of a master
Register a master to serve as the reference of judgment.
“2. Master Registration” (Page 4-14)/”2. Master Registration” (Page 5-25)
STEP 3. Tool settings
Set tools to measure the target and to judge whether a target is good or not-good.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 4-20)/”3. Tool Settings” (Page 5-27)
STEP 4. Output assignment
Assign the content to be output to each output line.
“4. Output Assignment” (Page 4-107)/”4. Output Assignment” (Page 5-79)
Starting the operation/adjustment
Switch the settings screen to the run screen, and start the operation. You can adjust the threshold and ZERO/
Offset while the controller is running.
“Chapter 6 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 6-1)
3-8
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Operation when the Power is Turned on
Operation when the Power is Turned on
Operation flow when the power is turned
on
Turning on the power
(1)
Direct Connection (1 unit)/Direct Connection (2
units or more)/Network Connection
(2)
Start the sensor for
the first time
(4)
(5)
(3)
Set up the sensor
Run
Connecting…
The sensor can be independently operated.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3-9
3
Basic Operation
Start IX-Navigator
(1) ‌The connection methods with the sensor are Direct
Connection (“1 unit” or “2 units or more”) and Network
Connection.
yyDirect Connection (1 unit)/Direct Connection (2 units
or more)
Use this method only if the system consists of one or
more sensors and the PC. Network settings do not
need to be configured.
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator
(Direct Connection (1 unit))” (Page 3-10)
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator
(Direct Connection (2 units or more))” (Page 3-11)
yyNetwork Connection
This connection uses static IP addresses for the
sensor and PC. Use this method if there are other
devices, such as a communications unit, on the local
area network.
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator
(Network Connection)” (Page 3-12)
(2) ‌When the sensor is turned on for the first time, perform
the Initial Sensor Setup.
“Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page
3-14)
(3) ‌The Sensor Setup Menu appears. Create the program
in the settings navigator. After the program is created,
operation begins.
“Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)”
(Page 4-1)
“Chapter 5 Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)”
(Page 5-1)
(4) ‌After starting the sensor for the second time and setup
has been completed, the operation automatically begins
when the power is turned on.
“Chapter 6 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 6-1)
(5) ‌When connection fails, the software remains on the
connecting screen.
“Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the
sensor” (Page A-21)
Basic Operation Flow
Operation for initial startup of the
IX‑Navigator (Direct Connection (1 unit))
1 Turn on the power of the sensor.
Turn on the power of the sensor before
clicking the [Direct Connection] button in the
step below.
3
The screen to select the language opens.
2 Double-click the [IX-Navigator] icon on the
yyWhen connecting the sensor to the software for the
first time, perform initial sensor setup and select the
polarity of the sensor. For more details, refer to:
“Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page
3-14)
yyWhen connecting to the sensor after initial setup has
been completed, the [Running] or [Program] menu
screen will open.
yyIf the sensor head is replaced on the amplifier, the
sensor will be initialized. For details, refer to
“Operations when replacing the sensor head”
(Page 3-14)
Basic Operation
desktop.
The Activation Menu screen opens.
3 Select [1 unit] below the [Direct Connection]
button then click the [Direct Connection] button.
yyIf the [Language] button is clicked, the Select
language screen opens. This setting changes
the display language.
yyClick the [User’s Manual] button to view the
user’s manual for this device.
The Direct Connection screen opens.
4 Click the [Connect] button.
If multiple network adapters are installed on the
PC, select the network adapter to be used for
connection.
3-10
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
yyIf communication fails and the connection
screen freezes, refer to
“Remedy when direct connection (1unit)
is unavailable” (Page A-21)
yyWhen using direct connection (1 unit), the
IP Address of the sensor is automatically
set.
Basic Operation Flow
Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator
(Direct Connection (2 units or more))
5 Select a sensor to be connected and click the
[Connect] button.
1 Turn on the power of the sensor.
Turn on the power of the sensor before
clicking the [Direct Connection] button in the
step below.
The screen to select the language opens.
2 Double-click the [IX-Navigator] icon on the
The Activation Menu screen opens.
3 Select [2 units or more] below the [Direct
Connection] button then click the [Direct
Connection] button.
yyIf the [Language] button is clicked, the Select
language screen opens. This setting changes
the display language.
yyClick the [User’s Manual] button to view the
user’s manual for this device.
The Direct Connection screen opens.
4 Click the [Start Search] button.
yyWhen connecting the sensor to the software for the
first time, perform initial sensor setup and select the
polarity of the sensor.
“Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page
3-14)
yyWhen connecting to the sensor after initial setup has
been completed, the [Running] or [Program] menu
screen will open.
yyIf the sensor head is replaced on the amplifier, the
sensor will be initialized. For details, refer to
“Operations when replacing the sensor head”
(Page 3-14)
When using Direct Connection (2 units or
more), do not connect devices other than
IX-H sensors, the control panel, and a PC
to the same network.
yyIf communication fails and the connection
screen freezes, refer to
“Remedy when direct connection (2
units or more) is unavailable” (Page A-22)
yyWhen using direct connection (2 units or
more), the IP Address of the connected
sensors are automatically set. If the IP
Address of the sensor has not been set, it
will be automatically assigned.
If multiple network adapters are installed on the
PC, select the network adapter to be used for
connection.
A confirmation screen opens. Check there is no problem
and tape the [OK] button.
Searching for a sensor begins.
When the search is finished, the search results will be
displayed.
Up to 16 sensors can be identified through
direct connection (2 units or more).
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3-11
3
Basic Operation
yyBy clicking the [LED Blinking] button, the
indicator light for the selected sensor operates
as described below. Use this function to
identify sensors.
yySensor: The sensor head blinks alternately
(green and red)
yyAmplifier: PWR/ERR, OUT, TRIG blinks
(orange)
yyBy clicking the [Device Name Setting] button,
the screen for entering the device name will
open. For details, refer to
“Device Name” (Page 7-38)
yyBy clicking the [Search Again] button, the
search for a sensor will restart.
desktop.
Basic Operation Flow
Operation for initial startup of the
IX‑Navigator (Network Connection)
When connecting the sensor to a network,
consult an engineer who is knowledgeable
about networks.
Setting the network address for IX-Navigator
3
1 Turn on the power of the sensor.
Basic Operation
Turn on the power of the sensor before the
[Network Connection] button is clicked in the
step below.
The screen to select the language opens.
2 Double-click the [IX-Navigator] icon on the
desktop.
The Activation Menu screen opens.
3 Click the [Network Connection] button.
Searching for a sensor to be connected
The IX-Navigator software automatically searches for a
sensor on the network and connects with it.
When connecting the sensor to the software for the first
time, perform initial sensor setup and select the polarity of
the sensor. For details, refer to
“Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page 3-14)
yyThe search time is about 10 seconds.
yySearching range and retrievable number of units
are as follows.
yySensor with no IP address (state at the time of
shipping):
A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved within a
range that the BOOTP packet from the sensor
reaches (Page A-30).
yySensor with IP address :
A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on the
local network to which the PC is connected.
1 Click the [Search Sensor] button.
yyIf the [Language] button is clicked, the Select
language screen opens. This setting changes
the display language.
yyClick the [User’s Manual] button to view the
user’s manual for this device.
If multiple network adapters are installed on the
PC, select the network adapter to be used for
connection.
The IX-Navigator will begin to search the network for a
sensor.
When searching has completed, the results of the
search will be displayed.
The Network Connection screen opens.
If no sensor is found, refer to
“When the connection cannot be
established by searching for the sensor”
(Page A-24)
There are two ways to connect the sensor with the
software, detailed below
€
the sensor on the network is searched
€When
“Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page
3-12)
€
the sensor is specified by the IP address
€When
“Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address”
(Page 3-13)
3-12
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Basic Operation Flow
2 Select a sensor to be connected and click the
[Connect] button.
€
connecting to a sensor that does not have
€When
an IP Address:
Specifying sensor to be connected by IP
address
Used when the IP address of the sensor to be
connected is defined beforehand.
1 Input the IP address of the sensor to be
connected.
3
Basic Operation
The Network Settings screen opens.
Input the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default
Gateway, and then click the [Connect] button.
If multiple network adapters are installed on the
PC, select the network adapter to be used for
connection.
2 Click the [Connect] button.
€
connecting to the sensor with set IP
€When
address
yyWhen connecting the sensor to the software for the
first time, perform initial sensor setup and select the
polarity of the sensor. For details, refer to
“Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page
3-14)
yyWhen connecting to the sensor after initial setup has
been completed, the [Run] or [Program] menu screen
will open.
yyIf the sensor head is replaced on the amplifier, the
sensor will be initialized. For details, refer to
“Operations when replacing the sensor head”
(Page 3-14)
yyWhen connecting the sensor to the software for the
first time, perform initial sensor setup and select the
polarity of the sensor. For details, refer to
“Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page
3-14)
yyWhen connecting to the sensor after initial setup has
been completed, the [Running] or [Program] menu
screen will open.
yyIf the sensor head is replaced on the amplifier, the
sensor will be initialized. For details, refer to
“Operations when replacing the sensor head”
(Page 3-14)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
If the software cannot correctly connect to
the sensor, refer to
“When the connection cannot be
established by specifying the sensor” (Page
A-25)
3-13
Basic Operation Flow
Operation for initial startup of the sensor
When a sensor with default settings is connected, perform
the Initial Sensor Setup and select the polarity of the sensor
(NPN or PNP).
For details about the polarity of the sensor, refer to
“Input/Output Circuit and Electric Specifications” (Page
2-13)
3
1 Click the [OK] button.
Operations when replacing the sensor
head
If a sensor head is replaced with a different type of sensor
head, initialization of the sensor is required.
Initialize the sensor following the instructions displayed on
the PC.
The information of the sensor head prereplacement is saved in the sensor amplifier.
Before initializing the sensor, we recommend
that you perform [Batch Backup]. Refer to
“Backing up in a batch” (Page 7-19)
Basic Operation
1 Click the [Initialize Sensor] button.
The Initial Sensor Setup begins. After setup is
completed, a screen appears indicating completion.
2 Click the [OK] button.
The Polarity screen opens.
3 Select the polarity of the sensor and click the [OK]
button.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Click the [OK] button.
The main [Program] screen will open.
The initialization process on the sensor will begin. After
setup has completed, a screen appears indicating
completion.
3 Click the [OK] button.
The main [Program] screen will open.
3-14
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Setting to the Factory Default
Setting to the Factory Default
Initializing the sensor
Initialize the information set in the sensor using factory
default settings.
yyThe following settings will not be initialized.
yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP) (Page 7-27)
yyNetwork Settings (IP Address / Subnet Mask /
Default Gateway / Port number (TCP)) (Page
7-38)
yyTo initialize the registered programs individually,
refer to
“Initializing a program” (Page 7-10)
3
Basic Operation
1 Click the [Advanced Sensor Settings] button on
the main screen in [Program].
The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.
2 Select the [Initialize/Update] tab and click the
[Initialize Sensor] button.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Click the [OK] button.
A confirmation screen appears.
4 Click the [Yes] button.
The initialization process on the sensor will begin. After
setup has completed, a screen appears indicating
completion.
5 Click the [OK] button.
The display returns to the Advanced Sensor Settings
screen.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3-15
Basic IX-Navigator Operations
Basic IX-Navigator Operations
Operating the image tool bar
Operations when the image is magnified
This section explains the operation method for the image
tool bar displayed at the top part of the image display
screen on the IX-Navigator while in [Running] mode.
If operating the scroll bar or dragging the image, it moves
the image display range in that direction.
Image tool bar
3
Basic Operation
Scroll bar
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
The area of magnification that is being displayed
when the image is magnified is shown on the bottom
left of the image.
(1) [Zoom In] / [Zoom Out] button
Clicking the [Zoom In]/ [Zoom Out] button magnifies/
reduces the displayed image on the image display
screen.
The center of the image is zoomed in and out of.
For details of operation when the display is zoomed in,
refer to
“Operations when the image is magnified” (Page
3-16)
(2) [Fit to Window] button
Fits the display size of the image to the window size.
(3) Display magnification
Shows the display magnification of the image on the
image display screen.
(4) Select display
You can change the contents of the image to be
displayed from the drop-down list.
“Changing display contents” (Page 3-17)
(5) [Save Image] button
Individually saves the image displayed on the IXNavigator to the PC.
The IX-Navigator’s screen will also be saved at the
same time (screenshot).
“Saving images and screens displayed on the IXNavigator individually” (Page 7-21)
(6) [Show saved image file location] button
Selecting [Show saved image file location] from the
expanded menu opens the folder to where an image is
saved when the [Save Image] button is clicked.
Selecting the [Change saved image file location]
enables you to change the image save destination.
3-16
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Enlarged area currently displayed
Entire image
Basic IX-Navigator Operations
Changing display contents
Height Display/Height image 1
You can change the contents to be displayed on the image
display area by selecting the desired contents from the
drop-down list.
The display contents that you can select differ depending
on the IX-Navigator state such as whether it is in [Running]
or [Program] mode. Regardless of the display that you
select, [Select display] is always displayed.
Displays the height image of the overall captured image.
3
Captured image
Displays an image taken by the sensor.
Basic Operation
Height image 2
Displays the height image within the tool window.
Measurement Position
Displays the tool window of the set tool.
Part height is overlaid on the image in the following
manner.
yyBlue to red indicates that the height is low to high,
respectively.
High
Measurement area check
Areas (blind spots) that cannot be measured due to the
laser not being able to reach the region are shaded.
Low
yySections that are the same color are the same
height.
yyAs for the height image, an area that is nearer the
sensor is “high” regardless of the [Measurement
Direction] settings.
yyThe shaded areas cannot be detected.
Check that the locations that you want to measure
can be measured.
yyHeight image 1 can be used for the step tool,
height tool, average height tool, MAX/MIN tool,
and height area tool.
yyHeight image 2 can be used for the average height
tool, MAX/MIN tool, and height area tool.
yyThe height image display function is available only
for [Program].
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3-17
Basic IX-Navigator Operations
Display contents specific to each tool
The contents specific to each tool are displayed.
yyOnly contents for the selected tool can be
displayed.
yyThere are some display contents that are
specific to certain tools.
Example: MAX/MIN tool
Editing the tool window
The tool window displayed when the tool is set in the
Settings Navigator can be edited to any size or direction.
In scan mode
zz
Select a rectangle or circle for the tool window shape.
However, this becomes a point with the step tool and height
tool, and is called the measurement point.
3
Basic Operation
Tool window (measurement point)
Tool window
In line mode
zz
Select a band on the line for the tool window shape.
Tool window
3-18
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Basic IX-Navigator Operations
In line mode
„„
Moving the tool window
By moving the mouse cursor onto the tool window, the
mouse cursor changes to
. Drag the cursor to move the
tool window.
Moving the mouse cursor onto the top right or left corner of
the tool window changes the mouse cursor to
.
The width of the tool window can be changed by dragging
it.
3
You can only change the angle of the tool
window when the window is a rectangle in scan
mode.
Changing the size of the tool window
In scan mode
„„
Change the size of a measurement point using
the tool settings.
“Setting the height tool” (Page 4-39)
Moving the mouse cursor onto the top right of the tool
window changes the mouse cursor to
.
The orientation of the tool window can be changed by
dragging it.
The direction can be reset by the [Angle Reset] button.
Rectangular tool window
zz
By moving the mouse cursor onto either side of the tool
window, the mouse cursor changes to or
.
By moving the mouse cursor onto either corner of the
tool window except the upper right corner, the mouse
cursor changes to .
The height, width, or size of the tool window can be
changed by dragging it.
Circular tool window
zz
The size of the circle can be changed by dragging the
outline of the tool window.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3-19
Basic Operation
Changing the angle of the tool window
Basic IX-Navigator Operations
Editing Values
You can edit the value of the trigger interval, the threshold
of each tool, and other values using various methods.
If you enter a value that exceeds the valid input
range, it will be rounded down or up to the
maximum or minimum value respectively.
3
Setting by the slider
Set the value by dragging the slider to the left or right.
Basic Operation
Slider
Setting by the numerical input fields
You can either input numbers directly in the numerical input
fields or click on the spin buttons.
Numerical input fields
3-20
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Chapter
4
This chapter explains how to set the Settings Navigator
functions while using scan mode.
Settings Navigator
(Scan Mode Setup)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-1
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Settings Navigator................................................................4-2
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator........................4-3
1. Detection Setup................................................................4-7
2. Master Registration........................................................4-14
3. Tool Settings...................................................................4-20
4. Output Assignment......................................................4-107
Settings Navigator
Settings Navigator
In the Settings Navigator, the settings of the program that allow the sensor to judge a target are set over several steps.
While following the steps with navigation buttons, configure the settings.
Navigation button
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Navigation button
Flow in the Settings Navigator
STEP 1. Detection Setup
Set the conditions to detect the target. Adjust the height of the target, set
the trigger conditions, and adjust the brightness.
“1. Detection Setup” (Page 4-7)
STEP 2. Master Registration
Capture and register a master image that will serve as the reference for
judgment.
“2. Master Registration” (Page 4-14)
STEP 3. Tool Settings
Set tools to measure the target and judge whether a target is OK or No
Good.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 4-20)
STEP 4. Output Assignment
Assign the content to be output to each output line.
“4. Output Assignment” (Page 4-107)
4-2
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator
6 Select scan mode as the detection mode for the
Starting the Settings Navigator
program.
1 Turn on the power of the sensor.
2 Start the IX-Navigator.
When the sensor is in one of the following conditions,
the [Program] screen will open. Proceed to step 5.
yyWhen the power is turned on for the first time
yyIf all programs are not being set
yyWhen replacing the sensor head
yyPrograms have two types of detection
modes: scan mode and line mode.
yySome of the program settings differ
depending on the detection mode.
yyThe detection mode cannot be changed
while configuring the settings or after
configuring the settings with Settings
Navigator.
3 Click the [Program] button.
4
4 Click the [OK] button.
The [Program] screen opens.
5 Select a program to be set.
When the [Detail] button is clicked, the Program
Details screen is displayed. You can select the
program for the sensor on the Program Details
screen.
“Displaying the Program Details screen”
(Page 7-7)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-3
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
yyChanging the detection mode for a set
program resets the program settings. If you
do not want to reset the program settings,
select a new program that has not been
set.
yyTo change the detection mode of a set
program, click the [OK] button on the
displayed confirmation screen. If there is
any detection history, it will be deleted.
A confirmation screen opens.
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator
7 Click the [Sensor Setup] button.
Types of Settings Navigator Images
The types of images displayed on the Settings Navigator
screen are shown below.
Image type
4
The startup screen of the Settings Navigator opens.
€
a program that has not been set is selected
€When
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Proceed to [1. Detection Setup] to set the imaging
conditions for the sensor.
Type
Description
The currently captured image.
The image registered as the master.
This is the test run screen.
The captured image is displayed.
“1. Detection Setup” (Page 4-7)
€
a program that has been set is selected
€When
Click the navigation button for each step to change the
settings.
Navigation button
“1. Detection Setup” (Page 4-7)
“2. Master Registration” (Page 4-14)
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 4-20)
“4. Output Assignment” (Page 4-107)
4-4
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator
Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow
This section explains each setting screen displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow.
For details on the operation and contents of each setting screen, refer to the applicable section.
1. Detection Setup
“1. Detection
Setup” (Page 4-7)
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Returns to (A)
(A)
2. Master
Registration
“2. Master
Registration” (Page
4-14)
Returns to (A)
3. Tool Settings
“3. Tool Settings”
(Page 4-20)
Returns to (A)
4. Output
Assignment
“4. Output
Assignment” (Page
4-107)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-5
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator
Finishing the Settings Navigator
Finishing without completing the steps
Finishing by completing all steps
1 Click the [Exit Setup] button.
1 Set all steps in the Settings Navigator.
2 Click the [Complete Settings] button.
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
€
the required settings are completed
€When
The confirmation dialog to save opens.
€
the required settings are not completed
€When
The confirmation dialog to save opens.
3 Click the [Yes] button.
The settings in the Settings Navigator will be saved into
the program, and the system returns to the [Program]
screen.
yyBy clicking the [No] button, the confirmation
dialog to cancel the settings opens. By clicking
the [Yes] button, Settings Navigator finishes
without saving the settings.
yyBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system
returns to the Settings Navigator screen.
The confirmation dialog to finish opens.
yyBy clicking the [OK] button, the confirmation dialog to
save opens.
yyBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system returns to
the Settings Navigator screen.
The required settings have not been
completed yet. Even if the [OK] button is
clicked and the settings are saved in the
program, the proper operation cannot be
performed.
2 Click the [Yes] button.
The settings in the Settings Navigator will be saved into
the program, and the system returns to the [Program]
screen.
yyBy clicking the [No] button, the confirmation
dialog to cancel the settings opens. By clicking
the [Yes] button, Settings Navigator finishes
without saving the settings.
yyBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system
returns to the Settings Navigator screen.
4-6
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
1. Detection Setup
1. Detection Setup
Set the conditions to measure the target. Adjust the image settings to define differences between good and not-good
images.
Main Screen for Detection Conditions
(1)
(2)
(3)
(7)
(4)
4
(5)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(1) Title
Displays the program number and program name.
(2) Navigation buttons
Moves between steps in Settings Navigator.
(3) Image type
Displays the image type. [Live] is the image the sensor
is currently capturing.
(4) Image tool bar
Displays operation tools for the displayed image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(5) Captured image
Displays the captured image.
(6) Measurement point
You can drag to measure the height of the desired
position.
(12)
(13)
(7) Settings button
Displays the settings that can be adjusted in Detection
Setup.
“Trigger Options” (Page 4-8)
“Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-9)
“Extended Functions” (Page 4-10)
(8) Settings screen
Displays the current settings to be edited based on the
selected item.
(9) Height measurement check box
Turns execution of height measurement on or off.
Turning it off speeds up the refreshing of the image
because height is not measured.
(10) Height measurement value
Displays the measurement value of the measurement
point. If you set tilt adjustment in STEP 2, the
adjustment result is applied.
(11) Detected position check
Displays the position of the measurement point in the
range of measurement.
(12) [Next to STEP2] button
The display moves to the main screen for Master
Registration.
“2. Master Registration” (Page 4-14)
(13) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-6)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-7
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
(8)
(6)
1. Detection Setup
Setting Detection Setup
If the trigger interval is shorter than the
processing time, a trigger error occurs.
Trigger Options
€
[External Trigger] is selected
€When
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
2 Display the settings screen for detection
conditions.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 4-5)
4
3 Click the [Trigger Options] button.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Trigger
Delay
Sets the time (delay) from trigger input until
measurement and capture.
yySetting range: 0 to 10000 ms
yyDefault value: 0 ms
The screen to set the Trigger Options appears.
4 Select the trigger type and set the image capture
timing.
The trigger is the timing for capturing and measuring
targets with the device's internal camera.
Internal
Trigger
(Default)
External
Trigger
Automatically starts measurement and
capture at the set trigger interval.
Measures and captures every time a trigger
input is received from a device installed
externally.
€
[Internal Trigger] is selected
€When
Trigger
Interval
4-8
Sets an interval (cycle) to automatically
capture and measure images.
yySetting range: 1 to 10000 ms
yyDefault value: 50 ms
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
To update the image, turn on the [Trigger ON]
button.
1. Detection Setup
When brightness is to be adjusted manually
zz
Brightness Adjustment
To check the image after adjusting brightness
when [External Trigger] is selected, turn on
the [Trigger ON] button. If the [Trigger ON]
button is turned off, the device will wait for
a trigger and the captured image will not
refresh.
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
2 Display the settings screen for detection
conditions.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 4-5)
3 Click the [Brightness Adjustment] button.
(1) Adjust brightness by selecting the imaging mode.
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The screen to configure the Brightness Adjustment
settings opens.
4 Adjust brightness.
If master registration is completed, changing
the brightness settings displays a screen
prompting you to re-register a master image.
Re-register the master as needed.
When brightness is to be adjusted automatically
zz
(1) Click the [Automatic Brightness Adjustment]
button.
Automatic brightness adjustment enables a target to be
captured and measured with the appropriate brightness
by changing the light intensity and shutter speed
according to the shape and surface condition of the
target.
€
€Brightness
Sets the image brightness.
yySetting range: 1 to 110
yyDefault value: 30
Note that the image quality can be affected
when setting a higher brightness value.
€
Mode
€Imaging
Normal
This mode is the basic imaging mode. You
can reduce noise when capturing images.
HDR
(Default)
This mode is for capturing a target that
reflects light and has high contrast, such as
metal.
High Gain
This mode is used when exposure time
needs to be shortened or when the imaging
environment is dark. Lowers image quality
due to high gain.
Do not move a target during the auto
brightness adjustment. If the target is
moving, focus may not be adjusted correctly.
The automatic brightness adjustment function
operates based on the internal trigger. Trigger
options are not affected.
When automatic brightness adjustment is completed,
the image displayed will be adjusted based on the
adjustments made.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-9
1. Detection Setup
Measurement direction
„„
€
Halation
€Cut
0
Halation mitigation is not performed. The
device operates at high speed to capture
only one image.
1 (Default)
The impact of halation and shadows is
reduced on the image by combining four
images that are captured through changing
the LED lights shining on the target.
2 to 4
4
If master registration is completed, changing
the measurement direction settings displays a
screen prompting you to re-register a master
image. Re-register the master as needed.
1 Select the direction to increase or decrease the
measurement value.
These settings are used when halation
cannot be cut with setting [1]. Although
halation is easier to cut with a larger setting,
the image is susceptible to shadowing in
order to darken the image when combining
images.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
€
€Lighting
OFF
The LED light is not used.
ON
(Default)
The LED light is used.
€
(default)
€Normal
The measurement value increases as the target
approaches the sensor.
yySetting the light to OFF disables the
halation mitigation function.
yyIf master registration is completed,
changing the lighting displays a screen
prompting you to re-register a master
image. Re-register the master as needed.
Measurement Value
+999.99
Distance
-999.99
Clicking the [Undo] button restores the settings
to the values before adjustment.
Distance
€
€Reverse
The measurement value decreases as the target
approaches the sensor.
Measurement Value
Extended Functions
+999.99
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
Distance
2 Display the settings screen for detection
conditions.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 4-5)
3 Click the [Extended Functions] button.
The Extended Functions settings screen opens.
4-10
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
-999.99
Distance
1. Detection Setup
Measurement mode
„„
Reduce measurement noise
„„
If master registration is completed, changing the
measurement mode settings displays a screen
prompting you to re-register a master image. Reregister the master as needed.
1 Select a measurement mode.
If master registration is completed, changing
the measurement noise cut settings displays
a screen prompting you to re-register a master
image. Re-register the master as needed.
1 Select whether to use the measurement noise
cut function.
4
Select this setting to shorten the processing time.
If the target is outside of the detection range,
the measurement value may be affected by
reflected light from outside of the detection
range. If this occurs, select [High Speed].
€
€OFF
Does not cut noise from the measured data.
€
(default)
€ON
Cuts noise from the measured data.
€
Sensitivity
€High
Select this setting if there are no problems with
processing time or measurement accuracy.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
yyCutting noise from the measured data
stabilizes the measurement value.
However, as data points decrease, the
measurement value may become unstable
and measurement may not be possible.
yyIf the target is outside of the detection
range, the measurement value may be
affected by reflected light from outside of
the detection range. If this occurs, select
[ON].
yyWhen [ON] is selected, a target with high
skew may not be measured. If this occurs,
select [OFF].
4-11
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
€
Speed (Default. For IX-360W, the default is
€High
[High Sensitivity])
1. Detection Setup
Measure when Position Adjustment fails
„„
Display outline
„„
1 Select the operation to be performed when
1 Click the [Go To Display screen] button.
position adjustment fails.
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The Display outline screen opens.
Measurement points
Subject to position adjustment
2 Select a sensitivity to extract the outline of the
target.
Position adjustment failure
Measurement points
If set to [OFF]
•Measurement is not performed
•ZERO/Offset is not possible
If set to [ON]
•Measurement is performed
•ZERO/Offset is possible
€
(default)
€OFF
If position adjustment fails, measurement will not be
performed.
When position adjustment fails, the measured
value is displayed as "---.--" or "----". The
matching rate for the position adjustment tool will
be displayed. The judgment result is displayed
as "--".
€
€Low
Reduces the extracted volume of an outline. You can
reduce the extracted volume of an outline that is not
necessary to detect.
€
(default)
€Middle
Extracts the standard outline.
€
€High
Extracts an outline of the image with low contrast. This
setting is used when the outline that you want to detect
cannot be extracted.
€
€ON
Measurement will be performed even if position
adjustment fails. The measurement position will be the
position of the tool window.
If the position adjustment tool is set, select
[ON] to adjust ZERO/Offset in a place where
the target is not located.
For details about behavior when position
adjustment fails, refer to:
“ZERO/Offset when position adjustment fails”
(Page 6-14)
4-12
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
1. Detection Setup
3 Adjust the brightness while checking the outline
displayed on the capture screen.
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
For details about adjusting the brightness, refer to:
“Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-9)
4 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Extended Functions settings
screen.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-13
2. Master Registration
2. Master Registration
Register a master image to serve as the reference for judgment.
Main Screen for Master Registration
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(4)
4
(5)
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
(7)
(8)
(1) Title
Displays the program number and program name.
(2) Navigation buttons
Moves between steps in Settings Navigator.
(3) Image type
Displays the image type. [Master] is the registered
master.
(4) Image tool bar
Displays the operation tools for the displayed image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(5) Captured image
Displays the captured image.
(9)
(10)
(6) [Register Master] button
Registers the image as the master.
“Master Registration” (Page 4-15)
(7) [Tilt Adjustment] button
Corrects sensor head tilt.
“Tilt Adjustment” (Page 4-16)
(8) [Back] button
The system returns to the main screen for Detection
Conditions.
“1. Detection Setup” (Page 4-7)
(9) [Next to STEP3] button
The display moves to the main screen for tool settings.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 4-20)
(10) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-6)
4-14
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2. Master Registration
6 Check the displayed captured image on the
Master Registration
screen and click the [Start Master Registration]
button.
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
2 Display the main screen for Master Registration.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 4-5)
3 Place the target that will be used as a reference
of judgment in the field of view of the camera.
4 Click the [Register Master] button.
4
Do not move the target during master
registration.
If you re-register a master when tilt
adjustment is enabled, tilt adjustment will be
disabled. Set the head tilt adjustment again
as needed.
5 Image a target.
7 Click the [OK] button.
€
an internal trigger
€For
The screen returns to the main screen for Master
Registration.
The target is imaged automatically.
€
an external trigger
€For
Input an external trigger from a sensor, PLC, or the like
via the input line (IN1). You can also click the [Trigger
ON] button to simulate the input of an external trigger.
8 If the sensor head is tilted in reference to the
measurement surface, adjust the sensor head
tilt.
“Tilt Adjustment” (Page 4-16)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-15
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
After master registration is completed, a message
appears indicating completion.
2. Master Registration
3 Select the reference image to use.
Tilt Adjustment
To install the sensor head with a tilt in any direction to the
reference surface, configure the following setting.
The reference surface is the surface that is used as a
reference in measurement. Setting a reference surface
sets that surface to 0.00 mm. The height is measured
perpendicularly to that reference surface.
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Reference
surface
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The height measurement
direction is perpendicular to
the front of the sensor head
The height measurement
direction is perpendicular to
the reference surface
1 Click the [Tilt Adjustment] button.
The settings screen for adjusting the tilt opens.
2 Select [Enable].
€
(default)
€Master
Sets the master as the target of adjustment.
€
Image
€Live
Sets the captured live image as the target of
adjustment.
4 Click the [Reference Surface Setup] button.
€
[Live Image] is selected for the target of
€When
adjustment
Check the Live image displayed on the screen and click
the [Set] button.
yyAs images that are used when [Live Image]
is set are not saved, you cannot re-check
those images.
yyWith the pin height tool set, if any of the
following operations are performed, the
setting cannot be changed. To change
the setting in such a case, re-register the
master.
yyWhen the power is turned OFF or ON
after master registration
yyWhen the program is switched after
master registration
yyWhen the program settings are cancelled
without being saved after master
registration
The Reference Surface Settings screen opens.
4-16
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2. Master Registration
5 Click three points located on the same plane on
the reference surface. Change the size of the
points as needed.
6 Click the [Next] button.
The reference surface is set.
Click
7 Check the reference surface and click the [OK]
€
€Small
button.
Part height is overlaid on the image in the
following manner.
yyBlue to red indicates that the height is low to
high, respectively.
Points are the standard size.
€
(default)
€Large
Places points in wide places.
High
yyThe average height within each point size will
be used as the reference height. After you
specify the three points, you can drag each
point to further adjust their location.
yyPlacing the three points as wide apart as
possible increases adjustment accuracy.
Low
Good example: Three points are far apart
yySections that are the same color are the same
height.
yyAs for the height image, one that is nearer
the sensor is “high” regardless of the
[Measurement Direction] settings.
yyShaded areas are the areas that cannot be
detected.
Check that the locations that you want to
measure can be measured.
Bad example: Three points are close together
yySelecting [Normal] or [Large] shortens
processing time when using [Real-time
Adjustment] compared to [Small].
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-17
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
You can place points in narrow places.
€
€Normal
4
2. Master Registration
Example: For a target similar the one below
8 Click the [OK] button.
The screen returns to the Adjust Tilt Settings screen.
9 Select whether to adjust for each trigger.
Sections that are the same height are the same
color.
The color is different for places where the height is
different.
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
No
(Default)
Adjusts with the value set during setup when
in operation.
Yes
Measures the three set points and
reconfigures the reference surface every
time an object is detected. It is enabled
when the object has the reference surface.
Undetectable area
Measurement cannot be performed
because the target is in a blind spot and the
sensor cannot receive the laser beam.
Undetectable area
Outside of the measurement range.
Selecting [Yes] increases processing time during
operation.
€
[Yes] is selected
€When
Select the reference surface adjustment range.
The reference surface adjustment range is the height
range used for tilt adjustment. The center of the
reference surface adjustment range is the measurement
value on the master.
Example of an undetectable area
For example, when the measurement value is
5.00 mm and the measurement range is ±1.00
mm, the adjustable range will be 4.00 to 6.00
mm.
Blind spot
Outside of the
measurement range
Insufficient light
volume
Reference surface
Reference surface
adjustment range
Click the [Reconfigure] button to reconfigure the
reference surface settings.
After reference surface settings are completed, a
message opens indicating completion.
4-18
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2. Master Registration
yyThe selection options for the adjustment
range displayed on the drop-down list differ
depending on the sensor head used.
yyClicking the [-]/[+] buttons also enables you to
select the previous or next selection option.
yyWhen the reference surface adjustment range
setting is narrower the processing time is
shorter.
The reference surface is not visible on the
„„
master
Select [Live Image] for the adjustment target, remove the
target, and set the reference surface.
Example 1
10 Click the [Close] button.
Remove target
If a height-related tool is set and you change
tilt adjustment settings, a screen prompting
you to check the tool settings appears. Edit
the tool settings as required.
Reference surface
setting point
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The screen returns to the main screen for Master
Registration.
Reference surface
Example 2
How to Select the Option Settings
Refer to the following when setting the tilt adjustment
options.
The reference surface is visible on
the master
→
The reference surface is not
visible on the master
→
Live Image
The reference surface is visible
on the master and adjust every
detection
→
Master +
Real-time
Adjustment
Remove target
Master
Reference surface
setting point
The reference surface is visible on the
„„
master
Select [Master] for the adjustment target and set the
reference surface.
Example 1
Example 2
Reference surface
setting point
Reference surface
The reference surface is visible on the
„„
master and adjust every detection
Select [Master] for the adjustment target and set the
reference surface.
So that the head can be tilted in any direction, select
[Enable] for [Real time adjustment].
Measure height
difference
Reference surface
Reference surface
Reference surface
Reference surface setting
point
Select the reference surface adjustment range as
necessary.
“When [Yes] is selected” (Page 4-18)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-19
3. Tool Settings
3. Tool Settings
Set tools to measure the target and to judge whether a target is OK or No Good.
The height and characteristics of the target registered as the master image are used as the basis for judgment.
During operation, the sensor judges whether a target is OK or No Good by comparing the differences in measurement
between the registered master image and the current target.
The limits for the number of tools that can be set in one program are as follows:
yyJudgment tool (16)
yyPosition Adjustment tool (1)
Measurement, calculation, and other tools with the
exception of the position adjustment tool are called
"judgment tools".
4
Types of tools
Follow the procedures referenced below to set up the tools.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Description of the
Settings
Setting Procedure
Step Tool
Page 4-21
Page 4-33
Height Tool
Page 4-21
Page 4-39
Average Height Tool
Page 4-22
Page 4-46
Position Adjustment
tool
Page 4-22
Page 4-55
MAX/MIN Tool
Page 4-23
Page 4-58
Height Area Tool
Page 4-23
Page 4-66
Pin Height Tool
Page 4-24
Page 4-73
Monochrome Area Tool
Page 4-25
Page 4-79
Width Tool
Page 4-25
Page 4-86
1-Axis Adjustment Tool
Page 4-26
Page 4-92
2-Axis Adjustment Tool
Page 4-26
Page 4-94
Step Calculation Tool
Page 4-27
Page 4-97
Thickness Calculation
Tool
Page 4-28
Page 4-103
Tool
Basic Tools
Advanced Tools
Image Tools
Calculation Tool
The thickness calculation tool can only be set
when an expansion unit is connected.
4-20
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Basic Tools
Step Tool
„„
A detection tool used to measure the height difference
between two points on the current target. This tool judges
whether a tool is OK or NG based on the differences
between the current target and the registered master image
according to a set threshold.
Tool settings
Height Tool
„„
A detection tool used to measure the height of the current
target. This tool judges whether a target is OK or NG based
on the differences between the current target and the
registered master image according to a set threshold.
Tool settings
Reference height
Height difference reference
4
Height difference is smaller than
the threshold
Height difference is larger than
the threshold
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Height is less than the threshold
Height is greater than the
threshold
4-21
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Example when the result was NG
Example when the result was NG
3. Tool Settings
Average Height Tool
„„
A detection tool used to measure the height of the current
target. This tool judges whether a target is OK or NG based
on the differences between the current target and the
registered master image according to a set limit. For the
average height tool, use the height average of the specified
area within the tool window. This tool is more suitable for
measuring a target that is small or has a complicated shape
like screw head than the height tool and the step tool.
4
Position Adjustment Tool
„„
This tool adjusts misaligned targets by searching for the
shape specified from the registered master image. The
position adjustment tool is used in conjunction with other
detection tools.
Tool settings
Measurement points
Tool settings
Reference height
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Position Adjustment tool
Example when the result was NG
Search area for position adjustment tool
Height is less than the threshold
Processing during an operation
Measurement points
Height is greater than the
threshold
Position Adjustment tool
Search area for position adjustment tool
4-22
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Advanced Tools
MAX/MIN Tool
„„
A detection tool to measure the maximum or minimum
height of the current target. This tool judges whether a
target is OK or NG based on the differences in height
between the current target and the registered master image
according to a set threshold.
Tool settings
Place tool window in the range to be measured
Height Area Tool
„„
A detection tool used to calculate the matching rate (number
of pixels) in the height area of the current target. The
height area is the area within a user-specified range. The
tool judges whether a target is OK or NG based on the
differences in matching rate between the current target and
the registered master image according to a set threshold.
Tool settings
Height area (shaded)
Set height range
MAX
Example when the result was NG
Set height range
Example of minimum measurement
The height is the same but the area (shaded area) is too
narrow.
MIN
Set height range
The area (target thickness) is the same but the height is
different.
The target is not inside the specified height area, so the
height area was not extracted.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-23
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Example of maximum measurement
4
3. Tool Settings
Pin Height Tool
„„
A detection tool used to measure the height of the current
target. This tool judges whether a target is OK or NG based
on the differences between the current target and the
registered master image according to a set limit. Use this
tool for multiple small targets.
Tool settings
Reference height
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Example when the result was NG
Height is greater or less than the threshold
4-24
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Image Tools
Monochrome Area Tool
„„
A tool used to calculate the matching rate (number of
pixels) of the area on the current target in comparison to
the area (number of pixels) of the registered master image
(100% matching rate) according to a set threshold. The
monochrome area is the area of brightness specified with a
desired value.
Width Tool
„„
A tool used to measure the width of the current target
in comparison to the width between the edges of the
registered master image. This tool judges whether a target
is OK or NG according to a limit set for the width.
Tool settings
Tool settings
Example when the
result was OK
Example when the
result was NG
Base is white
White area is 100% so OK
Base is gray
White area is 0% so NG
4
Example when the result was NG
Width s short
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Compares the area of
a target as defining an
area of a white base to
100%.
Width is long
4-25
3. Tool Settings
1-Axis Adjustment Tool
„„
2-Axis Adjustment Tool
„„
Tool settings
Tool settings
A tool used to adjust the variation of positioning
(misalignment) of the current target by searching for the
characteristics of the edge of the registered master image.
The 1-axis adjustment tool is used in combination with
other detection tools. This tool enables faster judgment
processing than the ordinary position adjustment tools.
The 1-axis adjustment tool adjusts the positioning in 1 axis
direction, either in the X-axis or Y-axis direction.
4
A tool used to adjust the variation of positioning
(misalignment) of the current target by searching for the
characteristics of the edge of the registered master image.
The 2-axis adjustment tool is used in combination with
other detection tools. This tool enables faster judgment
processing than the ordinary position adjustment tools.
The 2-axis adjustment tool adjusts the positioning in 2 axis
directions, both in the X-axis and Y-axis directions.
2-Axis Adjustment Tool (X-axis)
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
1-Axis Adjustment Tool
Processing during an operation
2-Axis Adjustment Tool (Y-axis)
Processing during an operation
4-26
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Calculation Tools
Step Calculation Tool
„„
A detection tool used to calculate the height difference of
the current target using the height data of two separate
points. This tool judges whether a target is OK or NG
based on the the height differences between the current
target and the registered master image according to a set
threshold.
Use example for the step calculation tool
zz
The step calculation tool is useful in the situations below.
€
the height difference cannot be measured
€When
with the step tool
01
MAX
02
MAX
Tool settings
01
02
€
the detection range is insufficient with one
€When
sensor head
Height difference calculation result = Tool 01 to 02
Select a set height tool or MAX/MIN tool for Tool
01 and Tool 02 to be used in height difference
calculations.
01
01
Example when the result was NG
01
02
Height difference is smaller than the threshold
When measuring the difference in height of two points
outside of the detection range with one sensor head,
you can measure the difference in height by using the
height tool set for the main unit and the expansion unit.
The measurement value of a tool used with the step
calculation tool is the value before ZERO/Offset and
2-point calibration set in each tool is applied.
01
02
Height difference is larger than the threshold
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-27
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Setting MAX of the MAX/MIN tool for both the Tool 01
and Tool 02 enables you to measure the maximum
values for the height difference.
3. Tool Settings
Thickness Calculation Tool
„„
A detection tool to calculate the thickness (height
difference) on the current target using the height data from
two separate points. This tool judges whether a target is
OK or NG based on the thickness differences between the
current target and the registered master image according to
a set threshold.
The thickness calculation tool is only available on a main
unit connected to an expansion unit.
Tool settings
4
Height measurement
value for main unit (A)
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Thickness (A+B)
Height measurement value
for expansion unit (B)
Select a set tool for Tool 01 and Tool 02 to be
used in thickness calculations.
Example when the result was OK
Example when the result was NG
Thicker than the threshold
The measurement value of a tool used with the
thickness calculation tool is the value before ZERO/
Offset and 2-point calibration set in each tool is
applied.
4-28
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Main Screen for the Tool settings
(1)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(4)
(7)
4
(5)
(1) Title
Displays the program number and program name.
(2) Navigation buttons
Moves between steps in Settings Navigator.
(3) Image type
Displays the image type. [Master] is the registered
master.
(4) Image tool bar
Displays the operation tools for the displayed image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(5) Captured image
Displays the captured image.
(9)
(10)
(6) Tool settings button
Adds, edits, copies, and deletes the tool.
“Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool” (Page 4-30)
(7) Tool list
Displays a list of tools set in the program. A
measurement value/matching rate and threshold value
is displayed for each tool. Selected added tools are
displayed in an orange frame.
(8) [Back] button
The screen returns to the main screen for Master
Registration.
“2. Master Registration” (Page 4-14)
(9) [Next to STEP4] button
The display moves to the main screen for Output
Assignment.
“4. Output Assignment” (Page 4-107)
(10) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-6)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-29
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
(8)
3. Tool Settings
Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool
Tools cannot be added in the following
cases:
yyIf 16 tools are already set.
yyIf you tried to add a second Position
Adjustment tool where a position
adjustment-related tool (position
adjustment tool, 1-axis adjsutment tool, or
2-axis adjustment tool) has already been
set.
yyIf you tried to add a thickness calculation
tool when an expansion unit is not attached
to the main unit.
yyIf you tried to add a step calculation tool
when two or more height-related tools
(height tool, MAX/MIN tool, average height
tool) are not set and when operating
without an expansion unit.
yyIf you tried to add the pin height tool after
performing any of the operations below
during the master registration. In such a
case, re-register the master.
yyPower OFF or ON
yyProgram switching
yyCancelling of the settings without saving
them
Adding a tool
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
2 Display the main screen for the tool settings.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 4-5)
4
3 Click the [Add Tool] button.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The Select Tool screen opens.
4 Select the tool to be added and click the [OK]
button.
The settings screen for the selected tool opens.
5 Configure the tool settings.
“Step Tool” (Page 4-33)
“Height Tool” (Page 4-39)
“Average Height Tool” (Page 4-46)
“Position Adjustment Tool” (Page 4-55)
“MAX/MIN Tool” (Page 4-58)
“Height Area Tool” (Page 4-66)
“Pin Height Tool” (Page 4-73)
“Monochrome Area Tool” (Page 4-79)
“Width Tool” (Page 4-86)
“1-Axis Adjustment Tool” (Page 4-92)
“2-Axis Adjustment Tool” (Page 4-94)
“Step Calculation Tool” (Page 4-97)
“Thickness Calculation Tool” (Page 4-103)
4-30
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Editing a tool
Copying a tool
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
2 Display the main screen for the tool settings.
2 Display the main screen for the tool settings.
3 Select a tool to be edited.
3 Select a tool to be copied.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 4-5)
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 4-5)
4
4 Click the [Copy] button.
The settings screen for the selected tool opens.
5
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
4 Click the [Edit] button.
Tools cannot be copied in the following
cases:
yyIf 16 tools are already set.
yyIf you tried to copy a position adjustmentrelated tool (position adjustment tool,
1-axis adjustment tool, or 2-axis adjustment
tool).
yyIf you tried to add the pin height tool after
performing any of the operations below
with the master registration. In such a case,
re-register the master.
yyPower OFF or ON
yyProgram switching
yyCancelling of the settings without saving
them
Edit the tool settings.
€
Mode
€Scan
“Step Tool” (Page 4-33)
“Height Tool” (Page 4-39)
“Average Height Tool” (Page 4-46)
“Position Adjustment Tool” (Page 4-55)
“MAX/MIN Tool” (Page 4-58)
“Height Area Tool” (Page 4-66)
“Pin Height Tool” (Page 4-73)
“Monochrome Area Tool” (Page 4-79)
“Width Tool” (Page 4-86)
“1-Axis Adjustment Tool” (Page 4-92)
“2-Axis Adjustment Tool” (Page 4-94)
“Step Calculation Tool” (Page 4-97)
“Thickness Calculation Tool” (Page 4-103)
A confirmation screen opens.
5 Click the [OK] button.
The tool is copied.
The new tool is numbered according to the
smallest unused tool number.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-31
3. Tool Settings
Deleting a tool
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
2 Display the main screen for the tool settings.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 4-5)
3 Select a tool to be deleted.
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
4 Click the [Delete] button.
A confirmation screen opens.
If the tool to be deleted is one of the
following, a confirmation screen appears
indicating as such:
yyThe tool is used for the OUT setting or
logic in the output assignment.
yyThe reference point for the step tool is
being referenced by another step tool as
the reference point.
yyThe tool is being referenced by a
calculation tool.
yyThe average height tool, height area tool,
or pin height tool is referenced by the
reference height settings of another tool.
5 Click the [OK] button.
The tool is deleted.
4-32
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
4 Adjust the position and size of the measurement
Step Tool
point.
Step tool settings
Items
Measurement Point
Point A
Size
Point B
Size
Shift Value
ZERO/Offset/
Limit Adjustment
HI
Point
LO
4
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-30)
2 Click a measurement point (Point A).
€
€Small
You can place points in narrow places.
€
(default)
€Normal
Points are the standard size.
€
€Large
Places points in wide places. The measurement value
is more stable than [Small] or [Normal].
€
button
€[A↔B]
Clicking this button swaps Point A and Point B positions.
5 Click the [Next] button.
Click
Point A is created.
3 Click a measurement reference point (Point B).
Clicking an existing step tool reference point displays a
confirmation screen. Clicking [Yes] enables you to use
the same reference point.
The Step Tool Settings screen opens.
6 To adjust a set measurement point, click the
[Settings] button under [Measurement Point].
Click
Point B is created.
If you use an existing reference point, settings
related to Point B in the subsequent steps
are not displayed. If you change the settings,
change the settings for the step tool that created
that Point B.
The Measurement Point Settings screen opens.
After adjusting a measurement point, click the [Close]
button.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-33
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
1 Add a step tool.
3. Tool Settings
7 Set “ZERO/Offset/Limit Adjustment”.
4
8 Set a threshold value.
€
Value
€Shift
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Input ZERO/Offset target value that can be used to shift
the current measurement value to a desired value.
€
button
€[ZERO/Offset]
Click this button to offset the value so that the
measurement value matches the set target value.
€
€HI
Input the maximum threshold value.
€
€LO
Input the minimum threshold value.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
€
button.
€[Clear]
yyThe default threshold value differs depending
on the sensor head that is used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
Click this button to display the Cancel ZERO/Offset
Confirmation screen. Clicking the [OK] button restores
the settings to the values before adjustment.
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
9 If needed, click the [Extended Functions] tab to
set the extended functions.
€
Range
€Measurement
Sets the height range to be measured. Narrowing the
range will shorten the processing time.
“Measurement Range” (Page 4-35)
€
Tool
€Rename
Changes the tool name.
“Rename Tool” (Page 4-36)
€
Calibration
€2-point
Adjust the measurement value proportionally to the
adjustment ratio by setting two sets of adjustment points
and their measurement values after adjustment.
“2-point Calibration” (Page 4-36)
10 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
4-34
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions for the step tool
and Point B.
You can directly select values from the drop-down list or
click the [-]/[+] buttons to change values.
The area outside of the measurement range will be
shaded.
Items
Measurement Range
2 Specify the measurement range for both Point A
Point A
Point B
Rename Tool
1st Point
2-point Calibration
2nd Point
Before
Correction
After
Correction
4
Before
Correction
yyThe selection options for the measurement
range displayed on the drop-down list differ
depending on the sensor head used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
Measurement Range
„„
The measurement range is the height range to be used
to measure the measurement point. The center of the
measurement range is the measurement value on the
master.
For example, when the measurement value is 5.00
mm and the measurement range is ±1.00 mm, the
measurable range will be 4.00 to 6.00 mm.
Distance measured
As narrowing the measurement range also
narrows the scan range, processing time
decreases.
Measurement points
Measurement
range
Measurement
range
1 Click the [Measurement Range] button.
3 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
the step tool.
The Measurement Range Settings screen opens.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-35
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
After
Correction
3. Tool Settings
Rename Tool
„„
2-point Calibration
„„
If there is a difference in the measured value and the actual
dimensions of the target to be measured, this difference
can be corrected. Both the zero point and tilt are corrected.
1 Click the [Rename Tool] button.
Display Value
Correction
After correcting
second point
Before correcting
second point
4
After correcting
first point
Before correcting
first point
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The Input Tool Name screen opens.
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
Offset Value
Measurement Value
The range for adjustment of the tilt is 0.5 to 2.0
times the value before adjustment. Input values
within this range for before and after correction.
The tool name changes and the system returns to the
extended functions screen for the step tool.
1 Click the [2-point Calibration] button.
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name,
“ABC (Step)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
The 2-point Calibration Settings screen opens.
2 Select to enable or disable the function.
If you selected the [Disable] button, click the
[Close] button.
If you selected the [Enable] button, proceed with
the subsequent steps.
yyDefault value: Disable
4-36
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
3 Input before and after correction values for the
first point and second point.
5 Click the [OK] button.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
yyTo perform 2-point calibration again, click the
[Readjust] button.
Clicking the [OK] button on the screen that
opens enables you to continue to adjust from
the previous adjustment result.
yyTo initialize the 2-point calibration adjustment
values, click the [Reset] button.
Click [OK] on the Confirm Reset screen that
opens to initialize the adjustment values.
6 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
the step tool.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault value (before correcting the first and second
points): ---.-- mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the first point): 0.00 mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the second point): 1.00
mm
This example uses the setting of a 9 mm and 4 mm
height difference.
1 Click the [Test] button.
yyClicking the [Load Curr.Val] button inputs the
current value as the before correction value.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring
the settings. The measurement value being
detected can also be acquired as the current
value.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
The Test image opens.
4 Click the [Execute] button.
2 Move the target to measure the 9 mm height
difference and click the [Load Curr.Val] button.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-37
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Setting example for 2-point calibration
zz
4
3. Tool Settings
3 Input the desired measurement value for the first 7 Click the [OK] button.
point after adjustment.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
8 Click the [End Test] button.
4
4 Move the target to measure the 4 mm height
difference and click the [Load Curr.Val] button.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The display returns to the Master screen.
5 Input the desired measurement value for the
second point after adjustment.
6 Click the [Execute] button.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
4-38
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
4 Click the [Next] button.
Height Tool
Setting the height tool
Items
Measurement Position
Point Size
Shift Value
ZERO/Offset/
Limit Adjustment
HI
LO
The Height Tool Settings screen appears.
5 To adjust a set measurement point, click the
1 Add the height tool.
[Settings] button under [Measurement Position].
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-30)
The Measurement Point Settings screen appears.
After adjusting a measurement point, click the [Close]
button.
Click
A measurement point is created.
3 Adjust the position and size of the measurement
6 Set “ZERO/Offset/Limit Adjustment”.
point.
€
Value
€Shift
Point
Input ZERO/Offset target value that can be used to shift
the current measurement value to a desired value.
€
€Small
You can place points in narrow places.
€
button
€[ZERO/Offset]
€
(default)
€Normal
Click this button to offset the value so that the
measurement value matches the set target value.
Points are the standard size.
€
€Large
Places points in wide places. The measurement value
is more stable than [Small] or [Normal].
€
button.
€[Clear]
Click this button to display the Cancel ZERO/Offset
Confirmation screen. Clicking the [OK] button restores
the settings to the values before adjustment.
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-39
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
2 Click a feature to measure.
4
3. Tool Settings
7 Set a threshold value.
Extended functions for the height tool
Items
Measurement Range
Rename Tool
1st Point
2-point Calibration
4
2nd Point
€
€HI
Input the maximum threshold value.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
€
€LO
Before
Correction
After
Correction
Before
Correction
After
Correction
Measurement Range
„„
Input the minimum threshold value.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyThe default threshold value differs depending
on the sensor head that is used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
8 If needed, click the [Extended Functions] tab to
The measurement range is the height range to be used
to measure the measurement point. The center of the
measurement range is the measurement value on the
master.
For example, when the measurement value is 5.00
mm and the measurement range is ±1.00 mm, the
measurable range will be 4.00 to 6.00 mm.
Distance measured
set the extended functions.
Measurement points
Measurement
range
1 Click the [Measurement Range] button.
€
Range
€Measurement
Sets the range in which the measurement point can
be measured. Narrowing the range will shorten the
processing time.
“Measurement Range” (Page 4-40)
€
Tool
€Rename
Changes the tool name.
“Rename Tool” (Page 4-41)
The Measurement Range Settings screen opens.
€
Calibration
€2-point
Adjust the measurement value proportionally to the
adjustment ratio by setting two sets of adjustment points
and their measurement values after adjustment.
“2-point Calibration” (Page 4-42)
9 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
4-40
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
2 Specify the measurement range.
You can directly select values from the drop-down list or
click the [-]/[+] buttons to change values.
The area outside of the measurement range will be
shaded.
As narrowing the measurement range also
narrows the scan range, processing time
decreases.
1 Click the [Rename Tool] button.
4
The Input Tool Name screen appears.
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
The tool name changes and the system returns to the
extended functions screen for the height tool.
Measurement
range
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name,
“ABC (Height)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
3 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
the height tool.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-41
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
yyThe selection options for the measurement
range displayed on the drop-down list differ
depending on the sensor head used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
Rename Tool
„„
3. Tool Settings
2-point Calibration
„„
If there is a difference in the measured value and the actual
dimensions of the target to be measured, this difference
can be corrected. Both the zero point and tilt are corrected.
Display Value
3 Input before and after correction values for the
first point and second point.
Correction
After correcting
second point
Before correcting
second point
4
After correcting
first point
Before correcting
first point
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Offset Value
Measurement Value
The range for adjustment of the tilt is 0.5 to 2.0
times the value before adjustment. Input values
within this range for before and after correction.
Input values within this range for before and
after correction.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault value (before correcting the first and second
points): ---.-- mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the first point): 0.00 mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the second point): 1.00
mm
yyClicking the [Load Curr.Val] button inputs the
current value as the before correction value.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring
the settings. The measurement value being
detected can also be acquired as the current
value.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
1 Click the [2-point Calibration] button.
4 Click the [Execute] button.
The 2-point Calibration Settings screen opens.
2 Select to enable or disable the function.
If you selected the [Disable] button, click the
[Close] button.
If you selected the [Enable] button, proceed with
the subsequent steps.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
yyDefault value: Disable
4-42
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
5 Click the [OK] button.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
yyTo perform 2-point calibration again, click the
[Readjust] button.
Clicking the [OK] button on the screen that
appears enables you to continue to adjust
from the previous adjustment result.
yyTo initialize the 2-point calibration adjustment
values, click the [Reset] button.
Click [OK] on the Confirm Reset screen that
appears to initialize the adjustment values.
Setting example (1) for 2-point calibration
zz
This example uses a reference surface of 0.00 mm and
a target with a measurement point height of 9.00 mm.
1 Click the [Test] button.
6 Click the [Close] button.
4
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
the height tool.
2 Move the target so that the measurement point
indicates the reference surface and click the
[Load Curr.Val] button.
3 Input the desired measurement value for the first
point after adjustment.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-43
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The Test image opens.
3. Tool Settings
4 Return the target to its original position and click 8 Click the [End Test] button.
the [Load Curr.Val] button.
4
The display returns to the Master screen.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
5 Input the desired measurement value for the
second point after adjustment.
Setting example (2) for 2-point calibration
zz
This example measures a 7.00 mm and 9.00 mm
targets with measurement points.
1 Click the [Test] button.
6 Click the [Execute] button.
The Test image opens.
2 Move the target so that the measurement point
indicates the position of the 7.00 mm height and
click the [Load Curr.Val] button.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
7 Click the [OK] button.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
4-44
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
3 Input the desired measurement value for the first 7 Click the [OK] button.
point after adjustment.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
8 Click the [End Test] button.
4
4 Move the target so that the measurement point
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
indicates the position of the 9.00 mm height and
click the [Load Curr.Val] button.
The display returns to the Master screen.
5 Input the desired measurement value for the
second point after adjustment.
6 Click the [Execute] button.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-45
3. Tool Settings
3 Edit the position, size, and angle of the tool
Average Height Tool
window in accordance with the target.
The height of the area framed by the tool window is
detected.
The detected range of the height is displayed in green.
Setting the Average Height Tool
Items
Measurement
Position
4
Edit Inspection
Window
Window Shape
Measurement
Area Settings
Average area
If you cannot specify the measurement target
as an area, perform the following.
yySize adjustment of the tool window
Matching the size of the tool window to the
measurement target helps you specify the
area more easily.
yySensitivity adjustment
“Sensitivity Adjustment” (Page 4-51)
Mask
Detection method
Reference Height Settings
Shift Value
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
ZERO/Offset/Limit
Adjustment
If you select [Rect], the tool window angle can
be reset by the [Angle Reset] button.
HI
LO
1 Add the average height tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-30)
2 Select the shape of the tool window used to
detect the target.
Tool window
4 If necessary, set a mask.
“Mask” (Page 4-50)
5 Click the [Next] button.
€
(default)
€Rect
The shape of the tool window will be a rectangle.
€
€Circle
The shape of the tool window will be a circle.
The settings screen for the measuring area opens.
4-46
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
6 Select the average size.
The average size is the size of the range that is the
average of the measurement values.
9 Click the [Next] button.
The Reference Height Settings screen appears.
€
€Small
4
10 Select the base point (point B).
€
(default)
€Normal
This setting averages the range of middle sizes.
€
€Large
This setting averages a greater range than [Normal].
Processing time is shorter.
7 Select the detection method.
€
€OFF
Reference Height Settings will not be performed.
€
in the tool
€Specify
Specify the base point from within the window of the
average height tool being set.
Setting can be made in the same manner as setting the
detection method in the measurement area setting.
“7 Select the detection method.” (Page 4-47)
€
Area
€Selected
When the tool window includes multiple specifiable
areas, click the [Higher] or [Lower] button or click on the
captured image to make a selection.
€
€MAX
When the tool window includes multiple areas, select
the area whose height is the highest.
€
€MIN
When the tool window includes multiple areas, select
the area whose height is the lowest.
8 Adjust the sensitivity of detecting the average
height as needed.
If you cannot specify the measurement target as an
area, perform the following.
“Sensitivity Adjustment” (Page 4-51)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-47
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The target is measured in detail. The processing time is
longer.
3. Tool Settings
€
another tool
€Use
Specify a pre-configured tool as the base point.
Select any of the following tools.
yyHeight Tool
yyAverage Height Tool
yyMAX/MIN Tool
yyOther tools specified as the base point
(point B) should be pre-configured.
yyTo specify the average height tool as the
base point of another tool (point B), set
the reference height settings to OFF in the
average height tool setting. Average height
tools where the reference height settings
are set are not displayed as options.
4
adjust a tool window that has already been
12 To
set, click the [Edit Window] button.
The edit screen of the tool window opens.
After editing a measurement point, click the [Close]
button.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
adjust a measurement area that has already
13 To
been set, tap the [Measurement Area Settings]
button.
The edit screen of the tool window opens.
After editing a measurement point, click the [Close]
button.
11 Click the [Next] button.
change reference height settings that have
14 To
already been set, click the [Reference Height
Settings] button.
The settings screen for the tool opens.
The edit screen of the reference height settings opens.
After changing step settings, click the [Close] button.
4-48
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
15 Set the ZERO/Offset adjustment.
yyThe default threshold value differs depending
on the sensor head that is used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
click the [Extended Functions] tab to
17 Ifsetneeded,
the extended functions.
4
€
Value
€Shift
€
button
€[ZERO/Offset]
Click this button to offset the value so that the
measurement value matches the set target value.
€
button
€[Clear]
Click this button to display the Cancel ZERO/Offset
Confirmation screen. Clicking the [OK] button restores
the settings to the values before adjustment.
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
16 Set a threshold value.
€
Range
€Measurement
Set the range of height to measure. Narrowing the
range will shorten the processing time.
“Measurement Range” (Page 4-52)
€
Name
€Tool
Changes the tool name.
“Tool Name” (Page 4-53)
€
Calibration
€2-point
Adjust the measurement value proportionally to the
adjustment ratio by setting two sets of adjustment points
and their measurement values after adjustment.
“2-point Calibration” (Page 4-53)
18 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
€
€HI
Input the maximum threshold value.
€
€LO
Input the minimum threshold value.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-49
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Input ZERO/Offset target value that can be used to shift
the current measurement value to a desired value.
3. Tool Settings
Mask
„„
The masked region is excluded from the average height
extraction target.
4 Edit the position, size, and angle of the mask.
1 Click the [Mask] button.
Mask
4
5 Click the [Close] button.
The mask is added and the display returns to the Mask
Settings screen.
The Mask Settings screen opens.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
6 Click the [Cut Mask] button to cut part of the
2 Click the [Add Mask] button.
€
button
€[Undo]
mask.
Click this button to restore any changed mask values.
€
button
€[Clear]
Clicking this button resets the mask.
The Add Mask screen opens.
3 Select the mask shape.
€
button
€[Undo]
Click this button to restore any changed mask values.
€
button
€[Clear]
Clicking this button resets the mask.
The screen to add the Cut Mask window appears.
7 Operate the Cut Mask window the same as
adding and then click the [Close] button.
Part of the mask is cut and the display returns to the
Mask Settings screen.
8 Repeat the above steps as needed to set the
mask region.
9 Click the [Close] button.
€
€Rect
The display returns to the edit screen of the tool
window.
The shape of the mask will be a rectangle.
€
€Circle
The shape of the mask will be a circle.
4-50
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Sensitivity Adjustment
„„
1 Click the [Sensitivity Adj.] button.
2 Adjust the sensitivity of detecting the average
height.
The vertical and horizontal axes represent the height
and area, respectively.
3 Click the [Close] button.
“Editing Values” (Page 3-20)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-51
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
yyClicking the [Live View] button enables you to
change settings while looking at the current
detection status.
Click the [End Live View] button to return to
the original screen.
yyWith the selection method set to [Selected
Area], click any of the following to select an
area.
yy[Higher]/[Lower] button
yyColored area on the image
yyPeak on the graph
yyOn the LIVE screen, the position adjustment/
1-axis /2-axis adjustment tools do not operate.
yyEach color on the graph represents candidate
average height.
yyThe peak in green indicated with ◄ on the
graph is the area currently selected.
yyThe colored area on the captured image
corresponds to the color of the peak in the
graph.
yyThe horizontal line on the scroll bar represents
the position of the peak.
3. Tool Settings
Extended Functions of the Average Height
Tool
Items
2 Specify the measurement range.
You can directly select values from the drop-down list or
click the [-]/[+] buttons to change values.
The area outside of the measurement range will be
shaded.
Measurement Range
Tool Name
1st Point
2-point Calibration
2nd Point
4
Before Corr.
After Corr.
Before Corr.
After Corr.
Measurement Range
„„
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The selection options for the measurement
range displayed on the drop-down list differ
depending on the sensor head used.
The measurement range is the height range to be used
to measure the tool window. The measurable range is the
measurement area specified by the master ± measurement
range.
As narrowing the measurement range also
narrows the scan range, processing time
decreases.
1 Click the [Measurement Range] button.
Measurement
range
3 Click the [Close] button.
The Measurement Range Settings screen opens.
4-52
The system returns to the extended functions screen of
the tool.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Tool Name
„„
2-point Calibration
„„
If there is a difference in the measured value and the actual
dimensions of the target to be measured, this difference
can be corrected. Both the zero point and tilt are corrected.
1 Click the [Tool Name] button.
Display Value
Correction
After correcting
second point
Before correcting
second point
After correcting first
point
Before correcting
first point
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
Offset Value
Measurement Value
The range for adjustment of the tilt is 0.5 to 2.0
times the value before adjustment. Input values
within this range for before and after correction.
The tool name is changed and the system returns to the
extended functions screen of the tool.
1 Click the [2-point Calibration] button.
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name,
“ABC (Average Height)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
The 2-point Calibration Settings screen opens.
2 Select to enable or disable the function.
If you selected the [Disable] button, click the
[Close] button.
If you selected the [Enable] button, proceed with
the subsequent steps.
yyDefault value: Disable
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-53
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The tool name input screen opens.
4
3. Tool Settings
3 Input before and after correction values for the
first point and second point.
5 Click the [OK] button.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
yyTo perform 2-point calibration again, click the
[Readjust] button.
Clicking the [OK] button on the screen that
opens enables you to continue to adjust from
the previous adjustment result.
yyTo initialize the 2-point calibration adjustment
values, click the [Reset] button.
Click [OK] on the Confirm Reset screen that
opens to initialize the adjustment values.
6 Click the [Close] button.
4
The system returns to the extended functions screen of
the tool.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault value (before correcting the first and second
points): ---.-- mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the first point): 0.00 mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the second point): 1.00
mm
yyClicking the [Load Curr.Val] button inputs the
current value as the before correction value.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring
the settings. The measurement value being
detected can also be acquired as the current
value.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
4 Click the [Execute] button.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
4-54
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
4 Select the area of the image to search for the
Position Adjustment Tool
target.
Setting the position adjustment tool
Items
Edit Inspection Window
Fine Tune Outline
Window Shape
Search region
Sensitivity
Eraser Width
Limit Adjustment
4
€
(default)
€Entire
All of the displayed image will be searched.
€
€Partial
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-30)
The Position Adjustment Tool Settings screen opens.
Edit the position and size of the search area.
2 Select the shape of the tool window to detect the
target.
Search region
Decreasing the search region decreases the
position adjustment processing time.
€
(default)
€Rect
The shape of the tool window will be a rectangle.
5 Select a sensitivity to extract the outline of the
target.
€
€Circle
The shape of the tool window will be a circle.
3 Edit the position, size, and angle of the tool
window in accordance with the target.
The outline in the area enclosed in the tool window will
be extracted.
The extracted outline is displayed in green.
€
€High
Extracts an outline of the image with low contrast. This
setting is used when the outline that you want to detect
cannot be extracted.
€
(default)
€Middle
Tool window
Extracts the standard outline.
€
€Low
Reduces the extracted volume of an outline. You can
reduce the extracted volume of an outline that is not
necessary to detect.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-55
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
1 Add the position adjustment tool.
3. Tool Settings
6 Click the [Remove Outline] button.
The specified outline is erased.
The erased outline is displayed in yellow.
8 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the Position Adjustment Tool
Settings screen.
9 Set a threshold value.
4
The Remove Outline Settings screen opens.
7 Remove an extracted outline that is not relevant
to judgment by dragging the mouse.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
yySetting range: 0 to 100
yyDefault value: 70
You can set the threshold value by moving the
slider.
click the [Extended Functions] tab to
10 Ifsetneeded,
the extended functions.
€
button
€[Undo]
Click this button to restore one erased outline. You can
perform this operation up to five times.
€
button
€[Redo]
Click this button to redo one [Undo] operation. You can
perform this operation up to five times.
€
button.
€[Clear]
€
Range
€Rotation
Clicking this button resets erased outlines.
€
€Sensitivity
High
Extracts an outline of the image with low
contrast. This setting is used when the
outline that you want to detect cannot be
extracted.
Middle
(Default)
Extracts the standard outline.
Low
Reduces the extracted volume of an outline.
You can reduce the extracted volume of an
outline that is not necessary to detect.
Sets the rotation range when searching for the outline
of the target.
“Extended functions for the position adjustment tool”
(Page 4-57)
11 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
€
€Size
Selects the width of the pen when removing an
unnecessary outline.
Click the [-]/[+] buttons or move the slider to select the
thickness.
4-56
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
2 Specify the margin setting.
Extended functions for the position
adjustment tool
Items
Rotation Range
Rotation Range
Margin
Search Algorithm
Rotation Range
„„
1 Sets the rotation range when searching for the
4
outline of the target.
€
(default)
€ON
Searches in a range wider than the set rotation range
when searching for the outline of the target.
€
€OFF
Only searches in the set rotation range when searching
for the outline of the target.
Search Algorithm
„„
1 Select the type (High Accuracy/High Speed) for
the search algorithm of the position adjustment
window.
yySetting range: ±0 to 180°
yyDefault: ±20°
yyNarrowing the rotation range can shorten the
processing time.
yyBy limiting the rotation range, this setting can
be used to judge the direction of the target.
yyWhen the position of the tool window after
position adjustment is unstable due to
misalignment of the position of the target,
select [High Accuracy].
yyIf detection is unstable because the
difference of the matching rate is small
between the “OK” image and “NG” image,
select [High Accuracy].
yyIf detection is unstable due to the
influence of unnecessary outline such as a
background, select [High Accuracy].
yyTo shorten the processing time, select [High
Speed].
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-57
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The system judges NG if the tilted target exceeds the
set rotation range even if the outline is the same as
what was specified in the registered master image.
3. Tool Settings
3 Edit the position, size, and angle of the tool
MAX/MIN Tool
window in accordance with the target.
The minimum/maximum height in the area enclosed in
the tool window will be measured.
Setting the MAX/MIN tool
Items
Measurement
Position
Edit Inspection
Window
Window Shape
Mask
Measurement Method
Averaging area
4
Shift Value
ZERO/Offset/
Limit Adjustment
HI
Tool window
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
LO
If you select [Rect], the tool window angle can
be reset by the [Angle Reset] button.
1 Add the MAX/MIN tool.
4 Select the measurement method.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-30)
2 Select the shape of the tool window to measure
the minimum/maximum height.
€
(default)
€MAX
€
€Rect
The shape of the tool window will be a rectangle.
€
€Circle
The shape of the tool window will be a circle.
Measures the maximum height of the target.
€
€MIN
Measures the minimum height of the target.
A circle is displayed on the place applicable to the
selected measurement method.
The default tool name changes depending on
the selected measurement method.
5 If necessary, set a mask.
“Mask” (Page 4-60)
4-58
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
6 Click the [Next] button.
9 Set “ZERO/Offset/Limit Adjustment”.
The MAX/MIN Tool Settings screen opens.
7 To edit a set tool window, click the [Settings]
button under “Measurement Position”.
€
Value
€Shift
€
button
€[ZERO/Offset]
Click this button to offset the value so that the
measurement value matches the set target value.
€
button.
€[Clear]
Click this button to display the Cancel ZERO/Offset
Confirmation screen. Clicking the [OK] button restores
the settings to the values before adjustment.
The Measurement position settings screen opens.
After editing a measurement point, click the [Close]
button.
8 Select the average size.
The average size is the size of the range that is the
average of the measurement values.
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
€
€Small
The target is measured in detail. The processing time is
longer.
€
€Normal
This setting averages the range of middle sizes.
€
(default)
€Large
This setting averages a greater range than [Small].
Processing time is shorter.
Shapes smaller than the displayed circle are a
value that is the average of the circumference.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-59
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Input ZERO/Offset target value that can be used to shift
the current measurement value to a desired value.
3. Tool Settings
10 Set a threshold value.
Mask
„„
The masked region is excluded from the minimum/
maximum height measurement target.
1 Click the [Mask] button.
4
€
€HI
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Input the maximum threshold value.
€
€LO
Input the minimum threshold value.
The Mask Settings screen opens.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyThe default threshold value differs depending
on the sensor head that is used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
2 Click the [Add Mask] button.
click the [Extended Functions] tab to
11 Ifsetneeded,
the extended functions.
€
button
€[Undo]
Click this button to restore any changed mask values.
€
button.
€[Clear]
Clicking this button resets the mask.
The Add Mask screen opens.
3 Select the mask shape.
€
Range
€Measurement
Sets the height range to be measured. Narrowing the
range will shorten the processing time.
“Measurement Range” (Page 4-62)
€
Tool
€Rename
Changes the tool name.
“Rename Tool” (Page 4-63)
€
Calibration
€2-point
Adjust the measurement value proportionally to the
adjustment ratio by setting two sets of adjustment points
and their measurement values after adjustment.
“2-point Calibration” (Page 4-63)
12 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
4-60
€
€Rect
The shape of the mask will be a rectangle.
€
€Circle
The shape of the mask will be a circle.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
4 Edit the position, size, and angle of the mask.
8 Edit the position, size, and angle of the shape to
be removed from the mask.
Mask
Mask
5 Click the [Close] button.
The mask is added and the display returns to the Mask
Settings screen.
mask.
Part of the mask is cut and the display returns to the
Mask Settings screen.
the above steps as needed to set the
10 Repeat
mask region.
11 Click the [Close] button.
Returns to the Measurement position settings screen.
€
button
€[Undo]
Click this button to restore any changed mask values.
€
button.
€[Clear]
Clicking this button resets the mask.
The Add Mask screen appears.
7 Select the shape to cut from the mask.
€
€Rect
The shape of the mask will be a rectangle.
€
€Circle
The shape of the mask will be a circle.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-61
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
6 Click the [Cut Mask] button to cut part of the
9 Click the [Close] button.
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions for the MAX/MIN tool
Items
Measurement Range
Upper Limit
2 Specify the measurement range.
You can directly select values from the drop-down list or
click the [-]/[+] buttons to change values.
The area outside of the measurement range will be
shaded.
Lower Limit
Rename Tool
1st Point
4
2-point Calibration
2nd Point
Before
Correction
After
Correction
Before
Correction
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
After
Correction
yyThe selection options for the measurement
range displayed on the drop-down list differ
depending on the sensor head used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
Measurement Range
„„
The measurement range is the height range to be used to
measure the tool window. The center of the measurement
range is the measurement value on the master.
The measurement value of the MAX/MIN tool is the MAX or
MIN value measured in the tool window.
For example, when the measurement value is 5.00
mm and the measurement range is ±1.00 mm, the
measurable range will be 4.00 to 6.00 mm.
Distance measured
As narrowing the measurement range also
narrows the scan range, processing time
decreases.
MAX or MIN value in tool window
Measurement
range
1 Click the [Measurement Range] button.
Measurement
range
3 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
the MAX/MIN tool.
The Measurement Range Settings screen opens.
4-62
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Rename Tool
„„
2-point Calibration
„„
If there is a difference in the measured value and the actual
dimensions of the target to be measured, this difference
can be corrected. Both the zero point and tilt are corrected.
1 Click the [Rename Tool] button.
Display Value
Correction
After correcting
second point
Before correcting
second point
After correcting
first point
Before correcting
first point
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
Offset Value
Measurement Value
The range for adjustment of the tilt is 0.5 to 2.0
times the value before adjustment. Input values
within this range for before and after correction.
The tool name changes and the system returns to the
extended functions screen for the MAX/MIN tool.
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name
when selecting MAX at measurement
method,
“ABC (MAX)” is displayed.
e.g.: ‌When “DEF” is input for the tool name
when selecting MIN at measurement
method,
“DEF (MIN)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
1 Click the [2-point Calibration] button.
The 2-point Calibration Settings screen opens.
2 Select to enable or disable the function.
If you selected the [Disable] button, click the
[Close] button.
If you selected the [Enable] button, proceed with
the subsequent steps.
yyDefault value: Disable
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-63
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The Input Tool Name screen opens.
4
3. Tool Settings
3 Input before and after correction values for the
first point and second point.
5 Click the [OK] button.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
yyTo perform 2-point calibration again, click the
[Readjust] button.
Clicking the [OK] button on the screen that
appears enables you to continue to adjust
from the previous adjustment result.
yyTo initialize the 2-point calibration adjustment
values, click the [Reset] button.
Click [OK] on the Confirm Reset screen that
appears to initialize the adjustment values.
6 Click the [Close] button.
4
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
the MAX/MIN tool.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Setting example for 2-point calibration
zz
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault value (before correcting the first and second
points): ---.-- mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the first point): 0.00 mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the second point): 1.00
mm
yyClicking the [Load Curr.Val] button inputs the
current value as the before correction value.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring
the settings. The measurement value being
detected can also be acquired as the current
value.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
4 Click the [Execute] button.
This example measures a 7.00 mm and 9.00 mm
targets with measurement points.
1 Click the [Test] button.
The Test image opens.
2 Move the target so that the measurement point
indicates the position of the 7.00 mm height and
click the [Load Curr.Val] button.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
4-64
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
3 Input the desired measurement value for the first 7 Click the [OK] button.
point after adjustment.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
8 Click the [End Test] button.
4
4 Return the target to its original position and click
the [Load Curr.Val] button.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The display returns to the Master screen.
5 Input the desired measurement value for the
second point after adjustment.
6 Click the [Execute] button.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-65
3. Tool Settings
3 Edit the position, size, and angle of the tool
Height Area Tool
window in accordance with the target.
The height area in the area enclosed in the tool window
will be extracted.
Setting the height area tool
Items
Edit Inspection
Window
Window Shape
Mask
Extract area
Height Extraction
Averaging area
Reference Height Settings
4
Limit
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Limit Adjustment
Tool window
If you select [Rect], the tool window angle can
be reset by the [Angle Reset] button.
Scale
Upper Limit
HI
4 If necessary, set a mask.
LO
“Mask” (Page 4-68)
1 Add the height area tool.
5 Click the [Settings] button.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-30)
The Height Area Tool Settings screen appears.
2 Select a tool window shape to extract the height
area.
The screen to extract the height area appears.
6 Click on the target to extract the height area.
Areas with the same height as the clicked place will be
extracted.
€
€Rect
The shape of the tool window will be a rectangle.
€
€Circle
The shape of the tool window will be a circle.
Extraction area
You can click the [Live View] button to look at
the current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Live View] button returns to the
previous screen.
4-66
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
7 Adjust the height area extraction range.
Clicking an area that has not been extracted adds areas
with the same height to the extraction range.
10 Set a threshold value.
4
€
area
€Extract
[-] button
Clicking this button reduces the height area
extraction range.
[+] button
Clicking this button increases the height
area extraction range.
[Undo]
button
Click this button to restore any values
that you changed by clicking the [-] or [+]
buttons.
[Clear]
button
Clicking this button resets the height area
extraction range.
[Adv.
Settings]
button
Click this button to display the screen for
inputting numerical values to specify the
detection range.
“Direct input of the extraction range”
(Page 4-70)
If the height area of the target is larger than the height
area of the registered master image, set the maximum
threshold to perform anomaly detection.
“Upper Limit” (Page 4-70)
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
click the [Extended Functions] tab to
11 Ifsetneeded,
the extended functions.
€
area
€Averaging
The average size is the size of the range that is the
average of the measurement values.
Small
The target is measured in detail. The
processing time is longer.
Normal
This setting averages the range of middle
sizes.
Large
(default)
This setting averages a greater range than
[Normal]. Processing time is shorter.
8 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the Height Area Tool Settings
screen.
9 Adjust reference height settings as needed.
“Reference Height Settings” (Page 4-69)
€
Height Range
€Specify
Sets the range of the heights to extract for the height
area as a numerical value.
“Specify Height Range” (Page 4-71)
€
Reference Area
€Fixed
Select the amount of area required for the matching
rate to become 100.
“Fixed Reference Area” (Page 4-72)
€
Tool
€Rename
Changes the tool name.
“Rename Tool” (Page 4-72)
12 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-67
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
yySetting range: 0 to 100
yyDefault value: 70
3. Tool Settings
Mask
„„
The masked region is excluded from the height area
extraction target.
4 Edit the position, size, and angle of the mask.
This is an example in which the height area that you
want to measure is secured with a screw. As the
screw affects the measurement, mask the area to
exclude it from height measurement.
1 Click the [Mask] button.
Mask
5 Click the [Close] button.
4
The mask is added and the display returns to the Mask
Settings screen.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
6 Click the [Cut Mask] button to cut part of the
mask.
The Mask Settings screen opens.
2 Click the [Add Mask] button.
7 Continue to adjust the mask until the desired
area is masked and then click the [Close] button.
€
button
€[Undo]
Part of the mask is cut and the display returns to the
Mask Settings screen.
Click this button to restore any changed mask values.
€
button.
€[Clear]
Clicking this button resets the mask.
The Add Mask screen opens.
3 Select the mask shape.
8 Repeat the above steps as needed to set the
mask region.
9 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the Height Area Tool Settings
screen.
€
€Rect
The shape of the mask will be a rectangle.
€
€Circle
The shape of the mask will be a circle.
4-68
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Reference Height Settings
„„
€
another tool
€Use
With the reference height settings the height area is
extracted in relation to the height from the specified
location. If the overall height of the target changes, making
reference height settings for the target enables stable
detection.
Specify the base point from another tool.
Select any of the following tools.
yyHeight Tool
yyAverage Height Tool
yyMAX/MIN Tool
1 Click the [Reference Height Settings] button.
yyOther tools specified as the base point
(point B) should be pre-configured.
yyTo specify the average height tool as the
base point (point B), set the reference
height settings to OFF in the average
height setting. Average height tools where
the reference height settings are set are
not displayed as options.
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
2 Select the base point (point B).
€
€OFF
Select this option when not to specify the base point.
3 Click the [Close] button.
The system returns to the setting screen of the tool.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-69
3. Tool Settings
Direct input of the extraction range
„„
1 Click the [Adv. Settings] button.
4
Upper Limit
„„
1 This setting will change the upper limit of the
tool threshold when the check box is selected.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
2 Check the height of the position to which you
have dragged the pointer.
yyDefault: OFF
2 Select the setting scale.
Pointer
yyThe height cannot be checked in the following
locations.
yyOutside the tool window
yyMasked range
yyClicking the [Live View] button enables you to
change settings while looking at the current
detection status.
Click the [End Live View] button to return to
the original screen.
3 Edit the upper limit and lower limit of the
extraction range.
€
(default)
€0-200
Sets the upper and the lower limit of a threshold in a
range within 0 to 200.
€
€0-999
Sets the upper and the lower limit of a threshold in a
range within 0 to 999.
4 Click the [Close] button.
The system returns to the screen for extracting the
height area.
4-70
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
3 Set a threshold value.
Extended functions for the height area tool
Items
Specify Height Range
Upper Limit
Lower Limit
Fixed Reference Area
Rename Tool
Specify Height Range
„„
1 Click the [Specify Height Range] button.
4
Input the maximum threshold value.
€
€LO
Input the minimum threshold value.
yySetting range: 0 to 999
You can set the threshold value by moving the
slider.
The Advanced Height Extraction Settings screen opens.
2 Set the upper and lower limit of the range as a
number for the height area extraction.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
You can click the [Live View] button to look at
the current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Live View] button returns to the
previous screen.
3 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
the height area tool.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-71
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
€
€HI
3. Tool Settings
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Fixed Reference Area
„„
Rename Tool
„„
1 Click the [Fixed Reference Area] button.
1 Click the [Rename Tool] button.
The Fixed Reference Settings screen opens.
The Input Tool Name screen opens.
2 Select the reference area.
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
The tool name changes and the system returns to the
extended functions screen for the height area tool.
€
(default)
€Disable
Sets the area manually extracted from the master
image as the reference value for the tool.
€
Large
€Enable:
Sets the reference value for the tool as 1/10th (10%) of
the total sensor field of view.
€
Small
€Enable:
Sets the reference value for the tool as 1/100th (1%) of
the total sensor field of view.
If the height judged as good does not exist or
cannot be extracted from the registered master
image, select [Enable: Large] or [Enable: Small].
3 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
the height area tool.
4-72
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name,
“ABC (Height Area)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
3. Tool Settings
3 When there are multiple pins to measure, click
Pin Height Tool
the [Add] button and then repeat the tool window
setting operation.
Setting the Pin Height Tool
Items
Measurement Position
Edit Inspection Window
Reference Height Settings
Shift Value
ZERO/Offset/
Limit Adjustment
HI
LO
1 Add the pin height tool.
Clicking the [Delete] button deletes the selected
tool window.
4 Click the [Next] button.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-30)
The settings screen for the tool opens.
2 Click the measurement point and edit the
position and size of the tool window.
The angle cannot be edited.
The pin height is detected within the area framed by the
tool window.
The detected range of the height is displayed in green.
The measurement result is displayed on the captured
image.
yyMatching the window size to the size of the
target stabilizes detection.
yyClick the button for moving the window to
make fine adjustment of the position of the tool
window.
The settings screen for the tool opens.
Tool window
Measurement result
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-73
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
yyWhen editing the size of one of the
tool windows, the size of the rest
of the windows are also changed in
synchronization.
yyUp to 16 tool windows can be set.
yyIf a tool window is added when ZERO/Offset
is running, the ZERO/Offset is cleared.
yyWhen any of the tool windows cannot be
measured, the measurement result will be
an alarm.
The pin height tool does not store the height
obtained when the master is registered in
nonvolatile memory. Therefore, to change some
settings of the function after performing any of
the following, re-register the master.
yyWhen the power is turned OFF or ON after
master registration
yyWhen the program is switched after master
registration
yyWhen the program settings are cancelled
without being saved after master registration
3. Tool Settings
5 To adjust a tool window that has already been
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
set, click the [Edit Window] button.
The tool window cannot be adjusted in the
cases below. To make adjustment, re-register
the master.
yyWhen the power is turned OFF or ON after
master registration
yyWhen the program is switched after master
registration
yyWhen the program settings are cancelled
without being saved after master
registration
8 Set a threshold value.
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
€
€HI
The edit screen of the tool window opens.
After editing a measurement point, click the [Close]
button.
6 To set the base point, adjust reference height
Input the maximum threshold value.
€
€LO
Input the minimum threshold value.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
settings.
“Reference Height Settings” (Page 4-75)
7 Set the ZERO/Offset adjustment.
When any of the measurements of the set
tool windows falls outside the limit, the
status result will be NG.
yyThe default threshold value differs depending
on the sensor head that is used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
yyIf measurement is not possible (ALM) in any
of the set tool windows, the tool results turn to
ALM during operation and on the Test screen.
€
Value
€Shift
Input ZERO/Offset target value that can be used to shift
the current measurement value to a desired value.
€
button
€[ZERO/Offset]
Click this button to offset the value so that the
measurement values of all tool windows match the set
target value.
€
button
€[Clear]
Click this button to display the Cancel ZERO/Offset
Confirmation screen. Clicking the [OK] button restores
the settings to the values before adjustment.
4-74
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
9 If needed, click the [Extended Functions] tab to
set the extended functions.
€
Range
€Measurement
1 Click the [Reference Height Settings] button.
4
2 Make base point setting.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Set the range of height to measure. Narrowing the
range will shorten the processing time.
“Measurement Range” (Page 4-76)
Reference Height Settings
„„
€
Name
€Tool
Changes the tool name.
“Tool Name” (Page 4-77)
€
Advanced Settings
€Detection
Set the detection method and detection sensitivity.
“Detection Advanced Settings” (Page 4-78)
10 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
€
€OFF
Reference height settings will not be performed.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-75
3. Tool Settings
€
another tool
€Use
Specify a pre-configured tool as the base point.
Select any of the following tools.
yyHeight Tool
yyAverage Height Tool
yyMAX/MIN Tool
yyOther tools specified as the base point
(point B) should be pre-configured.
yyTo specify the average height tool as the
base point (point B), set the reference
height settings to OFF in the average
height settings. Average height tools where
reference height settings are made are not
displayed as options.
4
Extended Functions of the Pin Height Tool
Items
Measurement Range
Tool Name
Detection Advanced
Settings
Detection method
Sensitivity Adjustment
Measurement Range
„„
The measurement range is the height range to be used to
measure the tool window. The center of the measurement
range is the measurement value on the master.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
For example, when the measurement value is 5.00
mm and the measurement range is ±1.00 mm, the
measurable range will be 4.00 to 6.00 mm.
Measurement distance
Tool window
Measurement
range
1 Click the [Measurement Range] button.
3 Click the [Close] button.
The Measurement Range Settings screen opens.
4-76
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
2 Specify the measurement range.
You can directly select values from the drop-down list or
click the [-]/[+] buttons to change values.
The area outside of the measurement range will be
shaded.
As narrowing the measurement range also
narrows the scan range, processing time
decreases.
1 Click the [Tool Name] button.
4
The tool name input screen opens.
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
The tool name is changed and the system returns to the
extended functions screen of the tool.
Measurement
range
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name,
“ABC (Pin Height)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
3 Click the [Close] button.
The system returns to the extended functions screen of
the tool.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-77
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
yyThe selection options for the measurement
range displayed on the drop-down list differ
depending on the sensor head used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
Tool Name
„„
3. Tool Settings
Detection Advanced Settings
„„
Set the detection method and detection sensitivity of height.
3 Click the [Close] button.
The system returns to the extended functions screen of
the tool.
The settings cannot be changed in the cases
below. To change the settings, re-register the
master.
yyWhen the power is turned OFF or ON after
master registration
yyWhen the program is switched after master
registration
yyWhen the program settings are cancelled
without being saved after master registration
4
1 Click the [Detection Advanced Settings] button.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The screen for the detection advanced settings opens.
2 Select the detection method and detection
sensitivity.
€
method
€Detection
The pin height tool divides the measurement data in the
tool window into multiple areas.
Area Priority
(Default)
Detects the height of the largest area.
Height
Priority
Detects the height of the highest area.
€
Adjustment
€Sensitivity
The height detection sensitivity can be selected in five
levels.
4-78
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
3 Edit the position, size, and angle of the tool
Monochrome Area Tool
window in accordance with the target.
If you selected [Entire] as the window shape,
you can skip this step. The tool window will
be hidden.
Setting the monochrome area tool
Items
Edit Inspection
Window
Window Shape
Brightness
Extraction
Upper Limit
The monochrome area in the area enclosed in the tool
window will be extracted.
Mask
Lower Limit
Threshold
Threshold
Adjustment
4
Scale
HI
LO
Tool window
1 Add the monochrome area tool.
If you select [Rect], the tool window angle can
be reset by the [Angle Reset] button.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-30)
The Monochrome Area Tool Settings screen appears.
2 Select a tool window shape to extract the
monochrome area.
4 If necessary, set a mask.
“Mask” (Page 4-81)
5 Click the [Settings] button.
€
€Rect
The shape of the tool window will be a rectangle.
The screen to extract the monochrome area appears.
€
€Circle
The shape of the tool window will be a circle.
€
€Entire
The entire displayed image is subject to monochrome
area extraction.
If a position adjustment tool is set, [Entire]
cannot be selected.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-79
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Upper Limit
3. Tool Settings
6 Click a place on the target to extract the
monochrome area.
9 Set a threshold value.
Places with the same brightness as the clicked place
will be extracted.
4
Extraction area
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
You can click the [Live View] button to look at
the current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Live View] button returns to the
previous screen.
7 Adjust the monochrome area extraction range.
yySetting range: 0 to 100
yyDefault value: 70
If the monochrome area of the current target is larger
than the area of the registered master image, set the
maximum threshold to perform anomaly detection.
“Upper Limit” (Page 4-82)
Clicking a place that has not been extracted adds
places with the same brightness to the extraction range.
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
click the [Extended Functions] tab to
10 Ifsetneeded,
the extended functions.
€
€Upper
Input the maximum brightness for the tool’s range.
€
€Lower
Input the minimum brightness for the tool’s range.
€
button
€[Undo]
Click this button to restore any changed brightness
range values.
€
button.
€[Clear]
Clicking this button resets the monochrome area
extraction range.
You can set the threshold value by moving the
slider.
8 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the Monochrome Area Tool
Settings screen.
4-80
€
Brightness Extraction
€Advanced
Sets the range of brightness of the monochrome area
tool as a numerical value.
“Advanced Brightness Extraction” (Page 4-83)
€
Reference Area
€Fixed
Selects a reference for the matching rate to be 100%.
“Fixed Reference Area” (Page 4-83)
€
Tool
€Rename
Changes the tool name.
“Rename Tool” (Page 4-85)
11 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Mask
„„
The masked region is excluded from the monochrome area
extraction target.
4 Edit the position, size, and angle of the mask.
1 Click the [Mask] button.
Mask
5 Click the [Close] button.
The mask is added and the display returns to the Mask
Settings screen.
The Mask Settings screen opens.
€
button
€[Undo]
mask.
Click this button to restore any changed mask values.
€
button.
€[Clear]
Clicking this button resets the mask.
The Add Mask screen opens.
3
Select the mask shape.
€
€Rect
The shape of the mask will be a rectangle.
€
€Circle
The shape of the mask will be a circle.
€
button
€[Undo]
Click this button to restore any changed mask values.
€
button.
€[Clear]
Clicking this button resets the mask.
The Add Mask screen opens.
7 Select the shape to be removed from the mask.
€
€Rect
The shape of the mask will be a rectangle.
€
€Circle
The shape of the mask will be a circle.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-81
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
6 Click the [Cut Mask] button to cut part of the
2 Click the [Add Mask] button.
4
3. Tool Settings
8 Edit the position, size, and angle of the shape to
be removed from the mask.
4
2 Select the setting scale.
Mask
9 Click the [Close] button.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Part of the mask is cut and the display returns to the
Mask Settings screen.
the above steps as needed to set the
10 Repeat
mask region.
11 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the Monochrome Area Tool
Settings screen.
€
(default)
€0-200
Sets the upper and the lower limit of a threshold in a
range within 0 to 200.
€
€0-999
Sets the upper and the lower limit of a threshold in a
range within 0 to 999.
3 Set a threshold value.
Upper Limit
„„
1 Select or clear the [Upper Limit] check box. This
setting will change the upper limit of the tool
threshold when the check box is selected.
€
€HI
Input the maximum threshold value.
€
€LO
yyDefault: OFF
Input the minimum threshold value.
yySetting range: 0 to 999
You can set the threshold value by moving the
slider.
4-82
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions for the monochrome
area tool
Fixed Reference Area
„„
1 Click the [Fixed Reference Area] button.
Items
Advanced Brightness
Extraction
Upper Limit
Lower Limit
Fixed Reference Area
Rename Tool
Advanced Brightness Extraction
„„
4
1 Click the [Adv. Brightness Extraction] button.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The Fixed Reference Settings screen opens.
2 Select the reference area.
The Advanced Brightness Extraction Settings screen
opens.
2
Set the upper and lower limit of the range for the
monochrome area extraction.
€
(default)
€Disable
Sets the area manually extracted from the master
image as the reference value for the tool.
€
Large
€Enable:
Sets the reference value for the tool as 1/10th (10%) of
the total sensor field of view.
€
Small
€Enable:
Sets the reference value for the tool as 1/100th (1%) of
the total sensor field of view.
Select [Enable: Large] or [Enable: Small] if the
brightness judged as good does not exist or
cannot be extracted from the registered master
image.
3 Click the [Close] button.
yySetting range: 0 to 255
yyYou can set the extraction range by moving
the slider while checking the histogram.
yyYou can click the [Adjust on Live] button
to look at the current detection state while
configuring the settings.
Clicking the [Finish Live] button returns to the
previous screen.
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
the monochrome area tool.
3 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
the monochrome area tool.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-83
3. Tool Settings
Example of how the Fixed Reference Area is
zz
used
(2) Move the target to inside the tool window and
extract the target brightness.
Fixed Reference Area is used for judgments where the
inspection target is not detected or cannot be detected in
the master image, such as when examining installation
position misalignment. As tool windows are placed on
places that are NG in the master image, there is no
brightness that can be extracted. Use the Fixed Reference
Area to judge.
Example: Checking the part installation position
OK: Part is on the top left
NG: Part has shifted to the right
(3) Click the [End Live View] button.
4
3 On the Fixed Reference Area settings screen,
select [Enable: Large] or [Enable: Small].
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
1 Place a tool window on a location where the
target does not exist in the master image.
4 Switch the [Upper Limit] check box to ON and set
both [HI] and [LO] to [0].
2 Extract the target brightness.
(1) As the target is not inside the tool window,
brightness cannot be extracted. Tap the [Live View]
button.
Any extracted brightness in this tool window will be
judged as NG according to this setting.
4-84
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
5 The tool settings are now configured and
operation starts.
€ the result is OK
€If
As the brightness of the target is not extracted, the
result is OK.
1 Click the [Rename Tool] button.
4
The Input Tool Name screen appears.
As the brightness of the target is extracted, the result is
NG.
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
The tool name changes and the system returns to the
extended functions screen for the monochrome area
tool.
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name,
“ABC (Monochrome Area)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-85
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
€ the result is NG
€If
Rename Tool
„„
3. Tool Settings
Width Tool
5 Adjust the edge sensitivity as needed.
Setting the Width Tool
6 Set a threshold value.
“Edge Sensitivity Adjustment” (Page 4-88)
Items
Edit Inspection
Window
Window Shape
Mask
Edge Sensitivity Adj.
Limit
4
Limit Adjustment
Scale
Upper Limit
HI
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
LO
1 Add the width tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-30)
€
€Limit
The direction selection screen opens.
2 Select the direction in which the width is
measured and click the [OK] button.
HI
Input the maximum threshold value.
LO
Input the minimum threshold value.
€
€Scale
0-200
(Default)
Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
threshold in a range within 0 to 200.
0-999
Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
threshold in a range within 0 to 999.
€
Limit
€Upper
3 Edit the position, size, and angle of the tool
window in accordance with the target.
The edge is extracted from the area framed by the tool
window.
ON
(Default)
No
Uses the upper limit.
Does not use the upper limit.
Set this value when the width of the target is
not wider than that of the “OK” image.
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
Tool window
Click the [Angle Reset] button to reset the angle
of the tool window.
4 If necessary, set a mask.
“Mask” (Page 4-87)
4-86
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
7 If needed, click the [Extended Functions] tab to
set the extended functions.
Mask
„„
The masked region is excluded from the edge detection
target.
1 Click the [Mask] button.
€
Extraction Method
€Width
€
€Scaling
Set the scaling
“Scaling” (Page 4-90)
4
The Mask Settings screen opens.
2 Click the [Add Mask] button.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Select the method of extracting the width of the target
(Width Mode).
“Width Extraction Method” (Page 4-89)
€
Name
€Tool
Changes the tool name.
“Tool Name” (Page 4-91)
8 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
€
button
€[Clear]
Clicking this button resets the mask.
The Add Mask screen opens.
3 Edit the position and size of the mask.
Mask
Mask can be set for only one point.
4 Click the [Close] button.
The system returns to the setting screen of the tool.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-87
3. Tool Settings
Edge Sensitivity Adjustment
„„
1 Click the [Change] button.
4
The edge sensitivity adjustment screen opens.
2 Adjust the edge sensitivity.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Edge strength
graph
€
Sens. Auto Adj.] button
€[Edge
Click this button for the edge sensitivity to be
automatically adjusted.
€
€Sensitivity
Manually adjust the limit of the edge sensitivity while
looking at the edge strength graph.
yyWhen the maximum value (where the
contrasting density is greatest) is 100%, the
ratio of edge recognition is called the limit of
edge sensitivity.
yyThe limit of edge sensitivity can be adjusted
by dragging the red line on the edge strength
graph.
yyClicking the [Live View] button enables you
to make setting while looking at the current
detection status.
Click the [End Live View] button to return to
the original screen.
3 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the setting screen of the tool.
4-88
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Extended Functions of the Width Tool
yyTo extract width that is close to the width
of the registered master, select [Mas. Wid.].
Master image
Items
Movement in operation
Width Extraction Method
Scaling
Tool Name
Width to be measured
Width Extraction Method
„„
yyTo extract width by searching from the
outside of the tool window toward the
center, select [Outside].
1 Click the [Width Extraction Method] button.
4
2 Select the width extraction method.
Width to be measured
3 Click the [Close] button.
The system returns to the extended functions screen of
the tool.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-89
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Width to be measured
yyTo extract width by searching from the
center of the tool window toward outside,
select [Inside].
3. Tool Settings
Scaling
„„
When copying the scaling setting
zz
Select the source tool from which copying of the scaling
settings will be performed from the pull down menu of
“Copy Setting”, and click the [Copy] button.
1 Click the [Scaling] button.
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
2 Select [Enable] and set the scaling.
A confirmation screen appears.
Click the [OK] button.
The display of the [Display Range] is updated
with the value after scaling.
With the scaling set to [Enable], the display
range and the representation of the setting
scale (×2 or ×10) of the limit adjustment are
automatically adjusted.
When newly setting the scaling
zz
Enter a desired value for [Display Value].
A matching rate of 100 is scaled for the display value.
When the scaling value of the source tool
has been changed, copy again the scaling
setting.
3 Click the [OK] button.
A confirmation screen appears.
4 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the extended functions screen of
the tool.
4-90
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Tool Name
„„
1 Click the [Tool Name] button.
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The tool name input screen opens.
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
The tool name is changed and the system returns to the
extended functions screen of the tool.
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name,
“ABC (Width)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-91
3. Tool Settings
1-Axis Adjustment Tool
5 Adjust the edge sensitivity as needed.
Setting the 1-Axis Adjustment Tool
6 If needed, click the [Extended Functions] tab to
“Edge Sensitivity Adjustment” (Page 4-93)
set the extended functions.
Items
Edit Inspection Window
Edge Sensitivity Adj.
1 Add the 1-axis adjustment tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-30)
4
2 Select the detection direction and set the
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
position and size of the tool window according to
the target.
€
detection
€Edge
Select the contrast direction for detecting the edge of
the target.
“Edge Sensitivity Adjustment” (Page 4-93)
7 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
Tool window
3 Click the [Next] button.
4 To adjust a tool window that has already been
set, click the [Change] button under [Edit
Inspection Window].
The edit screen of the tool window opens.
Once editing is done, click the [OK] button.
4-92
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Edge Sensitivity Adjustment
„„
Extended Function of the 1-Axis Adjustment
Tool
1 Click the [Change] button.
Items
Edge Detection
Edge Detection
„„
1 Click the [Change] button.
4
The edge sensitivity adjustment screen opens.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
2 Adjust the edge sensitivity.
2 Select the width extraction method.
Edge strength graph
€
Sens. Auto Adj.] button
€[Edge
Click this button for the edge sensitivity to be
automatically adjusted.
€
€Sensitivity
Manually adjust the limit of the edge sensitivity while
looking at the edge strength graph.
yyWhen the maximum value (where the
contrasting density is greatest) is 100%, the
ratio of edge recognition is called the limit of
edge sensitivity.
yyThe limit of edge sensitivity can be adjusted
by dragging the red line on the edge strength
graph.
yyClicking the [Live View] button enables you
to adjust settings while looking at the current
detection status.
Click the [End Live View] button to return to
the original screen.
3 Click the [OK] button.
€
Dir. (default)
€Master
Detects the edge in the same contrast direction as that
of the master image.
€
€Both
Detects the edge in both Bright->Dark and Dark->Bright
directions.
€
€Bright->Dark
Detects the edge with bright part changing to dark part.
€
€Dark->Bright
Detects the edge with dark part changing to bright part.
3 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the extended functions screen of
the tool.
The system returns to the setting screen of the tool.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-93
3. Tool Settings
5 Click the [Next] button.
2-Axis Adjustment Tool
Setting the 2-Axis Adjustment Tool
Items
Edit Inspection Window
Edge Sensitivity Adj.
4
1
X-Axis
Y-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
6 To adjust a tool window that has already been
set, click the [X-Axis] or [Y-Axis] button for [Edit
Inspection Window].
Add the 2-axis adjustment tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-30)
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
2 Select the detection direction of the X-axis and
set the position and size of the tool window
according to the target.
The edit screen of the tool window opens.
Once editing is done, click the [OK] button.
7 Adjust the edge sensitivity as needed.
“Edge Sensitivity Adjustment” (Page 4-95)
Tool window
3 Click the [Next] button.
4 Select the detection direction of the Y-axis and
set the position and size of the tool window
according to the target.
Tool window
4-94
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
8 If needed, click the [Extended Functions] tab to
set the extended functions.
Edge Sensitivity Adjustment
„„
1 Click the [X-Axis] or [Y-Axis] button for [Edge
Sensitivity Adj.].
€
Detection
€Edge
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Select the contrast direction for detecting the edge of
the target.
“Edge Detection” (Page 4-96)
The edge sensitivity adjustment screen opens.
€
Correction
€Angle
Select whether to fit edge to the angle of the target.
“Angle Correction” (Page 4-96)
2 Adjust the edge sensitivity.
9 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
Edge strength
graph
€
Sens. Auto Adj.] button
€[Edge
Click this button for the edge sensitivity to be
automatically adjusted.
€
€Sensitivity
Manually adjust the limit of the edge sensitivity while
looking at the edge strength graph.
yyWhen the maximum value (where the
contrasting density is greatest) is 100%, the
ratio of edge recognition is called the limit of
edge sensitivity.
yyThe limit of edge sensitivity can be adjusted
by dragging the red line on the edge strength
graph.
yyClicking the [Live View] button enables you
to adjust settings while looking at the current
detection status.
Click the [End Live View] button to return to
the original screen.
3 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the setting screen of the tool.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-95
3. Tool Settings
Extended Function of the 2-Axis Adjustment
Tool
Angle Correction
„„
1 Select the angle settings.
Items
Edge Detection
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Angle Correction
Edge Detection
„„
4
1 Click the [X-Axis] or [Y-Axis] button.
€
(default)
€Enable
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Tilts the edge to detect in accordance with the angle of
the target.
€
€Disable
Does not tilt the edge detect in accordance with the
angle of the target.
2 Select the width extraction method.
€
Dir. (default)
€Master
Detects the edge in the same contrast direction as that
of the master image.
€
€Both
Detects the edge in both Bright->Dark and Dark->Bright
directions.
€
€Bright->Dark
Detects the edge with bright part changing to dark part.
€
€Dark->Bright
Detects the edge with dark part changing to bright part.
3 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the extended functions screen of
the tool.
4-96
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
2 Select the tool that is subject to step calculation.
Step Calculation Tool
Setting the step calculation tool
Items
Calculation target
A
B
Shift Value
ZERO/Offset/Limit
Adjustment
HI
LO
yyIf the expansion unit tool is used in
calculations, the calculation result is not
displayed on the Master screen. To configure
the settings while checking the calculation
results, switch to the Test screen.
yyIf both triggers are internal, the main unit
performs calculations using the latest
expansion unit judgment value.
1 Add the step calculation tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-30)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-97
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
yyAt least two of the following tools must be
added in advance to add the step calculation
tool:
yyHeight Tool
yyMAX/MIN Tool
yyAverage Height tool
yyThe following conditions must be met to
perform step calculation using an expansion
unit tool: A calculation error occurs if the
conditions are not met.
“Displaying the Limit Adjustment screen”
(Page 6-11)
yyThe sensor displayed on IX-Navigator must
be the main unit.
yyAn expansion unit must be connected when
the main unit is powered on.
yyThe expansion unit must be operating.
yyThe expansion unit must be in scan mode.
yyThe expansion unit tool must be the height
tool, MAX/MIN tool, or average height tool.
yyThe main unit and expansion unit trigger
condition must be one of the following:
• ‌Internal trigger for both the main unit and
expansion unit
• ‌External trigger and simultaneous trigger
input is enabled for both the main unit and
expansion unit.
yyTo specify the average height tool as the
calculation target, set the reference height
settings to OFF in the average height settings.
Average height tools where the reference
height settings are made are not displayed as
options.
yyIf only the main unit is used or setup is on
the expansion unit:
yyThe height tool, MAX/MIN tool, and
average height tool are displayed on the
drop-down list.
yyWhen setup is on the expansion unit, the
main unit tools will not be displayed on
the drop-down list.
yyIf setup is on the main unit that the
expansion unit is connected to:
yyThe expansion unit's tools are displayed
below the main unit's tools on the dropdown list.
yyThe expansion unit tools will only be
displayed as a tool number. The tool
name will not be displayed.
yyWhen the average height tool is set as
point B, the selected area in the average
height tool is filled in orange.
3. Tool Settings
3 Set “ZERO/Offset/Limit Adjustment”.
4
4 Set a threshold value.
€
€HI
€
Value
€Shift
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Input ZERO/Offset target value that can be used to shift
the current measurement value to a desired value.
€
button
€[ZERO/Offset]
Click this button to offset the value so that the
measurement value matches the set target value.
Input the maximum threshold value.
€
€LO
Input the minimum threshold value.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
€
button.
€[Clear]
Click this button to display the Cancel ZERO/Offset
Confirmation screen. Clicking the [OK] button restores
the settings to the values before adjustment.
ZERO/Offset adjustment will be performed
on the calculation results. Even if ZERO/
Offset is performed by the calculation target
tool separately, the calculation result of the
step calculation tool will not change.
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
yyIf the expansion unit tool is selected for step
calculation and the external trigger is set
with simultaneous trigger input from main/
expansion units disabled, a screen will open
prompting you to enable simultaneous trigger
input.
yyIf the expansion unit tool is selected for step
calculation and the expansion unit is not
operating, a screen will open prompting you to
put the expansion unit into run mode.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
4-98
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
yyThe default threshold value differs depending
on the sensor head that is used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
yyIf the expansion unit tool is selected for
step calculation and the external trigger
is set with simultaneous trigger input from
main/expansion units disabled, a screen
will appear prompting you to enable
simultaneous trigger input.
yyIf the expansion unit tool is selected for step
calculation and the expansion unit is not
operating, a screen will appear prompting
you to put the expansion unit into run mode.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
3. Tool Settings
5 If needed, click the [Extended Functions] tab to
set the extended functions.
Extended functions for the step calculation
tool
Items
Rename Tool
1st Point
2-point calibration
€
Tool
€Rename
2nd Point
Changes the tool name.
“Rename Tool” (Page 4-99)
Adjust the measurement value proportionally to the
adjustment ratio by setting two sets of adjustment points
and their measurement values after adjustment.
“2-point Calibration” (Page 4-100)
After
Correction
Before
Correction
After
Correction
Rename Tool
„„
1 Click the [Rename Tool] button.
6 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
The Input Tool Name screen opens.
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
The tool name changes and the system returns to the
extended functions screen for the step calculation tool.
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name,
“ABC (Calculate Step)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
€
Calibration
€2-point
Before
Correction
4-99
3. Tool Settings
2-point Calibration
„„
If there is a difference in the measured value and the actual
dimensions of the target to be measured, this difference
can be corrected. Both the zero point and tilt are corrected.
Display Value
3 Input before and after correction values for the
first point and second point.
Correction
After correcting
second point
Before correcting
second point
4
After correcting
first point
Before correcting
first point
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Offset Value
Measurement Value
The range for adjustment of the tilt is 0.5 to 2.0
times the value before adjustment. Input values
within this range for before and after correction.
1 Click the [2-point Calibration] button.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault value (before correcting the first and second
points): ---.-- mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the first point): 0.00 mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the second point): 1.00
mm
yyClicking the [Load Curr.Val] button inputs the
current value as the before correction value.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring
the settings. The measurement value being
detected can also be acquired as the current
value.
yyIf the expansion unit tool is selected for
step calculation and the external trigger
is set with simultaneous trigger input from
main/expansion units disabled, a screen
will appear prompting you to enable
simultaneous trigger input.
yyIf the expansion unit tool is selected for step
calculation and the expansion unit is not
operating, a screen will appear prompting
you to put the expansion unit into run mode.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
The 2-point Calibration Settings screen opens.
2 Select to enable or disable the function.
If you selected the [Disable] button, click the
[Close] button.
If you selected the [Enable] button, proceed with
the subsequent steps.
4 Click the [Execute] button.
yyDefault value: Disable
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
4-100
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
5 Click the [OK] button.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
3 Input the desired measurement value for the first
point after adjustment.
2-point calibration will be performed on the
calculation results. Even if 2-point calibration
is performed by the calculation target tool
separately, the calculation result of the step
calculation tool will not change.
4 Return the target to its original position and click
the [Load Curr.Val] button.
6 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
the step calculation tool.
Setting example for 2-point calibration
zz
This example uses a target with a Point A height of 7.00
mm and a Point B height of 5.00 mm.
1 Click the [Test] button.
5 Input the desired measurement value for the
second point after adjustment.
The Test image opens.
2 Move the target to measure a height difference
that differs to the settings and click the [Load
Curr.Val] button.
6 Click the [Execute] button.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-101
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
yyTo perform 2-point calibration again, click the
[Readjust] button.
Clicking the [OK] button on the screen that
appears enables you to continue to adjust
from the previous adjustment result.
yyTo initialize the 2-point calibration adjustment
values, click the [Reset] button.
Click [OK] on the Confirm Reset screen that
appears to initialize the adjustment values.
3. Tool Settings
7 Click the [OK] button.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
8 Click the [End Test] button.
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
The display returns to the Master screen.
4-102
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
2 Select the tools that will be used for the
Thickness Calculation Tool
thickness calculation.
Setting the thickness calculation tool
Items
Calculation target
A (Main)
B (Expansion)
Shift Value
ZERO/Offset/Limit
Adjustment
HI
yyA: The main unit tools are displayed.
yyB: The expansion unit tools are displayed.
LO
yyThe calculation results for the thickness
calculation tool are not displayed on the
Master screen. To configure the settings while
checking the calculation results, switch to the
Test screen.
yyIf both triggers are internal, the main unit
performs calculations using the latest
expansion unit judgment value.
yyOnly the height tool, MAX/MIN tool, and
average height tool are displayed for main
unit tools.
yyThe expansion unit tools will only be
displayed as a tool number. The tool name
will not be displayed.
3 Set “ZERO/Offset/Limit Adjustment”.
€
Value
€Shift
Input ZERO/Offset target value that can be used to shift
the current measurement value to a desired value.
€
button
€[ZERO/Offset]
Click this button to offset the value so that the
measurement value matches the set target value.
€
button.
€[Clear]
Click this button to display the Cancel ZERO/Offset
Confirmation screen. Clicking the [OK] button restores
the settings to the values before adjustment.
1 Add the thickness calculation tool.
ZERO/Offset adjustment will be performed
on the calculation results. Even if ZERO/
Offset is performed by the calculation target
tool separately, the calculation result of the
thickness calculation tool will not change.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-30)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-103
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
yyTo add the thickness calculation tool, at least
one height tool, MAX/MIN tool, or average
height tool must be added in advance to the
main unit.
yyThe following conditions must be met to
perform thickness calculation: A calculation
error occurs if the conditions are not met.
“Displaying the Limit Adjustment screen”
(Page 6-11)
yyThe sensor displayed on IX-Navigator must
be the main unit.
yyAn expansion unit must be connected when
the main unit is powered on.
yyThe expansion unit must be operating.
yyThe expansion unit must be in scan mode.
yyThe expansion unit tool must be the height
tool, MAX/MIN tool, or average height tool.
yyThe main unit and expansion unit trigger
condition must be one of the following:
• ‌Internal trigger for both the main unit and
expansion unit
• ‌External trigger and simultaneous trigger
input is enabled for both the main unit and
expansion unit.
yyTo specify the average height tool as the
calculation target, set the reference height
settings to OFF in the average height settings.
Average height tools where the reference
height settings are made are not displayed as
options.
3. Tool Settings
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
yyIf the external trigger is set with simultaneous
trigger input from main/expansion units
disabled, a screen will appear prompting you
to enable simultaneous trigger input.
yyIf the expansion unit is not operating, a screen
will appear prompting you to put the expansion
unit into run mode.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
4
4 Set a threshold value.
5 If needed, click the [Extended Functions] tab to
set the extended functions.
€
Tool
€Rename
Changes the tool name.
“Rename Tool” (Page 4-105)
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
€
Calibration
€2-point
Adjust the measurement value proportionally to the
adjustment ratio by setting two sets of adjustment points
and their measurement values after adjustment.
“2-point Calibration” (Page 4-105)
6 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
€
€HI
Input the maximum threshold value.
€
€LO
Input the minimum threshold value.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyThe default threshold value differs depending
on the sensor head that is used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
yyIf the external trigger is set with simultaneous
trigger input from main/expansion units
disabled, a screen will appear prompting you
to enable simultaneous trigger input.
yyIf the expansion unit is not operating, a
screen will appear prompting you to put the
expansion unit into run mode.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
4-104
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Extended functions for the thickness
calculation tool
Items
2-point Calibration
2nd Point
If there is a difference in the measured value and the actual
dimensions of the target to be measured, this difference
can be corrected. Both the zero point and tilt are corrected.
Display Value
Rename Tool
1st Point
2-point Calibration
„„
Before
Correction
After
Correction
Before
Correction
After
Correction
Correction
After correcting
second point
Before correcting
second point
After correcting
first point
Before correcting
first point
4
Measurement Value
1 Click the [Rename Tool] button.
The range for adjustment of the tilt is 0.5 to 2.0
times the value before adjustment. Input values
within this range for before and after correction.
1 Click the [2-point Calibration] button.
The Input Tool Name screen opens.
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
The 2-point Calibration Settings screen opens.
The tool name changes and the system returns to the
extended functions screen for the thickness calculation
tool.
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name,
“ABC (Calculate Thickness)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
2 Select to enable or disable the function.
If you selected the [Disable] button, click the
[Close] button.
If you selected the [Enable] button, proceed with
the subsequent steps.
yyDefault value: Disable
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-105
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Offset Value
Rename Tool
„„
3. Tool Settings
3 Input before and after correction values for the
first point and second point.
5 Click the [OK] button.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
2-point calibration will be performed on the
calculation results. Even if 2-point calibration
is performed by the calculation target tool
separately, the calculation result of the
thickness calculation tool will not change.
yyTo perform 2-point calibration again, click the
[Readjust] button.
Clicking the [OK] button on the screen that
appears enables you to continue to adjust
from the previous adjustment result.
yyTo initialize the 2-point calibration adjustment
values, click the [Reset] button.
Click [OK] on the Confirm Reset screen that
appears to initialize the adjustment values.
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault value (before correcting the first and second
points): ---.-- mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the first point): 0.00 mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the second point): 1.00
mm
6 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
the thickness calculation tool.
yyClicking the [Load Curr.Val] button inputs the
current value as the before correction value.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring
the settings. The measurement value being
detected can also be acquired as the current
value.
yyIf the external trigger is set with simultaneous
trigger input from main/expansion units
disabled, a screen will appear prompting you
to enable simultaneous trigger input.
yyIf the expansion unit is not operating, a
screen will appear prompting you to put the
expansion unit into run mode.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
4 Click the [Execute] button.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
4-106
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4. Output Assignment
4. Output Assignment
Assign the content to be output to each output line.
Main Screen for the Output Assignment
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
4
(6)
(7)
(8)
(1) Title
Displays the program number and program name.
(5) Captured image
Displays the captured image.
(2) Navigation buttons
Moves between steps in Settings Navigator.
(6) Tool settings button
Assign the function to output to each output line (OUT1
to OUT10).
“Setting the Output Assignment” (Page 4-109)
(3) Image type
Displays the image type. [Master] is the registered
master.
(4) Image tool bar
Displays the operation tools for the displayed image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(7) [Back] button
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 4-20)
(8) [Complete] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-6)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-107
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
(5)
4. Output Assignment
Output Assignment Settings
Output Items
OFF
Total Status
4
OK, NG
Output Items
Description
Do not output. Output will be
constantly OFF.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
When the total status result is OK
or NG, the output turns ON. The
total status conditions can be set in
the extended functions.
The total status OK output turns ON
by default when the status result of
all tools is OK. Additionally, the total
status NG output turns ON when
the status result of any tool was
NG.
“Total Status Conditions” (Page
4-110)
Run
When the sensor is running
correctly with no system error, the
output turns ON.
BUSY
Output is turned on during
detection/judgment. Output is set to
ON during Switch Program, Clear
ZERO/Offset, Laser Shutdown/
Release, and Reset Processing.
When BUSY output is ON, external
trigger input is not accepted.
Additionally, while BUSY output
is ON, the judgment output result
changes, so wait for BUSY output
to turn OFF before importing the
status output into a PLC or other
device.
Error
When an error occurs, the output
turns ON.
Alarm
When an alarm is activated, the
output turns ON.
Position adjustment
OK, NG
1-Axis Adjustment
OK, NG
2-Axis Adjustment
OK, NG
Tilt Adjustment
OK, NG
Tool 01 to 16*
yyHeight:
OK, NG, HIGH,
LOW
yyArea: OK, NG
4-108
Logic 1 to 8
OK, NG
Description
When the result of the specified
logic is OK or NG, the output turns
ON.
* When the measurement display unit is 0.01 mm
Default value
The default value of each output line is as follows:
yyOUT1: Total Status (OK)
yyOUT2: BUSY
yyOUT3 to OUT10: OFF
By default, the output line will be "N.O."
“N.O./N.C.” (Page 7-24)
When the position adjustment result
is OK or NG, the output turns ON.
When the 1-axis adjustment result
is OK or NG, the output turns ON.
When the 2-axis adjustment result
is OK or NG, the output turns ON.
When the tilt adjustment result is
OK or NG, the output turns ON.
When the specified tool outputs a
status result, the output turns ON.
‌
threshold ≤ judgment
yyOK: LOW
value ≤ HIGH threshold
yyNG: ‌Judgment result is HIGH or
LOW
yyHIGH: ‌HIGH threshold < judgment
value
‌
threshold > judgment
yyLOW: LOW
value
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4. Output Assignment
5 Click the [Extended Function 1] or [Extended
Setting the Output Assignment
Function 2] tab as needed to set the extended
function.
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
2 Display the main screen for output assignment.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 4-5)
3 Click the drop down menu for the output line to
select and assign an output item.
Extended Function 1
zz
€
Status Conditions
€Total
€
Error
€Trigger
Selects whether to include a trigger error in the output
item "Error".
“Trigger Error” (Page 4-110)
€
Error
€ZERO/Offset
Selects whether to include a ZERO/Offset error in the
output item "Error".
“ZERO/Offset Error” (Page 4-110)
€
Tools
€ZERO/Offset
Sets target tools when executing ZERO/Offset in a
batch.
“ZERO/Offset Tools” (Page 4-111)
€
Output
€Analog
Sets a target tool and scaling for analog output.
“Analog Output” (Page 4-112)
Extended Function 2
zz
€
1 to 8
€Logic
4 If there are output items with sub-settings, select
the type to be output.
Define the behavior of the logic output using judgment
results of each tool.
“Logic” (Page 4-113)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-109
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Selects the conditions to turn ON the total status result.
“Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-110)
4
4. Output Assignment
ZERO/Offset Error
„„
Extended functions for the output
assignment
1 Selects whether to include a ZERO/Offset error in
the output item "Error".
Total Status Conditions
„„
1 Selects the conditions to turn ON the total status
result.
4
€
€Disable
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
€ Tools OK (default)
€All
When all of the status results for the judgment tools are
OK, the total status result is OK.
If a ZERO/Offset error occurs, the output for the OUT
"Error" is assigned to stays OFF.
A ZERO/Offset error is not displayed on the operation
screen.
When Master display in the tool settings is
set: If ZERO/Offset is run when it cannot be
run, a ZERO/Offset error is displayed.
€
Tool OK
€Any
If any of the status results for the set detection tools are
OK, the total status result turns ON.
€
1 to 8
€Logic
When the result of the selected logic is OK, the total
status result is OK.
€
(default)
€Enable
When a ZERO/Offset error occurs, the output for the
OUT "Error" is assigned to turns ON.
A ZERO/Offset error is displayed on the operation
screen.
Trigger Error
„„
1 Selects whether to include a trigger error in the
output item "Error".
€
(default)
€Disable
If a trigger error occurs, the output for the OUT "Error"
is assigned to stays OFF.
A trigger error is not displayed on the operation screen.
€
€Enable
When a trigger error occurs, the output for the OUT
"Error" is assigned to turns ON.
A trigger error is displayed on the operation screen.
4-110
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4. Output Assignment
ZERO/Offset Tools
„„
How to Use the ZERO/Offset Target Tool
zz
1 Click the [Change] button under [ZERO/Offset
Tools].
The ZERO/Offset target tool can be used to apply
ZERO/Offset to a specific grouping of tools that are
used to measure the same place on the target as
shown below.
Example:
yyZERO/Offset is not run with Tool 01
yyZERO/Offset is run with Tool 02
Tool 01: Step
Tool 02: Height
4
The ZERO/Offset Tools Settings screen opens.
Offset in a batch.
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
2 Sets a target tool for when executing ZERO/
€
ZERO/Offset is run
€Before
€ [ON] is set for all tools
€If
ZERO/Offset is run with all tools.
€ Tool 01 is set to [OFF]
€If
ZERO/Offset is run with only Tool 02.
€
€OFF
The tool is not subject to Batch ZERO/Offset execution.
€
(default)
€ON
The tool is subject to Batch ZERO/Offset execution.
3 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
output assignment.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-111
4. Output Assignment
Analog Output
„„
Analog Output Graph
zz
To set the analog output, analog output must be
set to a setting other than OFF in advance on
the sensor advanced settings.
“Analog Output” (Page 7-25)
1 Selects a tool to be subject to analog output.
€
1
€Example
This example represents the situation where the lower
limit of the measurement value is assigned as the lower
limit of the analog output, and the upper limit of the
measurement value is assigned as the upper limit of the
analog output while scaling.
Analog Output
Upper Limit
4
Lower Limit
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
Measurement
Value
€
2
€Example
This example represents the situation where the upper
limit of the measurement value is assigned as the lower
limit of the analog output, and the lower limit of the
measurement value is assigned as the upper limit of the
analog output while scaling.
Analog Output
If a monochrome area tool and a height area
tool are selected, a user-selected value is
output for the analog output when an error
occurs. This value is selected in the sensor
advanced settings.
“Analog Output” (Page 7-25)
Upper Limit
Lower Limit
2 Sets a scaling measurement value for the analog
output range.
4-112
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
Measurement
Value
The following is analog output in the case that
the upper limit value is set to the same value as
the lower limit value in the scaling settings.
yyMeasurement value ≤ Upper limit value
The lower limit value of analog output is output
Example: ‌1 V if the analog output range is 1 to
5V
yyMeasurement value > Upper limit value
The upper limit value of analog output is output
Example: ‌5 V if the analog output range is 1 to
5V
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4. Output Assignment
2 Select the logical condition of the logic output.
Logic
„„
To set logic, at least two tools must be set.
“Setting example by the logic condition.” (Page 4-114)
1 Click the button of the logic to set.
€
€AND
€
€OR
Outputs the logical sum (OR) of the judgment outputs of
the selected tool.
€ or More Conditions Held
€2
When two or more judgment outputs of the selected tool
are held, the output turns ON.
€ or More Conditions Held
€3
For a button without logic, [Empty] is displayed
next to the button.
When three or more judgment outputs of the selected
tool are held, the output turns ON.
3 Select the tool to be incorporated into the logic
and the type of its judgment result.
yyClick [Prev] or [Next] button to switch the page.
yyTo incorporate the already set logic into
another logic, use a logic with a greater
number than the set logic.
yyTo clear the settings of the logic, click the
[Clear] button.
yyThe type of selectable judgment result differs
depending on the tool. See the following:
“Tools that can be incorporated into logic
and judgment results” (Page 4-115)
4 Click the [OK] button.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4-113
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Outputs the logical product (AND) of the judgment
outputs of the selected tool.
4. Output Assignment
Setting example by the logic condition.
zz
€
€AND
When tool A and tool B are set to OK and tool C is set
to NG
Tool A
Tool B
Tool C
(NG)
Logic 1 to 8
Logic output image
in the case of AND logic
4
€ or More Conditions Held
€2
When tool A, B, and C each is set to OK
Tool A
Tool B
Tool C
Logic
OK
OK
OK
OK
NG
OK
OK
OK
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG
NG
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG
OK
NG
OK
NG
NG
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
Tool A
Tool B
Tool C
Logic
OK
NG
NG
NG
OK
OK
OK
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
OK
NG
OK
NG
OK
NG
NG
NG
OK
NG
Tool A
Tool B
Tool C
Tool D
Logic
€ or More Conditions Held
€3
When tool A, B, C, and D each is set to OK
OK
OK
NG
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
NG
OK
NG
NG
NG
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
NG
NG
NG
OK
NG
OK
OK
OK
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
OK
NG
€
€OR
When tool A and tool B are set to OK and tool C is set
to NG
Tool A
Tool B
Tool C
(NG)
Logic 1 to 8
Logic output image
in the case of OR logic
Tool A
Tool B
Tool C
Logic
OK
OK
OK
OK
NG
OK
OK
OK
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG
NG
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG
OK
NG
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG
NG
OK
NG
NG
NG
OK
4-114
OK
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG
OK
NG
OK
NG
OK
NG
NG
OK
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
NG
OK
OK
OK
NG
NG
NG
OK
OK
NG
NG
OK
NG
OK
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
NG
NG
OK
OK
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
NG
NG
NG
OK
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4. Output Assignment
Tools that can be incorporated into logic and
zz
judgment results
The following table shows selectable types of judgment
result with .
Tool name
Selectable or not
NG
HIGH
LOW
ALARM
Position
Adjustment


-
-
-
1-Axis
Adjustment


-
-
-
2-Axis
Adjustment


-
-
-
Step





Height





Average
Height





MAX/MIN





Pin Height





Height Area


-
-

Monochrome
Area


-
-

Width





IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
OK
4-115
4. Output Assignment
MEMO
4
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)
4-116
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Chapter
5
This chapter explains how to set the Settings Navigator
functions while using line mode.
Settings Navigator
(Line Mode Setup)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-1
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Settings Navigator................................................................5-2
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator........................5-3
1. Detection Setup................................................................5-7
2. Master Registration........................................................5-25
3. Tool Settings...................................................................5-27
4. Output Assignment........................................................5-79
Settings Navigator
Settings Navigator
In the Settings Navigator, the settings of the program that allow the sensor to judge a target are set over several steps.
While following the steps with navigation buttons, configure the settings.
Navigation button
5
Navigation button
Flow in the Settings Navigator
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
STEP 1. Detection Setup
Set the conditions to detect the target. Set the height, laser position, and
sampling frequency.
“1. Detection Setup” (Page 5-7)
STEP 2. Master Registration
Capture and register a master image that will serve as the reference for
judgment.
“2. Master Registration” (Page 5-25)
STEP 3. Tool Settings
Set tools to measure the target and judge whether a target is OK or No
Good.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 5-27)
STEP 4. Output Assignment
Assign the content to be output to each output line.
“4. Output Assignment” (Page 5-79)
5-2
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator
6 Select line mode as the detection mode for the
Starting the Settings Navigator
program.
1 Turn on the power of the sensor.
2 Start the IX-Navigator.
When the sensor is in one of the following conditions,
the [Program] screen will open. Proceed to step 5.
yyWhen the power is turned on for the first time
yyIf all programs are not being set
yyWhen replacing the sensor head
yyPrograms have two types of detection
modes: scan mode and line mode.
yySome of the program settings differ
depending on the detection mode.
yyThe detection mode cannot be changed
while configuring the settings or after
configuring the settings with Settings
Navigator.
3 Click the [Program] button.
5
A confirmation screen opens.
4 Click the [OK] button.
The [Program] screen opens.
5 Select a program to be set.
You can select a program on the Program
Details screen displayed when you click the
[Detail] button.
“Displaying the Program Details screen”
(Page 7-7)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-3
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
yyChanging the detection mode for a set
program resets the program settings. If you
do not want to reset the program settings,
select a program that has not been set.
yyTo change the detection mode of a set
program, click the [OK] button on the
displayed confirmation screen.
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator
7 Click the [Sensor Setup] button.
Types of Settings Navigator Images
The types of images displayed on the Settings Navigator
screen are shown below.
Image type
The startup screen of the Settings Navigator opens.
€
a program that has not been set is selected
€When
Start setting [1. Detection Setup].
Type
5
Description
The currently captured image.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
The image registered as the master.
This is the test run screen.
The captured image is displayed.
“1. Detection Setup” (Page 5-7)
€
a program that has been set is selected
€When
Click the navigation button for each step to start
changing the settings.
Navigation button
“1. Detection Setup” (Page 5-7)
“2. Master Registration” (Page 5-25)
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 5-27)
“4. Output Assignment” (Page 5-79)
5-4
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator
Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow
This section explains each setting screen displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow.
For details on the operation and contents of each setting screen, refer to the applicable section.
1. Detection Setup
“1. Detection
Setup” (Page 5-7)
Returns to (A)
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
(A)
2. Master
Registration
“2. Master
Registration” (Page
5-25)
Returns to (A)
3. Tool Settings
“3. Tool Settings”
(Page 5-27)
Returns to (A)
4. Output
Assignment
“4. Output
Assignment” (Page
5-79)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-5
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator
Finishing the Settings Navigator
Finishing without completing the steps
Finishing by completing all steps
1 Click the [Exit Setup] button.
1 Set all steps in the Settings Navigator.
2 Click the [Complete Settings] button.
5
€
the required settings are completed
€When
The confirmation dialog to save opens.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
€
the required settings are not completed
€When
The confirmation dialog to save opens.
3 Click the [Yes] button.
The settings in the Settings Navigator will be saved into
the program, and the system returns to the [Program]
screen.
yyBy clicking the [No] button, the confirmation
dialog to cancel the settings opens. By clicking
the [Yes] button, Settings Navigator finishes
without saving the settings.
yyBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system
returns to the Settings Navigator screen.
The confirmation dialog to finish opens.
yyBy clicking the [OK] button, the confirmation dialog to
save opens.
yyBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system returns to
the Settings Navigator screen.
The required settings have not been
completed yet. Even if the [OK] button is
clicked and the settings are saved in the
program, the proper operation cannot be
performed.
2 Click the [Yes] button.
The settings in the Settings Navigator will be saved into
the program, and the system returns to the [Program]
screen.
yyBy clicking the [No] button, the confirmation
dialog to cancel the settings opens. By clicking
the [Yes] button, Settings Navigator finishes
without saving the settings.
yyBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system
returns to the Settings Navigator screen.
5-6
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
1. Detection Setup
1. Detection Setup
Set the conditions to measure the target. Adjust the conditions so that the places you want to measure can be stably
detected.
Main Screen for Detection Conditions
(1)
(2)
(8)
(3)
(4)
(5)
5
(9)
(6)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(1) Title
Displays the program number and program name.
(2) Navigation buttons
Moves between steps in Settings Navigator.
(3) Image type
Displays the image type. [Live] is the image the sensor
is currently capturing.
(4) Image tool bar
Displays operation tools for images taken by the sensor.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(5) Captured image
Displays the captured image.
(6) Measurement point
Drag to measure the height of the desired position on
the laser.
(7) Show Laser Position
Displays the position of the laser.
(13)
(14)
(8) Settings button
Displays the settings that can be adjusted in Image
Optimization.
“Brightness Adjustment” (Page 5-8)
“Measurement Adjustment” (Page 5-9)
“Extended Functions” (Page 5-11)
(9) Settings screen
Displays the current settings to be edited based on the
selected item.
(10) Height measurement check box
Turns execution of height measurement on or off.
(11) Height measurement value
Displays the measurement value of the measurement
point. The content of the alarm settings are not applied
to the measurement value.
(12) Detected position check
Displays the measurement value of the measurement
point in the range.
(13) [Next to STEP2] button
The display moves to the main screen for Master
Registration.
“2. Master Registration” (Page 5-25)
(14) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-6)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-7
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
(7)
1. Detection Setup
When brightness is to be adjusted manually
zz
Setting Detection Setup
(1) Adjust brightness by selecting the imaging mode.
Brightness Adjustment
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-3)
2 Display the settings screen for detection
conditions.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 5-5)
3 Click the [Brightness Adjustment] button.
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
The screen to configure the Brightness Adjustment
settings opens.
4 Adjust brightness.
When brightness is to be adjusted automatically
zz
(1) Click the [Automatic Brightness Adjustment]
button.
Automatic brightness adjustment enables a target to be
captured with the appropriate brightness by changing
the light intensity and shutter speed according to the
shape and surface condition of the target.
€
€Brightness
Sets the image brightness.
yySetting range: 0 to 120
yyDefault value: 30
Note that the image quality can be affects if
setting a higher brightness value.
€
Mode
€Imaging
Normal
This mode is the basic imaging mode.
You can reduce the noise when capturing
images.
HDR
(Default)
This mode is for capturing a target that
reflects light and has high contrast, such as
metal.
€
€Lighting
OFF
The LED light is not used.
ON
(Default)
The LED light is used.
Do not move a target during the auto
brightness adjustment. If the target is
moving, focus may not be adjusted correctly.
When automatic brightness adjustment is completed,
the image displayed will be adjusted based on the
adjustments made.
5-8
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Even if you turn the LED light OFF, you can still
execute [Automatic Brightness Adjustment] and
other functions are not affected.
Clicking the [Undo] button restores the settings
to the values before adjustment.
1. Detection Setup
5 Set the filter.
Measurement Adjustment
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-3)
2 Display the settings screen for detection
conditions.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 5-5)
3 Click the [Measurement Adjustment] button.
€
€Filter
The measurement value is averaged. If
there are fluctuations in the measurement
values, stable measurement results can be
obtained by setting a high data count.
Median
The median filter is used. Use this method
if there is a fluctuation in the measurement
values when detecting the moving target.
The Adjust Measurements settings screen opens.
4 Select the sampling frequency.
€
count
€Data
Ave
yySetting Range: 1, 2, 4, and 6
yyDefault value: 4
Median
yySetting range: 3, 6, 8, 12, and 24
Ex.1: ‌When setting the filter to [Ave], and the number of
data to “4.”
Sampling Frequency
yyDefault value: 6 ms
(Default when IX-360W is connected:
11 ms)
Internal
Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
…
Average Measurement Time
*1
Average Measurement Time
*2
Average Measurement Time
*3
Judgment
Data
A
B
C
…
*1 Data 1 to 4 is averaged and Data A is output.
*2 Data 2 to 5 is averaged and Data B is output.
*3 Data 3 to 6 is averaged and Data C is output.
Increasing the average count lengthens the
response time. If you increase the average
count, be mindful of the response time.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-9
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Ave
(Default)
1. Detection Setup
6 Adjust the laser position (angle).
Ex.2: ‌When setting the filter to [Median], and the
number of data to “3.”
Sampling Period
Internal
Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
…
*1
*2
€ button
€[+]
5
Clicking this button moves the laser position upwards
on the screen.
*3
Judgment
Data
A
B
C
€ button
€[-]
…
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
*1 The median value of data 1 to 3 is output as data A.
*2 The median value of data 2 to 4 is output as data B.
*3 The median value of data 3 to 5 is output as data C.
Clicking this button moves the laser position downwards
on the screen.
Increasing the average count lengthens the
response time. If you increase the average
count, be mindful of the response time.
5-10
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
If [Rotate Image 180 deg] is enabled on the
sensor advanced settings, the direction the laser
moves will correlate with the displayed image.
If master registration is completed, changing
the laser position displays a screen
prompting you to re-register a master image.
Re-register the master as needed.
1. Detection Setup
Timing Input
„„
Extended Functions
This selects the hold function and timing input type when
timing input occurs.
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-3)
2 Display the settings screen for detection
1 Select the hold function type.
conditions.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 5-5)
3 Click the [Extended Functions] button.
€
Hold (default)
€Sample
€
Hold
€Peak/Bottom/P-P
Uses one of the following modes:
Peak
Hold
Holds the maximum value measured as the
hold value during the sampling period.
Bottom
Hold
Holds the minimum value measured as the
hold value during the sampling period.
P-P
Hold
Holds the difference between the minimum
and maximum values measured as the hold
value during the sampling period.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-11
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
The Extended Functions settings screen opens.
Uses sample hold.
Holds the judgment value in accordance with the timing
input.
1. Detection Setup
2 Select the timing input type.
Example of Hold Behavior
zz
€
Hold, Level
€Sample
Hold Value
Measurement Value
Display Value
Time
Timing ON
Input OFF
€
(default)
€Latching
5
Sample
Hold
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Peak/
Bottom/P-P
Hold
€
Hold, Edge
€Sample
Holds the measurement value only while the
timing input is on.
Turning on timing input ends the sampling
period and holds the measurement value.
Turning off timing input starts the next
sampling period.
Hold Value
Measurement Value
Display Value
€
(Rising)
€Edge
Time
Sample
Hold
Holds the measurement value when the
timing input is turned on.
Peak/
Bottom/P-P
Hold
Turning on timing input ends the sampling
period and holds the measurement value.
When timing input is turned on, the next
sampling period starts.
€
(Falling)
€Edge
Sample
Hold
Holds the measurement value when the
timing input is turned off.
Peak/
Bottom/P-P
Hold
Turning off timing input ends the sampling
period and holds the measurement value.
When timing input is turned off, the next
sampling period starts.
Timing ON
Input OFF
Power on or reset input*1
*1: ‌After turning on the power or resetting the device, the hold
value will be displayed as "---.--" until the timing input is
turned on.
€
Hold, Level
€Peak
Hold Value
Measurement Value
Display Value
For details about the behavior examples by timing
input setting, refer to:
“Example of Hold Behavior” (Page 5-12)
Time
T
T
T
Timing ON
Input OFF
Power on or reset input*1
T: Sampling period
*1: ‌After turning on the power or resetting the device, the hold
value will be displayed as "---.--" until the timing input is
turned on.
5-12
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
1. Detection Setup
€
Hold, Edge
€Peak
€
to Peak Hold, Level
€Peak
Display Value
Hold Value
Hold Value
Measurement Value
Measurement Value
p: Max. value
b: Min. value
Display Value
(p´-b´)
(p-b)
Time
T
T
p
T
b
Timing ON
Input OFF
p´
b´
T
Power on or reset input*
Timing ON
Input OFF
1
T: Sampling period
*1: ‌After turning on the power or resetting the device, the hold
value will be displayed as "---.--" until the timing input is
turned on.
Hold Value
Measurement Value
Power on or reset input*1
T: Sampling period
*1: ‌After turning on the power or resetting the device, the hold
value will be displayed as "---.--" until the timing input is
turned on.
€
to Peak Hold, Edge
€Peak
Hold Value
Measurement Value
p: Max. value
b: Min. value
Display Value
Time
T
T
(p´-b´)
T
(p-b)
Timing ON
Input OFF
p
b
T: Sampling period
*1: ‌After turning on the power or resetting the device, the hold
value will be displayed as "---.--" until the timing input is
turned on.
€
Hold, Edge
€Bottom
Hold Value
Measurement Value
Display Value
b´
T
Power on or reset input*1
p´
Time
T
Timing ON
Input OFF
Power on or reset input*1
T: Sampling period
*1: ‌After turning on the power or resetting the device, the hold
value will be displayed as "---.--" until the timing input is
turned on.
Time
T
T
T
Timing ON
Input OFF
Power on or reset input*1
T: Sampling period
*1: ‌After turning on the power or resetting the device, the hold
value will be displayed as "---.--" until the timing input is
turned on.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-13
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
€
Hold, Level
€Bottom
Display Value
Time
T
1. Detection Setup
Adjust Head Tilt
„„
€
vertical
€Laser
Set the laser emission direction as the height
measurement direction.
1 Click the [Change] button.
The settings screen for adjusting the sensor head tilt
appears.
5
For details about how to use the sensor head
when [Vertical laser] is selected, refer to the
following.
“When mounting the sensor head diagonally”
(Page 2-4)
2 Select a reference direction when measuring
height.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
€
setting
€Custom
To install the sensor head with a tilt in relation to the
reference surface, configure the following setting.
The reference surface is the surface that is used as a
reference in measurement. Setting a reference surface
sets that surface to 0.00 mm. The height is measured
perpendicularly to that reference surface.
“Setting the reference surface.” (Page 5-15)
Before adjustment
€
vertical (default)
€Camera
After adjustment
Reference
surface
Sets the height measurement direction of the front of
the sensor head to vertical.
The height measurement
direction is perpendicular to
the front of the sensor head
The height measurement
direction is perpendicular to
the reference surface
3 Click the [Close] button.
If a height-related tool is set and you change
the adjust head tilt settings, a screen
prompting you to check the tool settings
appears. Edit the tool settings as required.
The system returns to the Extended Functions settings
screen.
5-14
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
1. Detection Setup
Setting the reference surface.
zz
This setting adjusts the sensor head if the sensor head and
measurement reference surface and not perpendicular.
3 Click three points on the reference surface.
Change the size of the points as needed.
1 Click the [Set Reference Surface] button.
Click
€
€Small
You can place points in narrow places.
€
€Normal
5
Points are the standard size.
The capture screen opens.
Places points in wide places.
yyAfter you specify the three points, you can
drag each point to adjust them.
yyPlacing the three points as wide apart as
possible increases adjustment accuracy.
Good example: Three points are far apart
An image is captured.
Bad example: Three points are close together
4 Click the [Next] button.
The reference surface is set and the adjustment result
is displayed.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-15
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
2 Click the [Set] button.
€
(default)
€Large
1. Detection Setup
5 Check the reference surface and click the [OK]
Example: For a target similar the one below
button.
Part height is overlaid on the image in the
following manner.
yyBlue to red indicates that the height is low to
high, respectively.
High
Sections that are the same height are the same
color.
The color is different for places where the height is
different.
Low
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
yySections that are the same color are the same
height.
yyAs for the height image, one that is nearer
the sensor is “high” regardless of the
[Measurement Direction] settings.
yyShaded areas are areas that cannot be
detected.
Check that the locations that you want to
measure can be measured.
Undetectable area
Measurement cannot be performed
because the target is in a blind spot and the
sensor cannot receive the laser beam.
Undetectable area
Outside of the measurement range.
Example of an undetectable area
Blind spot
Outside of the
measurement range
Insufficient light
volume
Click the [Reconfigure] button to reconfigure the
reference surface settings.
After reference surface settings are completed, a
message appears indicating completion.
6 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Adjust Head Tilt Settings
screen.
5-16
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
1. Detection Setup
Measurement direction
„„
1 Select the measurement direction for the target.
€
(default)
€Normal
5
Z-Axis: The measurement value increases as the target
approaches the sensor.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Measurement Value
+999.99
Distance
-999.99
Distance
X-Axis: The right side of the image is the positive
direction.
€
€Reverse
Z-Axis: The measurement value decreases as the
target approaches the sensor.
Measurement Value
+999.99
Distance
-999.99
X-Axis: The left side of the image is the positive
direction.
Distance
yyWhen changing the measurement direction
after the master registration, re-register the
master.
yyThe center of the captured image has a
measurement value of 0mm in the X-axis
direction.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-17
1. Detection Setup
Alarm Setting
„„
€
[User setting] is selected
€When
Specifies time in number of samples that the last
measurement value before the sensor goes out of range is
held.
Specify the alarm count.
In the following cases, the IX-H cannot perform
measurement:
yyOutside of the measurement range
yyLight intensity too great/insufficient
yyPosition adjustment tool failed
yyTilt adjustment tool failed
In the alarm settings, set how to process data when
measurement is not possible.
1 Select the type of alarm setting.
yySetting range: 1 to 100
yyDefault value: 1
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Default
(Default)
No normal value hold by alert will be done.
Clamp
Holds the measurement value prior to going
out of range until measurement is possible
again.
User
setting
Holds the measurement value prior to going
out of range for a user specified sampling
count.
The content of the alarm settings are not applied
to the measurement value displayed on the
detection conditions setting screen.
5-18
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
If [Default] or [User setting] is selected, the
system behaves in the following manner:
yyWhile the status result is being held by the
alarm when measurement is not possible,
measurement cannot be performed with
other tools even if measurement is possible
for that tool.
yyWhen the sensor is restored to a state in
which it can measure again, the hold will
be released even if the number of sampling
counts does not exceed the alarm count.
yyIf the sensor's sampling count exceeds the
alarm count and [Clamp] is not selected,
"-----" is displayed as the measurement
value. This state is called the "alarm state".
In the alarm state, if the sensor is returned
to a measurable state for a number of
sampling counts larger than the average
count, the device is restored from the alarm
state and the measurement value will be
displayed.
1. Detection Setup
Example of Alarm Settings Behavior 1
zz
When the internal measurement value is restored from an alarm before the alarm settings count is exceeded (the average
count is four and alarm count is three when two tools are set)
Alarm period (internal measurement value)
Time until measurement can be performed for the average count.
Four samples
Time until measurement can be performed
for the average count.
Four samples
Tool 1
(HI Threshold)
Tool 1 (internal
measurement value)
Tool 1 (judgment value)
Tool 2
(HI Threshold)
5
Tool 2 (internal measurement value)
ON
Tool 2 (judgment value)
OFF
Total status ON
output OK OFF
Total status ON
output NG OFF
Tool 1 judgment ON
NG OFF
Tool 2 judgment ON
NG OFF
*1
This period changes depending on the average count and alarm count settings. This example is shown below.
i) When an alarm occurs once: The four samples from Sampling No. 2 to 5 are the hold period.
Sampling No.
1
Internal Measurement Value
Normal
Alert
Normal
Normal
Normal
(Hold)
Normal (Hold)
* Ave. standby
Judgment Value
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal (Hold)
* Ave. standby
Normal (Hold)
* Ave. standby
Normal
Normal
Normal
6
7
8
ii) When an alarm occurs twice: The five samples from Sampling No. 2 to 6 are the hold period.
Sampling No.
1
Internal Measurement Value
Normal
Alert
Alert
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
(Hold)
Normal
(Hold)
Normal (Hold)
* Ave. standby
Normal (Hold)
* Ave. standby
Normal (Hold)
* Ave. standby
Normal
Normal
Judgment Value
2
3
4
5
iii) When an alarm occurs three times: The six samples from Sampling No. 2 to 7 are the hold period.
Sampling No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Internal Measurement Value
Normal
Alert
Alert
Alert
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Judgment Value
Normal
Normal
(Hold)
Normal
(Hold)
Normal
(Hold)
Normal (Hold)
* Ave. standby
Normal (Hold)
* Ave. standby
Normal (Hold)
* Ave. standby
Normal
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-19
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Alarm output
Period the status result is held
according to the hold when an alarm
occurs
Four to six samples*1
1. Detection Setup
Example of Alarm Settings Behavior 2
zz
When the internal measurement value cannot be restored from an alarm before the alarm settings count is exceeded (the
average count is four and alarm count is three when two tools are set)
Alarm period (internal measurement value)
Alarm settings count + Average count for the sampling period
= Max. seven samples*3
Time until measurement can be
performed for the average count.
Four samples
Time until measurement can be performed
for the average count.
Four samples
Tool 1
(HI Threshold)
Tool 1 (internal
measurement
value)
5
Tool 2
(HI Threshold)
Tool 2 (internal measurement value)
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Period the status result is held
according to the hold when an alarm
occurs
Alarm output
Tool 1 (judgment
value)
Tool 2 (judgment
value)
Alarm period
(Judgment value*1)
ON
OFF
Total status ON
output OK OFF
Total status ON
output NG OFF
Tool 1 judgment ON
NG OFF
Tool 2 judgment ON
NG OFF
*1
*2
*3
5-20
The measurement value for the tool for which the alarm occurred is displayed as "---.--".
NG output for each tool will be turned off until the measurement value is determined from when an alarm occurs
until after it has been restored.
This period changes depending on the average count and alarm count settings. This example is shown below.
Sampling No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Internal
Measurement
Value
Normal
Alert
Alert
Alert
Alert
Alert
Alert
Alert
Judgment Value
Normal
Normal
(Hold)
Normal
(Hold)
Normal
(Hold)
Normal
(Hold)
Normal
(Hold)
Normal
(Hold)
Alert
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
1. Detection Setup
When Clamp is Set
zz
(Average count: four, when setting 2 tools)
Alarm period (internal measurement value)
Time until measurement can be
performed for the average count.
Four samples
Time until measurement can be performed
for the average count.
Four samples
Tool 1
(HI Threshold)
Tool 1 (internal
measurement
value)
Tool 2
(HI Threshold)
Tool 2 (internal measurement value)
ON
OFF
Total status ON
output OK OFF
Total status ON
output NG OFF
Tool 1 judgment ON
NG OFF
Tool 2 judgment ON
NG OFF
Pattern to Avoid Alarms
zz
If an alarm like the following occurs repeatedly, you can prevent an alarm occurring by increasing the alarm count.
Example: When the average count is four
Internal
Measurement
Value
Measurement
Value
(Alarm count:
Two)
Measurement
Value
(Alarm count:
Six)
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
--.--- --.--- --.--- --.--- --.--- --.---
1.0
1.1
1.2
--.--- --.--- --.---
1.2
1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
--.--- --.--- --.---
1.2
1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
--.--- --.--- --.--- --.--ALM
→
*
*
*
→
1.3
1.4
--.--- --.--- --.--- --.--- --.--- --.---
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.2
--.--- --.--- --.--- --.--1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
ALM
*
*
*
1.0
1.1
1.3
1.4
1.2
1.25 1.27 1.35
1.2
1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
1.2
1.25 1.27 1.35
An alarm will occur with the alarm count set to two, but will not occur when set to six.
* ‌This state is the average count measurement standby state. Although the measurement value is displayed as "---.--",
alarm output is turned off.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-21
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Tool 2 (judgment
value)
Period the status result is held
according to the hold when an alarm
occurs
Alarm output
Tool 1 (judgment
value)
1. Detection Setup
Reduce measurement noise
„„
Set the strength of the function used to cut noise from the
measured data.
Laser Sensitivity Adjustment
„„
Adjust the optical sensitivity of the laser for detecting
edges.
1 Click the [Adv. Settings] tab.
In the following cases, adjustment with [Manual]
may stabilize detection.
yyNoise (unnecessary measurement value) occurs
at the edge terminal.
yyNoise (unnecessary measurement value)
occurs when inspecting a target with weak laser
reflection, such as a black target.
1 Click the [Settings 2] tab.
5
2 Select the strength to cut noise.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
2 Select the adjustment method of the laser
sensitivity.
yySetting range: 0 to 5
yyDefault value: 1
The measurement value may be affected by
reflected and stray light from outside of the
detection range. If this occurs, adjust the
settings.
€
(Default)
€Auto
Adjusts the optical sensitivity automatically.
€
€Manual
Adjusts the optical sensitivity manually.
€
€No
Does not adjust the optical sensitivity.
3 When [Manual] is selected, click the [Settings]
button.
5-22
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
1. Detection Setup
4 Adjust the sensitivity and adjustment range.
2 Set whether to use the X-Axis median filter for
measurement data.
yySetting range: OFF, 3, 5, 7, 9
yyDefault: 5
€
€Sensitivity
Sensitivity with which reflected light is detected. With
this item set to a small value, a target with low light
quantity is less easily detected.
1
Click the [Settings 2] tab.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
yySetting range: 0 to 255
yyDefault value: 255
5
Peak selection
„„
€
Range
€Adjustment
The range where the adjusted detection sensitivity is
applied.
Whole
Applies to the whole portion where laser is
applied.
Near Edge
(Default)
Applies only to the regions near edges.
With [Auto] set, [Near Edge] is applied to the
operation.
5 Click the [Close] button.
2 Select a point between the near and the far
ends whose peak value is to be used as the
measurement value.
X-Axis median filter
„„
1 Click the [Settings 2] tab.
yySetting range: 7 steps
yyDefault value: 0
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-23
1. Detection Setup
Remove ambient influence
„„
You can cut ambient light that destabilizes measurement.
1 Click the [Settings 3] tab.
2
5
Select OFF or ON for the Measurement Ambient
Light Cut setting.
Measure when Position Adjustment fails
„„
1 Click the [Settings 3] tab.
2 Select the operation to be performed when
position adjustment fails.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
€
(default)
€OFF
€
(default)
€OFF
The ambient light cut function does not operate.
€
€ON
If position adjustment fails, measurement will not be
performed.
When position adjustment fails, the measured
value is displayed as "---.--" or "----". The
matching rate for the position adjustment tool will
be displayed. The judgment result is displayed
as "--".
The ambient light cut function operates.
Even if this setting is set to [ON],
measurement may be unstable or
measurement may not be possible depending
on the ambient light.
€
€ON
Measurement will be performed even if position
adjustment fails. The measurement position in this case
is the position of the window set on the master.
If the position adjustment tool is set and [ON]
is selected, adjust ZERO/Offset on a location
on which the target is not located.
5-24
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
2. Master Registration
2. Master Registration
Image and register a master image to serve as the reference for judgment.
Main Screen for Master Registration
(1)
(2)
(3)
(7)
(4)
(5)
5
(6)
(9)
(10)
(1) Title
Displays the program number and program name.
(6) Show Laser Position
Displays the position of the laser.
(2) Navigation buttons
Moves between steps in Settings Navigator.
(7) [Register Master] button
Registers the image as the master.
“Master Registration” (Page 5-26)
(3) Image type
Displays the image type. [Master] is the registered
master.
(4) Image tool bar
Displays the operation tools for the displayed image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(5) Captured image
Displays the captured image.
(8) [Back] button
The system returns to the main screen for Detection
Conditions.
“1. Detection Setup” (Page 5-7)
(9) [Next to STEP3] button
The display moves to the main screen for tool settings.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 5-27)
(10) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-6)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-25
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
(8)
2. Master Registration
Master Registration
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-3)
2 Display the main screen for Master Registration.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 5-5)
3 Place the target that will be used as a reference
for judgment in the field of view of the camera.
4 Click the [Register Master] button.
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
5 Check the displayed captured image on the
screen and click the [Start Master Registration]
button.
Do not move the target during master
registration.
After master registration is completed, a message
opens indicating completion.
6 Click the [OK] button.
The screen returns to the main screen for Master
Registration.
5-26
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
3. Tool Settings
Set tools to measure the target and to judge whether the target is OK or No Good.
The height and characteristics of the target registered as the master image are used as the basis for judgment.
During operation, the sensor judges whether a target is OK or No Good by comparing the differences in measurement
between the registered master image and the current target.
The limits for the number of tools that can be set in one program are as follows:
yyJudgment tool (16)
yyPosition Adjustment tool (1)
yyTilt Adjustment Tool (1)
With the exception of tools that perform adjustments,
tools that perform measurements, calculations, and
so on are called "judgment tools".
Types of tools
Follow the procedures referenced below to set up the tools.
Setting Procedure
Step Tool
Page 5-28
Page 5-37
Height Tool
Page 5-28
Page 5-43
Basic Tools
Position Adjustment
tool
Page 5-29
Page 5-49
Tilt Adjustment Tool
Page 5-29
Page 5-51
Advanced Tools
Edge Position Tool
Page 5-30
Page 5-52
Width/Diameter Tool
Page 5-30
Page 5-59
Calculation Tools
Step/Width Tool
Page 5-31
Page 5-67
Thickness Tool
Page 5-32
Page 5-73
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Description of the
Settings
Tool
The Thickness Tool can only be set when an
expansion unit is connected.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-27
3. Tool Settings
Basic Tools
Step Tool
„„
Height Tool
„„
Tool settings
Tool settings
A detection tool used to measure the height difference
between two points on the current target. This tool judges
whether a tool is good or not-good based on the differences
between the current target and the registered master image
according to a set threshold.
A detection tool used to measure the height of the current
target. This tool judges whether a target is good or notgood based on the differences between the current target
and the registered master image according to a set
threshold.
Reference height
Height difference reference
5
Example when the result was NG
Example when the result was NG
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Height difference is smaller than
the threshold
Height difference is larger than
the threshold
5-28
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Height is less than the threshold
Height is greater than the
threshold
3. Tool Settings
Position Adjustment Tool
„„
Tilt Adjustment Tool
„„
Tool settings
Tool settings
This tool adjusts misaligned targets by searching for the
edge height specified from the registered master image.
The position adjustment tool is used in conjunction with
other detection tools.
Tool window
This tool corrects for tilt on the current target based on a
straight line between two points on the registered master
image. The tilt adjustment tool is used in conjunction with
other detection tools.
Position adjustment
window
Adjust the position for places with
height changes
Processing during an
operation
Tilt adjustment points
Adjust the line that connects the two tilt adjustment points
so that the measurement direction is perpendicular.
5 mm
The position adjustment tool adjusts the position of
other tool windows. Therefore, you can continue to
measure the same part of the target even if the position
of the target shifts.
Before tilt adjustment
4.8 mm
The measurement direction before tilt adjustment is
perpendicular to a level target.
As the measurement direction is tilted, height and the
difference in height cannot be measured correctly.
After tilt adjustment
5 mm
Tilt adjustment points
The measurement direction after tilt adjustment is
perpendicular to the line that connects the set tilt
adjustment points.
As the sensor head is adjusted even if the target is tilted,
height and difference in height can be measured correctly.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Example target
5-29
3. Tool Settings
Advanced Tools
Edge Position Tool
„„
A tool used to measure the displacement (X direction) of
the current target in comparison to the edge (step) of the
registered master image. This tool judges whether a target
is OK or NG according to a limit set for the displacement.
Tool settings
Threshold
5
Width/Diameter Tool
„„
Width mode
zz
A tool used to measure the width (X direction) of the current
target in comparison to the width between two edges (steps)
of the registered master image. This tool judges whether a
target is OK or NG according to a limit set for the width.
Tool settings
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Example when the result was NG
Edge
Width s short
Width is long
Example when the result was NG
Diameter mode
zz
A tool used to measure the diameter of the current target
circle in comparison to the diameter of the registered
master image. This tool judges whether a target is OK or
NG according to a limit set for the diameter.
The diameter mode calculates the diameter with the
premise that the target is a perfect circle.
Tool settings
Example when the result was NG
Diameter is small
5-30
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Diameter is big
3. Tool Settings
Calculation Tools
Step/Width Tool
„„
A tool used to measure the step/width between two points
of the current target in comparison to the step (height
difference)/width between two points of the registered
master image. This tool judges whether a target is OK or
NG according to a limit set for the step (height difference)/
width.
Use example for the step/width tool
zz
The step/width tool is useful in the situations below.
€
the detection range is insufficient with one
€When
sensor head
Tool settings
5
For Tool 01 and Tool 02 used for the step/width
calculation, select the already set height tool/
edge position tool.
When measuring the difference in step/width of two
points outside of the detection range of a single sensor
head, you can measure the difference in height by using
the height/edge position tools set for the main unit and
the expansion unit.
Example when the result was NG
Height difference is smaller than the threshold
The measurement value of a tool used with the
step/width tool is the value before ZERO/Offset and
2-point calibration for each tool is applied.
Height difference is larger than the threshold
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-31
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Height difference calculation result = Tool 01 to 02
3. Tool Settings
Thickness Tool
„„
A detection tool to calculate the thickness (height
difference) on the current target using the height data from
two separate points. This tool judges whether a target
is good or not-good based on the thickness differences
between the current target and the registered master image
according to a set threshold.
The thickness tool is only available on a main unit
connected to an expansion unit.
Tool settings
Height measurement
value for main unit (A)
Thickness (A+B)
5
Height measurement value for
expansion unit (B)
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Select a set tool for Tool 01 and Tool 02 to be
used in thickness calculations.
Example when the result was OK
Example when the result was NG
Thicker than the threshold
The measurement value of a tool used with the
thickness tool is the value before ZERO/Offset and
2-point calibration for each tool is applied.
5-32
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Main Screen for the Tool settings
(1)
(2)
(7)
(3)
(4)
(8)
(5)
5
(6)
(1) Title
Displays the program number and program name.
(2) Navigation buttons
Moves between steps in Settings Navigator.
(3) Image type
Displays the image type. [Master] is the registered
master.
(4) Image tool bar
Displays the operation tools for the displayed image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(5) Captured image
Displays the captured image.
(6) Show Laser Position
Displays the position of the laser.
(10)
(11)
(7) Tool settings button
Adds, edits, copies, and deletes the tool.
“Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool” (Page 5-34)
(8) Tool list
Displays a list of tools set in the program. A
measurement value/matching rate and threshold value
is displayed for each tool. Selected added tools are
displayed in an orange frame.
(9) [Back] button
The screen returns to the main screen for Master
Registration.
“2. Master Registration” (Page 5-25)
(10) [Next to STEP4] button
The display moves to the main screen for Output
Assignment.
“4. Output Assignment” (Page 5-79)
(11) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-6)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-33
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
(9)
3. Tool Settings
5 Configure the tool settings.
Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool
Adding a tool
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-3)
2 Display the main screen for the tool settings.
“Step Tool” (Page 5-37)
“Height Tool” (Page 5-43)
“Position Adjustment Tool” (Page 5-49)
“Tilt Adjustment Tool” (Page 5-51)
“Edge Position Tool” (Page 5-52)
“Width/Diameter Tool” (Page 5-59)
“Step/Width Tool” (Page 5-67)
“Thickness Tool” (Page 5-73)
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 5-5)
3 Click the [Add Tool] button.
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
The Select Tool screen opens.
4 Select the tool to be added and click the [OK]
button.
Tools cannot be added in the following
cases:
yyIf 16 tools are already set.
yyIf you tried to add a second tool to a place
where a position adjustment tool is already
set.
yyIf you tried to add a second tool to a place
where a tilt adjustment tool is already set.
yyIf you tried to add a thickness calculation
tool when an expansion unit is not attached
to the main unit.
yyIf you tried to add a step calculation tool
when two or more height-related tools are
not set and when operating without an
expansion unit.
The settings screen for the selected tool opens.
5-34
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Editing a tool
Copying a tool
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
2 Display the main screen for the tool settings.
2 Display the main screen for the tool settings.
3 Select a tool to be edited.
3 Select a tool to be copied.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-3)
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 5-5)
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-3)
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 5-5)
5
4 Click the [Copy] button.
The settings screen for the selected tool opens.
5
Tools cannot be copied in the following
cases:
yyIf 16 tools are already set.
yyIf the tool to be copied is a position
adjustment tool.
yyIf the tool to be copied is a tilt adjustment
tool.
Edit the tool settings.
“Step Tool” (Page 5-37)
“Height Tool” (Page 5-43)
“Position Adjustment Tool” (Page 5-49)
“Tilt Adjustment Tool” (Page 5-51)
“Edge Position Tool” (Page 5-52)
“Width/Diameter Tool” (Page 5-59)
“Step/Width Tool” (Page 5-67)
“Thickness Tool” (Page 5-73)
A confirmation screen opens.
5 Click the [OK] button.
The tool is copied.
The new tool is numbered according to the
smallest unused tool number.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-35
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
4 Click the [Edit] button.
3. Tool Settings
Deleting a tool
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-3)
2 Display the main screen for the tool settings.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 5-5)
3 Select a tool to be deleted.
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
4 Click the [Delete] button.
A confirmation screen appears.
If the tool to be deleted is one of the
following, a confirmation screen appears
indicating as such:
yyThe tool is used in the output assignment.
yyThe tool is being referenced by a
calculation tool.
5 Click the [OK] button.
The tool is deleted.
5-36
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Step Tool
The maximum size of the tool window differs
depending on the measurement method.
If you changed the measurement method,
check the position and size of the tool
window.
Step tool settings
Items
4 Select the Hold mode.
Point A
Measurement Method
Point B
yyHold mode is only displayed if [Peak/
Bottom/P-P Hold] is selected for [Timing
Input] in the detection conditions.
“Timing Input” (Page 5-11)
yyIf Hold mode is changed from [Peak
Hold] or [Bottom Hold] to [Peak to Peak],
a screen to clear ZERO/Offset opens.
Clicking the [OK] button changes the Hold
mode and ZERO/Offset is cleared.
Hold Mode
Shift Value
ZERO/Offset/
Threshold Adjustment
HI
LO
1 Add a step tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 5-34)
€
Hold (default)
€Peak
The maximum value measured during the timing period
is held and used as the judgment value.
Window
3 Select the method to measure the measurement
point.
€
Hold
€Bottom
The minimum value measured during the timing period
is held and used as the judgment value.
€
to Peak
€Peak
The difference between the maximum and the minimum
values measured during the timing period are is held
and used as the judgment value.
€
(default)
€Ave
Sets the average height value in the detection range as
the measurement value.
€
€Max
Sets the maximum height value in the detection range
as the measurement value.
The position of the maximum value is displayed on the
screen when [MAX/MIN] is selected in [Select display].
€
€Min
Sets the minimum height value in the detection range
as the measurement value.
The position of the minimum value is displayed on the
screen when [MAX/MIN] is selected in [Select display].
€
button
€[A↔B]
Clicking this button swaps Point A and Point B.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-37
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
2
Edit the position and size of the tool window.
3. Tool Settings
5 Set “ZERO/Offset Adjustment”.
6 Set a threshold value.
€
Value
€Shift
5
Input ZERO/Offset target value that can be used to shift
the current measurement value to a desired value.
€
button
€[ZERO/Offset]
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Click this button to offset the value so that the
measurement value matches the set target value.
€
€HI
Input the maximum threshold value.
€
€LO
Input the minimum threshold value.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
If you selected [Peak to Peak] for Hold mode,
this button cannot be executed on the Master
screen. Switch to the Test screen to use it.
€
button.
€[Clear]
Click this button to display the Cancel ZERO/Offset
Confirmation screen. Clicking the [OK] button restores
the settings to the values before adjustment.
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
“Configuring settings on the Test image”
(Page 5-42)
5-38
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
yyThe default threshold value differs depending
on the sensor head that is used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
“Configuring settings on the Test image”
(Page 5-42)
3. Tool Settings
7 If needed, click the [Extended Functions] tab to
set the extended functions.
Extended functions for the step tool
Items
Rename Tool
1st Point
2-point Calibration
2nd Point
€
Tool
€Rename
Changes the tool name.
“Rename Tool” (Page 5-39)
Before
Correction
After
Correction
Before
Correction
After
Correction
Averaging area for MAX/MIN Measurement
€
Calibration
€2-point
€
area for MAX/MIN Measurement
€Averaging
Select the size of the range that is the average of the
measurement values.
“Averaging area for MAX/MIN Measurement” (Page
5-41)
5
Hysteresis
Rename Tool
„„
1 Click the [Rename Tool] button.
€
€Hysteresis
Sets the hysteresis for the threshold value.
“Hysteresis” (Page 5-41)
8 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
The Input Tool Name screen opens.
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
The tool name changes and the system returns to the
extended functions screen for the step tool.
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name,
“ABC (Step)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-39
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Adjust the measurement value proportionally to the
adjustment ratio by setting two sets of adjustment points
and their measurement values after adjustment.
“2-point Calibration” (Page 5-40)
3. Tool Settings
2-point Calibration
„„
If there is a difference in the measured value and the actual
dimensions of the target to be measured, this difference
can be corrected. Both the zero point and tilt are corrected.
Display Value
3 Input before and after correction values for the
first point and second point.
Correction
After correcting
second point
Before correcting
second point
After correcting
first point
Before correcting
first point
5
Offset Value
Measurement Value
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
The range for adjustment of the tilt is 0.5 to 2.0
times the value before adjustment. Input values
within this range for before and after correction.
1 Click the [2-point Calibration] button.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault value (before correcting the first and second
points): ---.-- mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the first point): 0.00 mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the second point): 1.00
mm
yyClicking the [Load Curr.Val] button inputs the
current value as the before correction value.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring
the settings. The measurement value being
detected can also be acquired as the current
value.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
The 2-point Calibration Settings screen opens.
4 Click the [Execute] button.
2 Select to enable or disable the function.
If you selected the [Disable] button, click the
[Close] button.
If you selected the [Enable] button, proceed with
the subsequent steps.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
yyDefault value: Disable
5-40
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
5 Click the [OK] button.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
yyTo perform 2-point calibration again, click the
[Readjust] button.
Clicking the [OK] button on the screen that
opens enables you to continue to adjust from
the previous adjustment result.
yyTo initialize the 2-point calibration adjustment
values, click the [Reset] button.
Click [OK] on the Confirm Reset screen that
opens to initialize the adjustment values.
6 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
the step tool.
Averaging area for MAX/MIN Measurement
„„
yyYou can set this when [Max] or [Min] is
selected for the method to measure the
measurement point. You cannot set this setting
when [Ave] is selected for both Point A and
Point B.
yyThe settings are the same for both Point A and
B.
To set hysteresis, Timing Input must be set to
[Sample Hold] and [Latching].
“Timing Input” (Page 5-11)
Judgment Value
HIGH
Threshold
Hysteresis
LOW
Threshold
Hysteresis
Time
HIGH ON
Status Output OFF
GO ON
Status Output OFF
LOW ON
Status Output OFF
In the above timing chart, [N.O.] (default) is set for
the status output format.
For N.C., ON and OFF are inverted.
“N.O./N.C.” (Page 7-24)
1 Sets the hysteresis for the threshold value.
1 Select the average size when measuring the
maximum or minimum values.
yySetting range: 0.00 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault: 0.00 mm
€
€Small
Use this setting to measure small shapes.
€
(With IX-360W connected: default)
€Normal
This setting averages a greater range than [Small].
€
(With a sensor head other than IX-360W
€Large
connected: default)
This setting averages a greater range. The
measurement value is more stable than [Small] and
[Normal].
Shapes smaller than the displayed range have a
value that is the average of the circumference.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-41
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
For a setting for 2-point calibration, refer to the
example for scan mode.
“Setting example for 2-point calibration”
(Page 4-37)
Hysteresis
„„
3. Tool Settings
Configuring settings on the Test image
4 Click the [End Test] button.
1 Click the [Test] button.
The display returns to the Master screen.
5
The Test image opens.
2 You can switch the hold display settings if
needed.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
€
(default)
€Yes
Enables the hold display. The hold image and value
determined by the timing input are displayed.
Clicking the [TIMING] button turns the timing input to on
or off.
If [Peak to Peak] is selected for the Hold mode, a button
is displayed that switches the displayed image between
the peak image and the bottom image.
€
€No
Disables the hold display. The latest sampling image
and measured value are displayed.
3 Configure the settings.
The following items can be set on the Test screen.
yyZERO/Offset
“5 Set “ZERO/Offset Adjustment”.” (Page 5-38)
yyLimit Adjustment
“6 Set a threshold value.” (Page 5-38)
yyHysteresis
“Hysteresis” (Page 5-41)
5-42
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
4 Select the Hold mode.
Height Tool
yyHold mode is only displayed if [Peak/
Bottom/P-P Hold] is selected for [Timing
Input] in the detection conditions.
“Timing Input” (Page 5-11)
yyIf Hold mode is changed from [Peak
Hold] or [Bottom Hold] to [Peak to Peak],
a screen to clear ZERO/Offset opens.
Clicking the [OK] button changes the Hold
mode and ZERO/Offset is cleared.
Setting the height tool
Items
Measurement Method
Measurement Method
Hold Mode
Shift Value
ZERO/Offset/
Limit Adjustment
HI
LO
1 Add the height tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 5-34)
5
2 Edit the position and size of the tool window.
The maximum value measured during the timing period
is held and used as the judgment value.
€
Hold
€Bottom
The minimum value measured during the timing period
is held and used as the judgment value.
Tool window
3 Select the measurement method for the window.
€
to Peak
€Peak
The difference between the maximum and minimum
values measured during the time period is held and
used as the judgment value.
€
(default)
€Ave
Sets the average height value in the detection range as
the measurement value.
€
€Max
Sets the maximum height value in the detection range
as the measurement value.
The position of the maximum value is displayed on the
screen when [MAX/MIN] is selected in [Select display].
€
€Min
Sets the minimum height value in the detection range
as the measurement value.
The position of the minimum value is displayed on the
screen when [MAX/MIN] is selected in [Select display].
The maximum size of the tool window differs
depending on the measurement method.
If you changed the measurement method,
check the position and size of the tool window.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-43
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
€
Hold (default)
€Peak
3. Tool Settings
5 Set “ZERO/Offset/Limit Adjustment”.
6 Set a threshold value.
€
Value
€Shift
5
Input ZERO/Offset target value that can be used to shift
the current measurement value to a desired value.
€
button
€[ZERO/Offset]
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Click this button to offset the value so that the
measurement value matches the set target value.
€
€HI
Input the maximum threshold value.
€
€LO
Input the minimum threshold value.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
If you selected [Peak to Peak] for Hold mode,
this button cannot be executed on the Master
screen. Switch to the Test screen to use it.
€
button
€[Clear]
Click this button to display the Cancel ZERO/Offset
Confirmation screen. Clicking the [OK] button restores
the settings to the values before adjustment.
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
“Configuring settings on the Test image”
(Page 5-48)
5-44
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
yyThe default threshold value differs depending
on the sensor head that is used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
“Configuring settings on the Test image”
(Page 5-48)
3. Tool Settings
7 If needed, click the [Extended Functions] tab to
set the extended functions.
Extended functions for the height tool
Items
Rename Tool
1st Point
2-point Calibration
2nd Point
€
Tool
€Rename
Changes the tool name.
“Rename Tool” (Page 5-45)
Before
Correction
After
Correction
Before
Correction
After
Correction
Averaging area for MAX/MIN Measurement
€
Calibration
€2-point
€
area for MAX/MIN Measurement
€Averaging
Select the size of the range that is the average of the
measurement values.
“Averaging area for MAX/MIN Measurement” (Page
5-47)
5
Hysteresis
Rename Tool
„„
1 Click the [Rename Tool] button.
€
€Hysteresis
Sets the hysteresis for the threshold value.
“Hysteresis” (Page 5-47)
8 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
The Input Tool Name screen opens.
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
The tool name changes and the system returns to the
extended functions screen for the height tool.
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name,
“ABC (Height)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-45
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Adjust the measurement value proportionally to the
adjustment ratio by setting two sets of adjustment points
and their measurement values after adjustment.
“2-point Calibration” (Page 5-46)
3. Tool Settings
2-point Calibration
„„
If there is a difference in the measured value and the actual
dimensions of the target to be measured, this difference
can be corrected. Both the zero point and tilt are corrected.
Display Value
3 Input before and after correction values for the
first point and second point.
Correction
After correcting
second point
Before correcting
second point
After correcting
first point
Before correcting
first point
5
Offset Value
Measurement Value
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
The range for adjustment of the tilt is 0.5 to 2.0
times the value before adjustment. Input values
within this range for before and after correction.
1 Click the [2-point Calibration] button.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault value (before correcting the first and second
points): ---.-- mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the first point): 0.00 mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the second point): 1.00
mm
yyClicking the [Load Curr.Val] button inputs the
current value as the before correction value.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring
the settings. The measurement value being
detected can also be acquired as the current
value.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
The 2-point Calibration Settings screen opens.
4 Click the [Execute] button.
2 Select to enable or disable the function.
If you selected the [Disable] button, click the
[Close] button.
If you selected the [Enable] button, proceed with
the subsequent steps.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
yyDefault value: Disable
5-46
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
5 Click the [OK] button.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
yyTo perform 2-point calibration again, click the
[Readjust] button.
Clicking the [OK] button on the screen that
appears enables you to continue to adjust
from the previous adjustment result.
yyTo initialize the 2-point calibration adjustment
values, click the [Reset] button.
Click [OK] on the Confirm Reset screen that
appears to initialize the adjustment values.
6 Click the [Close] button.
The display returns to the extended functions screen for
the height tool.
To set hysteresis, Timing Input must be set to
[Sample Hold] and [Latching].
“Timing Input” (Page 5-11)
Judgment Value
HIGH
Threshold
LOW
Threshold
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Time
HIGH Status ON
Output OFF
GO Status ON
Output OFF
LOW Status ON
Output OFF
In the above timing chart, [N.O.] (default) is set for
the status output format.
For N.C., ON and OFF are inverted.
“N.O./N.C.” (Page 7-24)
1 Sets the hysteresis for the threshold value.
Averaging area for MAX/MIN Measurement
„„
You can set this setting when [Max] or [Min]
is selected for the method to measure the
measurement point. You cannot set this setting
when [Ave] is selected.
1 Select the average size when measuring the
maximum or minimum values.
yySetting range: 0.00 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault: 0.00 mm
€
€Small
Use this setting to measure small shapes.
€
(With IX-360W connected: default)
€Normal
This setting averages a greater range than [Small].
€
(With a sensor head other than IX-360W
€Large
connected: default)
This setting averages a greater range. The
measurement value is more stable than [Small] and
[Normal].
Shapes smaller than the displayed range have a
value that is the average of the circumference.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-47
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
For a setting for 2-point calibration, refer to the
example for scan mode.
“Setting example (1) for 2-point calibration”
(Page 4-43)
“Setting example (2) for 2-point calibration”
(Page 4-44)
Hysteresis
„„
3. Tool Settings
Configuring settings on the Test image
4 Click the [End Test] button.
1 Click the [Test] button.
The display returns to the Master screen.
5
The Test image opens.
2 You can switch the hold display settings if
needed.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
€
(default)
€Yes
Enables the hold display. The hold image and value
determined by the timing input are displayed.
Clicking the [TIMING] button turns the timing input to on
or off.
If [Peak to Peak] is selected for the Hold mode, a button
is displayed that switches the displayed image between
the peak image and the bottom image.
€
€No
Disables the hold display. The latest sampling image
and measured value are displayed.
3 Configure the settings.
The following items can be set on the Test screen.
yyZERO/Offset
“5 Set “ZERO/Offset/Limit Adjustment”.” (Page
5-44)
yyLimit Adjustment
“6 Set a threshold value.” (Page 5-44)
yyHysteresis
“Hysteresis” (Page 5-47)
5-48
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
4 Select a method to detect the edge.
Position Adjustment Tool
Setting the position adjustment tool
The selected edge is displayed in green. Edge
candidates are displayed in yellow.
Items
Step shape
Detection method
Edge No.
Edge Sensitivity
1 Add the position adjustment tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 5-34)
Selected Edge
2 Edit the position and size of the tool window.
€
step (default)
€Maximum
Detects the maximum step from the applicable step
shapes.
Detects the three maximum steps of the applicable step
shapes from the left.
€
edge (from right)
€Specified
Detects the three maximum steps of the applicable step
shapes from the right.
Window
3 Select the shape of the step to be detected as an
edge.
5 When [Specified edge (from left)] or [Specified
edge (from right)] is selected, select an edge to
be detected from the edge candidates.
(1) Set the edge detection sensitivity.
€ (default)
€A
Detects the height difference rising on the laser position
display from left to right of the screen as an edge.
€
€B
Detects the height difference falling on the laser position
display from left to right of the screen as an edge.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
5-49
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
€
edge (from left)
€Specified
5
3. Tool Settings
(2) Specify an edge to be detected.
yySetting range: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
yyDefault: 1st
yyYou can specify an edge by clicking an edge
candidate displayed on the screen.
yyIf the edge for the specified number does not
exist, the candidate edge is displayed in red.
yyIf the edge is not specified, tool setting cannot
be completed.
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
6 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
There are no items to be set on the extended
functions tab for the position adjustment tool.
5-50
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
4 Click the [OK] button.
Tilt Adjustment Tool
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
Setting the tilt adjustment tool
1 Add the tilt adjustment tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 5-34)
2 Place Point A and Point B on the reference
surface. Adjust the position and size of the tool
window.
The laser position after tilt adjustment is displayed with
a broken green line.
Placing Point A and Point B in the following
way stabilizes the adjustment:
yyPlace Point A and Point B as far apart as
possible.
yyMake the tool window as large as possible.
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
If a step tool or height tool is already
added, this tilt adjustment tool changes
the measurement value. Depending on the
details of the tilt adjustment, a window may
not be placed on the place location that the
step tool or height tool was placed. Check
the step tool and height tool settings and
make any changes as needed.
Tilt adjustment cannot be performed in the
following cases:
yyPosition adjustment failed (“Measure When
Position Adjustment Fails” is [No]).
yyThe tilt of the target exceeds the adjustable
range.
yyThe measurement range in one or both tool
windows is insufficient.
yyOne or both tool windows are protruding
outside of the detection range.
yyOne or both of the windows are outside
of the measurement range or if the light
intensity is too great or insufficient.
3 Click the [OK] button.
A confirmation screen appears.
If a step tool or height tool is not set, the
confirmation screen does not appear.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-51
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Window
yyThere are no items to be set on the extended
functions tab for the tilt adjustment tool.
yyPosition adjustment and then tilt adjustment
will be processed.
yyThe height above the green dotted line and
adjustment result is 0 mm.
3. Tool Settings
3 Select the shape of the step to be detected as an
Edge Position Tool
edge.
Setting the Edge Position Tool
Items
Detection edge type
Measurement Method
Detection
method
Edge No.
Edge Sensitivity
Hold Mode
€ (default)
€A
Shift Value
ZERO/Offset/
Limit Adjustment
5
Detects the height difference rising on the laser position
display from left to right of the screen as an edge.
HI
LO
€
€B
Detects the height difference falling on the laser position
display from left to right of the screen as an edge.
1 Add the edge position tool.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
“Adding a tool” (Page 5-34)
2 Edit the position and size of the tool window.
Window
4 Select a method to detect the edge.
The selected edge is displayed in green. Edge
candidates are displayed in yellow.
Selected Edge
In the initial state, the point of 0 mm is
approximately at the center of the screen.
Clicking the [Live View] button enables you
to adjust settings while looking at the current
detection status.
Click the [End Live View] button to return to the
original screen.
€
step (default)
€Maximum
Detects the maximum step from the applicable step
shapes.
€
edge (from left)
€Specified
Detects the three maximum steps of the applicable step
shapes from the left.
€
edge (from right)
€Specified
Detects the three maximum steps of the applicable step
shapes from the right.
5-52
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
5 When [Specified edge (from left)] or [Specified
edge (from right)] is selected, select an edge to
be detected from the edge candidates.
(1) Set the edge detection sensitivity.
[Set] button.
The settings screen for the measurement method
opens.
After editing a measurement point, click the [Close]
button.
8 Select the Hold mode.
yyHold mode is only displayed if [Peak/
Bottom/P-P Hold] is selected for [Timing
Input] in the detection conditions.
“Timing Input” (Page 5-11)
yyIf Hold mode is changed from [Peak
Hold] or [Bottom Hold] to [Peak to Peak],
a screen to clear ZERO/Offset opens.
Clicking the [OK] button changes the Hold
mode and ZERO/Offset is cleared.
(2) Specify an edge to be detected.
yySetting range: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
yyDefault: 1st
yyYou can specify an edge by clicking an edge
candidate displayed on the screen.
yyIf the edge for the specified number does
not exist, the window frame is displayed in
red. If the setting is exited with the situation
unchanged, the judgment is not correctly
performed and the status remains as ALM.
€
Hold (default)
€Peak
The maximum value measured during the sampling
period is held and used as the judgment value.
€
Hold
€Bottom
The minimum value measured during the sampling
period is held and used as the judgment value.
€
to Peak
€Peak
The difference between the maximum value and the
minimum value measured during the sampling period is
held and used as the judgment value.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-53
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Clicking the [Live View] button enables you
to adjust settings while looking at the current
detection status.
Click the [End Live View] button to return to the
original screen.
6 Click the [Next] button.
7 To change the measurement method, click the
3. Tool Settings
10 Set a threshold value.
9 Set the ZERO/Offset adjustment.
€
Value
€Shift
5
Input ZERO/Offset target value that can be used to shift
the current measurement value to a desired value.
€
button
€[ZERO/Offset]
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Click this button to offset the value so that the
measurement value matches the set target value.
€
€HI
Input the maximum threshold value.
€
€LO
Input the minimum threshold value.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
If you selected [Peak to Peak] for Hold mode,
this button cannot be executed on the Master
screen. Switch to the Test screen to use it.
€
button
€[Clear]
Click this button to display the Cancel ZERO/Offset
Confirmation screen. Clicking the [OK] button restores
the settings to the values before adjustment.
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
“Setting on the Test screen” (Page 5-58)
5-54
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
yyThe default threshold value differs depending
on the sensor head that is used.
“Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Edge
Position]” (Page A-36)
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
“Setting on the Test screen” (Page 5-58)
3. Tool Settings
click the [Extended Functions] tab to
11 Ifsetneeded,
the extended functions.
Extended Function of the Edge Position Tool
Items
Tool Name
1st Point
2-point Calibration
2nd Point
Before Corr.
After Corr.
Before Corr.
After Corr.
Hysteresis
€
Name
€Tool
Tool Name
„„
Changes the tool name.
“Tool Name” (Page 5-55)
€
Calibration
€2-point
5
€
€Hysteresis
Sets the hysteresis for the threshold value.
“Hysteresis” (Page 5-57)
12 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
The tool name input screen opens.
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
The tool name changes and the system returns to the
extended functions screen for the edge position tool.
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name,
“ABC (Edge Position)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-55
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Adjust the measurement value proportionally to the
adjustment ratio by setting two sets of adjustment points
and their measurement values after adjustment.
“2-point Calibration” (Page 5-56)
1 Click the [Tool Name] button.
3. Tool Settings
2-point Calibration
„„
If there is a difference in the measured value and the actual
dimensions of the target to be measured, this difference
can be corrected. Both the zero point and tilt are corrected.
3 Input before and after correction values for the
first point and second point.
Correction
Display Value
After correcting second point
Before correcting second
point
After correcting first point
Before correcting first point
5
Offset Value
Measurement Value
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
The range for adjustment of the tilt is 0.5 to 2.0
times the value before adjustment. Input values
within this range for before and after correction.
1 Click the [2-point Calibration] button.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault value (before correcting the first and second
points): ---.-- mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the first point): 0.00 mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the second point): 1.00
mm
yyClicking the [Load Curr.Val] button inputs the
current value as the before correction value.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring
the settings. The measurement value being
detected can also be acquired as the current
value.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
The 2-point Calibration Settings screen opens.
4 Click the [Execute] button.
2 Select to enable or disable the function.
If you selected the [Disable] button, click the
[Close] button.
If you selected the [Enable] button, proceed with
the subsequent steps.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
yyDefault value: Disable
5-56
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
5 Click the [OK] button.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
yyTo perform 2-point calibration again, click the
[Readjust] button.
Clicking the [OK] button on the screen that
opens enables you to continue to adjust from
the previous adjustment result.
yyTo initialize the 2-point calibration adjustment
values, click the [Reset] button.
Click [OK] on the Confirm Reset screen that
opens to initialize the adjustment values.
6 Click the [Close] button.
The system returns to the extended functions screen of
the tool.
To set hysteresis, Timing Input must be set to
[Sample Hold] and [Latching].
“Timing Input” (Page 5-11)
Judgment Value
HIGH
Threshold
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
LOW
Threshold
Time
HIGH ON
Status Output No
GO ON
Status Output No
LOW ON
Status Output No
In the above timing chart, [N.O.] (default) is set for
the status output format.
For N.C., ON and OFF are inverted.
“N.O./N.C.” (Page 7-24)
1 Sets the hysteresis for the threshold value.
yySetting range: 0.00 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault: 0.00 mm
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-57
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
For a setting for 2-point calibration, refer to the
example for scan mode.
“Setting example for 2-point calibration”
(Page 4-37)
Hysteresis
„„
3. Tool Settings
4 Click the [End Test] button.
Setting on the Test screen
1 Click the [Test] button.
The display returns to the Master screen.
5
The Test image opens.
2 You can switch the hold display settings if
needed.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
€
(default)
€Yes
Enables the hold display. The hold image and value
determined by the timing input are displayed.
Clicking the [TIMING] button turns the timing input to on
or off.
If [Peak to Peak] is selected for the Hold mode, a button
is displayed that switches the displayed image between
the peak image and the bottom image.
€
€No
Disables the hold display. The latest sampling image
and measured value are displayed.
3 Configure the settings.
The following items can be set on the Test screen.
yyZERO/Offset
“9 Set the ZERO/Offset adjustment.” (Page 5-54)
yyLimit Adjustment
“10 Set a threshold value.” (Page 5-54)
yyHysteresis
“Hysteresis” (Page 5-57)
5-58
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
4 If the edge you want to measure has not been
Width/Diameter Tool
extracted, adjust the edge sensitivity.
As the edge sensitivity increases, steps with smaller
height differences can be recognized as edges.
Setting the Width/Diameter Tool
Items
Measurement Method
Edge Sensitivity
Mask
Shift Value
ZERO/Offset/
Limit Adjustment
HI
LO
Judgment mode: Width
zz
5 If necessary, set a mask.
1 Add the width/diameter tool.
6 Click the [Next] button.
“Mask” (Page 5-62)
“Adding a tool” (Page 5-34)
2 Select [Width] for the judgment mode and click
the [OK] button.
Judgment mode: Diameter
zz
1 Add the width/diameter tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 5-34)
The judgment mode selection screen opens.
2 Select [Diameter] for the judgment mode and
click the [OK] button.
3 Edit the position and size of the tool window.
3 Edit the position and size of the tool window.
Window
yyWhen multiple edges exist, they are
displayed as follows:
yyGreen line: Currently selected edges
yyYellow line: Candidate edge not selected
yyDragging the green line to the yellow line
enables you to change the selection of
edge.
Window
Clicking the [Live View] button enables you
to adjust settings while looking at the current
detection status.
Click the [End Live View] button to return to the
original screen.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-59
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
The judgment mode selection screen opens.
5
Adjust settings common to width/diameter.
“Common” (Page 5-60)
3. Tool Settings
Edit the tool window so that it can include
the entire target that you want to detect.
Note that in the following cases, edit the tool
window so that it can include the target only.
yyWhen the target is too large to be fit within
the sensor view
<When adjusting the set tool window>
Click the [Measurement Pos.] button.
The edit screen of the tool window opens.
After editing the measurement point, click the [Close]
button.
Common
zz
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
yyWhen the background is not flat
1 Select the Hold mode.
yyHold mode is only displayed if [Peak/
Bottom/P-P Hold] is selected for [Timing
Input] in the detection conditions.
“Timing Input” (Page 5-11)
yyIf Hold mode is changed from [Peak
Hold] or [Bottom Hold] to [Peak to Peak],
a screen to clear ZERO/Offset opens.
Clicking the [OK] button changes the Hold
mode and ZERO/Offset is cleared.
Clicking the [Live View] button enables you
to adjust settings while looking at the current
detection status.
Click the [End Live View] button to return to the
original screen.
4 If necessary, set a mask.
“Mask” (Page 5-62)
5 Click the [Next] button.
Make settings common to width/diameter.
“Common” (Page 5-60)
€
Hold (default)
€Peak
The maximum value measured during the sampling
period is held and used as the judgment value.
€
Hold
€Bottom
The minimum value measured during the sampling
period is held and used as the judgment value.
€
to Peak
€Peak
The difference between the maximum value and the
minimum value measured during the sampling period is
held and used as the judgment value.
5-60
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
2 Set the ZERO/Offset adjustment.
3 Set a threshold value.
€
Value
€Shift
Input ZERO/Offset target value that can be used to shift
the current measurement value to a desired value.
€
button
€[ZERO/Offset]
Input the maximum threshold value.
5
€
€LO
Input the minimum threshold value.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
If you selected [Peak to Peak] for Hold mode,
this button cannot be executed on the Master
screen. Switch to the Test screen to use it.
€
button
€[Clear]
Click this button to display the Cancel ZERO/Offset
Confirmation screen. Clicking the [OK] button restores
the settings to the values before adjustment.
yyThe default threshold value differs depending
on the sensor head that is used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
“Setting
����������������������������������������
on the Test screen” (Page 5-66)
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
“Setting on the Test screen” (Page 5-66)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-61
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Click this button to offset the value so that the
measurement value matches the set target value.
€
€HI
3. Tool Settings
4 If needed, click the [Extended Functions] tab to
set the extended functions.
Mask
„„
The masked region is excluded from the edge detection
target.
1 Click the [Mask] button.
€
Name
€Tool
Changes the tool name.
“Tool
�����������������������
Name” (Page 5-63)
5
€
Extraction Method (Only when the
€Width
judgment mode is [Width])
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Select the method of extracting the width of the target
(Width Mode).
“Width Extraction Method (Only when the judgment
mode is [Width])” (Page 5-63)
The Mask Settings screen opens.
2 Click the [Add Mask] button.
€
Calibration
€2-point
Adjust the measurement value proportionally to the
adjustment ratio by setting two sets of adjustment points
and their measurement values after adjustment.
“2-point Calibration” (Page 5-64)
€
€Hysteresis
€
button
€[Clear]
Sets the hysteresis for the threshold value.
“Hysteresis” (Page 5-65)
5 Click the [OK] button.
Clicking this button resets the mask.
The Add Mask screen opens.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
3 Edit the position and size of the mask.
Mask
Only one point can be set for the mask.
4 Click the [Close] button.
The system returns to the setting screen of the tool.
5-62
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Extended Functions of the Width/Diameter
Tool
Items
Width Extraction Method (Only when the
„„
judgment mode is [Width])
1 Click the [Width Extraction Method] button.
Tool Name
Width Extraction Method
(Only when the judgment mode is [Width])
1st Point
2-point Calibration
2nd Point
Before Corr.
After Corr.
Before Corr.
After Corr.
Hysteresis
Click the [Tool Name] button.
€
Wid.
€Mas.
The tool name input screen opens.
2
Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
Extracts width that is close to the width of the registered
master.
€
€Outside
Extracts width by searching from the outside of the tool
window toward the center.
€
€Inside
The tool name changes and the system returns to the
extended functions screen for the Width/Diameter tool.
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(judgment_mode_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name
with the judgment mode of [Width],
“ABC (Width)” is displayed.
e.g.: ‌When “DEF” is input for the tool name
with the judgment mode of [Diameter],
“DEF (Diameter)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
Extracts width by searching from the center of the tool
window toward outside.
When [Inside] is selected, the center line is
displayed.
[Inside] requires edges on both sides of the
center line. Even when there are two or more
candidate edges within the tool window,
if two edges are both on either side of the
center line, the status will be ALM.
3 Click the [Close] button.
The system returns to the extended functions screen of
the tool.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-63
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
1
5
2 Select the width extraction method.
Tool Name
„„
3. Tool Settings
2-point Calibration
„„
If there is a difference in the measured value and the actual
dimensions of the target to be measured, this difference
can be corrected. Both the zero point and tilt are corrected.
3 Input before and after correction values for the
first point and second point.
Correction
Display Value
After correcting second point
Before correcting second
point
After correcting first point
Before correcting first point
5
Offset Value
Measurement Value
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
The range for adjustment of the tilt is 0.5 to 2.0
times the value before adjustment. Input values
within this range for before and after correction.
1 Click the [2-point Calibration] button.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault value (before correcting the first and second
points): ---.-- mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the first point): 0.00 mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the second point): 1.00
mm
yyClicking the [Load Curr.Val] button inputs the
current value as the before correction value.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring
the settings. The measurement value being
detected can also be acquired as the current
value.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
4 Click the [Execute] button.
The 2-point Calibration Settings screen opens.
2 Select to enable or disable the function.
If you selected the [Disable] button, click the
[Close] button.
If you selected the [Enable] button, proceed with
the subsequent steps.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
yyDefault value: Disable
5-64
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
5 Click the [OK] button.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
yyTo perform 2-point calibration again, click the
[Readjust] button.
Clicking the [OK] button on the screen that
opens enables you to continue to adjust from
the previous adjustment result.
yyTo initialize the 2-point calibration adjustment
values, click the [Reset] button.
Click [OK] on the Confirm Reset screen that
opens to initialize the adjustment values.
6 Click the [Close] button.
The system returns to the extended functions screen of
the tool.
To set hysteresis, Timing Input must be set to
[Sample Hold] and [Latching].
“Timing Input” (Page 5-11)
Judgment Value
HIGH
Threshold
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
LOW
Threshold
Time
HIGH ON
Status Output No
GO ON
Status Output No
LOW ON
Status Output No
In the above timing chart, [N.O.] (default) is set for
the status output format.
For N.C., ON and OFF are inverted.
“N.O./N.C.” (Page 7-24)
1 Sets the hysteresis for the threshold value.
yySetting range: 0.00 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault: 0.00 mm
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-65
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
For a setting for 2-point calibration, refer to the
example for scan mode.
“Setting example for 2-point calibration”
(Page 4-37)
Hysteresis
„„
3. Tool Settings
4 Click the [End Test] button.
Setting on the Test screen
1 Click the [Test] button.
The display returns to the Master screen.
5
The Test image opens.
2 You can switch the hold display settings if
needed.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
€
(default)
€Yes
Enables the hold display. The hold image and value
determined by the timing input are displayed.
Clicking the [TIMING] button turns the timing input to on
or off.
If [Peak to Peak] is selected for the Hold mode, a button
is displayed that switches the displayed image between
the peak image and the bottom image.
€
€No
Disables the hold display. The latest sampling image
and measured value are displayed.
3 Configure the settings.
The following items can be set on the Test screen.
yyZERO/Offset
“2 Set the ZERO/Offset adjustment.” (Page 5-61)
yyLimit Adjustment
“3 Set a threshold value.” (Page 5-61)
yyHysteresis
“Hysteresis” (Page 5-65)
5-66
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Step/Width Tool
yyIf only the main unit is used or setup is on
the expansion unit:
yyOnly height tools and edge position tools
are displayed on the drop-down list.
yyWhen setup is on the expansion unit, the
main unit tools will not be displayed on
the drop-down list.
yyIf setup is on the main unit that the
expansion unit is connected to:
yyThe expansion unit's tools are displayed
below the main unit's tools on the dropdown list.
yyThe expansion unit tools will only be
displayed as a tool number. The tool
name will not be displayed.
Setting the Step/Width Tool
Items
A
Calculation target
B
Hold Mode
Shift Value
ZERO/Offset/
Limit Adjustment
HI
LO
yyIf an expansion unit tool is used in
calculations, the calculation result is not
displayed on the Master screen. To configure
the settings while checking the calculation
results, switch to the Test screen.
yyThe expansion unit sampling frequency is the
same as the sampling frequency setting for
the main unit.
1 Add the step/width tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 5-34)
2 Select the calculation target tool.
3 Select the Hold mode.
yyHold mode is only displayed if [Peak/
Bottom/P-P Hold] is selected for [Timing
Input] in the detection conditions.
“Timing Input” (Page 5-11)
yyIf Hold mode is changed from [Peak
Hold] or [Bottom Hold] to [Peak to Peak],
a screen to clear ZERO/Offset opens.
Clicking the [OK] button changes the Hold
mode and ZERO/Offset is cleared.
€
Hold (default)
€Peak
The maximum value measured during the timing period
is held and used as the judgment value.
€
Hold
€Bottom
The minimum value measured during the timing period
is held and used as the judgment value.
€
to Peak
€Peak
The difference between the maximum value and the
minimum value measured during the timing period is
held and used as the judgment value.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-67
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
yyAt least two height tools or edge position tools
must be added in advance to add the step/
width tool.
yyThe following conditions must be met to
perform step/width calculation using an
expansion unit tool. A calculation error occurs
if the conditions are not met.
“Displaying the Limit Adjustment screen”
(Page 6-11)
yyThe sensor displayed on IX-Navigator must
be the main unit.
yyAn expansion unit must be connected when
the main unit is powered on.
yyThe expansion unit must be operating.
yyThe expansion unit must be in line mode.
yyThe expansion unit tool must be the height
tool or edge position tool.
3. Tool Settings
4 Set “ZERO/Offset/Limit Adjustment”.
5 Set a threshold value.
€
Value
€Shift
5
Input ZERO/Offset target value that can be used to shift
the current measurement value to a desired value.
€
button
€[ZERO/Offset]
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Click this button to offset the value so that the
measurement value matches the set target value.
€
€HI
Input the maximum threshold value.
€
€LO
Input the minimum threshold value.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
If you selected [Peak to Peak] for Hold mode,
this button cannot be executed on the Master
screen. Switch to the Test screen to use it.
€
button.
€[Clear]
Click this button to display the Cancel ZERO/Offset
Confirmation screen. Clicking the [OK] button restores
the settings to the values before adjustment.
ZERO/Offset adjustment will be performed
on the calculation results. Even if ZERO/
Offset is performed on the calculation target
tools separately, the calculation result of the
step/width tool will not change.
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
If the expansion unit tool is selected for
calculation and the expansion unit is not
operating, a screen will appear prompting you to
put the expansion unit into run mode.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
“Configuring settings on the Test image”
(Page 5-72)
5-68
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
yyThe default threshold value differs depending
on the sensor head that is used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
If the expansion unit tool is selected for
calculation and the expansion unit is not
operating, a screen will appear prompting you
to put the expansion unit into run mode.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
“Configuring settings on the Test image”
(Page 5-72)
3. Tool Settings
6 If needed, click the [Extended Functions] tab to
set the extended functions.
Extended Functions for the Step/Width Tool
Items
Rename Tool
1st Point
2-point Calibration
2nd Point
€
Tool
€Rename
Changes the tool name.
“Rename Tool” (Page 5-69)
Before
Correction
After
Correction
Before
Correction
After
Correction
Hysteresis
€
Calibration
€2-point
5
Rename Tool
„„
1 Click the [Rename Tool] button.
€
€Hysteresis
Sets the hysteresis for the threshold value.
“Hysteresis” (Page 5-71)
7 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
The Input Tool Name screen opens.
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
The tool name is changed and the system returns to the
extended functions screen of the step/width tool.
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name,
“ABC (Step/Width)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-69
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Adjust the measurement value proportionally to the
adjustment ratio by setting two sets of adjustment points
and their measurement values after adjustment.
“2-point Calibration” (Page 5-70)
3. Tool Settings
2-point Calibration
„„
If there is a difference in the measured value and the actual
dimensions of the target to be measured, this difference
can be corrected. Both the zero point and tilt are corrected.
Display Value
3 Input before and after correction values for the
first point and second point.
Correction
After correcting
second point
Before correcting
second point
After correcting
first point
Before correcting
first point
5
Offset Value
Measurement Value
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
The range for adjustment of the tilt is 0.5 to 2.0
times the value before adjustment. Input values
within this range for before and after correction.
1 Click the [2-point Calibration] button.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault value (before correcting the first and second
points): ---.-- mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the first point): 0.00 mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the second point): 1.00
mm
yyClicking the [Load Curr.Val] button inputs the
current value as the before correction value.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring
the settings. The measurement value being
detected can also be acquired as the current
value.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
The 2-point Calibration Settings screen opens.
2 Select to enable or disable the function.
4 Click the [Execute] button.
If you selected the [Disable] button, click the
[Close] button.
If you selected the [Enable] button, proceed with
the subsequent steps.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
yyDefault value: Disable
5-70
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
5 Click the [OK] button.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
2-point calibration will be performed on the
calculation results. Even if 2-point calibration
is performed on the calculation target tools
separately, the calculation result of the step/
width tool will not change.
yyTo perform 2-point calibration again, click the
[Readjust] button.
Clicking the [OK] button on the screen that
appears enables you to continue to adjust
from the previous adjustment result.
yyTo initialize the 2-point calibration adjustment
values, click the [Reset] button.
Click [OK] on the Confirm Reset screen that
appears to initialize the adjustment values.
The system returns to the extended functions screen of
the step/width tool.
For a setting for 2-point calibration, refer to the
example for scan mode.
“Setting example for 2-point calibration”
(Page 4-101)
To set hysteresis, Timing Input must be set to
[Sample Hold] and [Latching].
“Timing Input” (Page 5-11)
Judgment Value
HIGH
Threshold
LOW
Threshold
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Time
HIGH Status ON
Output OFF
GO Status ON
Output OFF
LOW Status ON
Output OFF
In the above timing chart, [N.O.] (default) is set for
the status output format.
For N.C., ON and OFF are inverted.
“N.O./N.C.” (Page 7-24)
1 Sets the hysteresis for the threshold value.
yySetting range: 0.00 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault: 0.00 mm
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-71
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
6 Click the [Close] button.
Hysteresis
„„
3. Tool Settings
Configuring settings on the Test image
4 Click the [End Test] button.
1 Click the [Test] button.
The display returns to the Master screen.
5
The Test image opens.
2 You can switch the hold display settings if
needed.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
€
(default)
€Yes
Enables the hold display. The hold image and value
determined by the timing input are displayed.
Clicking the [TIMING] button turns the timing input to on
or off.
If [Peak to Peak] is selected for the Hold mode, a button
is displayed that switches the displayed image between
the peak image and the bottom image.
€
€No
Disables the hold display. The latest sampling image
and measured value are displayed.
3 Configure the settings.
The following items can be set on the Test screen.
yyZERO/Offset
“4 Set “ZERO/Offset/Limit Adjustment”.” (Page
5-68)
yyLimit Adjustment
“5 Set a threshold value.” (Page 5-68)
yyHysteresis
“Hysteresis” (Page 5-71)
5-72
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
Thickness Tool
yyOnly the height tool is displayed for main
unit tools.
yyThe expansion unit tools will only be
displayed as a tool number. The tool name
will not be displayed.
Setting the Thickness Tool
Items
3 Select the Hold mode.
A (Main)
Calculation Target
B (Expansion)
yyHold mode is only displayed if [Peak/
Bottom/P-P Hold] is selected for [Timing
Input] in the detection conditions.
“Timing Input” (Page 5-11)
yyIf Hold mode is changed from [Peak
Hold] or [Bottom Hold] to [Peak to Peak],
a screen to clear ZERO/Offset opens.
Clicking the [OK] button changes the Hold
mode and ZERO/Offset is cleared.
Hold Mode
Shift Value
ZERO/Offset/
Limit Adjustment
HI
LO
yyThe calculation results for the thickness tool
are not displayed on the Master screen. To
configure the settings while checking the
calculation results, switch to the Test screen.
yyThe expansion unit sampling frequency is the
same as the sampling frequency setting for
the main unit.
€
Hold (default)
€Peak
The maximum value measured during the timing period
is held and used as the judgment value.
€
Hold
€Bottom
The minimum value measured during the timing period
is held and used as the judgment value.
€
to Peak
€Peak
The difference between the maximum value and the
minimum value measured during the timing period is
held and used as the judgment value.
1 Add the thickness tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 5-34)
2 Select the calculation target tool.
yyA: The main unit tools are displayed.
yyB: The expansion unit tools are displayed.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-73
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
yyTo add the thickness tool, at least one height
tool must be added in advance to the main
unit.
yyThe following conditions must be met to
perform calculation. A calculation error occurs
if the conditions are not met.
“Displaying the Limit Adjustment screen”
(Page 6-11)
yyThe sensor displayed on IX-Navigator must
be the main unit.
yyAn expansion unit must be connected when
the main unit is powered on.
yyThe expansion unit must be operating.
yyThe expansion unit must be in line mode.
yyThe expansion unit tool must be the height
tool.
3. Tool Settings
4 Set “ZERO/Offset/Limit Adjustment”.
5 Set a threshold value.
€
Value
€Shift
5
Input ZERO/Offset target value that can be used to shift
the current measurement value to a desired value.
€
button
€[ZERO/Offset]
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Click this button to offset the value so that the
measurement value matches the set target value.
€
€HI
Input the maximum threshold value.
€
€LO
Input the minimum threshold value.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
If you selected [Peak to Peak] for Hold mode,
this button cannot be executed on the Master
screen. Switch to the Test screen to use it.
€
button
€[Clear]
Click this button to display the Cancel ZERO/Offset
Confirmation screen. Clicking the [OK] button restores
the settings to the values before adjustment.
ZERO/Offset adjustment will be performed
on the calculation results. Even if ZERO/
Offset is performed by the calculation target
tool separately, the calculation result of the
thickness tool will not change.
You can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
If the expansion unit is not operating, a screen
will appear prompting you to put the expansion
unit into run mode.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
“Configuring settings on the Test image”
(Page 5-78)
5-74
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
yyThe default threshold value differs depending
on the sensor head that is used.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring the
settings.
If the expansion unit is not operating, a screen
will appear prompting you to put the expansion
unit into run mode.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
“Configuring settings on the Test image”
(Page 5-78)
3. Tool Settings
6 If needed, click the [Extended Functions] tab to
set the extended functions.
Extended Functions for the Thickness Tool
Items
Rename Tool
1st Point
2-point Calibration
2nd Point
€
Tool
€Rename
Changes the tool name.
“Rename Tool” (Page 5-75)
Before
Correction
After
Correction
Before
Correction
After
Correction
Hysteresis
€
Calibration
€2-point
5
Rename Tool
„„
1 Click the [Rename Tool] button.
€
€Hysteresis
Sets the hysteresis for the threshold value.
“Hysteresis” (Page 5-77)
7 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
The Input Tool Name screen opens.
2 Input the tool name and click the [OK] button.
The tool name is changed and the system returns to the
extended functions screen of the calc. thick. tool.
yyIf you changed the tool name, the name will be
displayed in the following format:
Input_tool_name_(initial_tool_name)
e.g.: ‌When “ABC” is input for the tool name,
“ABC (Calculate Thickness)” is displayed.
yyClearing the field and clicking the [OK] button
restores the tool to its default name.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-75
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Adjust the measurement value proportionally to the
adjustment ratio by setting two sets of adjustment points
and their measurement values after adjustment.
“2-point Calibration” (Page 5-76)
3. Tool Settings
2-point Calibration
„„
If there is a difference in the measured value and the actual
dimensions of the target to be measured, this difference
can be corrected. Both the zero point and tilt are corrected.
Display Value
3 Input before and after correction values for the
first point and second point.
Correction
After correcting
second point
Before correcting
second point
After correcting
first point
Before correcting
first point
5
Offset Value
Measurement Value
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
The range for adjustment of the tilt is 0.5 to 2.0
times the value before adjustment. Input values
within this range for before and after correction.
1 Click the [2-point Calibration] button.
yySetting range: -999.99 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault value (before correcting the first and second
points): ---.-- mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the first point): 0.00 mm
yyDefault value (after correcting the second point): 1.00
mm
yyClicking the [Load Curr.Val] button inputs the
current value as the before correction value.
yyYou can click the [Test] button to look at the
current detection state while configuring
the settings. The measurement value being
detected can also be acquired as the current
value.
If the expansion unit is not operating, a screen
will appear prompting you to put the expansion
unit into run mode.
Clicking the [End Test] button returns to the
previous screen.
The 2-point Calibration Settings screen opens.
2 Select to enable or disable the function.
If you selected the [Disable] button, click the
[Close] button.
If you selected the [Enable] button, proceed with
the subsequent steps.
4 Click the [Execute] button.
2-point calibration is performed and a message
indicating completion opens.
yyDefault value: Disable
5-76
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
3. Tool Settings
5 Click the [OK] button.
The measurement value is displayed as the after
adjustment value.
2-point calibration will be performed on the
calculation results. Even if 2-point calibration
is performed by the calculation target tool
separately, the calculation result of the
thickness tool will not change.
yyTo perform 2-point calibration again, click the
[Readjust] button.
Clicking the [OK] button on the screen that
appears enables you to continue to adjust
from the previous adjustment result.
yyTo initialize the 2-point calibration adjustment
values, click the [Reset] button.
Click [OK] on the Confirm Reset screen that
appears to initialize the adjustment values.
The system returns to the extended functions screen of
the thickness tool.
To set hysteresis, Timing Input must be set to
[Sample Hold] and [Latching].
“Timing Input” (Page 5-11)
Judgment Value
HIGH
Threshold
LOW
Threshold
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Time
HIGH Status ON
Output OFF
GO Status ON
Output OFF
LOW Status ON
Output OFF
In the above timing chart, [N.O.] (default) is set for
the status output format.
For N.C., ON and OFF are inverted.
“N.O./N.C.” (Page 7-24)
1 Sets the hysteresis for the threshold value.
yySetting range: 0.00 to 999.99 mm
yyDefault: 0.00 mm
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-77
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
6 Click the [Close] button.
Hysteresis
„„
3. Tool Settings
Configuring settings on the Test image
4 Click the [End Test] button.
1 Click the [Test] button.
The display returns to the Master screen.
5
The Test image opens.
2 You can switch the hold display settings if
needed.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
€
(default)
€Yes
Enables the hold display. The hold image and value
determined by the timing input are displayed.
Clicking the [TIMING] button turns the timing input to on
or off.
If [Peak to Peak] is selected for the Hold mode, a button
is displayed that switches the displayed image between
the peak image and the bottom image.
€
€No
Disables the hold display. The latest sampling image
and measured value are displayed.
3 Configure the settings.
The following items can be set on the Test screen.
yyZERO/Offset
“4 Set “ZERO/Offset/Limit Adjustment”.” (Page
5-74)
yyLimit Adjustment
“5 Set a threshold value.” (Page 5-74)
yyHysteresis
“Hysteresis” (Page 5-77)
5-78
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4. Output Assignment
4. Output Assignment
Assign the content to be output to each output line.
Main Screen for the Output Assignment
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(7)
(5)
5
(6)
(9)
(1) Title
Displays the program number and program name.
(6) Show Laser Position
Displays the position of the laser.
(2) Navigation buttons
Moves between steps in Settings Navigator.
(7) Tool settings button
Assign the function to output to each output line (OUT1
to OUT10).
“Setting the Output Assignment” (Page 5-81)
(3) Image type
Displays the image type. [Master] is the registered
master.
(4) Image tool bar
Displays the operation tools for the displayed image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(5) Captured image
Displays the captured image.
(8) [Back] button
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 5-27)
(9) [Complete Settings] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-6)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-79
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
(8)
4. Output Assignment
Output Assignment Settings
Output Items
Description
Do not output. Output will be
constantly OFF.
OFF
Total Status
OK, NG
5
Default value
When the total status result is OK
or NG, the output turns ON. Status
output turns ON by default when
the status result of all tools was OK.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
Run
When the sensor is running
correctly with no system error, the
output turns ON.
BUSY
Set to ON during Switch Program,
Clear ZERO/Offset, Laser
Shutdown/Release, and Reset
Processing.
Not set to ON during detection/
judgment.
Error
When an error occurs, the output
turns ON.
Alarm
When an alarm is activated, the
output turns ON.
Position Adjustment*1
OK, NG
Tilt Adjustment*1
OK, NG
Tool 01 to 16*2
yyHeight:
OK, NG, HIGH,
LOW
Logic 1 to 8
OK, NG
*1
*2
5-80
The default value for the output line is as follows:
yyOUT1: Total Status (OK)
yyOUT2: BUSY
yyOUT3 to OUT10: OFF
By default, all output lines will be "N.O."
“N.O./N.C.” (Page 7-24)
If NG output is set for the tools, output will
be turned off until the measurement value is
determined from when the alarm sounds until
immediately after it has been reset.
When the position adjustment result
is OK or NG, the output turns ON.
When the tilt adjustment result is
OK or NG, the output turns ON.
When the specified tool outputs a
status result, the output turns ON.
‌
threshold ≤ judgment
yyOK: LOW
value ≤ HIGH threshold
yyNG: ‌Judgment result is HIGH or
LOW
yyHIGH: ‌HIGH threshold < judgment
value
‌
threshold > judgment
yyLOW: LOW
value
When the result of the specified
logic is OK or NG, the output turns
ON.
Hold mode is not displayed if [Peak/Bottom/P-P
Hold] is selected for [Timing Input] in the detection
conditions.
When the measurement display unit is 0.01 mm
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4. Output Assignment
5 Click the [Extended Function 1] or [Extended
Setting the Output Assignment
Function 2] tab as needed to set the extended
function.
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-3)
2 Display the main screen for output assignment.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 5-5)
3 Click the drop down menu for the output line to
select and assign an output item.
Extended Function 1
zz
€
Error
€ZERO/Offset
Selects whether to include a ZERO/Offset error in the
output item "Error".
“ZERO/Offset Error” (Page 5-82)
Sets target tools when executing ZERO/Offset in a
batch.
“ZERO/Offset Tools” (Page 5-82)
€
Output
€Analog
Sets a target tool and scaling for analog output.
“Analog Output” (Page 5-83)
Extended Function 2
zz
€
1 to 8
€Logic
Define the behavior of the logic output using judgment
results of each tool.
“Logic” (Page 5-84)
4 If there are output items with sub-settings, select
the type to be output.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-81
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
€
Tools
€ZERO/Offset
5
4. Output Assignment
ZERO/Offset Tools
„„
Extended functions for the output
assignment
1 Click the [Change] button under [ZERO/Offset
Tools].
ZERO/Offset Error
„„
1 Selects whether to include a ZERO/Offset error in
the output item "Error".
The ZERO/Offset Tool Settings screen opens.
5
2 Sets a target tool for when executing ZERO/
Offset in a batch.
€
€Disable
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
If a ZERO/Offset error occurs, the output for the OUT
"Error" is assigned to stays OFF.
A ZERO/Offset error is not displayed on the operation
screen.
When Master display in the tool settings is
set: If ZERO/Offset is run when it cannot be
run, a ZERO/Offset error is displayed.
€
(default)
€Enable
When a ZERO/Offset error occurs, the output for the
OUT "Error" is assigned to turns ON.
A ZERO/Offset error is displayed on the operation
screen.
€
€OFF
The tool is not subject to Batch ZERO/Offset execution.
€
(default)
€ON
The tool is subject to Batch ZERO/Offset execution.
5-82
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4. Output Assignment
How to Use the ZERO/Offset Target Tool
zz
The ZERO/Offset target tool can be used to apply
ZERO/Offset to a specific grouping of tools that are
used to measure the same place on the target as
shown below.
€
ZERO/Offset is run
€Before
Analog Output
„„
To set the analog output, analog output must be
set to a setting other than OFF in advance on
the sensor advanced settings.
“Analog Output” (Page 7-25)
1 Selects a tool to be subject to analog output.
5
€ [ON] is set for all tools
€If
ZERO/Offset is run with all tools.
output range.
€ Tool 01 is set to [OFF]
€If
ZERO/Offset is run with only Tool 02.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-83
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
2 Sets a scaling measurement value for the analog
4. Output Assignment
Logic
„„
Analog Output Graph
zz
€
1
€Example
This example represents the situation where the lower
limit of the measurement value is assigned as the lower
limit of the analog output, and the upper limit of the
measurement value is assigned as the upper limit of the
analog output while scaling.
To set logic, at least two tools must be set.
1 Click the button of the logic to set.
Analog Output
Upper Limit
Lower Limit
5
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
Measurement
Value
€
2
€Example
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
This example represents the situation where the upper
limit of the measurement value is assigned as the lower
limit of the analog output, and the lower limit of the
measurement value is assigned as the upper limit of the
analog output while scaling.
Analog Output
Upper Limit
For a button without logic, [Empty] is displayed
next to the button.
Lower Limit
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
Measurement
Value
The following is analog output in the case that
the upper limit value is set to the same value as
the lower limit value in the scaling settings.
yyMeasurement value ≤ Upper limit value
The lower limit value of analog output is output
Example: ‌1 V if the analog output range is 1 to
5V
yyMeasurement value > Upper limit value
The upper limit value of analog output is output
Example: ‌5 V if the analog output range is 1 to
5V
2 Select the logical condition of the logic output.
“Setting example by the logic condition.” (Page 4-114)
€
€AND
Outputs the logical product (AND) of the judgment
outputs of the selected tool.
€
€OR
Outputs the logical sum (OR) of the judgment outputs of
the selected tool.
€ or More Conditions Held
€2
When two or more judgment outputs of the selected tool
are held, the output turns ON.
€ or More Conditions Held
€3
When three or more judgment outputs of the selected
tool are held, the output turns ON.
5-84
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
4. Output Assignment
3 Select the tool to be incorporated into the logic
and the type of its judgment result.
yyClick [Prev] or [Next] button to switch the page.
yyTo incorporate the already set logic into
another logic, use a logic with a greater
number than the set logic.
yyTo clear the settings of the logic, click the
[Clear] button.
yyThe type of selectable judgment result differs
depending on the tool. See the following:
“Tools that can be incorporated into logic
and judgment results” (Page 4-115)
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
4 Click the [OK] button.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
5-85
4. Output Assignment
MEMO
5
Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)
5-86
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Chapter
6
Operating/Adjusting
This chapter explains the procedures for starting operation,
the names and functions of each part and the adjustment
procedures to fully utilize the judgment ability of the IX Series.
Starting Operation................................................................6-2
Overview of the Operation Screen......................................6-3
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen................6-4
Stabilizing the Judgment Process....................................6-16
Shortening the Processing Time......................................6-21
6
Operating/Adjusting
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
6-1
Starting Operation
Starting Operation
Starts operation of the sensor according to the program created with the Settings Navigator.
The sensor can be independently operated.
Turning on the power and starting
operation
1 Turn on the power of the sensor.
2 Start the IX-Navigator.
1 Exit the settings of the sensor, such as Settings
Navigator.
When the sensor is in the one of the
following conditions, the [Program] screen
opens.
yyWhen the power is turned on for the first
time
yyIf all programs are not being set
yyWhen setting up the sensor
yyWhen replacing the sensor head
6
Exiting the sensor settings and starting
operation
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-6)
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 5-6)
The main screen in [Program] opens.
2 Click the [Run] button.
3 Confirm that the main screen opens in [Running]
mode.
Operating/Adjusting
If a calculation tool is used with the expansion
unit and the expansion unit is not operating,
a screen will open prompting you to put the
expansion unit into run mode.
If the image or status result does not update,
see the following.
“Troubleshooting” (Page A-15)
6-2
The [Running] main screen opens and operation starts.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
If the image or status result does not update,
see the following.
“Troubleshooting” (Page A-15)
Overview of the Operation Screen
Overview of the Operation Screen
Main screen in [Running]
Switch Screen
Change the content that is displayed
on the screen.
“Switching the Run Screen
Display” (Page 6-6)
Limit Adjustment
Displays Measurement Value/Matching Rate
information, Threshold Adjustment, and ZERO/
Offset screens for each tool.
“Displaying the Limit Adjustment screen”
(Page 6-11)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
6-13)
“Performing ZERO/Offset” (Page 6-14)
6
Operating/Adjusting
Current Status
Displays operation data.
“Displaying operating information” (Page 6-10)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
6-3
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
(6) Menu bar
The sensor menu opens.
“Operating from the menu bar” (Page 7-45)
Run screen
Scan Mode
zz
(19) (20) (1)
(2)
(3) (4) (5)
(6)
(8)
(13)
(7)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(14)
(15)
(18)
(16)
Line Mode
zz
(19) (20) (1)
(2)
(17)
(3) (4) (5)
(6)
6
(8)
(13)
(7)
(9)
Operating/Adjusting
(10)
(11)
(12)
(14)
(15)
(18)
(16)
(17)
(1) [Running] / [Program] switch button
Switch between the [Running] and [Program] main
screens.
yyBy clicking the [Program] button while on the main
screen in [Running], operation stops and the screen
switches to the main screen of [Program].
yyBy clicking the [Running] button while on the main
screen in [Program], the setting process finishes and
the screen switches to the main screen of [Running].
(2) Program
Displays the program number and program name.
Programs can be switched from the drop-down menu.
The password must be input to run if the
password lock is being set.
“Security” (Page 7-39)
(3) [Detection History] button
Displays the Detection History screen.
“Displaying the sensor detection history screen”
(Page 7-11)
(4) [Backup/Transfer] button
Displays the Backup/Transfer screen.
“Saving the Sensor Settings and Images” (Page
7-19)
(7) Status bar
yyOn the main screen in [Running], the total status
result, run function lamp, [TRIGGER]/[TIMING] button,
[Peak]/[Bottom] button, and processing time are
displayed.
yyOn the main screen in [Program], the image type and
trigger type are displayed.
€
status result
€Total
Displays the total status result.
If the total status result is OK, [OK] will be displayed.
If the total status result is NG, [NG] will be displayed.
[--] is displayed when ZERO/Offset is running and
during judgment standby.
Nothing is displayed if [Live Values] is displayed in line
mode.
The total status conditions can be selected in scan
mode from [All Tools OK] or [Any Tool OK].
€
function lamp
€Run
yyLaser
The light turns on (green) if the sensor is emitting the
laser.
yyZERO/Offset
The light turns on (green) when ZERO/Offset is
running.
yyIn scan mode: Trigger
Displays the trigger type. Also displays the trigger
cycle when set to internal trigger. The light turns on
(one-shot) when the trigger is running.
yyIn line mode: Timing
The light turns on (green) when timing is being input.
(8) In scan mode: [TRIGGER] button
In line mode: [TIMING] button
This button is displayed when the trigger type is
external trigger while in scan mode.
Clicking this button enables a trigger or timing to be
input. The button can be displayed or hidden.
yyScan mode: ‌Click the button to issue a trigger.
yyLine mode: ‌Clicking the button turns the timing input
to on or off.
“Trigger/Timing Button” (Page 7-48)
The password must be input to run if the
password lock is being set.
“Security” (Page 7-39)
€
buttons (line mode only)
€[Peak]/[Bottom]
These buttons are displayed when the Hold mode for
the selected tool is [Peak to Peak]. The value for the
selected button is displayed.
(5) [Advanced Sensor Settings] button
Displays the Sensor Advanced screen.
“Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor”
(Page 7-23)
6-4
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
€
time (scan mode only)
€Processing
Displays the time that it takes to process an image and
make judgment (the time between the sensor receiving
a trigger and outputting the status result).
The delay time for One-Shot output is not included.
“Output Options” (Page 7-25)
(9) Image tool bar
Displays the operation tools for the displayed image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(10) Select display
The displayed capture image changes every time this
button is clicked. Click the [▼] button on the right to
select the display to be switched from the drop-down
list. Regardless of the display that you select, [Select
display] is always displayed.
“Changing the displayed captured image” (Page
6-8)
(12) Tool window
yyIf the tool status result is OK, a green border is
displayed. If it is NG, a red border is displayed. If
outside of the measurement range, it will be displayed
by red slanting lines. It is displayed in gray right after
ZERO/Offset is running.
yyThe tool number is displayed on the top-left of the tool
window.
yy[P] is displayed for the position adjustment tool. In line
mode, the window is only displayed when the position
adjustment tool is selected.
yy[T] is displayed for the tilt adjustment tool (line mode).
yy[T] is displayed on the first point that comprises the
reference surface for tilt adjustment (scan mode).
yyBy clicking the tool window, the selected tool can be
switched.
The password must be input to run if the
password lock is being set.
“Security” (Page 7-39)
(16) [Current Status] button
Displays the Operating Information screen.
“Displaying operating information” (Page 6-10)
(17) Switch screen drop-down list
You can select the screen to be displayed from the
drop-down list.
“Switching the Run Screen Display” (Page 6-6)
(18) Sensor Information
Displays the model, device name, connection
method ([Direct connection] or [IP address of network
connection]), and MAC address for the sensor.
Default setting of the device name: ‌Model numbers for
the sensor head/
amplifier
Example: IX-150/
H2000
“Device Name” (Page 7-38)
(19) [Change Connected Sensor] button
If two or more sensors are directly connected or the
control panel is connected to a network, you can search
and switch between other connected sensors.
“Changing the sensor to be displayed on a screen”
(Page 7-3)
(20) [Disconnect] button
Disconnects the software from the sensor.
(13) Tool information
Displays the tool number, name, measurement value,
threshold value, and status result. The selected tool is
indicated by an orange frame.
“Tool Information” (Page 6-6)
(14) [Limit Adjustment] button
Displays the threshold adjustment screen for the
selected tool.
“Displaying the Limit Adjustment screen” (Page
6-11)
yy“Lock Enabled” will be displayed in the
lower right of the main screen in [Running]
if password lock has been enabled.
If password lock is enabled, the password
is required when switching from the
[Running] main screen to the [Program]
main screen.
“Security” (Page 7-39)
yyThe search area and tool window will be
hidden when you select [Captured Image]
on the image toolbar.
The password must be input to run if the
password lock is being set.
“Security” (Page 7-39)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
6-5
6
Operating/Adjusting
(11) Captured image
In scan mode, the captured image is displayed.
If you are using the hold function in line mode, the hold
image is displayed when the measurement value for the
selected tool is determined. If you are not using the hold
function, the captured image is displayed.
(15) [Batch ZERO/Offset] button
Performs ZERO/Offset for all tools.
If the button is held down, ZERO/Offset adjustment
status is cleared on all tools.
“Performing Batch ZERO/Offset” (Page 6-15)
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
Tool Information
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(8) Status gauge
Displays the measurement value or matching rate.
yyGreen if the status result is OK.
yyRed if the status result is NG.
The gauge is shown in orange if [Show No Hold]
is selected in line mode.
(5)
(6)
(7)
(7)
(8)
(1)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(9)
(8)
(1)
6
(9)
(2)
(10) (11)
(4)
Operating/Adjusting
(5)
(6)
(7)
(7)
(8)
(6)
(9) Threshold
Displays the threshold value.
(10) Measurement value of the pin height tool (MAX)
Displays the measurement value (MAX) of the pin
height tool.
The numerical value in the parentheses represents the
number of the tool window.
The judgment bar is displayed also for the measurement
value (MAX).
(11) Measurement value of the pin height tool (MIN)
Displays the measurement value (MIN) of the pin height
tool.
The numerical value in the parentheses represents the
number of the tool window.
The judgment bar is displayed also for the measurement
value (MIN).
Switching the Run Screen Display
The display types for the run screen are shown below.
(1) Tool No.
Displays the number of the tool.
Type
(2) Tool Name
Displays the name of the tool.
You can change the extended functions for each tool.
(3) Measurement Value/Matching Rate
Displays the measurement value or matching rate.
yyIf a calculation error occurs for a calculation tool, “--.--” is shown for the measurement value and the icon
is displayed next to it. Clicking this icon displays a
screen that indicates the cause of the alarm.
yyIn scan mode, if the tool window is protruding from the
screen after position adjustment, a message appears
instead of the measurement value or matching rate,
stating that the tool window is protruding from the
window.
Standard 1
Displays the captured image and tool
information. The measurement value, limit,
and status result are displayed for the tool
information.
Standard 2
Displays the captured image and tool
information. The measurement value and
status result are displayed for the tool
information.
List
Only displays tool information. The captured
image is not displayed. The measurement
value, limit, and status result are displayed
for the tool information.
No Hold
This can only be displayed in line mode.
Displays the captured image in real time.
(4) Alarm display
Displays in red when an alarm has activated.
(5) OK/NG display
Displays the tool status result.
yyIf the status result is OK, [OK] will be displayed.
yyIf the status result is NG, [NG] will be displayed.
yy[--] is displayed when ZERO/Offset is running.
(6) Upper Limit
Displays the maximum threshold value.
(7) Lower Limit
Displays the minimum threshold value.
6-6
Description
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
Switching screens with a button
Switching screens with the drop-down list
1 Click the [View] button.
1 Click the [▼] button and select the type of
display from the drop-down list.
The type of screen below is displayed.
The run screen changes to the selected display type.
Operating/Adjusting
The screens change in the order below.
yyScan mode:
Standard 1 → Standard 2 → List → returns to
Standard 1
yyLine mode:
Standard 1 → Standard 2 → List → Show No
Hold → returns to Standard 1
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
6
6-7
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
Selecting the tool
Changing the displayed captured image
1 Click the tool information displayed on the tool
pane or the tool window displayed on the sensor
image.
Click
Click
The selected tool window will be highlighted. The tool
information is displayed in an orange frame.
6
Operating/Adjusting
If you click a place where multiple tool
windows are overlapped, the tool will be
selected in the following way:
yyIf the selected tool is included, the selected
tool is given priority.
yyIf the selected tool is not included, the tool
with the smallest tool number is selected.
yyIn the case of a line mode program for
which [Peak/Bottom/P-P Hold] is selected
for [Timing Input], the captured image is
not displayed for the following tools:
yyPosition Adjustment Tool
yyTilt Adjustment Tool
yyStep/Width Tool that targets the
expansion unit tools
The display types for the captured image are shown below.
Scan Mode
zz
Type
Captured image
The captured image is displayed.
Measurement
position
Displays the measurement point and tool
window.
Outline
Displays outline information.
Area
Displays the extracted area.
Measurement
area check
Displays the measurable area.
Areas that cannot be measured are
shaded (in red).
Measurement
area check:
Point A
Displays the measurable area for Point A.
Areas that cannot be measured are
shaded (in yellow).
Measurement
area check:
Point B
Displays the measurable area for Point B.
Areas that cannot be measured are
shaded (in blue).
Measurement
area check:
Tool
Displays the measurable area for the
measurement point and tool window.
Areas that cannot be measured are
shaded (in yellow).
MAX/MIN
Displays the MAX (MIN) measurement
point.
Height Image/
Height Image 1/
Height Image 2
Displays the difference between high and
low in color.
Detection Point
Displays the point being detected by the
1-axis adjustment tool, 2-axis adjustment
tool, or width tool.
Selection Area
Displays the area (green) being extracted
by the average height tool.
Measurement
Point
Displays the place (green) being detected
by the pin height tool.
Clicking the tool information of the selected tool
will deselect the tool.
6-8
Description
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
Line Mode
zz
Type
Switching screens with a button
Description
Captured image
The captured image is displayed.
Measurement
position
Displays the measurement point and tool
window.
MAX/MIN
Displays the MAX (MIN) measurement
point.
Measurement
area check
Displays the measurable area.
Areas that cannot be measured are
shaded (in red).
Height Image
Displays the difference between high and
low in color.
Detection Point
Displays the point being detected by the
edge position tool or width/diameter tool.
1 Click the [Select display] button.
The type of screen below is displayed.
yyThe display type will differ for each screen,
including the run and settings screens.
yyRegardless of the display that you select, [Select
display] is always displayed.
6
1 Click the [▼] button and select the type of
display from the drop-down list.
The screen changes to the selected display type.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
6-9
Operating/Adjusting
Switching screens with the drop-down list
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
Displaying operating information
(3) Logic
Displays the set logic and its output status.
Displaying operating information
(4) Count
Displays information related to triggers or judgment.
1 Click the [Current Status] button.
Trig No.
(Scan
Mode)
Displays the total number of triggers issued.
This number does not include the number of
trigger errors.
Judgment
counts
(Line Mode)
Displays the total number of judgments
performed from timing input.
OK
Displays the count when the total status
result is OK.
NG
Displays the count when the total status
result is NG.
Count is not displayed for a program in line
mode for which [Sample Hold] and [Latching]
is selected for Timing Input.
The Operating Information screen opens.
(1)
6
(2)
Operating/Adjusting
yyThe upper limit of TrigNo is 999999. When the
number exceeds the upper limit, the counter
resets to 0 and starts counting again.
yyThe upper limit of OK and NG is 999999. If the
limit is exceeded, the display stops at 999999.
(3)
(7)
(5) Processing time
Displays information related to the processing time.
TIME
Displays the processing time of the latest
judgment process.
MAX
Displays the maximum value of the
processing time.
(6)
MIN
(1) Input
Items assigned to IN1 to IN8 and the input state are
displayed.
Displays the minimum value of the
processing time.
AVE
Displays the average value of the processing
time.
(8)
(9)
(4)
(5)
In the following case, the IN1 input status
of the expansion unit displays the IN1 input
status of the main unit.
yyWhen [Trigger/Timing] of “Main/Expansion
Simul Input” is enabled in line mode.
yyWhen both of the main and expansion
unit are set to the scan mode and external
trigger, and [Trigger/Timing] of “Main/
Expansion Simul Input” is enabled.
Nothing is displayed for a program in line
mode.
(6) [Reset] button
Resets the count and processing time.
Clicking the button displays a confirmation screen. Click
the [OK] button.
(2) Output
Items assigned to OUT1 to OUT10 and the output state
are displayed.
6-10
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
yyIn addition to the count and processing
time, the measurement value/matching rate
information for all tools is also reset at the
same time.
yyThe [Reset] button is not displayed for a
program in line mode for which [Sample
Hold] and [Latching] is selected for Timing
Input.
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
yyThe password must be input to run if the
password lock is being set.
“Security” (Page 7-39)
yyThe count and processing time are reset in the
following cases:
yyWhen the [Reset] button is clicked
yyWhen the program is switched
yyWhen a tool is added, copied, or deleted
Even if you cancel after adding, copying, or
deleting a tool, the information is reset.
yyWhen detection mode is changed
yyWhen the sensor is turned OFF
yyWhen the sensor is initialized
yyWhen the set scale is changed in the upper
limit value with the height area tool or
monochrome area tool
yyWhen the [Reset] button is clicked on the
tool limit adjustment screen
Displaying the Limit Adjustment screen
Displaying the Limit Adjustment screen
1 Click the [Limit Adjustment] button.
(7) Analog output
If analog output is set to [ON], the analog output state is
displayed.
The Limit Adjustment screen opens.
yyThe selected tool is displayed on the tool
pane on the Limit Adjustment screen.
Selecting a different tool also changes the
display of the Limit Adjustment screen.
yyThe measurement value/matching rate
information cannot be displayed for the
following tools.
yyIn scan mode:
Tilt adjustment (select [Yes] for [Real time
adjustment])
yyIn line mode:
Position and tilt adjustment tools
(9) [Close] button
Closes the Operating Information screen.
Hiding the operating information
1 Click the [Close] button.
The Operating Information screen closes.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(11)
(9)
(10)
(16)
(12)
(17)
(18)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
6-11
6
Operating/Adjusting
(8) FTP connection status
Displays the status of connection to the FTP server
when the FTP client function is enabled.
A password must be input to run if the password
lock is being set.
“Security” (Page 7-39)
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
(1)
(2)
(8) Upper Limit
Displays the maximum threshold value.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(10)
(13)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(1)
6
Operating/Adjusting
(9)
(10)
(16)
(10) Status gauge
Displays the measurement value or matching rate.
yyGreen if the status result is OK.
yyRed if the status result is NG.
The gauge is shown in orange if [Show No Hold]
is selected in line mode.
(11) HI
Set a maximum limit value.
(12) LO
Set a minimum limit value.
(2)
(19)
(20)
(6)
(8)
(9) Lower Limit
Displays the minimum threshold value.
(4)
(5)
(7)
(11)
(12)
(17)
(18)
(13) Threshold
Set a threshold value. You can set the threshold value
by entering a number or moving the slider.
(14) [Upper Limit] check box
Select the check box to set an upper limit value.
(15) Scale
Selects the set scale when the [Upper Limit] check box
is selected.
(16) MAX/MIN/AVE
€
€MAX
Displays the maximum measurement value or matching
rate.
€
€MIN
(1) Tool No.
Displays the number of the tool.
(2) Tool Name
Displays the name of the tool.
You can change the extended functions for each tool.
(3) Measurement Value/Matching Rate
Displays the measurement value or matching rate.
yyIf a calculation error occurs for a calculation tool, "--.--" is shown for the measurement value and the icon
is displayed next to it. Clicking this icon displays a
screen that indicates the cause of the alarm.
yyIn scan mode, if the tool window is protruding from
the screen, a message appears stating the situation,
instead of the measurement value or matching rate.
(4) Alarm display
Displays in red when an alarm has activated.
(5) OK/NG display
Displays the tool status result.
yyIf the status result is OK, [OK] will be displayed.
yyIf the status result is NG, [NG] will be displayed.
yy[--] is displayed when ZERO/Offset is running.
Displays the minimum measurement value or matching
rate.
€
€AVE
Displays the average measurement value or matching
rate.
yyThe measurement value when an alarm is
activated is not included in [MAX], [MIN], or
[AVE].
yyWhen using the MAX/MIN/AVE, +FFFF and
-FFFF are treated as +999.99 and -999.99
respectively.
(17) [Reset] button
The measurement value/matching rate information will
be reset.
Clicking the button displays a confirmation screen. Click
the [OK] button.
(6) [ZERO/Offset] button
Performs the ZERO/Offset function.
(7) [Clear] button.
Removes the ZERO/Offset from the tool.
6-12
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
yyThe measurement value/matching rate
information for all tools, not just the
selected tool, is reset.
yyIn addition to the measurement value/
matching rate information, the operating
information (count and processing time) is
also reset.
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
The measurement value/matching rate
information is reset in the following cases:
yyWhen the [Reset] button is clicked
yyWhen the program is switched
yyWhen a tool is added, copied, or deleted
Even if you cancel after adding copying, or
deleting a tool, the information is reset.
yyWhen detection mode is changed
yyWhen the sensor is turned OFF
yyWhen the sensor is initialized
yyWhen the set scale is changed in the upper
limit value with the height area tool or
monochrome area tool
yyWhen the [Reset] button is clicked in the
Operating Information screen
(18) [Close] button
Closes the Limit Adjustment screen.
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment
Adjust the threshold while the device is in operation.
yyYou can adjust the threshold while the device is
in test mode when setting the tools with Settings
Navigator.
yyThere are no thresholds to adjust for the position
and tilt adjustment tools in line mode.
1 Display the Limit Adjustment screen.
“Displaying the Limit Adjustment screen” (Page
6-11)
2 Adjust the threshold.
If a slider is displayed on the judgment bar, you can
move the slider to adjust the threshold.
(19) Measurement value of the pin height tool (MAX)
Displays the measurement value (MAX) of the pin
height tool.
The numerical value in the parentheses represents the
number of the tool window.
The judgment bar is displayed also for the measurement
value (MAX).
Closing the Limit Adjustment screen
1 Click the [Close] button.
The Limit Adjustment screen closes.
The tool settings are updated with the adjusted
threshold value.
For details about how to adjust the threshold, see the
settings method for each tool.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 4-20)
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 5-27)
3 Click the [Close] button.
The Limit Adjustment screen closes.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
6-13
Operating/Adjusting
(20) Measurement value of the pin height tool (MIN)
Displays the measurement value (MIN) of the pin height
tool.
The numerical value in the parentheses represents the
number of the tool window.
The judgment bar is displayed also for the measurement
value (MIN).
6
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
Measuring when position adjustment fails with
zz
Performing ZERO/Offset
[OFF] selected
The ZERO/Offset target value for the applicable
tool needs to be set in advance.
Position adjustment will fail if there is no target. As
measurement cannot be performed, the measurement
value for the height tool is displayed as "---.--".
Performing ZERO/Offset
Perform the ZERO/Offset function for the selected tool.
1 Display the Limit Adjustment screen.
“Displaying the Limit Adjustment screen” (Page
6-11)
2 Click the [ZERO/Offset] button.
As the height tool does not have a measurement value,
an error occurs if ZERO/Offset is run.
6
Operating/Adjusting
Offsets the value so that the measurement value
matches the target ZERO/Offset value.
ZERO/Offset when position adjustment fails
„„
This example measures the height of the below target.
To cause a ZERO/Offset error when there is no target,
configure this setting.
Set position adjustment and
measure height.
The ZERO/Offset run result
changes in accordance with the
measurement settings when
position adjustment fails.
6-14
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
Measuring when position adjustment fails with
zz
[ON] selected
Although position adjustment fails when there is no
target, the height tool will have a measurement value as
measurement will be performed.
Performing Batch ZERO/Offset
Performs the ZERO/Offset function for all tools.
1 Click the [Batch ZERO/Offset] button.
A password must be input to run if the password
lock is being set.
“Security” (Page 7-39)
As the height tool has a measurement value, ZERO/
Offset can be run.
The ZERO/Offset target value replaces the
measurement value for all tools.
1 Hold down the [Batch ZERO/Offset] button for
two seconds.
Clearing ZERO/Offset
1 Click the [Clear] button.
A confirmation screen opens.
2 Click the [OK] button.
ZERO/Offset adjustment is cleared on all tools.
A confirmation screen opens.
2 Click the [OK] button.
ZERO/Offset adjustment is cleared.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
6-15
Operating/Adjusting
Batch Clearing ZERO/Offset
6
Stabilizing the Judgment Process
Stabilizing the Judgment Process
This section explains how to adjust the sensor when
judgment processing is not stable.
If the judgment process is adjusted to be more
stable, the processing time may become longer
or shorter depending on the functions used.
Adjust the judgment process in accordance with
the required process parameters.
Stabilizing measurement
Adjust the laser beam so that light can be stably received.
6
Stabilizing tools in scan mode
Stabilizing the step and height tools
Set the measurement point settings to [Large]
zz
Setting the size of the measurement point to [Large] widens
the detection range and stabilizes measurement.
“Step tool settings” (Page 4-33)
“Setting the height tool” (Page 4-39)
Adjust the measurement range to the required
zz
range
Measure near the center of the field of view
zz
Since the light intensity is weaker around the edges of
the field of view, the amount of light is most stable when
measuring near the center of the field of view.
By adjusting the measurement range settings to contain
only the required height area, unnecessary places will no
longer be measured and measurement will be more stable.
“Measurement Range” (Page 4-35)
“Measurement Range” (Page 4-40)
Use the tilt adjustment function
zz
Make the two points (point A and point B) of
zz
Operating/Adjusting
If the target is at an angle in regards to the sensor head,
there may be errors in the measurement value. Using the
tilt adjustment function stabilizes measurement.
yyTilt Adjustment
“Tilt Adjustment” (Page 4-16)
yyAdjusting Head Tilt
“Adjust Head Tilt” (Page 5-14)
Be careful of blind spots
zz
Areas where the laser beam is not returned to the light
receptor of the sensor head are called blind spots. Blind
spots cannot be measured. If the measurement target
is within a blind spot, adjust the sensor head installation
direction or the position of the target.
“Measurement area check” (Page 3-17)
Laser beam interference
zz
the step height positioned as close to each
other as possible.
When measuring the step height make the two
measurement points positioned as close together as
possible to reduce the error that occurs when the target
tilts.
Stabilizing the MAX/MIN Tool
Configure the mask settings
zz
By masking the places in the window that do not need to be
measured, measurement will be more stable.
“Mask” (Page 4-60)
Adjust the measurement range to the required
zz
range
Interference from the laser beam of another sensor head
may result in unstable measurements. Below are methods
to prevent interference from a laser beam.
yySeparate the sensor heads
yySpace out the triggers in scan mode
yyUse the interference prevention function
“Interference Prevention” (Page 7-28)
By adjusting the measurement range settings to contain
only the required height area, unnecessary places will no
longer be measured and measurement will be more stable.
“Measurement Range” (Page 4-62)
Setting measurement mode to [High] (scan
zz
mode)
If the reflection intensity from the target is weak, [High]
increases light intensity, stabilizing measurement.
“Measurement mode” (Page 4-11)
Slowing down the sampling frequency (line
zz
mode)
If light intensity is insufficient due to a tilted target having
weak reflection intensity or other reasons, setting the
sampling frequency to [11 ms] stabilizes measurement as it
corrects insufficient light intensity.
“Measurement Adjustment” (Page 5-9)
6-16
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Stabilizing the Judgment Process
Stabilizing the Height Area Tool
Stabilizing the Monochrome Area Tool
Configure the mask settings
zz
Fine tune the extraction area
zz
By masking the places in the window that do not need to be
measured, measurement will be more stable.
“Mask” (Page 4-68)
Adjust the advanced height extraction settings
zz
Adjusting the upper and lower limits allows fine-tuning of
the upper and lower limits of the extracted height area tool,
providing more stable judgment.
“Specify Height Range” (Page 4-71)
Stabilizing the Average Height Tool
If the desired brightness was not able to be extracted,
click the [+]/[-] buttons or move the slider to fine tune the
extraction area, providing more stable judgment.
“Advanced Brightness Extraction” (Page 4-83)
Configure the mask settings
zz
By masking the places in the window that do not need to be
inspected, judgment will be more stable.
“Mask” (Page 4-81)
Stabilizing the position adjustment tool
Rotation Range
Setting the average size to [Small]
zz
Setting the average size to [Small] measures the target
minutely, increasing stability.
“Setting the Average Height Tool” (Page 4-46)
6
Adjusting the sensitivity of the measurement
zz
Click [Live View] on the sensitivity adjustment screen. To
increase stability, adjust the sensitivity so that the detection
status of the area you want to detect will not change
regardless of individual differences between targets.
“Sensitivity Adjustment” (Page 4-51)
Operating/Adjusting
area
Position Adjustment Tool
Search area for position adjustment tool
Stabilizing the Pin Height Tool
Set the installation distance closer to the
zz
target.
Measurement will get more stable when mounting the
sensor head closer to the target as the size of the target
will be enlarged.
Fit the window size to the pin.
zz
When the position adjustment does not follow
zz
the rotation of the target on the image
If the target is able to rotate more than the set rotation
range, increase the rotation range. To stabilize position
adjustment, add extra margin to the rotation range.
“Extended functions for the position adjustment tool”
(Page 4-57)
Unnecessary places will no longer be measured and
measurement will be more stable.
Broaden the search region if the variation in the target’s
positioning exceeds the region to be searched.
“Setting the position adjustment tool” (Page 4-55)
Set the measurement range as narrow as
zz
If the position adjustment becomes unstable
zz
By adjusting the measurement range settings to contain
only the required height area,
unnecessary places will no longer be measured and
measurement will be more stable.
Remove the unnecessary outline in the tool.
Set the sensitivity of the outline extraction to [Low].
“Setting the position adjustment tool” (Page 4-55)
possible.
due to the effect of the unwanted outlines
If the outline of the reference target cannot be
zz
detected
If the contrast of the target is low, the outline may not
be extracted. Set the sensitivity of the outline extraction
to [High]. If detection remains unstable after setting the
extraction sensitivity to [High], adjust image optimization
settings.
“Setting the position adjustment tool” (Page 4-55)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
6-17
Stabilizing the Judgment Process
When the window position after position
zz
adjustment is unstable
When the position of the detection window/tool window
after position adjustment is unstable due to misalignment of
the position of the target, set the search algorithm to [High
Accuracy].
“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-57)
When the measurement point is misaligned
zz
because the position adjustment rotates for a
round target
When the window of position adjustment rotates for a round
target, set the rotation range of position adjustment to 0°.
Always measure the height of the same point to acquire
stable measurements with the measurement tool.
“Rotation Range” (Page 4-57)
Stabilizing tools in line mode
Stabilizing Tools in Line Mode (Common to
All Tools)
Installing the laser vertically
zz
In line mode, installing the laser vertically makes
measurement more stable for the following reasons.
“When mounting the sensor head diagonally” (Page
2-4)
yyEven if there is a change in the height of the target, the
laser emission position remains the same, which enables
measurement at the same point.
Measurement points
Measurement
point changes
6
Measurement
point does not
change
Operating/Adjusting
yyThe amount of light captured by the camera is increased,
resulting in stable measurement.
yyDiffused reflection on a vertical wall can be prevented,
resulting in stable measurement.
Position adjustment tool
When the measurement point is misaligned
zz
because of the movement of a target
Place the position adjustment tool near the measurement
point.
Because the measurement point rotates on the position
adjustment tool, make the measurement point closer to the
position adjustment tool for the measurement position to be
more stable.
Rotation
Stabilizing the step and height tools
Increase the size of the tool window
zz
Increasing the tool window size widens the detection range
and stabilizes measurement.
“Changing the size of the tool window” (Page 3-19)
Increase the number of data of the filter
zz
(average/median)
Increasing the number of data stabilizes the data.
“Measurement Adjustment” (Page 5-9)
Setting the average size to [Large]
zz
Position adjustment tool
6-18
Measurement point
If the measurement method is set to maximum or
minimum, selecting [Large] for the average size stabilizes
the measurement value as the average number of points
increases.
“Averaging area for MAX/MIN Measurement” (Page
5-41)
“Averaging area for MAX/MIN Measurement” (Page
5-47)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Stabilizing the Judgment Process
Enlarging the target by adjusting the distance
zz
Stabilizing the Edge Position Tool
Change the edge sensitivity and detection
zz
method
When an edge is not detected, select [Specified edge] for
the detection method and set it to an appropriate number.
For an edge with a low height difference, adjust the edge
sensitivity.
“Setting the Edge Position Tool” (Page 5-52)
from the target
When the judgment mode is [Diameter], distance
adjustment increases the number of data used for
calculating the diameter, achieving stability.
When the judgment mode is [Width], shorter distance helps
to detect edges, achieving stability.
Stabilizing the position adjustment tool
Adjusting tilt correction in [1. Detection
zz
Change the edge sensitivity and detection
zz
Adjust the tilt in [1. Detection Condition] so that the height
difference for which you want to detect the edge and the
measurement direction are the same.
“Adjust Head Tilt” (Page 5-14)
If the edge to be used for position adjustment is not
detected, select [Specified Edge] for the detection method
and set the desired edge number.
For an edge with a low height difference, adjust the edge
sensitivity.
“Setting the position adjustment tool” (Page 5-49)
Condition]
Increase the number of data of the filter
zz
(average/median)
Increasing the number of data stabilizes the data.
“Measurement Adjustment” (Page 5-9)
Increase the number of data of the filter
zz
Adjusting tilt correction in [1. Detection
zz
Conditions]
Adjust the tilt in [1. Detection Conditions] so that the height
difference for which you want to adjust the position and
measurement direction are the same.
“Adjust Head Tilt” (Page 5-14)
(average/median)
Increasing the number of data stabilizes the data.
“Measurement Adjustment” (Page 5-9)
Adjust the tilt in [1. Detection Condition].
zz
Adjust the tilt in [1. Detection Condition] so that the
measurement directions are the same.
“Adjust Head Tilt” (Page 5-14)
Setting the mask
zz
By masking the places in the window that do not need to be
measured, measurement will be more stable.
“Mask” (Page 5-62)
Stabilizing the Tilt Adjustment Tool
Window layout
zz
Separate the distance between the two reference points as
much as possible.
“Setting the tilt adjustment tool” (Page 5-51)
Increasing the size of the tool window
zz
Increasing the tool window size widens the detection range
and stabilizes measurement.
“Changing the size of the tool window” (Page 3-19)
Changing the edge sensitivity <Judgment
zz
mode: Width>
For an edge with a low height difference, raise the edge
sensitivity.
“Judgment mode: Width” (Page 5-59)
Increasing the size of the tool window so
zz
that the entire target can be included in it
<Judgment mode: Diameter>
Increasing the tool window size increases the amount of
data used for calculating the diameter, increasing stability.
“Judgment mode: Diameter” (Page 5-59)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
6-19
6
Operating/Adjusting
Stabilizing the Width/Diameter Tool
method
Stabilizing the Judgment Process
Stabilizing the judgment process by taking
a clear image of the target (scan mode)
Adjust an image that can be recognized by the position
adjustment tool so that the difference between an “OK”
image and a “NG” image can be clearly recognized and
captured with the monochrome area tool.
Achieving adequate image brightness
If the image is too dark, the position adjustment tool will be
unstable due to poor contrast. Additionally, judgment of “OK”
and “NG” targets will be unstable with the monochrome
area tool. If the image is too bright, the judgment process
may become unstable. Brightness can be manually
adjusted or adjusted with the auto brightness adjustment
function.
“When brightness is to be adjusted automatically” (Page
4-9)
6
If Auto Brightness Adjustment is not sufficient
zz
Operating/Adjusting
You can adjust the brightness more granularly by adjusting
it manually.
“When brightness is to be adjusted manually” (Page
4-9)
Reducing the effect of ambient light
If detection is unstable due to ambient light from around
the sensor, use shielding around the sensor and target to
prevent ambient light.
Turning on the measurement ambient light cut function in
line mode can reduce the effect of ambient light.
“Remove ambient influence” (Page 5-24)
Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned
target position (scan mode only)
If there is a variation (misalignment) in the positioning of
the target, the position of the target shifts out of the tool
window and judgment cannot be performed correctly.
Using the position adjustment tool stabilizes target
detection.
“Position Adjustment Tool” (Page 4-22)
“Position Adjustment Tool” (Page 4-55)
Tool settings
Raising the brightness value increases the exposure time,
resulting in a brighter image. When [HighGain] is selected
for the imaging mode, the brightness amplification factor
increases and the image becomes brighter.
You can only select [HighGain] when in scan mode.
If there is uneven brightness on the target
zz
Refer to "Reducing the shininess of the glossy or metal
surface".
“Reducing the shininess of a glossy or metal surface”
(Page 6-20)
Processing during an operation
Reducing the shininess of a glossy or metal
surface
Glossy and/or metal surfaces may reflect light from the
target into the camera. Since mirror reflection has a high
light intensity, the target will “shine” and the image will be
saturated with light.
Use the Auto Brightness Adjustment
zz
If the target is reflective, using the auto brightness
adjustment function will enable the High Dynamic Range
imaging mode, which will reduce the shininess of the target.
The HDR function prevents light saturation by imaging the
target with a wider dynamic range of brightness. The HDR
function can also be used manually.
“When brightness is to be adjusted automatically” (Page
4-9)
Using the halation mitigation function
zz
Using the halation mitigation function in scan mode will
reduce the effects of reflection.
“When brightness is to be adjusted manually” (Page
4-9)
6-20
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Shortening the Processing Time
Shortening the Processing Time
This section explains how to adjust the device settings to
shorten the processing time.
To shorten the processing time, perform adjustments to
shorten the processing times of the imaging and the tools.
If the processing time is shortened, the stability
of judgment may decrease. The processing time
should be adjusted in a manner that maintains
the stability of the judgment process.
For the processing time
The processing time in scan mode is the period of time
from when an external or internal trigger is received to
when the status result is finalized. The processing time is
displayed on the top of the screen.
Since line mode judges for each sample at the
selected sampling frequency, there is not a
measured processing time.
Flow of the internal process
Shortening the processing time of the step
and height tools
Measurement range
zz
If the measurement range is wide, narrowing them will
shorten the processing time.
“Measurement Range” (Page 4-35)
“Measurement Range” (Page 4-40)
Measurement Point
zz
Selecting [Normal] or [Large] shortens processing time
compared to [Small].
“Step tool settings” (Page 4-33)
“Setting the height tool” (Page 4-39)
Standardizing reference points (step tool only)
zz
When multiple step tools are being used, using the same
reference points for multiple step tools will shorten the
processing time.
“Step tool settings” (Page 4-33)
Shortening the Processing Time of the
Average Height Tool
Imaging/measurement
processing
Measurement range
zz
Narrowing the measurement range shortens the processing
time.
“Measurement Range” (Page 4-52)
(Position adjustment
tool)
Size of the tool window
zz
Decreasing the size of the tool window vertically (laser scan
direction) shortens the processing time.
(Tilt adjustment)
Processing time
Tool 1 process
If the tool window is diagonal due to position
adjustment even if the vertical direction is set to
a small value, processing time increases.
If this occurs, adjust the rotation range for
position adjustment.
“Extended functions for the position
adjustment tool” (Page 4-57)
Tool 2 process
Reference height settings
zz
Tool n process
Status output
When the base point is set to [Use another tool] in the
reference height settings, any of the following shortens the
processing time.
yyChange the reference height settings target to [Specify in
the tool].
yySelect a base point within the tool without changing the
window size of the average height tool.
yyDelete the tool that has been originally specified for the
base point.
“Setting the Average Height Tool” (Page 4-46)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
6-21
6
Operating/Adjusting
Trigger input
Shortening the processing time of each
tool
Shortening the Processing Time
When setting multiple average height tools
zz
Arranging the tool windows horizontally within the view
(perpendicular to the laser scan direction) shortens the
processing time.
If the average size varies among different
average height tools, the processing time is not
shortened. Make the same area size setting for
them.
Average area
zz
Increasing the average area shortens the processing time.
“Setting the Average Height Tool” (Page 4-46)
Shortening the processing time of the MAX/
MIN tool
6
If the measurement range is wide, narrowing them will
shorten the processing time.
“Measurement Range” (Page 4-62)
Operating/Adjusting
Measurement range
zz
Average Size
zz
Increasing the average size shortens the processing time.
“Setting the MAX/MIN tool” (Page 4-58)
Decreasing the size of the tool window
zz
If the size of the tool window is large, decreasing it will
shorten the processing time. Reducing the vertical direction
(laser scan direction) shortens the processing time. If the
target is long and thin, you can place the target horizontally
and set the vertical direction for the tool window to a small
value.
“Changing the size of the tool window” (Page 3-19)
If the tool window is diagonal due to position
adjustment even if the vertical direction is set to
a small value, processing time increases. If this
occurs, adjust the rotation range for position
adjustment.
“Extended functions for the position
adjustment tool” (Page 4-57)
Shortening the processing time of the height
area tool
Average Size
zz
Increasing the average size shortens the processing time.
“Setting the height area tool” (Page 4-66)
Decreasing the size of the tool window
zz
If the size of the tool window is large, decreasing it will
shorten the processing time. Reducing the vertical direction
(laser scan direction) shortens the processing time. If the
target is long and thin, you can place the target horizontally
and set the vertical direction for the tool window to a small
value.
“Changing the size of the tool window” (Page 3-19)
If the tool window is diagonal due to position
adjustment even if the vertical direction is set to
a small value, processing time increases. If this
occurs, adjust the rotation range for position
adjustment.
“Extended functions for the position
adjustment tool” (Page 4-57)
Shortening the Processing Time of the Pin
Height Tool
When setting multiple windows
zz
Arranging each window horizontally within the view
(perpendicular to the laser scan direction) shortens the
processing time.
yySetting with a short processing time
Tool window
Laser scan
direction
yySetting with a long processing time
Tool window
Laser scan
direction
Measurement Range
zz
If the measurement range is large, narrowing the range will
shorten the processing time.
“Extended Functions of the Pin Height Tool” (Page 4-76)
6-22
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Shortening the Processing Time
Shortening the processing time of the
position adjustment tool
Rotation Range
Position Adjustment Tool
Search area for position adjustment tool
Search region
zz
If the search region is [Entire], decrease the tool window
size by changing the setting to [Partial]. The search time
can be shortened by decreasing the tool window size.
“Setting the position adjustment tool” (Page 4-55)
6
Operating/Adjusting
Note that the range of the target position that
position adjustment can correct becomes
narrower.
Rotation range
zz
The search time can be shortened by narrowing the rotation
range.
“Extended functions for the position adjustment tool”
(Page 4-57)
Note that the range of the target angle that
the position adjustment function can correct
becomes narrower.
Fine tune outline
zz
If the outline extraction sensitivity is [Middle] or [High],
selecting [Low] will shorten the processing time.
“Setting the position adjustment tool” (Page 4-55)
Produce an image with few unnecessary
zz
outlines
Reducing the number of potential outlines in the field of
view will reduce processing time. Produce an image that
only has necessary outlines with the following methods:
yyMake the target background plain.
yyDecrease the tool window size by setting the search
region to [Partial].
“Setting the position adjustment tool” (Page 4-55)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
6-23
Shortening the Processing Time
Shortening the imaging processing time
You can shorten the imaging processing time with the
following methods:
yyDecrease the image brightness values and shorten the
exposure time.
yySelect [HighGain] for the imaging mode.
yySelect [0] for the halation mitigation function.
“When brightness is to be adjusted manually” (Page
4-9)
Shortening measurement processing
time
6
Operating/Adjusting
You can shorten the measurement processing time with the
following methods:
yyDo not use the [Real time adjustment] function.
“Tilt Adjustment” (Page 4-16)
yyIf you use the [Real time adjustment] function, select
the point size for which processing time is the shortest
(Selecting [Normal] or [Large] shortens the processing
time compared to [Small]).
“Tilt Adjustment” (Page 4-16)
yyIf adjusting the tilt during operation, narrow the reference
surface adjustment range.
“Tilt Adjustment” (Page 4-16)
yySelect [High Speed] for the measurement mode.
“Measurement mode” (Page 4-11)
yyWhen setting multiple tools, use a calculation tool to
standardize reference and measurement points and to
reduce the number of measurement tools.
“Step Calculation Tool” (Page 4-27)
“Step Calculation Tool” (Page 4-97)
Example: ‌To measure height of both Point A and Point B,
and the difference in level of Point A and B
Point A
Point B
Rather than setting "height tool ×2 + step tool", setting
"height tool ×2 + step calculation tool (specify the height
tool)" will shorten the processing time.
This is because "height tool ×2 + step tool" measures
both Point A and Point B twice. Whereas "height tool ×2 +
step calculation tool" measures Point A and Point B once
and can process the difference in level with calculations
only.
6-24
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Chapter
7
Various Functions
This chapter explains the Program Details screen, the Sensor
Detection History screen, the I/O Settings screen, and the
Advanced screen.
In addition, this chapter explains the operation of the menu bar.
Changing the Sensor Displayed on the PC
(Change Connected Sensor Function)...............................7-2
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)..................7-4
Sensor's Detection History
(Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)......7-11
Adding Date and Time information to the sensor
(function for adding sensor date information)................7-17
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images..........................7-19
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor............7-23
Operating from the menu bar............................................7-45
7
Various Functions
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-1
Changing the Sensor Displayed on the PC (Change Connected Sensor Function)
Changing the Sensor Displayed on the PC
(Change Connected Sensor Function)
When multiple sensors are connected to a PC, the sensor displayed on the PC can be changed. When direct connection (2
units or more) or network connection is used, this function can be used.
PC
Ethernet switch
7
Various Functions
7-2
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Changing the Sensor Displayed on the PC (Change Connected Sensor Function)
Changing the sensor to be displayed on a
screen
1 Click [Change Connected Sensor] on the main
screen in [Running] or [Program].
The Change Connected Sensor screen opens.
2 Select a sensor to be displayed on the PC and
click the [Connect] button.
7
Various Functions
The image of the selected sensor is displayed on the
PC.
yyWhen direct connection (1 unit) is used,
this function cannot be used.
yyIf the selected sensor has not gone through
the initial setup process, the Sensor Setup
screen will be displayed.
“Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Scan
Mode Setup)” (Page 4-1)
“Chapter 5 Settings Navigator (Line
Mode Setup)” (Page 5-1)
yySensors that have been displayed as
the search results of the network search
are displayed. If you want to connect to
a sensor that is not displayed, click the
[Search Again] button.
yyBy clicking the [LED Blinking] button, the
indicator light for the selected sensor blinks as
described below.
yySensor head: The indicator light blinks green
and red alternately.
yySensor amplifier:‌‌PWR/ERR, OUT, and
TRIG blinks orange.
yyBy clicking the [Change Device Name] button,
the screen for setting the device name will
open.
“Device Name” (Page 7-38)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-3
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
Overview of the program functions
The sensor can save the judgment conditions set in the
Settings Navigator as a program. Up to 32 programs
(32 products) can be saved. By selecting the judgment
condition (program) for each product, changeover can be
easily performed.
Sensor
P31: Product XX
•••
P02: Product C
P01: Product B
P00: Product A
Settings Navigator
yyDetection Conditions
yyMaster
yyTool Settings
yyOutput Assignment
7
Sensor Advanced Settings
yyI/O Settings
yyDevice Settings
Things can be performed with the
program functions
yyUp to 32 programs can be saved.
“Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)”
(Page 4-1)
“Chapter 5 Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)”
(Page 5-1)
yyPrograms can be named.
“Editing a program name” (Page 7-8)
yyPrograms can be copied and used.
“Copying a program” (Page 7-8)
yyReads and operates the saved program.
“Switching programs (changing over)” (Page 7-5)
yyA program switch method can be selected.
“Program Switch Method” (Page 7-24)
yyPrograms can be reset to their default settings.
“Initializing a program” (Page 7-10)
Preparing the program functions
Registers the judgment condition for each product to the
program before running.
Various Functions
Preparation flow
1 Select a program number.
Select a program number to register a judgment
condition from P00 to P31.
2 Set the judgment condition in the Settings
Navigator.
3 Select a program switch method.
The switching method can be selected from the
following items.
yySwitching from the external input line.
yySelecting the program from the main screen in
[Running].
yyDisplaying the Program Details screen and selecting
the program.
7-4
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
Switching programs (changing over)
Preparation procedures
1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu.
“Run screen” (Page 6-4)
2 Select a program number to register a judgment
condition.
When switching the program in the main
screen in [Running]
1 Start run mode.
“Starting Operation” (Page 6-2)
2 Select the program number to which the product
to be judged is registered.
3 Set the judgment condition in the Settings
Navigator.
“Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Scan Mode Setup)”
(Page 4-1)
“Chapter 5 Settings Navigator (Line Mode Setup)”
(Page 5-1)
A confirmation screen appears.
4 Repeat the above steps to register programs for
all products that will be inspected and changed
over with the sensor.
5 Select a program switch method.
3 Start run mode with the new program number by
“Program Switch Method” (Page 7-24)
6 If [External IN] is selected in the program switch
clicking the [OK] button.
method, set the input terminal.
“Input Function” (Page 7-23)
“When switching the program by external input”
(Page 7-6)
The bits to be used will differ depending on the number
of programs.
Product numbers
to be registered
(Program
numbers)
2
bit to be assigned to the input
line
bit0
3 to 4
bit0/bit1
5 to 8
bit0/bit1/bit2
9 to 16
bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3
17 to 32
bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3/bit4
yyFor details of how to switch the program from
the control panel, refer to "IX-H User's Manual
(Control Panel)".
yyFor details of how to switch programs from the
DL Series communications unit, refer to "DL
Series User’s Manual (IX-H/IX)".
For example, if the number of programs is 7,
you do not need to assign inputs to bit3 and bit4.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-5
7
Various Functions
If you change to a program with a different
mode, a message will appear stating that
the detection history, if any exists, will be
deleted. Clicking the [OK] button deletes the
history.
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
When switching the program by external input
1 Start run mode.
“Starting Operation” (Page 6-2)
The following message appears when run mode starts.
"The program switching method is set to external input. Program number during operation corresponds to state of
external input."
2 Select the program number for the product to be judged by activating specific input lines.
Activate input lines IN2 to IN8 which were assigned to bit0 to bit4 in the input settings according to the following table.
The statuses of the input lines need to be maintained for as long as a program is active.
7
Various Functions
Program
number
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
Program
number
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
P00
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
P16
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
P01
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
P17
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
P02
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
P18
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
P03
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
P19
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
P04
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
P20
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
P05
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
P21
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
P06
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
P22
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
P07
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
P23
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
P08
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
P24
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
P09
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
P25
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
P10
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
P26
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
P11
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
P27
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
P12
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
P28
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
P13
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
P29
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
P14
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
P30
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
P15
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
P31
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
yyWhen the polarity is [NPN]
yyWhen the polarity is [PNP]
ON:
OFF:
ON:
OFF:
The input is shorted with a 0V line
Open
Voltage is applied to the input
Open
Start run mode with the new program number.
For details on how to control the input line and the timing chart, refer to:
“Changing Over (Scan Mode)” (Page 9-11)
“Changing Over (Line Mode)” (Page 9-13)
7-6
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
Displaying the Program Details screen
This section explains the Program Details screen displayed
when the [Detail] button is clicked on the main screen of
the IX-Navigator.
1 Display the main screen in [Program].
“Run screen” (Page 6-4)
2 Click the [Detail] button.
(3) [Initialize] button
Initializes the set items in the program and resets to the
default.
“Initializing a program” (Page 7-10)
(4) Program list
Displays a program number, program name, and
thumbnail image.
The selected program is indicated by an orange frame
and the details are displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
(5) Program name
Displays the program name.
(6) [Edit] button
Edits the program name.
“Editing a program name” (Page 7-8)
The Program Details screen opens. The displayed
items are as follows.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(7) Tool list
Displays the list of tools set in the program.
Selecting a tool displays the frame of the tool window
on the displayed image with a thick line.
(8) Master
Displays the master.
(9) Detection mode
Displays the detection mode for the program.
(4)
(6)
(7)
Various Functions
(5)
7
(10) [Close] button
The system switches to the selected program and
returns to the main screen in [Program].
(8)
(9)
(10)
(1) [Copy] button
Copies the program.
“Copying a program” (Page 7-8)
(2) [Import from File] button
Imports a program from the batch backup file.
“Importing a program” (Page 7-9)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-7
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
Editing a program name
Copying a program
You can change a program name to any name.
Copies a set program to another program number. Creates
a new program using the settings from the original program.
1 Open the main screen in [Program].
1 Open the main screen in [Program].
“Run screen” (Page 6-4)
“Run screen” (Page 6-4)
2 Click the [Detail] button.
2 Click the [Detail] button.
The Program Details screen opens.
3 Select a program and click the [Edit] button.
The Program Details screen opens.
3 Click the [Copy] button.
7
Various Functions
The screen to edit the program name opens.
4
Input any name and click the [OK] button.
The screen to copy the program opens.
4 Select the program copy source and destination,
and click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Program details screen.
The program is copied.
7-8
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
5 Select a batch backup file that will be used as
Importing a program
Imports one program from a batch backup file. A new
program is created using the settings from the imported
program.
the source of the imported program and click the
[Open] button.
1 Open the main screen in [Program].
“Run screen” (Page 6-4)
2 Click the [Detail] button.
6 Select a program from the batch backup file to
be a source of settings for the new program.
The Program Details screen opens.
3 Click the [Import from File] button.
7 Select the program that will be used as the
7
destination for the imported program.
Various Functions
The screen to import a file opens.
The program from the batch backup file will be imported
to the selected destination.
4 Click the [...] button.
The dialog box to select a file opens.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-9
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
Initializing a program
Initialize the settings in the program to reset them to their
default settings.
1 Open the main screen in [Program].
“Run screen” (Page 6-4)
2 Click the [Detail] button.
The Program Details screen opens.
3 Select the program to be initialized and click the
[Initialize] button.
7
Various Functions
A confirmation screen appears.
4 Click the [OK] button.
The selected program is initialized.
7-10
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Sensor's Detection History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)
Sensor's Detection History (Confirming the
Images whose Status Result is NG)
The sensor has built-in memory that can be used to save
the images used for judgment. The sensor automatically
saves the latest images according to the saving condition.
The saving conditions are as follows:
€ images
€All
Saves all the images that were judged.
€
images only (default value)
€NG
Saves only the images with a total status result of NG.
The sensor loads the saved images into the PC. The
images can be used to confirm the causes or patterns of
NG results.
The numbers of saved images for the detection history are
as follows:
yyScan mode: 100 images
yyLine mode: 500 images
Displaying the sensor detection history
screen
There are two methods for displaying the Sensor
Detection History screen.
To change the logging conditions, display it
from the main screen in [Program].
“Displaying from the main screen in
[Program]” (Page 7-12)
Displaying from the main screen in
[Running]
1 Click the [Detection History] button in the main
screen in [Running].
The numbers of saved images vary depending on the
setting. Refer to the following:
“Sensor Amplifier” (Page 10-5)
Since the memory for the sensor detection
history is volatile, all saved images are erased
when the power is turned OFF. To save the
images, batch back up the images into USB
memory.
“Backing up in a batch” (Page 7-19)
yyOne image is saved per detection history for
programs in scan mode.
yyFor programs in line mode, images are saved as
per the following:
yySample Hold (Saved at timing input):
One image/detection history
yyPeak Hold/Bottom Hold:
One image is saved per tool (excluding the
position adjustment tool) (max. 16 images/
detection history)
yyP-P Hold:
Two images are saved per tool (excluding the
position adjustment tool) (max. 32 images/
detection history)
The Logging pause confirmation screen opens.
Select whether or not to pause.
When operation is not paused:
yyAdded or overwritten images from the
history will not be updated automatically.
To update, click the [Refresh] button.
yyIf an archive image is overwritten, updated,
or erased by the sensor while it is being
displayed, it may not be displayed again.
2 Click the [OK] button.
The Sensor Detection History screen appears.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-11
Various Functions
For programs in line mode if [Peak/Bottom/
P-P Hold] is selected for [Timing Input] in the
detection conditions, multiple images will be
saved for one sample. Therefore, the number of
images that are kept for the judgment count and
history may differ.
7
Sensor's Detection History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)
Loading and viewing saved images
Displaying from the main screen in
[Program]
1
Click the [Detection History] button in the main
screen in [Program].
1 Display the Sensor Detection History screen.
“Displaying the sensor detection history screen”
(Page 7-11)
The Sensor Detection History screen appears.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(9)
(10)
(8)
(13)
The Sensor Detection History screen appears.
(11)
(12)
(14)
(1) Filter
Select the detection history type from [All]/[NG Only]/[OK
Only].
7
Various Functions
(2) [Save] button
Saves all images saved in the sensor’s image history
to individual files (*.bmp and *.ixa) or to a batch backup
file (*.ixa).
“Save Selected History” (Page 7-13)
“Saving all images from the image history
individually” (Page 7-14)
“Backing up the Detection History in a Batch” (Page
7-15)
When you select batch backup, both the
archived images and the settings for the
programs are saved.
(3) [Refresh] button
Displayed if [Continue Logging] is selected when the
detection history is displayed from the main screen in
[Running].
Clears the current image history displayed on the IXNavigator and then acquires and displays the latest
image history from the sensor.
(4) [Delete All] button
Clears the image history currently saved in the sensor.
“Clearing the saved images” (Page 7-16)
(5) [Logging Settings] button
Sets the logging condition (storage condition) for the
detection history.
“Changing the image history logging conditions”
(Page 7-16)
7-12
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Sensor's Detection History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)
(6) Thumbnail images
Displays the total status results, history number, and
thumbnail image.
Selected detection histories are displayed in an orange
frame.
yyIf the setting to add the sensor date
information is enabled, the capture date
information will be added.
“Adding Date and Time information to
the sensor (function for adding sensor date
information)” (Page 7-17)
yyThe history number for an image from a
program with different settings than the current
program will be displayed in gray.
Save Selected History
Saves the selected Detection History.
1 Display the Sensor Detection History screen.
“Displaying the sensor detection history screen”
(Page 7-11)
2 Click the [Save] button and select the [Save
Selected History (*.bmp,*.ixa)].
(7) Processing time (scan mode only)
Displays the processing time of the selected image.
(8) History number
Displays the history number of the selected detection
history.
In the following cases, characters of the history
number are displayed in gray.
yyThe program number is different from the
current program
yyImages which the tool settings was changed
after detection history saving
A confirmation screen appears.
7
(10) Image tool bar
Displays the tools for operating the captured image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
Selected detect
history
The file name of the backup file
including only the selected detection
history.
(12) Program
Displays the program number and program name.
BMP file of the
screen
The bmp file name of the screen shot.
(13) Tool information
Displays the tool information for the the image’s
program. Selected tools are displayed in an orange
frame.
When a program is in line mode and [Peak/Bottom/P-P
Hold] is selected for [Timing Input], images are saved
by tool. You can select a tool to change the image.
For tools for which [Peak to Peak] is selected for [Hold
mode], two images that can be switched with the [Peak]/
[Bottom] buttons are saved.
BMP file of image
The bmp file name of the captured
image.
Required Size
The file size (estimated value) of the
backup file.
(11) Captured image
Displays the captured image.
3 Click the [Go] button.
The Save As screen opens.
In the case of a line mode program for
which [Peak/Bottom/P-P Hold] is selected
for [Timing Input], the captured image is not
displayed for the following tools:
yyPosition Adjustment Tool
yyTilt Adjustment Tool
yyStep Calculation Tool that targets
expansion unit tools
(14) [Close] button
The system returns to the main screen in [Running] or
[Program].
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-13
Various Functions
(9) Total status result
Displays the total status result of the selected detection
in OK or NG.
Sensor's Detection History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)
4 Click the [Save] button.
Saving all images from the image history
individually
Saves all images saved in the sensor’s image history to
individual files (*.bmp and *.ixa).
This function saves all files at the same time. To
save images individually, save with the [Save
Image] button on the image tool bar.
Change the file save destination and file name
as needed.
“Displaying the sensor detection history screen”
(Page 7-11)
2 Click the [Save] button and select [Save all
The save completion message opens.
5 Click the [OK] button.
1 Display the Sensor Detection History screen.
images one by one (*.bmp, *.ixp)].
The display returns to the Sensor Detection History
screen.
7
Various Functions
The Browse For Folder screen opens.
3 Specify the destination for the images and click
the [OK] button.
The file is saved with the following name:
yyFor programs in line mode if [Peak/Bottom/
P-P Hold] is selected for [Timing Input] in the
detection conditions
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss(sequence number)_
history number_tool number[_PEAK|_
BOTTOM].bmp*
*: ‌YYYY : Year, MM : Month, DD : Day,
hh : Hour, mm : Minute, ss : Second
*: ‌When the tool for the program is in [Peak
to Peak] for Hold mode, “_PEAK” or “_
BOTTOM” is added.
yyIf other than programs above
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss(sequence number)_
history number.bmp*
*: ‌YYYY : Year, MM : Month, DD : Day,
hh : Hour, mm : Minute, ss : Second
The save completion message opens.
7-14
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Sensor's Detection History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)
4 Click the [OK] button.
The display returns to the Sensor Detection History
screen.
4 Click the [Save] button.
Backing up the Detection History in a
Batch
Saves all images saved in the sensor’s image history to a
batch backup file (*.ixa).
1 Display the Sensor Detection History screen.
“Displaying the sensor detection history screen”
(Page 7-11)
Change the file save destination and file name
as needed.
The backup completion message opens.
2 Click the [Save] button and select [Batch Backup 5 Click the [OK] button.
(*.ixa)].
The display returns to the Sensor Detection History
screen.
7
Various Functions
The Batch Backup screen opens.
3 Click the [Go] button.
€
size
€Required
Displays the file size (estimated value) of the backup
file.
If you run a backup while the device is
operating, the backup file size decreases only
for any archive images that are deleted while the
backup is running.
Name it and the save screen opens.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-15
Sensor's Detection History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)
Clearing the saved images
Deletes all images saved in the internal memory of the
sensor.
1 Display the Sensor Detection History screen.
Changing the image history logging
conditions
1 Display the Sensor Detection History screen.
To change the logging conditions, display
the sensor detection history screen from the
main screen in [Program].
“Displaying the sensor detection history screen”
(Page 7-11)
2 Click the [Delete All] button.
“Displaying the sensor detection history screen”
(Page 7-11)
2 Click the [Logging Settings] button.
7
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Click the [Yes] button.
Various Functions
This clears the detection history.
The Logging Settings screen opens.
3 Select a logging condition.
€
€All
Saves all images to the detection history regardless of
the status result.
€
only
€NG
Only saves the images whose status result is NG to the
detection history.
4 Click the [OK] button.
The display returns to the Sensor Detection History
screen.
yyThe numbers of saved images for the
detection history vary depending on the
settings. If you do not need all images in
the history, Keyence recommends that you
select [NG only].
“Sensor Amplifier” (Page 10-5)
yyFor programs in line mode if [Peak/Bottom/
P-P Hold] is selected for [Timing Input] in
the detection conditions, multiple images
will be saved for one sample. Therefore,
the number of images that are kept for the
judgment count and history may differ.
7-16
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Adding Date and Time information to the sensor (function for adding sensor date information)
Adding Date and Time information to the sensor
(function for adding sensor date information)
Overview for Adding Sensor Date
Information Function
Direct Connection (2 units or more)/Network
Connection
Enabling the adding sensor date information function
enables you to add the capture date information to the
image data.
If it is NG, the data can be confirmed on the sensor
detection history screen.
If [Time+Date Info] is enabled, the following
operations occur:
yyCapture date information is added to archived
images.
yyThe sensor date information is synchronized with
the PC date every 3 seconds.
yyOnce the date information has been added to
the sensor, the sensor date information will be
updated even if the PC is disconnected.
yyIf the sensor is turned off, the date information will
be cleared.
Date information is added to the sensor when it is
connected to IX-Navigator.
1 Open the main screen in [Program].
“Run screen” (Page 6-4)
2 Select [Setting] → [Time+Date Info] from the
menu bar.
3 Select [Enable].
4 Click the [Change] button.
Setting the Adding Sensor Date
Information Function
7
For direct connection (1 unit)
5 Register the sensors to which date information
1 Open the main screen in [Program].
added from the list.
“Run screen” (Page 6-4)
2
The screen to specify a sensor opens.
Select [Setting] → [Time+Date Info] from the
menu bar.
€
searching for a sensor and registering it
€When
(1) Click the [Search Sensor] button.
3 Select [Enable].
4 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program].
The sensors are searched and registered in the list.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-17
Various Functions
Date information is added to the sensor when it is
connected to IX-Navigator.
Adding Date and Time information to the sensor (function for adding sensor date information)
€
specifying the IP address of the sensor for
€When
registering
(1) Click the [Add Sensor] button.
The Specify IP Address screen appears.
(2) Enter the sensor's IP address and click the [OK]
button.
7
The sensor of the specified IP address will be registered
in the list.
6 Select [ON] from [Setting] row of the sensors to
add the date information.
Various Functions
[ON] is selected for newly registered sensors.
yyUp to 16 sensors can be registered on the
Sensor List screen.
yyIf you cannot connect to a sensor for which
[ON] is set, the IP address is displayed in red.
yyTo initialize the list, click the [Clear] button.
7 After the setting is completed, click the [OK]
button.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program].
7-18
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images
Backs up the data saved in the sensor, transfers the setting
data, and captures an image.
4 Perform the Batch Backup settings.
Saving the sensor settings and the
detection history
Backing up in a batch
Backs up the data saved in the sensor to the PC in a batch
backup file.
When using multiple sensors, settings can be copied using
the batch backup data.
yyIt is recommended to perform a batch backup
of the data saved in the sensor in case of
malfunction of the product.
yyThe save time increases when backup is
performed during operation. Running this
operation while in setup is recommended.
€
Detection History
€Save
Selects the backup target.
OFF
Backs up all the sensor settings.
ON
Backs up the sensor settings and detection history.
If [Save Detection History] is set to [ON]
and a backup is performed, the following
detection histories cannot be backed up.
Running this operation while in setup is
recommended.
yyA detection history that was deleted during
batch backup
yyA detection history that increased in size
during batch backup
1 Display the main screen in [Running] or
[Program].
“Run screen” (Page 6-4)
2 Click the [Backup] button.
€
Size
€Required
If you select [Save Detection History] is set
to [ON] and run a backup while the device is
operating, the backup file size decreases only
for any archive images that are deleted while the
backup is running.
The Backup screen opens.
3 Click the [Batch Backup] button.
5 Click the [Go] button.
The Save As screen opens.
6 Click the [Save] button.
The Batch Backup screen opens.
yyThe following folder is set by default:
C:\Users\(Login_user_name)\Documents\
IX-Navigator
yyThe following file name is set by default:
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss.ixa*
* ‌YYYY : Year, MM : Month, DD : Day,
hh : Hour, mm : Minute, ss : Second
yyChange a saving destination of the file and file
name as needed.
The backup completion message opens.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-19
7
Various Functions
Displays the file size (estimated value) of the backup
file.
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images
7 Click the [OK] button.
€
Detection History
€Save
The system returns to the Backup screen.
Selects the backup target.
Backing up the program individually
Backs up the setting data saved in the sensor into the PC
for each individual program.
OFF
Backs up the program settings.
ON
Backs up the program settings and detection
history.
If [Save Detection History] is set to [ON]
and a backup is performed, the following
detection histories cannot be backed up.
Running this operation while in setup is
recommended.
yyA detection history that was deleted during
backup
yyA detection history that increased in size
during backup
The saving time increases when this is
performed during operation. Running this
operation while in setup is recommended.
1 Display the main screen in [Running] or
[Program].
“Run screen” (Page 6-4)
2 Click the [Backup] button.
€
Size
€Required
Displays the file size (estimated value) of the backup
file.
yyIf you select [Save Detection History] is set
to [ON] and run a backup while the device is
operating, the backup file size decreases only
for any archive images that are deleted while
the backup is running.
yyThe file size displays the size of programs
for which all detection histories are selected.
If the [Save Detection History] check box
is selected and back up is run when there
is detection histories of multiple programs,
only the detection histories of the selected
programs will be saved. Therefore, the file size
will decrease.
7
Various Functions
The Backup screen opens.
3 Click the [Individual Program Backup] button.
5 Click the [Go] button.
The Save As screen opens.
6 Click the [Save] button.
The Batch Backup screen opens.
4 Set the individual program backup settings.
yyThe following folder is set by default:
C:\Users\(Login_user_name)\Documents\
IX-Navigator
yyThe following file name is set by default:
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss.ixa*
* ‌YYYY : Year, MM : Month, DD : Day,
hh : Hour, mm : Minute, ss : Second
yyChange a saving destination of the file and file
name as needed.
€
Programs
€Saved
Select a program to back up from the pull-down menu.
The backup completion message opens.
7 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Backup screen.
7-20
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images
Saving images and screens displayed on the
IX-Navigator individually
An image displayed on the IX-Navigator can be saved to
the PC by clicking on the [Save Image] button.
The IX-Navigator’s screen will also be saved at the same
time (screenshot).
The screens which display the [Save Image] button are
below:
yyMain screen in [Running]
yyMain screen in [Program]
yySettings Navigator
yyProgram Details
yySensor Detection History
This section explains the procedure for saving images by
using an example of the main screen in [Running].
Procedure to save images
„„
Confirming the saving destination of an
„„
image
1 Click the save image button and select the [Show
saved image file location] button.
The folder used as the destination for the saved images
is displayed.
Changing the destination for saved images
„„
1 Click the [Save Image] button.
1 Click the save image button and select the
[Change saved image file location] button.
7
yyThe following folder is set by default:
C:\Users\(Login_user_name)\Documents\IXNavigator\IMAGE
yyThe file is saved with the following name:
yyImage by the sensor
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss.ixa*
yyIX-Navigator screen
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss_screen.bmp*
Various Functions
The [Image saved] message appears, and a file in .bmp
format will be saved to the save destination.
The Browse For Folder screen opens.
2 Specify a destination for the saved images and
click the [OK] button.
* YYYY : Year, MM : Month, DD : Day, hh : Hour,
mm : Minute, ss : Second
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-21
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images
Transferring the backed up settings to
the sensor
5 Select a batch backup file to be transferred, and
click the [Open] button.
Transfers the settings data (batch backup file) saved in the
PC to the sensor.
yyOperations cannot be canceled during
transmission of the settings data.
yyIt is recommended to back up the data saved
in the sensor in a batch before transmission.
“Backing up in a batch” (Page 7-19)
yyThe detection history will not be transferred.
yyA batch backup file from a different model than
the connected sensor cannot be transferred.
yyThe connection between the communications
unit (DL) and external device is temporarily
disconnected when the communications unit
(DL) settings are changed by the transfer of
settings data.
The Transfer Program Settings screen opens.
6 Confirm the information to be transferred from
the setting file and click the [Send] button.
1 Display the main screen in [Running] or
[Program].
“Run screen” (Page 6-4)
7
2 Click the [Backup] button.
Various Functions
yyIf you would like to transfer the I/O polarity
(NPN/PNP) as well as the network settings,
select the [Transfer the below settings.]
check box
of the Setting Transfer
Options.
The Backup screen opens.
3 Click the [Transfer Program Settings] button.
A confirmation screen appears.
4 Click the [OK] button.
If the [Transfer the below settings.] check
box
is selected, pay attention to the
following items.
yyWhen a file transfer is completed, the
connection with the sensor is terminated
and the system returns to the Activation
Menu screen.
yyWhen the protocol setting has been
changed, connection is terminated and the
sensor restarts.
After file transfer has been complete, the transfer
completion message opens.
The screen to select the batch backup file opens.
7 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Backup screen.
If a file is transferred with the [Transfer the
below settings.] check box
in Setting
Transfer Options selected, connection with
the sensor is terminated and the system
returns to the Activation Menu screen.
7-22
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
Setting the Advanced Information of the
Sensor
This section explains the Advanced Sensor Settings screen
displayed when the [Advanced Sensor Settings] button on
the main screen is clicked.
The Advanced Sensor Settings can only be
changed when the [Advanced Sensor Settings]
button is clicked while on the main screen in
[Program].
Input
Sets the input settings for the sensor.
1 Click the [Advanced Sensor Settings] button on
the main screen in [Program].
Input Function
1 Select the function to be assigned to the input
line from the drop-down list.
€
€IN1
Sets the detection timing of the external trigger input for
IN1 input line.
yyExternal Trigger Rising/Timing (default)
In scan mode, it detects the trigger input to the rising
edge of the external trigger.
In line mode, it detects timing input.
yyExternal Trigger Falling/Timing
In scan mode, it detects the trigger input to the falling
edge of the external trigger.
In line mode, it detects timing input.
€
to IN8
€IN2
Sets the roles for input line IN2 to 8.
yyOFF (default)
Disregards the input.
yyProgram bit0 to bit4
Specifies the bit number for switching programs.
The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.
of the sensor.
7
yyZERO/Offset
Runs batch ZERO/Offset.
yyReset (Error Only)
Resets currently occurring errors.
yyReset (Status Only)
Resets the current status results. If using the Hold
function, it releases the Hold state for the status
results.
yyReset (Status & Error)
Resets the current status results and occurring errors.
3 When the setting is completed, click the [OK]
button.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program].
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-23
Various Functions
2 Select the [Input] tab and set the input settings
yyLaser Emission Stop
Stops light and laser emissions. In scan mode, it
stops the receipt of external trigger inputs.
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
Output
Program Switch Method
Sets the output settings for the sensor.
1 Select a program switch method.
€
(default)
€Panel/PC/Comm.(DL)
The program number can be switched on the control
panel, PC, or communications units (DL Series).
1 Click the [Advanced Sensor Settings] button on
the main screen in [Program].
€
input
€External
The program number can be switched from external
input.
To switch a program number from external
input, you need to assign program bit0 to
bit4 to input lines IN2 to IN8.
“Input Function” (Page 7-23)
The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.
2 Select the [Output] tab and set the output
ZERO/Offset storage
1 Select whether to store the ZERO/Offset state in
settings of the sensor.
nonvolatile memory.
€
(default)
€Disable
7
The ZERO/Offset state will not be stored in nonvolatile
memory. ZERO/Offset adjustment performed from the
control panel or IX-Navigator will be stored.
Various Functions
€
€Enable
The ZERO/Offset state will be stored in nonvolatile
memory.
If you run ZERO/Offset frequently, select
[Disable]. You can overwrite nonvolatile
memory up to one million times.
3 After the setting is completed, click the [OK]
button.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program].
N.O./N.C.
1 Specifies the output format of the output line
with [N.O.] or [N.C.].
€
(default)
€N.O.
ON is output when the conditions are satisfied and OFF
is output when they are not.
€
€N.C.
OFF is output when the conditions are satisfied and ON
is output when they are not.
7-24
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
Analog output accuracy
„„
Output Options
You can switch between ±5 V, 1-5 V, 0-5 V, and 4-20
mA for analog output.
1 Select a status output mode.
Voltage output
€
(default)
€Latching
Outputs in accordance with the judgment condition of
the sensor.
Current output
Output range*1
±5 V
(Full scale 10 V)
4 to 20 mA
(Full scale 16 mA)
€
€One-Shot
Output
resistance
100Ω
-
€
€ON-Delay
Max. load
resistance
-
350Ω
Repeat
accuracy
±1 mV
±1.5 µA
Display
accuracy
±0.05% of F.S.
±0.25 % of F.S.
Outputs the status of the output line in one shot.
Output is delayed for the specified time whenever the
judgment condition changes from OFF to ON.
€
€OFF-Delay
Output is delayed for the specified time whenever the
judgment condition changes from ON to OFF.
€
Time
€Delay
Set this setting when [ON-Delay] or [OFF-Delay] is
selected.
Specify the time to delay status output.
yyDefault value: 100 ms
€
ON Time
€One-Shot
Temperature
±0.005% of F.S./°C
characteristics
Update
frequency
±0.01 % of F.S./°C
Scan mode: After processing is finalized
Line mode: Same as sampling frequency
*1 Output during an alarm or error is as follows:
Voltage output: -5.5 V, +5.5 V (selectable)
Current output: 3 mA, 21 mA (selectable)
Set this setting when [One shot] is selected.
Specify the one-shot output time.
yyDefault value: 100 ms
7
Various Functions
Analog Output
1 Specifies the analog output format and output
value when an alarm or error occurs.
Output During Alarm/Error
Analog Output
Type
Setting range
Default value
OFF
-
-
4 to 20 mA
3.0 mA
21.0 mA
3.0mA
0-5V
0V, 5.5V
5.5V
1-5V
0V, 5.5V
5.5V
±5 V
-5.5V, 5.5V
5.5V
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-25
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
€
output
€Analog
I/O Monitor
Allows for manual control of the I/O line to confirm correct
wiring.
1 Click the [Advanced Sensor Settings] button on
the main screen in [Program].
This button is displayed if analog output is enabled.
Select the output value from the drop-down list and click
[Test Output] to change analog output.
“Analog Output” (Page 7-25)
3 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program].
The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.
2 Select the [I/O Monitor] tab, check input, and set
output.
7
Various Functions
€
€Input
Displays the input status of external input in real time.
You can check whether output is being correctly input
into the sensor.
In the following case, the IN1 input status
of the expansion unit displays the IN1 input
status of the main unit.
yyWhen [Trigger/Timing] of “Main/Expansion
Simul Input” is enabled in line mode.
yyWhen both of the main and expansion
unit are set to the scan mode and external
trigger, and [Trigger/Timing] of “Main/
Expansion Simul Input” is enabled.
€
€Output
Controls the output state for each OUT.
You can check whether signals are being correctly
output from the sensor.
To turn on output for each OUT, select [ON] and select
[OFF] to turn output off.
7-26
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
NPN/PNP
Main with Exp. unit operations
Switches the polarity of the sensor.
1 Click the [Advanced Sensor Settings] button on
the main screen in [Program].
The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.
2 Select the [NPN/PNP] tab and then select the
sensor I/O format.
Output circuit
NPN open collector
Input circuit
No-voltage input
To use the main/expansion unit link operation,
performing the following operations or changing the
settings pauses expansion unit operation and turns
ON the expansion unit's BUSY output.
Both scan mode and line mode
yyWhen the main/expansion unit simultaneous input
settings are changed
yyWhen the interference prevention setting is
changed
yyWhen scan mode or line mode is changed with
[Trigger/Timing] enabled for [Main/Expansion
Simul Input].
yyWhen scan mode or line mode is changed with
the interference prevention setting enabled.
Line mode only
yyWhen the sampling frequency is changed with
[Trigger/Timing] enabled for [Main/Expansion
Simul Input].
yyWhen the sampling frequency is changed with the
interference prevention setting enabled.
yyWhen the sampling frequency is changed with the
main/expansion unit calculation setting enabled.
yyWhen a tool that performs calculations on the
main or expansion unit is added or deleted
yyWhen a program is changed with [Trigger/Timing]
enabled for [Main/Expansion Simul Input].
yyWhen a program that has a different sampling
frequency is loaded with the interference
prevention setting enabled.
yyWhen changing from a program that has the main/
expansion unit calculation setting set to a program
that does not have the main/expansion unit
calculation setting set.
yyWhen changing from a program that does not
have the main/expansion unit calculation setting
set to a program that has the main/expansion unit
calculation setting set.
1 Click the [Advanced Sensor Settings] button on
the main screen in [Program].
€
€PNP
Output circuit
PNP open collector
Input circuit
Voltage input
3 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program].
The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-27
7
Various Functions
€
€NPN
This setting can only be set on main units that have an
expansion unit connected.
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
2 Select the [Main with Exp. unit operations] tab
and configure the main/expansion unit link
settings.
Interference Prevention
1 Select whether to enable or disable the prevent
interference function.
€
(default)
€Off
The prevent interference function is not used.
€
€On
The prevent interference function is used.
The LED light and laser emissions timing is staggered
between the main unit and expansion unit.
3 After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program].
7
Main/Expansion Simul Input
Various Functions
1 Select the settings for [Main/Expansion Simul
Input].
€
(default)
€Disable
The input for the main unit will not be transmitted to the
expansion unit.
€
€Enable
The input for the main unit will be transmitted to the
expansion unit.
yyIf [Enable] is selected for [Trigger/Timing],
the expansion unit behaves in the following
manner:
yyHow the trigger button is displayed on the
[Program] screen depends on the main unit's
settings.
yyThe trigger button is always hidden on the
[Running] screen.
yyIn line mode, sampling frequency is the
same as the sampling frequency setting for
the main unit.
yyIf [Enable] is selected for [Program Switching],
the expansion unit behaves in the following
manner:
yyThe method to switch programs depends on
the main unit's settings.
yyThe expansion unit will switch to the same
program number as the main unit.
yyWhen the main/expansion simultaneous input
setting is enabled, function processing on
the main unit is completed after processing
on the expansion unit is completed.
yyIf [Enable] is selected for [ZERO/Offset],
batch ZERO/Offset is not subject to
simultaneous input.
7-28
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
yyEven if the [Main/Expansion Simul Input]
setting is disabled, the main and expansion
units link to capture and judge images.
yyFor the prevent interference function
to work, the main and expansion units'
programs must be set in the following way:
yyThe operation mode must be the same
between the units.
yyExternal trigger must be set on both
units.
yyIf the interference prevention function
is set to [On] in line mode, the sampling
frequency is twice as long as when [Off]
is set. Additionally, the expansion unit
sampling frequency is the same as the
sampling frequency setting for the main
unit.
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
After operation starts, when the target is judged, the
text or images that reflect the settings are automatically
transferred to the FTP server.
FTP
Configure the FTP client function.
1 Click the [Advanced Sensor Settings] button on
the main screen in [Program].
The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.
2 Select the [FTP] tab and configure the FTP client
settings.
3 After setting is completed, click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program].
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-29
7
Various Functions
yyChanging Enabled/Disabled for the FTP
client function changes the number of
saved images for the detection history.
“Sensor Amplifier” (Page 10-5)
yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],
adjust the processing time so that all the
images can be transferred. Also, check
that there is sufficient storage in the FTP
server.
yyFor an image that meets multiple transfer
conditions, an image is transferred for
each of the number of conditions.
yyWhen the transfer could not be done in
time, the data is saved in the internal
buffer. The maximum number of saved
images in the internal buffer is 20 images
in scan mode and 100 images in line mode.
yyImage data is transferred in the sequence
that the images have been saved to the
internal buffer.
yyIf there is not sufficient space in the
internal buffer, the image is discarded
because it cannot be saved in the buffer.
An FTP transfer error (insufficient transfer
buffer) occurs.
yySwitching the program between different
modes during operation clears all the
non-transferred image data in the internal
buffer. Also, an FTP transfer error (transfer
failure) occurs.
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
Connection Test
„„
FTP Client Settings
Click the [Connection Test] button.
1 Select [Enable] for [FTP Client Settings] and click 1
the [Destination Settings] button.
yyWhen a screen appears stating that connection is
successful, setting has been completed.
yyUnder the root folder of the FTP server, the
“IX_Series_FTP_Test” folder is created, where
“IX_Series_FTP_Test.txt” is transferred.
7
2 Set the network address of the FTP server.
Various Functions
€ Address
€IP
Displays the IP address of the FTP server.
Set a user-defined address.
€
€Port
Displays the port number.
(default: 21)
Normally, there is no need to change.
€
Name
€User
Input the user name for logging into the FTP server.
(Default: Not set (blank))
€
€Password
Input the password for logging into the FTP server.
(Default: Not set (blank))
€
Mode
€PASV
To use the passive mode, select [Enable].
€
Test
€Connection
Test the connection to the FTP server.
3 After setting is completed, click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Advanced Sensor Settings
screen.
7-30
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
If data is not correctly transferred with the
FTP client function, refer to the following:
“Remedy when data transfer via FTP is
unavailable” (Page A-29)
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
€
€Enable
Common Settings
Adds judgment information to an image.
Transfers an image of 440 pixels horizontally and 240
pixels vertically.
The judgment information added is as follows:
yyProgram number
yyTool information (tool number, judgment value, unit,
status result, alarm on/off (ALM))
yyAlphabetical notation of position adjustment (P) and
tilt adjustment (T), judgment value, status result,
alarm on/off (ALM)
yyDate and time information
1 Configure the common settings.
If “Add Judgment Information to the Image” is
enabled, the guidelines of the image file size are
as follows:
yyBMP: approx. 320 KB
yyJPEG: approx. 30 KB
yyThe unit of each tool is as follows:
Detection
mode
File Format
zz
Selects the file saving format for the image data.
€
€BMP
Transfers images in BMP format.
Transfers images in JPEG format.
The file size of these images is smaller than a BMP
image.
However, the image quality will slightly decrease.
Scan
mode
7
mm
yyHeight Area
yyMonochrome None
Area
Add Judgment Information to the Image
zz
Select whether to add judgment information to an image
that is transferred to the FTP server.
€
€Disable
Does not add judgment information to an image.
Transfers an image of 320 pixels horizontally and 240
pixels vertically.
If “Add Judgment Information to the Image” is
disabled, the guidelines of the image file size
are as follows:
yyBMP: approx. 230 KB
yyJPEG: approx. 25 KB
yyStep
yyHeight
yyAverage
Height
yyMAX/MIN
yyPin Height
yyStep
Calculation
yyThickness
Calculation
Units
Line
mode
Width
yyDefault: None
yyScaling setting
enabled: mm
yyStep
yyHeight
yyEdge
Position
yyWidth/
Diameter
yyStep/Width
yyThickness
mm
“Setting the Width Tool” (Page 4-86)
yyFor one pin height tool having three or more
windows, only the maximum and minimum
values are added.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-31
Various Functions
€
€JPEG
Tool
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
FTP Error
zz
Examples of transferred images
Select whether to turn ON the error output in the event
of a file transfer failure.
€
€Disable
Does not turn ON the error output in the event of a file
transfer failure.
€
€Enable
Turns ON the error output in the event of a file transfer
failure.
If there is too much tool information and not
enough space for it, the judgment information for
the 20th and subsequent rows are not added.
Transfer Judgment Results (Text)
zz
7
Select whether to transfer the status result in a text
format file together with an image.
€
€Disable
Various Functions
Does not transfer the status result in a text format file.
€
€Enable
Transfers the status result in a text (tab separated)
format file.
An example saved results file using Microsoft
Excel is shown below.
7-32
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
If file transfer fails with [Enable] selected, the
following occurs:
yyThe following error messages are displayed in
response to the causes of failure.
yyFTP Connection Error
yyFTP Transfer Error (Transfer Failed)
yyFTP Transfer Error (Insufficient Data Buffer)
yySync error
yyThe error output turns ON.
yyThe indicator light of the sensor blinks in red.
yyIf “FTP Transfer Error” has occurred while
the sensor is running, the error condition will
continue until the error is cleared.
“Clearing Errors” (Page 9-14)
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
Transfer Condition
zz
Transfer Condition Settings
Select the condition for images to be transferred.
Up to four transfer conditions can be set.
Each transfer condition operates independently.
Therefore, if there are duplicated settings, the
file may be overwritten.
1 Select [Enable] for the transfer condition to set
€ (Default)
€All
Transfers all the images that have been judged.
€
Status
€Total
Transfers only images with the total status result of OK
or NG.
and click the [Change] button.
€
01 to Tool 16
€Tool
Transfers only images where the selected tool’s status
result is OK or NG/ALM.
€
1 to 8
€Logic
Transfers the images with the judgement result of the
selected logic is OK or NG.
Various Functions
2 Set the transfer condition.
7
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-33
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
Setting the transfer destination folder and file
zz
name
€ transfer destination folder
€A
Root folder
......................(1)
................ (2)
Folder name
YYYYMMDD (Date folder)
Pnn (Program number folder)
IXmmmmm (Sub folder)
.......... (3)
....(4)
....(5)
0000
0001
.............. (6)
0002
IXmmmmm (Sub folder)
....(5)
0000
0001
.............. (6)
(1) Root folder
This is the root folder of the FTP server.
When [Folder] is not set and [Create Subfolder] is set to
[No Sub Folder], files are transferred to the root folder.
(2) Folder name
The folder specified in the Folder name (Page 7-35) is
created.
When [Create Subfolder] is set to [No Sub Folder], files
are transferred to this folder. When not set, no folder is
created.
(3) Date folder
When [Create Subfolder] is set to [Date], [Program/
Date], or [Date/Program], a date folder is created for
sorting files.
(4) Program number folder
When [Create Subfolder] is set to [Program], [Program/
Date], or [Date/Program], a program number folder is
created for sorting files.
nn: 0 to 31
(5) Sub folder
When [Create Subfolder] is set to other than [No Sub
Folder], a folder is created.
If the [Serial No.] for [File Name] is disabled, files are
transferred to this sub folder.
If the [Serial No.] for [File Name] is enabled, files are
transferred to the serial No. folder (6) created directly
under this folder.
“mmmmm” represents a serial No. created every time
the sensor is restarted or the FTP settings are changed.
Default: IX00001
7
Various Functions
(6) Serial No. folder
When [Create Subfolder] is set to other than [No Sub
Folder], a folder is created. A serial number from “0000”
to “9999.”
When the number of transferred files exceeds the upper
limit of the serial number for the file name (Page 7-37),
a new serial No. folder is created.
You can select whether to create a date folder and
program number folder. You can also desirably
select the order of hierarchy.
7-34
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
Folder
zz
Configure the folder name.
€
input area
€Text
Specify the transfer destination folder of the FTP server.
(Default: Not set (blank))
Up to 54 characters can be set for the desired folder
name.
yyInput is not necessary if the image data is to be
transferred to the root folder.
yyTo specify a subfolder, break the folder name with “/”
(one-byte slash).
yyIf the specified folder does not exist, a new folder will
be created.
yy“/” (one-byte slash), “.” (one-byte point)
and “ “ (one-byte space) cannot be used as
the first nor last letter of the folder name.
yy“/” (one-byte slash) cannot be used
multiple times in a row.
€
Subfolder
€Create
Select this setting to create a subfolder and sort files.
yyNo Sub Folder (Default)
A subfolder, program number folder, and YYMMDD
folder will not be created.
yyProgram
A program number folder/subfolder will be created.
yyDate
A YYMMDD folder/subfolder will be created.
yyProgram/Date
A program number folder/YYMMDD folder/subfolder
will be created.
yyDate/Program
A YYMMDD folder/program number folder/subfolder
will be created.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-35
7
Various Functions
yySubfolder only
Only a subfolder will be created.
A program number folder and YYMMDD folder will not
be created.
yyWithout date and time added using the
[Time + Date Info] function, when [Date],
[Program/Date], or [Date/Program] is
selected, [Time + Date Info] is automatically
set to enabled.
yyWhen all of the following conditions are
met, a time synchronization error will
occur.
yy[Date], [Program/Date], or [Date/Program]
is selected.
yy“Time + Date Info” setting of the control
panel or IX-Navigator is disabled.
yy[FTP Error] is enabled.
Note that because the sensor cannot get
exact date and time when image data is
transferred, the name of a date folder to be
created is “20000000.”
yyThe default for subfolders is “IX00001”.
yyEvery time the sensor is restarted or the
FTP settings are changed, a sub folder with
incremented name is created.
yyThe upper limit is “IX99999”. When the
upper limit has been reached, the count
continues by returning to “IX00000”.
yyThe subfolder name cannot be initialized.
yyWhen an option other than [No Sub Folder]
is selected and the “Serial No.” setting of
the file name is enabled, a serial No. folder
is created under the sub folder.
yyThe initial value of a sequential folder is
“0000.”
yyWhen the serial number of the file name
reaches the upper limit, a sequential folder
with incremented name is created.
yyThe upper limit of the sequential folder is
9999. When the number exceeds the upper
limit, the subfolder number is counted up
by one while the sequential folder number
resets to 0000 and starts counting again.
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
File Name
zz
Set the file name. The following shows the file name rules.
Setting
Items
Text
Input Area
File name
aaaaa
Serial
No.
_ xxxxx
Total Status
Info Addition
_ Pnn_ss
Tool Status
Info Addition
_ bbcc_…
Time Stamp
_ YYYYMMDD_hhmmss
Hold
_ TTH
Extension
.ddd
If left bland or set to [Disable] or [Not Add], the rule of the item is not applied.
yyWhen overwriting a file with the same name in
the same folder at each transfer, the settings
below should be applied. The file name will be
“IX.ddd (extension).”
yyText Input Area: blank
yyTotal Status Info Addition: Disable
yyTool Status Info Addition: Not Add
yyTime Stamp: Disable
yySerial No.: Disable
yyHold: Sample Hold
* For Hold, line mode only.
“Timing Input” (Page 5-11)
yyWhen saving only a file including a desired
number of last images (e.g., 100 images), the
settings are as follows:
yyCreate Subfolder: No Sub Folder
yyTotal Status Info Addition: Disable
yyTool Status Info Addition: Not add
yyTime Stamp: Disable
yySerial No.: Enable
yyUpper limit of serial No.: 99
yyHold: Sample Hold
* For Hold, line mode only.
yyFor a program in line mode with the Hold mode
set to [Peak to Peak], the hold information “_
TTH” is added to the end of the file name.
yyTT: Tool number
yyH: Hold type (B: Bottom, P: Peak)
7
Various Functions
€
input area (aaaaa)
€Text
Sets the file name of the transfer files.
(Default: Not set (blank))
Up to 54 characters can be set for the desired file
name.
yyIf there is a file with the same name at
the transfer destination, that file will be
overwritten. When you transfer image data
from multiple IX series devices, specify
different transfer destinations so that the
image data is not overwritten accidentally.
yyIf the transfer destination folder is read
only or is open, the image data transfer will
fail.
yyNote the maximum length of the file path
that the FTP server allows.
If the total length of the file paths
consisting of the file name, forward
destination folder name, and root folder
path exceeds the allowance of the FTP
server, transmission may fail. For details
on the allowance, see the instruction
manual of the FTP server.
7-36
€
Status Info Addition (Pnn_ss)
€Total
yyDisable
Does not add the program number and total status
result.
yyEnable (default)
Adds the program number and total status result.
Pnn: Program number (nn: 00 to 31)
ss: Total status result (ss: OK or NG)
€
Status Info Addition (bbcc)
€Tool
yyNot add (default)
Does not add the judgment information of the tool.
yyAdd OK/NG/ALM
Adds the judgment information of all tools.
yyAdd NG/ALM
Adds only the information of the tools whose judgment
result is NG or ALM.
When [Add OK/NG/ALM] or [Add NG/ALM] is selected,
the information is added to the file name in accordance
with the following rules.
yybb: Type of the tool.
01 to 16: Tool number
P_: Position adjustment
T_: Tilt adjustment
yycc: Judgment result of the tool (bb).
In the case of ALM, “--” is shown.
Example:
Status result of each tool
File name with tool
status added
Tool 01 is OK
01OK
Tool 01 is NG, and
Tool 02 is ALM
01NG_02--
Position adjustment is NG
(one judgment tool)
P_NG_01--
Tilt adjustment is NG
(two judgment tools)
T_NG_01--_02--
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
€
Stamp (YYYYMMDD_hhmmss)
€Time
yyDisable (default)
Does not add the time and date information.
yyEnable
Adds the time and date information.
YYYYMMDD: Date (year month date)
hhmmss:
Time (hour minute second)
yyWhen using the Time + Date Info function,
if [Enable] is selected without time and
date information added, the [Time + Date
Info] is automatically set to Enable.
yyWhen all of the following conditions are
met, a time synchronization error will
occur.
yy[Time Stamp] is enabled.
yy[Time + Date Info] is set to disabled.
yy[FTP Error] is enabled.
Note that because the sensor cannot
obtain the exact time and date when
transferring image data, the time and date
part in a file name to be created will be
“20000000_000000.”
yyDisable (Default)
Does not add a serial number.
yyEnable
Adds a serial number.
yyThe initial value of the serial number is
00000.
yyThe upper limit of the serial number is
65535. When the number exceeds the
upper limit, the counter resets to 00000 and
starts counting again.
<Upper limit of serial No.>
Make setting when [Enable] is selected for the Serial
No. setting.
Sets the upper limit of the number of image data that
can be transferred to the transfer destination folder to a
number between 0 and 65535.
(Default value: 999)
When the serial number of the file name reaches the
upper limit, the following occurs:
yyWhen [Create Subfolder] is set to any setting other
than [No Sub Folder], a folder of the next sequence
number is created in the same subfolder (4-digit
number). The file serial number resets to 0.
yyWhen [Create Subfolder] is set to [No Sub Folder], the
file serial number resets to zero. If there is a file with
the same name, that file will be overwritten.
Example of Folder/File Name:
zz
Displays the examples of folder and file names based
on the settings.
3 After setting is completed, click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Advanced Sensor Settings
screen.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-37
7
Various Functions
yyThe format of the date in the time stamp varies
depending on the language. The format of the
time is common.
yyWith [Enable] selected, if the Adding Sensor
Date Information function is disabled, a
confirmation screen for enabling the function
appears.
€
No. (xxxxx)
€Serial
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
Device
Environmental
Configure the sensor settings.
1 Click the [Advanced Sensor Settings] button on
the main screen in [Program].
Device Name
„„
1 Click the [Change Device Name] button.
The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.
2 Select the [Device] tab and configure the sensor
settings.
The Device Name Settings screen opens.
7
2 Input the device name and click the [OK] button.
Various Functions
yyDefault setting: ‌Model numbers for the sensor head/
amplifier
Example: IX-150/H2000
3 After the setting is completed, click the [OK]
button.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program].
The system returns to the Advanced Sensor Settings
screen.
Network settings
„„
1 Click the [Change Network Settings] button.
The Network Settings screen opens.
7-38
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
2 Change the network settings and click the [OK]
button.
Clicking the [Reset] button resets the IP
address, subnet mask, and default gateway to
[Empty].
The display returns to the Advanced Sensor Settings
screen.
Enable the password lock
„„
Display the main screen in [Running]. The “Lock Enabled”
message appears in the lower right of the screen.
While in the main screen in [Running], the following
operations will be locked:
yyTransition to the main screen in [Program]
yyProgram switching
yyManual Trigger/Timing Input
yyLimit Adjustment screen display
yyBatch ZERO/Offset execution/Clear
yyStatistics information reset
yyLogging stop at the time of detection history display
yyDetection history clear
yyTransfer Program Settings
Disable the password lock
„„
Security
Set a password to the sensor to prevent incorrect operation.
1 Select to enable or disable the password lock
Input the password when the input dialog for the password
appears, and click the [OK] button.
function.
7
yyIf you cancel the password lock and go to the main
screen in [Program], the password lock will be disabled
until you go to the main screen in [Running].
yyIf the password lock is canceled on the [Running] screen,
the operation will be locked again after 120 seconds pass
without performing any of the locked operations or when
clicking the status bar.
2 If [Password Lock] is selected, input the
password into the [Password] and [Confirm
password] fields.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-39
Various Functions
The password lock is unlocked and a “Lock Disabled”
message appears in the lower right of the screen.
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
Rotating Image 180 deg
Measurement Value Display Unit
The target displayed on the screen can be rotated 180°
to address installation restrictions of the sensor and the
target. You can rotate the target 180° and display it on the
screen.
1 Select the display unit for the measurement
value.
Indicator light
Target
7
Communication unit (DL) settings
Configure the communications unit (DL) settings.
Various Functions
This setting can be made only when the sensor
is connected to the main unit.
When using the DL Series, refer also to each “DL
Series User’s Manual (IX-H/IX)”.
Before rotating 180°
1
After rotating 180°
Select to enable or disable the rotate image 180°
function.
If master registration is completed, setting
[Rotate Image 180 deg] displays a screen
prompting you to re-register a master. Reregister the master as needed.
“2. Master Registration” (Page 4-14)
“2. Master Registration” (Page 5-25)
7-40
Data Assignment
„„
1 Click the [Settings] button of [Data Assignment].
The Communications Unit (DL) Settings screen opens.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
2 Select the device to which to assign
4 Click the [OK] button.
communications data.
The display returns to the Advanced Sensor Settings
screen.
Advanced Settings
„„
1 Click the [Set] button of [Adv. Settings].
€
unit only (default)
€Main
Only assign communications data to the main unit's
tools.
€
€Main/Expansion
Assign communications data to the main and expansion
unit's tools.
yyIf an expansion unit is not connected, only
[Main unit only] can be selected.
yyIf the expansion unit tools have
communications data assigned to them
and you change to [Main unit only], a
confirmation screen will appear. Clicking
the [OK] button assigns [OFF] to the
communications data.
Communications data that can be assigned are labeled
1 to 15.
yyOptions: ‌OFF, Main unit: Tool 01 to Tool 16, Main unit:
Position Adjustment, Main unit: Tilt Adj(Scan),
Main unit: Tilt Adj(Line), Exp. unit: Tool 01 to
Tool 16, Exp. unit: Position Adjustment, Exp.
unit: Tilt Adj(Scan), Exp. unit: Tilt Adj(Line)
yyDefault value: OFF
2
Select the setting for the byte swap. Change
the order of stored character data when writing
the FTP transfer file name to the sensor via the
communications unit (DL).
€
(default)
€Disable
Store the FTP transfer file name into the character data
in the order of low -> high.
€
€Enable
Store the FTP transfer file name into the character data
in the order of high -> low.
yyThe expansion unit tools are displayed
when [Main/Expansion] is selected as the
data assignment target.
yyIf the previous setting is [Main/Expansion],
you can assign expansion unit tools even
if an expansion unit is not connected.
yyThe connection between the
communications unit (DL) and external
device is temporarily disconnected when
changing the communications unit (DL)
settings.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-41
7
Various Functions
3 Select a tool to assign to communications data.
The Communications Unit (DL) Settings screen opens.
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
3 Setting the output of the pin height tool.
Select the method of outputting the measurement value
of the pin height tool of IX-H2000 (main unit) via the
communications unit (DL).
Example of data assignment of the pin height
zz
tool
This is an example where the pin height tool is set for
Tool 01 of the IX-H2000 (main unit). This pin height tool
has six tool windows added.
Pin
01
€
€Individual
Able to output up to 15 pin measurement values of the
pin height tool. The measurement value of the pins are
output aligned to the front for the communications data
assignment area.
€
€MAX/MIN
Pin
02
Pin
03
Pin
04
Pin
05
Pin
06
€ make output for each pin (up to 15 pins),
€To
select [Individual].
To output the measurement values of Pin 01 to 06 of the
pin height tool set for Tool 01 of the main unit, set [Main
unit: Tool 01] all for the communication data assignment
1 through 6.
Outputs the measurement values of the pins with the
maximum and minimum heights.
7
€
value
€Worst
Various Functions
Outputs the measurement value that is deviated most
from the thresholds of upper and lower limits.
When all pins fall within the thresholds of the upper and
lower limits, the value that is closest to the thresholds is
output.
For an example of data assignment of the pin
height tool, see the following:
“Example of data assignment of the pin
height tool” (Page 7-42)
4 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the advanced sensor settings
screen.
7-42
Communication
data
assignment No.
Communication
data
assignment
setting
Output data
1
Main unit: Tool 01
Pin 01 of
Main unit Tool 01
2
Main unit: Tool 01
Pin 02 of
Main unit Tool 01
3
Main unit: Tool 01
Pin 03 of
Main unit Tool 01
4
Main unit: Tool 01
Pin 04 of
Main unit Tool 01
5
Main unit: Tool 01
Pin 05 of
Main unit Tool 01
6
Main unit: Tool 01
Pin 06 of
Main unit Tool 01
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
€ output the maximum and minimum values
€To
only, select [MAX/MIN].
To output the maximum and minimum values of the
pin height tool set for Tool 01 of the main unit, set
assignment as follows:
Operation Mode
Changing the operation mode changes the
number of images to be saved in the detection
history.
“Sensor Amplifier” (Page 10-5)
1 Click the [Settings] button for the [Operation
Mode].
Communication
data
assignment No.
1
2
Output data
Main unit: Tool 01
Maximum Pin of
Main unit Tool 01
(In the example,
Pin 03)
Main unit: Tool 01
Minimum Pin of
Main unit Tool 01
(In the example,
Pin 05)
7
2 Select whether to use the high resolution mode.
€ output the worst values only, select [Worst
€To
value].
To output the worst value of the pin height tool set for
Tool 01 of the main unit, set assignment as follows:
€
€Disable
Does not use high resolution mode.
€
(default)
€Enable
Uses high resolution mode.
When high resolution mode is used, the pin height tool
is available in scan mode.
Communication
data
assignment No.
1
Communication
data
assignment
setting
Output data
Main unit: Tool 01
Pin with the worst
value of
Main unit Tool 01
(In the example,
Pin 05)
3 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the advanced sensor settings
screen.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-43
Various Functions
Communication
data
assignment
setting
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
Initialize/Update
1 Click the [Advanced Sensor Settings] button on
the main screen in [Program].
The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.
2 Select the [Initialize/Update] tab and configure
the sensor settings.
7
Various Functions
3 Click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program].
Initialize Sensor
Initialize the information set in the sensor and reset it to the
factory defaults.
For details, refer to the following.
“Initializing the sensor” (Page 3-15)
Update Sensor
Updates the operation software of the sensor.
For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.
URL : http://www.keyence.com/
7-44
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Operating from the menu bar
Operating from the menu bar
[File] menu
[View] menu
Batch Backup
Current Status
Backs up the data saved in the sensor to the PC as a batch
backup file.
For details about the procedure, refer to the following.
“Backing up in a batch” (Page 7-19)
Individual Program Backup
You can operate the [Running] screen.
Show or hide the operating information.
For details, refer to:
“Displaying operating information” (Page 6-10)
Limit Adjustment
Backs up the setting data saved in the sensor into the PC
for each individual program.
For details about the procedure, refer to the following.
“Backing up the program individually” (Page 7-20)
You can operate the [Running] screen.
You can adjust the threshold for the selected tool.
For details, refer to:
“Displaying the Limit Adjustment screen” (Page 6-11)
Transfer Program Settings
Transfers the setting data (batch backup file) saved in the
PC to the sensor.
For details about the procedure, refer to the following.
“Transferring the backed up settings to the sensor” (Page
7-22)
7
Various Functions
Exiting
Exit the IX-Navigator.
1 Select [File] → [Exit] from the menu bar.
The IX-Navigator exits.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-45
Operating from the menu bar
[Sensor] menu
yyIf initial setup for the selected sensor
has not been performed, the Sensor
Setup (Settings Navigator) screen will be
displayed. For details about the sensor
settings, refer to:
“Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Scan
Mode Setup)” (Page 4-1)
“Chapter 5 Settings Navigator (Line
Mode Setup)” (Page 5-1)
yyThe sensors displayed on the Change
Connected Sensor screen are those
identified by the initial network search.
Sensors added to the network after the
initial search can be displayed on the list
by clicking the [Search Again] button.
yyWhen direct connection (1 unit) is used,
this function cannot be used.
Disconnect
Disconnects the connection between the sensor and PC,
and displays the connection menu screen.
1 Select [Sensor] → [Disconnect] from the menu
bar.
A confirmation screen opens.
2 Click the [Yes] button.
The system returns to the Activation Menu screen.
Reset Statistics
Reset the operating information.
7
1 Display the main screen in [Running].
2 Select [Sensor] → [Reset Statistics] from the
menu bar.
Change Connected Sensor(s)
Various Functions
Changes the sensor to be connected to the PC.
1
Select [Sensor] → [Change Connected Sensor(s)]
from the menu bar.
The Change Connected Sensor screen opens.
2 Select a sensor to be connected to the PC and
click [Connect].
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Click the [OK] button.
The operating information is reset.
Initialize Sensor
Initialize the information set in the sensor and reset it to the
factory defaults.
For details, refer to the following.
“Initializing the sensor” (Page 3-15)
Update Sensor
The image of the selected sensor is displayed on the
PC.
7-46
Updates the operation software of the sensor.
For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.
URL : http://www.keyence.com/
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Operating from the menu bar
[Image] menu
Capture
Save Image
„„
Zoom
Reduce (Zoom Out)
„„
Reduces the size of the image displayed on the IXNavigator.
Select [Image] → [Zoom] → [Reduce (Zoom Out)] from the
menu bar. The image will be reduced with each selection of
the button.
The image can be reduced by a maximum value of
100%.
Enlarge (Zoom In)
„„
Enlarges the size of the image displayed on the IXNavigator.
Select [Image] → [Zoom] → [Enlarge (Zoom In)] from the
menu bar. The image will be magnified with each selection
of the button.
The image can be magnified by a maximum value
of 500%.
Fit Window
„„
Show saved image file location
„„
Opens the destination folder to which captured images will
be saved.
Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Show saved image file
location] from the menu bar.
For details, refer to the following.
“Confirming the saving destination of an image” (Page
7-21)
Change saved image file location
„„
Opens the folder directory and changes the destination
folder to which captured images will be saved.
Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Change saved image file
location] from the menu bar.
For details, refer to the following.
“Changing the destination for saved images” (Page
7-21)
Trigger
You can operate the [Run] screen.
This setting is enabled for scan mode programs that have
an external trigger set.
You can input a trigger by clicking this button even if there
is no input from an external device.
A trigger is issued once every time [Image] → [Trigger] is
selected from the menu bar.
Timing
You can operate the [Run] screen.
This setting is displayed for programs in line mode.
You can turn the timing input on or off by clicking this button
even if there is no input from an external device.
Every time [Image] → [Timing] is selected from the menu
bar, timing input is turned on or off.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-47
7
Various Functions
Fits the image displayed on the IX-Navigator to the size of
the screen and displays it.
Select [Image] → [Zoom] → [Fit Window] from the menu
bar.
Captured images are saved as .bmp files.
The IX-Navigator’s screen will be saved at the same time
(screenshot).
Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Save Image] from the menu
bar.
For details, refer to the following.
“Procedure to save images” (Page 7-21)
Operating from the menu bar
[Setting] menu
Language
Switches the display language of the IX-Navigator.
Trigger/Timing Button
Select whether to hide or show the [TRIGGER] button while
the external trigger is set in scan mode or the [TIMING]
button while in line mode.
Select [Setting] → [Trigger/Timing Button] from the menu
bar and select the [Show]/[Hide].
When an internal trigger is set in scan mode, the
[TRIGGER] button will not be displayed.
1 Select [Setting] → [Language] from the menu bar
and select a language.
A confirmation screen opens.
2 Click the [OK] button.
3 Exit the IX-Navigator.
“Exiting” (Page 7-45)
4 Start the IX-Navigator again.
The display language of the IX-Navigator will be
switched to the selected language.
Add Time+Date Info
7
You can operate the [Program] screen.
Displays “Add Time + Date Info” screen, on which the date
and time information settings can be set and added to the
image data.
Select [Setting] → [Add Time+Date Info] from the menu bar.
For details, refer to the following.
“Adding Date and Time information to the sensor
(function for adding sensor date information)” (Page 7-17)
Various Functions
7-48
The display of characters in device and program
names when changing the display language will
change in the following manner:
yyCharacters that cannot be displayed with the
language set after the change are replaced and
displayed as hyphens (-).
yyIf the device or program name has not been
changed after the language change, the
device or program name will be displayed as
they were originally set when changing the
language back to the original language.
yyIf the device or program name is changed
by changing the language, the changed
characters will remain replaced by hyphens
(-). The original device or program name is
erased and the hyphens (-) will remain when
the language is changed back to the original
language.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Operating from the menu bar
[Window] menu
[Help] menu
Program Details
User's Manual
You can operate the [Program] screen.
Display the Program Details screen.
Select [Window] → [Program Details] from the menu bar.
For details, refer to the following.
“Displaying the Program Details screen” (Page 7-7)
Opens the User's Manual (PDF format) of the selected
language.
Select [Help] → [User's Manual] from the menu bar.
yyThe User's Manual (PDF format) can also be
opened by pressing the [F1] key.
yyIn cases where the [Help] menu does not exist
on the menu bar, such as the Program Details
screen, Sensor Setup screen (Settings Navigator),
etc, open the User’s Manual by pressing the [F1]
key.
Detection History
Display the Sensor Detection History screen.
Select [Window] → [Detection History] from the menu bar.
For details, refer to the following.
“Sensor’s Detection History (Confirming the Images
whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 7-11)
About
Displays the version information for the IX-Navigator.
Select [Help] → [About] from the menu bar.
Backup
Display the Backup screen.
Select [Window] → [Backup] from the menu bar.
For details, refer to:
“Saving the Sensor Settings and Images” (Page 7-19)
7
Various Functions
Advanced Sensor Settings
Displays the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.
Select [Window] → [Advanced Sensor Settings] from the
menu bar.
For details, refer to the following.
“Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor” (Page
7-23)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
7-49
Operating from the menu bar
MEMO
7
Various Functions
7-50
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Chapter
8
Checking Settings and
Detection History
Checking settings and detection history using the IX-Navigator
with no sensor connected can be done by loading a batch
backup file (*.ixa) or an individual program backup file (*.ixa).
This chapter explains the functions and operations while
confirming settings and detection history from program files.
Basic Operation for Checking Settings and
Detection History..................................................................8-2
Names and Functions of the Screen..................................8-3
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode).........................................8-4
Settings Navigator (Line Mode)...........................................8-9
Confirming the Sensor Detection History........................8-14
Operating from the menu bar............................................8-15
8
Checking settings and detection history
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
8-1
Basic Operation for Checking Settings and Detection History
Basic Operation for Checking Settings and
Detection History
Saving a batch backup file/individual
program backup file
3 Select a file and click the [Open] button.
1 Save the batch backup file (*.ixa) or individual
program backup file (*.ixa).
“Backing up in a batch” (Page 7-19)
“Backing up the program individually” (Page 7-20)
The batch backup file (*.ixa) or individual
program backup file (*.ixa) can also be saved
by using the control panel. For details, refer to
"IX‑H User's Manual (Control Panel)".
Starting “Check Settings/Detection
History” mode
1 Double-click the [IX-Navigator] icon on the
Files with the formats other than .ixa format
cannot be used.
The main screen of the “Check Settings/Detection
History” mode opens.
desktop.
The Activation Menu screen opens.
8
The .ixa file can be opened by double-clicking
the file.
“Main Screen for “Check Settings/Detection History””
(Page 8-3)
Checking settings and detection history
2 Click the [Open file] button.
Exiting “Check Settings/Detection
History” mode
1 Return to the main screen of “Check Settings/
If the [Language] button is clicked, the Select
language screen opens. You can select
the desired language to change the display
language.
Detection History” mode.
2 Select [File] → [Exit Settings/Detection history
screen] from the menu bar.
The system returns to the Activation Menu screen.
Select [File] → [Exit] when finishing IX-Navigator
without returning to the Activation Menu screen.
The [Open file] screen opens.
8-2
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Names and Functions of the Screen
Names and Functions of the Screen
Main Screen for “Check Settings/Detection History”
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(8)
(9)
(11)
(10)
(12)
(13)
(1) Menu bar
Displays the menu.
“Operating from the menu bar” (Page 8-15)
(2) File name
Displays the file name of the open .ixa file.
(8) Image type
Displays the image type.
The image type is fixed to [Master] for “Check Settings/
Detection History” mode.
(3) [Open] button
Displays the screen to open a file.
“Opening file” (Page 8-15)
(4) Program
Displays the program number and program name.
Programs can be switched from the pull-down menu.
(5) [Detail] button
Displays the Program Details screen.
“Program Details” (Page 8-16)
(6) [Detection History] button
Display the Sensor Detection History screen.
“Confirming the Sensor Detection History” (Page
8-14)
Checking settings and detection history
(9) Image tool bar
Displays the tools for operating the captured image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(10) Master Image
Displays the master image.
(11) Detection mode
Displays the detection mode for the program.
(12) [Sensor Setup] button
Displays the Sensor Settings screen.
“Settings Navigator (Scan Mode)” (Page 8-4)
“Settings Navigator (Line Mode)” (Page 8-9)
(13) Sensor Information
Displays the sensor type and device name.
(7) [Advanced Sensor Settings] button
Displays the Sensor Advanced screen.
“Advanced Sensor Settings” (Page 8-16)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
8
8-3
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode)
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode)
Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow
This section explains each setting confirmation screen to be displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow.
For details of the operation in each setting confirmation screen, refer to the applicable section.
1. Detection
Conditions
“1. Detection
Conditions” (Page
8-5)
Returns to (A)
(A)
2. Master
Registration
“2. Master
Registration” (Page
8-6)
8
Returns to (A)
Checking settings and detection history
3. Tool Settings
“3. Tool Settings”
(Page 8-7)
Returns to (A)
4. Output
Assignment
“4. Output
Assignment” (Page
8-8)
8-4
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode)
1. Detection Conditions
Confirm the conditions to detect the target.
Main Screen for Detection Conditions
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(6)
(7)
8
(1) Program
Displays the program number and program name.
Checking settings and detection history
(2) Navigation button
Moves steps in Settings Navigator.
(3) Image display screen
Only a message is displayed. An image is not displayed.
(4) Settings button
Displays the settings which can be confirmed in the
Detection Conditions.
“Trigger Options” (Page 4-8)
“Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-9)
“Extended Functions” (Page 4-10)
(5) Setting confirmation screen
Displays the settings of the item selected by the settings
button.
(6) [Next to STEP2] button
The display moves to the main screen for Master
Registration.
“2. Master Registration” (Page 8-6)
(7) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 8-4)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
8-5
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode)
2. Master Registration
Confirm the master image that serves as the reference of judgment.
Main Screen for Master Registration
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
8
(1) Title
Displays the program number and program name.
Checking settings and detection history
(2) Navigation button
Moves steps in Settings Navigator.
(3) Image type
Displays the image type. [Master] is the registered
master.
(4) Image tool bar
Displays the tools for operating the captured image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(5) Master Image
Displays the master image.
8-6
(8)
(9)
(6) [Tilt Adjustment] button
The settings for adjusting the tilt opens.
“Tilt Adjustment” (Page 4-16)
(7) [Back] button
The system returns to the main settings for Detection
Conditions.
“1. Detection Conditions” (Page 8-5)
(8) [Next to STEP3] button
The display moves to the main screen for tool settings.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 8-7)
(9) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 8-4)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode)
3. Tool Settings
Confirm the detection tools used to judge if a target is “OK” or “NG”.
Main Screen for the Tool settings
(1)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(4)
(7)
(5)
(8)
(1) Title
Displays the program number and program name.
(3) Image type
Displays the image type. [Master] is the registered
master.
(4) Image tool bar
Displays the tools for operating the captured image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(5) Master Image
Displays the master image.
(10)
8
(6) [Display Settings] button
Displays the selected tool settings.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 4-20)
(7) Tool list
Displays the list of tools set in the program. A
measurement value/matching rate and threshold value
is displayed for each tool. Displays the selected tools in
an orange frame.
(8) [Back] button
The screen returns to the main screen for Master
Registration.
“2. Master Registration” (Page 8-6)
(9) [Next to STEP4] button
The display moves to the main screen for Output
Assignment.
“4. Output Assignment” (Page 8-8)
(10) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 8-4)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
8-7
Checking settings and detection history
(2) Navigation button
Moves steps in Settings Navigator.
(9)
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode)
4. Output Assignment
Confirm the output contents assigned to each output line.
Main Screen for the Output Assignment
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
(7)
8
(8)
Checking settings and detection history
(1) Title
Displays the program number and program name.
(5) Master Image
Displays the master image.
(2) Navigation button
Moves steps in Settings Navigator.
(6) Tool settings button
Displays the output items assigned to the output line.
“Setting the Output Assignment” (Page 4-109)
(3) Image type
Displays the image type. [Master] is the registered
master.
(4) Image tool bar
Displays the tools for operating the captured image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
8-8
(7) [Back] button
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 8-7)
(8) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 8-4)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Settings Navigator (Line Mode)
Settings Navigator (Line Mode)
Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow
This section explains each setting confirmation screen to be displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow.
For details of the operation in each setting confirmation screen, refer to the applicable section.
1. Detection
Conditions
“1. Detection
Conditions” (Page
8-10)
Returns to (A)
(A)
2. Master
Registration
“2. Master
Registration” (Page
8-11)
8
Returns to (A)
Checking settings and detection history
3. Tool Settings
“3. Tool Settings”
(Page 8-12)
Returns to (A)
4. Output
Assignment
“4. Output
Assignment” (Page
8-13)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
8-9
Settings Navigator (Line Mode)
1. Detection Conditions
Confirm the conditions to detect the target.
Main Screen for Detection Conditions
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(6)
8
(1) Program
Displays the program number and program name.
Checking settings and detection history
(2) Navigation button
Moves steps in Settings Navigator.
(3) Image display screen
Only displays a message. An image is not displayed.
(4) Settings button
Displays the settings which can be confirmed in the
Detection Conditions.
“Brightness Adjustment” (Page 5-8)
“Measurement Adjustment” (Page 5-9)
“Extended Functions” (Page 5-11)
(5) Setting confirmation screen
Displays the settings of the item selected using the
settings button.
(6) [Next to STEP2] button
The display moves to the main screen for Master
Registration.
“2. Master Registration” (Page 8-11)
(7) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 8-9)
8-10
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
(7)
Settings Navigator (Line Mode)
2. Master Registration
Confirm the master image that serves as the reference of judgment.
Main Screen for Master Registration
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(5) Master Image
Displays the master image.
(2) Navigation button
Moves steps in Settings Navigator.
(6) [Back] button
The system returns to the main settings for Detection
Conditions.
“1. Detection Conditions” (Page 8-10)
(3) Image type
Displays the image type. [Master] is the registered
master.
(4) Image tool bar
Displays the tools for operating the captured image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(7) [Next to STEP3] button
The display moves to the main screen for tool settings.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 8-12)
(8) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 8-9)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
8-11
8
Checking settings and detection history
(1) Title
Displays the program number and program name.
Settings Navigator (Line Mode)
3. Tool Settings
Confirm the tools to judge whether the target is “OK” or “NG”.
Main Screen for the Tool settings
(1)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(4)
(7)
(5)
(8)
8
(1) Title
Displays the program number and program name.
Checking settings and detection history
(2) Navigation button
Moves steps in Settings Navigator.
(3) Image type
Displays the image type. [Master] is the registered
master.
(4) Image tool bar
Displays the tools for operating the captured image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(5) Master Image
Displays the master image.
(9)
(10)
(6) [Display Settings] button
Displays the selected tool settings.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 5-27)
(7) Tool list
Displays a list of tools set in the program. A
measurement value/matching rate and threshold value
is displayed for each tool. Displays the selected tools in
an orange frame.
(8) [Back] button
The screen returns to the main screen for Master
Registration.
“2. Master Registration” (Page 8-11)
(9) [Next to STEP4] button
The display moves to the main screen for Output
Assignment.
“4. Output Assignment” (Page 8-13)
(10) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 8-9)
8-12
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Settings Navigator (Line Mode)
4. Output Assignment
Confirm the output contents assigned to each output line.
Main Screen for the Output Assignment
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
(7)
(8)
(5) Master Image
Displays the master image.
(2) Navigation button
Moves steps in Settings Navigator.
(6) Tool settings button
Displays the output items assigned to the output line.
“Setting the Output Assignment” (Page 5-81)
(3) Image type
Displays the image type. [Master] is the registered
master.
(4) Image tool bar
Displays the tools for operating the captured image.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-16)
(7) [Back] button
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 8-12)
(8) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Settings Navigator Screen and Operation Flow”
(Page 8-9)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
8-13
8
Checking settings and detection history
(1) Title
Displays the program number and program name.
Confirming the Sensor Detection History
Confirming the Sensor Detection History
Sensor Detection History Screen
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
8
(1) [Delete One] button
Deletes selected history image.
(2) [Undo Deletion] button
Cancels the [Delete One] operation last executed.
Checking settings and detection history
(3) [Delete] button -> [Delete All]
Clears the saved detection history.
(4) [Delete] button -> [Delete all images to the left of the
selected image]
Deletes all detection history on the left side of the
selected image.
(5) [Delete] button -> [Delete all images to the right of
the selected image]
Deletes all detection history on the right side of the
selected image.
For detail on the other functions, see the following:
“Sensor’s Detection History (Confirming the Images
whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 7-11)
The following buttons and menus will not be
displayed in the Sensor’s detection history screen
while in “Check Settings/Detection History” mode.
yy[Refresh] button
yy[Save] button → [Batch Backup (*.ixa)] menu
8-14
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Operating from the menu bar
Operating from the menu bar
[File] menu
Exit Settings/Detection history screen
Opening file
1 Select [File] → [Exit Settings/Detection history
Open the batch backup file (*.ixa) or the individual program
backup file (*.ixa) saved in the PC.
1 Select [File] → [Open file] from the menu bar.
screen] from the menu bar.
Terminates the settings and history checking screen
and returns to the Activation Menu screen.
“Activation Menu screen” (Page 3-6)
The [Open file] screen opens.
2 Select a file and click the [Open] button.
Exit
1 Select [File] → [Exit] from the menu bar.
The IX-Navigator exits.
[Image] menu
Zoom
Reduce (Zoom Out)
„„
Files with formats other than .ixa format
cannot be used.
The main screen of “Check Settings/Detection History”
mode opens.
1 Select [File] → [Save] from the menu bar.
The save screen opens.
The image can reduced by a maximum value of
100%.
Enlarge (Zoom In)
„„
The captured image is enlarged.
Select [Image] → [Zoom] → [Enlarge (Zoom In)] from the
menu bar. The image will be magnified with each selection.
The image can be magnified by a maximum value
of 500%.
€
Backup
€Batch
Backup settings in a batch.
For details, refer to:
“Backing up in a batch” (Page 7-19)
Fit Window
„„
€
Program Backup
€Individual
Save a specified program only.
For details, refer to:
“Backing up the program individually” (Page 7-20)
yyFile size will be reduced if detection history is
excluded.
yySince Individual Program Backup saves only
a program, the file size is smaller than the one
of batch backup.
Fits the captured image to the window size.
Select [Image] → [Zoom] → [Fit Window] from the menu
bar.
Capture
Save Image
„„
The images which are displayed in the screen of “Check
Settings/Detection History” mode are saved as .bmp files.
The IX-Navigator’s image will also be saved at the same
time (screenshot).
Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Save Image] from the menu
bar.
For details, refer to:
“Procedure to save images” (Page 7-21)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
8-15
8
Checking settings and detection history
Save
The size of the captured image is reduced.
Select [Image] → [Zoom] → [Reduce (Zoom Out)] from the
menu bar. The image will be reduced with each selection.
Operating from the menu bar
Show saved image file location
„„
Opens the destination folder for saving the captured
images.
Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Show saved image file
location] from the menu bar.
For details, refer to:
“Confirming the saving destination of an image” (Page
7-21)
Detection History
Display the Sensor Detection History screen.
Select [Window] → [Detection History] from the menu bar.
For details, refer to:
“Sensor’s Detection History (Confirming the Images
whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 7-11)
The following buttons and menus will not be
displayed in the sensor’s detection history screen
while in “Check Settings/Detection History” mode.
yy[Refresh] button
yy[Delete All] button
yy[Save] button → [Batch Backup (*.ixa)] menu
Change saved image file location
„„
Opens the folder reference screen and changes the
destination to which to save captured images.
Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Change saved image file
location] from the menu bar.
For details, refer to:
“Changing the destination for saved images” (Page
7-21)
[Setting] menu
Language
Advanced Sensor Settings
Displays the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.
Select [Window] → [Advanced Sensor Settings] from the
menu bar.
For details, refer to:
“Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor” (Page
7-23)
Switches the display language of the IX-Navigator.
For details, refer to:
“Language” (Page 7-48)
The displayed language can be switched on the
Activation Menu screen of the IX-Navigator.
“Activation Menu screen” (Page 3-6)
8
Checking settings and detection history
The following difference exists for the Advanced
Sensor Settings screen while in “Check Settings/
Detection History” mode.
yyThe settings cannot be changed. The setting
contents can only be checked.
yyThe [Main with Exp. unit operations] tab appears
when opening the file of the main unit.
yyThe [I/O Monitor] tab is not displayed.
yyThe [Initialize/Update] tab is not displayed.
[Window] menu
[Help] menu
Program Details
Displays the Program Details screen.
Select [Window] → [Program Details] from the menu bar.
For details, refer to:
“Displaying the Program Details screen” (Page 7-7)
The following buttons will not be displayed in the
Program Details screen while in “Check Settings/
Detection History” mode.
yy[Copy] button
yy[Import from File] button
yy[Initialize] button
yy[Edit] button
8-16
User's Manual
Opens the User's Manual (PDF format) of the selected
language.
Select [Help] → [User's Manual] from the menu bar.
For details, refer to:
“User’s Manual” (Page 7-49)
About
Displays the version information for the IX-Navigator.
Select [Help] → [About] from the menu bar.
For details, refer to:
“About” (Page 7-49)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Chapter
9
This chapter explains how the input and output terminals
control each operation.
Controlling with Input/
Output Line
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers
(Scan Mode)..........................................................................9-2
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Timing Input
(Line Mode)...........................................................................9-4
Importing the Status Output (Scan Mode).........................9-8
Changing Over (Scan Mode).............................................9-11
Changing Over (Line Mode)...............................................9-13
Clearing Errors...................................................................9-14
Resetting Status.................................................................9-15
Laser Shutdown/Release...................................................9-16
Running ZERO/Offset.........................................................9-17
Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on......9-18
Timing Input Response Time (Line Mode).......................9-19
Response Time (Line Mode)..............................................9-20
9
Controlling with Input/Output Line
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
9-1
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers (Scan Mode)
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers
(Scan Mode)
For details about the trigger, refer to:
“Setting Detection Setup” (Page 4-8)
External Trigger
When [Trigger Options] is set to [External], imaging and judgment are performed when the external trigger input is
performed.
Trigger 1
Trigger 2
Min
100 µs
External trigger input
ON
OFF
Trigger 3
Trigger 4
Min 1.2 ms
(5)
(1)
Processing time
BUSY output
ON
OFF
Judgment process
(internal)
(2)
Max 2 ms
(3)
Trigger delay
Total status output
Status output of each tool
Position adjustment output
Trigger error output
ON
OFF
Min 200 µs
Previous result
Result from Trigger 1
(4)
Result from Trigger 2
Result from Trigger 4
Max 2 ms
ON
OFF
(1)Positions the target and inputs external trigger. The shortest input time is 100 μs for ON, and 1.2 ms for OFF.
(2)BUSY output turns ON. Processing time differs depending on the sensor settings.
(3)After the trigger delay time elapses, the target is imaged and the judgment process is performed.
(4)After the judgment process is completed, the status output is updated and the BUSY output is turned OFF. Once the
BUSY output is turned off, the status output will be imported.
9
(5)If an external trigger is input while the BUSY signal is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error occurs.
The ignored trigger is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment under the
Settings Navigator to [Enable].
Controlling with Input/Output Line
yyThe output lines for each output are active in the following instances:
When Output Settings are [N.O.]: Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings are [N.C.]: Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyWhen the polarity of the sensor is NPN, the input line will be ON when the 0V line is shorted. When the polarity of the
sensor is PNP, the input line will be ON when voltage is applied to the 0V line.
yyThe edge of the trigger for activating or deactivating the timing input can be set for the external trigger input.
“Input Function” (Page 7-23)
yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the
program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen.
yyWhen the output mode of status output is set to [Latching]. For [One-Shot], refer to the following.
“Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 9-10)
9-2
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers (Scan Mode)
Internal Trigger
When [Trigger Options] is set to [Internal], imaging and judgment are performed at the set trigger interval.
Internal trigger
Trigger 1
(1)
Trigger 2
Trigger interval
Trigger interval
Processing time
BUSY output
ON
OFF
Judgment process
(internal)
Total status output
Status output of each tool
Position adjustment output
Trigger error output
Trigger 3
Trigger 4
Trigger interval
Trigger 5
Trigger interval
(5)
(2)
(3)
Min 0.2 ms
ON
OFF
Previous result
Result from Trigger 1
Result from Trigger 2
Result from Trigger 4
(4)
ON
OFF
(1) The internal trigger is input at the set trigger interval.
(2) BUSY output turns ON with each internal trigger. Processing time differs depending on the settings.
(3) The target is imaged and judged. There are no trigger delay settings when using an internal trigger.
(4)After the judgment process is completed, the status output is updated and the BUSY output is turned OFF. Once the
BUSY output is turned off, the status output will be imported.
(5)If the internal trigger is input while the BUSY signal is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error occurs.
The ignored trigger is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment under the
Settings Navigator to [Enable].
yyThe output lines for each output are active in the following instances:
When Output Settings are [N.O.]: Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings are [N.C.]: Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe trigger error output turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is
switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen.
yyWhen the output mode of status output is set to [Latching]. For [One-Shot], refer to the following.
“Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 9-10)
9
Operating in the shortest cycle
To input the internal trigger and perform the judgment process in the shortest cycle, set the trigger interval to 1ms. In
addition, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment in Settings Navigator to [Disable] and disregard the trigger error.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
9-3
Controlling with Input/Output Line
Set the trigger interval longer than the processing time. If the trigger interval is shorter than the processing
time, the internal trigger will be input during the processing time, and the trigger error will occur.
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Timing Input (Line Mode)
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Timing
Input (Line Mode)
Sample Hold
Level operation
Sampling period
Sampling period
(3)
(2)
Hold released
(5)
Sample Hold
(7)
Hold released
Judgment Value
Status output
T3
Timing ON
Input OFF
T3
(1)
(4)
T2
(6)
T1
Time
9
T3
Remarks
T1
Minimum one sampling cycle
Minimum on time
T2
Minimum one sampling cycle
Minimum off time
T3
“Timing Input Response Time (Line
Mode)” (Page 9-19)
Response time from timing input until hold starts or is released
Controlling with Input/Output Line
(1) Turn off the timing input.
(2)After the response time for the timing input has passed, the hold is released. The judgment value and output is updated
with the status result from sampling immediately after timing input.
(3) The target is detected every sampling cycle and the judgment value and output is updated.
(4) Turn on the timing input.
(5)After the response time for the timing input has passed, the judgment value and output is held with the status result
from the sample that occurred immediately after the timing input.
(6) Turn off the timing input.
(7)After the response time for the timing input has passed, the hold is released. The judgment value and output is updated
with the status result from the sample that occurred immediately after the timing input turns off.
9-4
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Timing Input (Line Mode)
Edge operation
Sample Hold
(2)
(5)
Sample Hold
Judgment Value
Status output
T3
ON
Timing
Input OFF
T3
(1)
(3)
(4)
T1
T2
Note: The figure shows when [Edge (Rising)] is set
Time
Remarks
T1
Min 100 µs
Minimum on time
T2
Minimum one sampling cycle
Minimum off time
T3
“Timing Input Response Time (Line
Mode)” (Page 9-19)
Response time from timing input until hold starts
(1) Turn on the timing input.
(2)After the response time for the timing input has passed, the judgment value and output is held with the status result
from sampling immediately after timing input.
(3) Turn off the timing input.
(4) Turn on the timing input.
(5)After the response time for the timing input has passed, the judgment value and output are updated and held with the
status result from the sample that occurred immediately after the timing input.
9
Controlling with Input/Output Line
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
9-5
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Timing Input (Line Mode)
Peak/Bottom/Peak to Peak Hold
Level operation
Sampling period 1
Sampling period 2
(1)
(5)
(3)
Judgment Value
Status output
Previous result
Hold
(7)
Result of sampling period 1
T3
Timing ON
Input OFF
Result of sampling period 2
T4
(2)
T3
(4)
T1
(6)
T2
Time
9
Hold
Remarks
T1
Minimum one sampling cycle
Minimum on time
T2
Minimum one sampling cycle
Minimum off time
T3
“Timing Input Response Time (Line
Mode)” (Page 9-19)
Response time from turning on the timing input level until hold starts
T4
Maximum one sampling cycle
Time from when the timing input level is turned off until the sampling
period starts
Controlling with Input/Output Line
(1) While the timing input is off, measurement is performed. This denotes the sampling period.
(2) Turn on the timing input.
(3)After the response time for the timing input has passed, the judgment value and output are updated and held based on
the measurement value that satisfies the hold function conditions during the sampling period as judgment results.
(4) Turn off the timing input.
(5)After a maximum of one sample has passed from the time that the timing input is turned off, the next measurement will
be performed. This denotes the next sampling period.
(6) Turn on the timing input.
(7)After the response time for the timing input has passed, the judgment value and output are updated and held based on
the measurement value that satisfies the hold function conditions during the sampling period as measurement results.
9-6
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Timing Input (Line Mode)
Edge operation
Sampling period 1
Sampling period 2
(1)
(4)
(3)
Judgment Value
Status output
Sampling period 3
(8)
Hold
(7)
Previous result
Result of sampling period 1
Result of sampling period 2
T3
Timing ON
Input OFF
Hold
T3
(2)
(5)
T1
(6)
T2
Note: The figure shows when [Edge (Rising)] is set
Time
Remarks
T1
Min 100 µs
Minimum on time
T2
Minimum one sampling cycle
Minimum off time
T3
“Timing Input Response Time (Line
Mode)” (Page 9-19)
Response time from turning on the timing input level until hold starts
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
9-7
9
Controlling with Input/Output Line
(1) Until the timing input turns on, measurement is performed. This denotes the sampling period.
(2) Turn on the timing input.
(3) After the response time for the timing input has passed, the judgment value and output are updated and held based
on the measurement value that satisfies the hold function conditions during the sampling period as measurement
results.
(4) Until the next timing input turns on, measurement is performed. This denotes the next sampling period.
(5) Turn off the timing input.
(6) Turn on the timing input.
(7) After the response time for the timing input has passed, the judgment value and output are updated and held based
on the measurement value that satisfies the hold function conditions from the sampling period as measurement
results.
(8) Until the next timing input turns on, measurement is performed. This denotes the next sampling period.
Importing the Status Output (Scan Mode)
Importing the Status Output (Scan Mode)
Imports the status output assigned to the output line of the I/O cable. For details about assigning to output lines, refer to:
“4. Output Assignment” (Page 4-107)
“4. Output Assignment” (Page 5-79)
Importing the total status/total status NG output
Total status results of multiple judgement tools and position adjustments for the examined target can be checked.
External trigger/Internal trigger
Trigger 1
Processing time
White line: OUT 2
Assign the BUSY output
Black line: OUT 1
Assign the total status/
total status NG output
ON
OFF
Min 0.2 ms
ON
OFF
Previous total status result
Total status result of Trigger 1
yyThis is an example operation when the output mode of status output is set to [Latching]. For [One-Shot], refer to:
“Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 9-10)
yyThe total status output turns ON when the total status results were OK.
The total status NG output turns ON when the total status results were NG.
The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 8] (scan mode
only).
yy[All Tools OK]
When all of the status results of the judgment tools and the adjustment result of the position adjustment result were
OK, the total status result is OK.
yy[Any Tool OK]
When any of the status results of the judgment tools except that of the position adjustment was OK, the total status
result is OK.
yy[Logic 1] to [Logic 8]
When the status result of the selected logic was OK, the total status result is OK.
9
Controlling with Input/Output Line
yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the assigned output turns off when the program
number is switched.
yyThe output lines for each output are active in the following instances:
When Output Settings are [N.O.]: Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings are [N.C.]: Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
9-8
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Importing the Status Output (Scan Mode)
Importing the individual status output of each detection tool/logic
The individual status result of the detection tool, logic, and position adjustment for the examined target can be checked.
Trigger input
Trigger 1
Processing time
Black line: OUT 1
Assign the BUSY output
ON
OFF
Min 0.2 ms
ON
White line: OUT 2
Assign "Tool 1"
OFF
Gray line: OUT 3
Assign Logic 1
OFF
Orange line: OUT 4
Assign position adjustment
OFF
ON
ON
Previous result
Status result of Tool 1
Previous result
Status result of Logic 1
Previous result
Status result of
position adjustment
yyThis is an example operation when the output mode of status output is set to [Latching]. For [One-Shot], refer to:
“Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 9-10)
yyThis is an example when the status results of Tool 1, Logic 1, and position adjustment are to be checked individually.
yyThe status output turns ON when the status result of each tool was OK and turns OFF when the result was NG or -----.
yyThe output lines for each output are active in the following instances:
When Output Settings are [N.O.]: Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings are [N.C.]: Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the assigned output turns off when the program
number is switched.
9
Controlling with Input/Output Line
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
9-9
Importing the Status Output (Scan Mode)
Changing the timing of the status output
The timing of the status output can be selected from [Latching] which links to the judgment timing and [One-Shot] which
outputs for a specified time. For details of how to configure the settings, refer to:
“Output Options” (Page 7-25)
External trigger/Internal
trigger
BUSY output
Trigger 1
Trigger 2
ON
OFF
Min 0.2 ms
Status output
(Latching output)
Status output
(One-Shot output)
ON
OFF
ON
Previous status result
Status result of Trigger 1
Status result of Trigger 2
Status result of Trigger 1
OFF
Delay time
Status result of Trigger 2
One-Shot ON time
Delay time
One-Shot ON time
yyIn case of [Latching], the output is updated with each judgment.
yyIn case of [One-Shot], the output is updated for a set amount of time after the set delay time has passed.
yyWhen the program number is switched, the status output turns off before each process is completed.
Canceling One-Shot output
To use the One-Shot output function, the following condition needs to be met.
Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > One-Shot ON Time
If the above is not met, the following One-Shot output that occurs during the One-Shot outputting is cancelled and is not
output.
9
Trigger 1
External trigger/Internal
trigger
BUSY output
(1)
ON
OFF
ON
Controlling with Input/Output Line
Internal process of Trigger
1
OFF
Internal process of Trigger
2
OFF
Judgment process
Trigger 2
Trigger input interval
(2)
Delay time
ON
One-Shot ON time
(3)
Status result of Trigger 2 (internal)
Delay time
ON
OFF
Status result of Trigger 1 (internal)
One-Shot ON time
Status result of Trigger 1
Delay time
One-Shot ON time
(1) This is an example of what happens when the trigger input interval is shorter than the One-Shot ON Time.
(2)To perform the One Shot output for the status result of Trigger 1, the previous One Shot output needs to be completed
so that the output can be performed normally.
(3)To perform the One Shot output for the status result of Trigger 1, the previous One Shot output needs to be completed.
Since the One Shot output of Trigger 1 is active, the output status of Trigger 2 is canceled and will not be output.
yyIf the BUSY time is not constant, meet the following condition to properly use a One Shot output. The system may be
affected by a fluctuated BUSY time.
BUSY time + Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > BUSY time + One-Shot ON Time
9-10
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Changing Over (Scan Mode)
Changing Over (Scan Mode)
Program functions can easily change over by switching programs saved on the sensor with the input line. For details about
program functions, refer to:
“Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)” (Page 7-4)
Trigger 1
Program ON
bit0 to bit4
input OFF
Trigger 2
T1
(1)
Trigger 3
(4)
PROG00
PROG01
PROG02
Switching time (T2)
BUSY ON
output OFF
Switching time*1
(2)
T3
Switch process
(internal)
Capture/
judgment
(internal)
Min
0 ms
Operation
program
Status
output
PROG00
PROG01
PROG02
ON
Previous result
OFF
Result from Trigger 1
Result from Trigger 2
Result from
Trigger 3
(3)
Changing multiple input lines at the same time
The program bit0 to bit4 input states must be changed within 4 ms of each other.
In the example below, if the inputs are turned off for more than 4 ms, input switches to Program 0 and then switches to
Program 2.
Max 4 ms
Program bit0
9
Time
Remarks
T1
Min 10 ms
Minimum on time
T2
Tool registration time (total of the below) +
120 ms
yyPosition adjustment: 50 ms (typ.)
yy1-Axis Adjustment: 1 ms (typ.)
yy2-Axis Adjustment: 30 ms (typ.)
yyTilt adjustment: 40 ms (typ.)
yyMonochrome area: 10 ms (typ.) x No.
yyHeight area: 15 ms (typ.) x No.
yyHeight: 1 ms (typ.) x No.
yyStep: 1 ms (typ.) x No.
yyMAX/MIN: 10 ms (typ.) x No.
yyWidth: 1 ms (typ.) x No.
yyAverage Height: 60 ms (typ.) x No.
yyPin Height: 1 ms (typ.) x No.
T3
10 ms (typ.)
Switching time
*1 If
‌ a program switches while the device is busy, the standby time
until the previous process completes is added.
Minimum busy output start time
(1) Keep the Program bit0 to bit4 inputs active to change the active program number.
“When switching the program by external input” (Page 7-6)
(2)The BUSY output turns ON while switching the programs. The time to change programs differs depending on the
settings.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
9-11
Controlling with Input/Output Line
Program bit1
Changing Over (Scan Mode)
(3)The output status (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the process to switch the program has
completed.
(4)If the program number is switched during the judgment process by the trigger input, the changeover time increases
because the system does not cancel judgment processing. Delay time differs depending on the settings of the sensor.
yyUse this function during operation. Programs cannot be switched with external input during setup.
yyThe response of an image displayed on the control panel might be delayed until after the process to switch the program
has completed. (BUSY output OFF).
9
Controlling with Input/Output Line
9-12
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Changing Over (Line Mode)
Changing Over (Line Mode)
Program functions can easily change over by switching programs saved on the sensor with the input lines. For details
about program functions, refer to:
“Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)” (Page 7-4)
Program ON
bit0 to bit4
input OFF
T1
(1)
PROG00
PROG01
PROG02
Switching time (T2)
BUSY ON
output OFF
(2)
Min
0 ms
T3
Switch process
(internal)
Operation
program
PROG00
PROG01
PROG02
Changing multiple input lines at the same time
The program bit0 to bit4 input states must be changed within 4 ms of each other.
In the example below, if the inputs are turned off for more than 4 ms, input switches to Program 0 and then switches to
Program 2.
Max 4 ms
Program bit0
Program bit1
Time
Remarks
Min 10 ms
T2
Tool registration time (total of the below) +
+40 ms
yyPosition adjustment: 1 ms (typ.)
yyTilt adjustment: 1 ms (typ.)
yyHeight: 1 ms (typ.) x No.
yyStep: 1 ms (typ.) x No.
yyEdge Position: 3 ms (typ.) x No.
yyWidth/Diameter (judgment mode: Width):
3 ms (typ.) x No.
yyWidth/Diameter (judgment mode:
Diameter): 1 ms (typ.) x No.
T3
10 ms (typ.)
9
Minimum on time
Switching time
If a program switches while the device is busy, the standby time until
the previous process completes is added.
Minimum busy output start time
(1) Keep the Program bit0 to bit4 inputs active to change the active program number.
“When switching the program by external input” (Page 7-6)
(2) The BUSY output turns ON while switching the programs. The time to change programs differs depending on the
settings.
yyUse this function during operation. Programs cannot be switching with external input during setup.
yyThe response of an image displayed on the control panel might be delayed until the process to switch the program has
completed (BUSY output OFF).
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
9-13
Controlling with Input/Output Line
T1
Clearing Errors
Clearing Errors
If an error occurs, the error that is output can be turned OFF using the reset input.
When [Reset (Error Only)] or [Reset (Status & Error)] is set for the Input Function, the error clear by reset input is enabled.
T1
Reset input
T2
(2)
T4
BUSY output
ON
(3)
OFF
(6)
Processing time
(T3)
T5
Process
execution
Clear error (internal)
(4)
Error output (1)
(5)
Time
9
Remarks
T1
Min 2 ms
Minimum off time
T2
Min 2 ms
Minimum on time
T3
In scan mode: 3 ms (typ.)
In line mode: 30 ms (typ.)
Processing time
Note: ‌If an error is reset while the device is busy, the standby time until the
previous process completes is added.
T4
2 ms (typ.)
Minimum busy output start time
T5
Min 200 µs
BUSY off before error output update
Controlling with Input/Output Line
(1) If an error occurred, the error output turns ON.
Error types that are output are:
yySystem error
yyStartup memory readout error
yyTrigger error
To output a trigger error, set the trigger error setting in the Output Assignment in Settings Navigator to [ON].
yyZERO/Offset Error
(2) Turn on the reset input.
(3) After the minimum busy output start time has passed, busy output turns on.
(4) Error clear processing is performed.
(5) After error clear processing, error output turns off.
Error types that can be cleared are:
yyTrigger Error
yyZERO/Offset Error
The system error/startup memory readout error cannot be cleared.
(6) After error clear is performed, BUSY output turns off.
9-14
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Resetting Status
Resetting Status
You can turn off the matching rate and judgment outputs with the reset input.
When [Reset (Status Only)] or [Reset (Status & Error)] is set for the Input Function, the status reset by reset input is
enabled.
T1
Reset input
T2
(1)
T4
BUSY output
ON
(2)
OFF
(5)
Processing time
(T3)
T5
Process
execution
Reset (internal)
(4)
Status output
State before reset (e.g.: On with status OK) State after reset: (e.g.: Off with no status)
Time
T1
Min 2 ms
Minimum off time
T2
Min 2 ms
Minimum on time
T3
In scan mode: 3 ms (typ.)
In line mode: 30 ms (typ.)
Processing time
Note: ‌If a judgment is reset while the device is busy, the standby time until the
previous process completes is added.
T4
2 ms (typ.)
Minimum busy output start time
T5
Min 200 µs
BUSY off before status output update
9
Turn on the reset input.
After the minimum busy output start time has passed, busy output turns on.
Status reset processing is performed.
After status reset processing, status output is reset.
After status output reset is performed, the BUSY output turns OFF.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Controlling with Input/Output Line
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Remarks
9-15
Laser Shutdown/Release
Laser Shutdown/Release
T1
Laser shutdown input
T1
(1)
(6)
T4
BUSY output
ON
OFF
T4
(2)
(5)
Processing time
(T3)
Laser shutdown/release
(internal)
Emission status
(7)
T5
Processing time
(T3)
Process
execution
Process
execution
(3)
(8)
Laser emitting
(4)
9
T5
(9)
Laser shutting down
Time
Controlling with Input/Output Line
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(10)
Laser emitting
Remarks
T1
Min 2 ms
Minimum off time
T2
Min 2 ms
Minimum on time
T3
In scan mode: 3 ms (typ.)
In line mode: 30 ms (typ.)
Processing time
Note: ‌If emission stops while the device is busy, the standby time until the
previous process completes is added.
T4
2 ms (typ.)
Minimum busy output start time
T5
Min 200 µs
BUSY off before emission state update
Laser shutdown input is turned on.
After the minimum busy output start time has passed, busy output turns on.
Laser shutdown processing is performed.
After laser shutdown processing, emission stops.
After laser shutdown processing is performed, BUSY output turns off.
Laser shutdown input is turned on.
After the minimum busy output start time has passed, busy output turns on.
Laser shutdown release processing is performed.
After laser shutdown release processing, laser emission starts.
After laser shutdown release processing performed, BUSY output turns off.
9-16
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Running ZERO/Offset
Running ZERO/Offset
T1
ZERO/Offset input
T2
(1)
T4
BUSY output
ON
(2)
OFF
(5)
Processing time
(T3)
ZERO/Offset
(internal)
T5
Process
execution
(3)
Judgment Value
(4)
State before shift
Time
Remarks
T1
Min 2 ms
Minimum off time
T2
Min 2 ms
Minimum on time
T3
In scan mode: 5 ms (typ.)
In line mode: 30 ms (typ.)
Processing time
Note 1: ‌If ZERO/Offset is reset while the device is busy, the standby time until
the previous process completes is added.
Note 2: ‌When saving ZERO/Offset values in the nonvolatile memory, the
following is calculated:
20 ms (typ.) x No. of tools (only tools that have a ZERO/Offset value)
T4
2 ms (typ.)
Minimum busy output start time
T5
Min 200 µs
BUSY off before judgment value update
9
Turn on ZERO/Offset input.
After the minimum busy output start time has passed, busy output turns on.
ZERO/Offset processing is performed.
After ZERO/Offset processing, the judgment value shifts.
After ZERO/Offset processing is performed, the BUSY output turns OFF.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Controlling with Input/Output Line
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
State after shift
9-17
Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on
Operations when Power of the Sensor is
Turned on
Operations when the power is turned ON are as follows. Check activation of the BUSY output when starting operation.
Initializing
2 seconds or longer
Power (DC24V)
BUSY
20 ms or
longer
Run
Setting
(1)
Determine the
I/O settings
(2)
Trigger
Error output
RUN output
Total status output
Status output of each tool
System error
ON
OFF
Program number
BUSY output
Run
(3)
ON
Trigger
(4)
OFF
(5)
ON
OFF
(6)
ON
OFF
Min 0 ms
Min
0.2 ms
Min
0.2 ms
ON
OFF
Position adjustment output
(1)After the power is turned ON, the I/O Settings (NPN or PNP and N.O. or N.C.) will be determined.
“Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page 3-14)
“NPN/PNP” (Page 7-27)
“N.O./N.C.” (Page 7-24)
9
(2)The program number will be determined. If the program switching condition (Page 8-11) is set to [External IN], the
program number is determined according to the input condition of the input line.
Controlling with Input/Output Line
(3)BUSY output turns ON.
yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.
yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to OFF, so no changes occur.
(4)The BUSY output turns OFF and the system starts to operate.
yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from ON to OFF.
yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.
By checking the activation of the BUSY output, operation in N.O./N.C. can be checked.
(5)If a startup error occurs, the error output turns ON during the BUSY status.
(6)The RUN output turns ON when the sensor is running with no system error occurring.
yyThe output lines for each output are active in the following instances:
When Output Settings are [N.O.]: Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings are [N.C.]: Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe RUN output, BUSY output, and error output will be output from the line assigned in the output assignment for the
program number determined after the power is turned ON. If the outputs are not assigned, these statuses will not be
output.
9-18
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Timing Input Response Time (Line Mode)
Timing Input Response Time (Line Mode)
The timing input response time is the time that timing is input until status output is finalized.
Response time (maximum value)
Sampling frequency: 6 ms
Setting
Main/expansion
Response time
(ms)
Main unit
24
Expansion unit
24
Main/expansion unit link
function
Main/expansion unit
calculation in use
Main unit
36
Expansion unit
24
Interference prevention (w/
o calculation)
Main unit
36
Expansion unit
36
Interference prevention
(with calculation)
Main unit
48
Expansion unit
36
Normal
Note: When the interference prevention function is used, the sampling frequency is twice as long.
Sampling frequency: 11 ms
Setting
Main/expansion
Response time
(ms)
44
Expansion unit
44
Main/expansion unit link
function
Main/expansion unit
calculation in use
Main unit
66
Expansion unit
44
Interference prevention (w/
o calculation)
Main unit
66
Expansion unit
66
Interference prevention
(with calculation)
Main unit
88
Expansion unit
66
9
Controlling with Input/Output Line
Main unit
Normal
Note: When the interference prevention function is used, the sampling frequency is twice as long.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
9-19
Response Time (Line Mode)
Response Time (Line Mode)
Response time is the time from the sensor recognizing changes to the target until output.
Status output response time (maximum value)
Filter: Average, Sampling Period: 6 ms
Response time (ms)
Setting
Main/expansion
Average number of times
1
2
4
6
Main unit
24
30
42
54
Expansion unit
24
30
42
54
Main/expansion unit link
function
Main/expansion unit
calculation in use
Main unit
36
42
54
66
Expansion unit
24
30
42
54
Interference prevention (w/
o calculation)
Main unit
36
48
72
96
Expansion unit
36
48
72
96
Interference prevention
(with calculation)
Main unit
48
60
84
108
Expansion unit
36
48
72
96
Normal
Note: When the interference prevention function is used, the sampling frequency is twice as long.
Filter: Average, Sampling Period: 11 ms
Response time (ms)
9
Setting
Main/expansion
Average number of times
Controlling with Input/Output Line
1
2
4
6
Main unit
44
55
77
99
Expansion unit
44
55
77
99
Main/expansion unit link
function
Main/expansion unit
calculation in use
Main unit
66
77
99
121
Expansion unit
44
55
77
99
Interference prevention (w/
o calculation)
Main unit
66
88
132
176
Expansion unit
66
88
132
176
Interference prevention
(with calculation)
Main unit
88
110
154
198
Expansion unit
66
88
132
176
Normal
Note: When the interference prevention function is used, the sampling frequency is twice as long.
9-20
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Response Time (Line Mode)
Filter: Median, Sampling Period: 6 ms
Response time (ms)
Setting
Main/expansion
Median count (times)
3
6
8
12
24
Main unit
30
42
48
60
96
Expansion unit
30
42
48
60
96
Main/expansion unit link
function
Main/expansion unit
calculation in use
Main unit
42
54
60
72
108
Expansion unit
30
42
48
60
96
Interference prevention
(w/o calculation)
Main unit
48
72
84
108
180
Expansion unit
48
72
84
108
180
Interference prevention
(with calculation)
Main unit
60
84
96
120
192
Expansion unit
48
72
84
108
180
Normal
Note: When the interference prevention function is used, the sampling frequency is twice as long.
Filter: Median, Sampling Period: 11 ms
Response time (ms)
Setting
Main/expansion
Median count (times)
6
8
12
24
Main unit
55
77
88
110
176
Expansion unit
55
77
88
110
176
Main/expansion unit link
function
Main/expansion unit
calculation in use
Main unit
88
121
143
187
319
Expansion unit
66
99
121
165
297
Interference prevention
(w/o calculation)
Main unit
88
132
154
198
330
Expansion unit
88
132
154
198
330
Interference prevention
(with calculation)
Main unit
110
154
176
220
352
Expansion unit
88
132
154
198
330
Normal
9
Controlling with Input/Output Line
3
Note: When the interference prevention function is used, the sampling frequency is twice as long.
Analog output update frequency
The analog output update frequency is the same as the sampling frequency.
Note: When the interference prevention function is used, the sampling frequency is twice as long.
Analog output response time
Status output response time + 0.3 ms
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
9-21
Response Time (Line Mode)
MEMO
9
Controlling with Input/Output Line
9-22
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Chapter
10
This chapter explains the specifications and dimensions of the
sensor and software.
Specifications
Specifications.....................................................................10-2
Dimensions.........................................................................10-8
10
Specifications
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
10-1
Specifications
Specifications
Sensor Head
Model
IX-055
Standard distance
55 mm
80 mm
Measurement distance
45 to 65 mm
62 to 98 mm
Range of detection*1
Scan mode
(X direction)
×
(Y direction)
Measurement distance 45 mm: 27.5×20.5 mm Measurement distance 62 mm: 36.5×27.0 mm
to
to
Measurement distance 55 mm: 32.5×24.5 mm Measurement distance 80 mm: 45.5×34.0 mm
to
to
Measurement distance 65 mm: 37.5×28.5 mm Measurement distance 98 mm: 54.5×41.0 mm
Line mode
(X direction)
Measurement distance 45 mm: 27.5 mm
to
Measurement distance 55 mm: 32.5 mm
to
Measurement distance 65 mm: 37.5 mm
Red semiconductor laser wavelength 660 nm (visible light)
Laser class
Class II Laser Product (FDA(CDRH)Part1040.10) ,
Class 2 Laser Product (IEC 60825-1: 2014)
Output
0.95 mW(FDA(CDRH)Part1040.10), 1.6 mW(IEC 60825-1: 2014)
Height*3
Minimum Scan Average height*4
detection mode
Pin height*5
(guideline)
Line mode*6
Repetition accuracy*7
Edge
Horizontal
detection
direction
(X direction) guideline*8
Line mode
Line mode
Image sensor
10
Specifications
*5
*6
*7
10-2
φ0.5 mm
φ0.3 mm
φ0.4 mm
0.5 mm x 0.5 mm
0.7 mm x 0.7 mm
10 µm
20 µm
(Indication : ‌when measuring the height between 2 different points, the typical
measurement to be performed is as shown below.
IX-055: 100 μm, IX-080: 200 μm)
0.3 mm
0.4 mm
120 ms~ (Typical example)
6 ms/11 ms (Selection type)
Amplifier type
Red LED
Lighting method
Pulse lighting
0.04% of F.S./°C
0.04% of F.S./°C
Enclosure rating
IP67
Ambient temperature*10
0 to +45°C (No freezing)
Relative humidity
35 to 85% RH (No condensation)
Environment
illuminance*11
Incandescent lamp 5000 lx or less
Vibration
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axes
Shock resistance
500 m/s2 3 different directions in 3 times
Environmental
resistance
*4
φ1.0 mm
φ0.4 mm
Monochrome CMOS image sensor
Temperature characteristic*9
*1
*2
*3
φ0.7 mm
Scan mode
Sampling Period
Illumination
Measurement distance 62 mm: 36.5 mm
to
Measurement distance 80 mm: 45.5 mm
to
Measurement distance 98 mm: 54.5 mm
Amplifier type
Laser source
Height
(Z direction)
IX-080
Material
Body: Zinc diecast, Front cover: Glass, Acrylic (hard coating),
Indicator light cover: TPU, Connector ring: PBT, Connector: Zinc diecast
Weight
Approx. 190g
X: Laser longitudinal direction, Y: Laser transverse direction
Classification is performed according to IEC60825-1 by following Laser Notice No.56 of FDA (CDRH).
When mounting the head vertically at the standard distance. For scan mode, when measurement is made by using
the height tool, measurement point “Small” without position correction.
When mounting the head vertically at the standard distance. For scan mode, when measurement is made by using
the average height tool, average size “Small” without position correction.
When mounting the head vertically at the standard distance. For scan mode, when measurement is made by using
the pin height tool without position correction.
When mounting the head vertically at the standard distance. For line mode, when measurement is made by using
the height tool, the minimum tool window size without position correction.
The value measured in scan mode by using “Large” point size in the height tool to measure the dedicated standard
object (white diffusing material) at the standard distance in the center of view.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Specifications
IX-150
IX-360
IX-360W
150 mm
360 mm
360 mm
100 to 200 mm
280 to 440 mm
280 to 440 mm
Measurement distance 100 mm: 56.5×42.0 mm Measurement distance 280 mm: 66.0×49.5 mm Measurement distance 280 mm: 150×113 mm
to
to
to
Measurement distance 150 mm: 82.5×61.5 mm Measurement distance 360 mm: 84.0×63.0 mm Measurement distance 360 mm: 192×144 mm
to
to
to
Measurement distance 200 mm: 108.5×81.0 mm Measurement distance 440 mm: 102.0×76.5 mm Measurement distance 440 mm: 234×176 mm
Measurement distance 100mm: 56.5mm
to
Measurement distance 150mm: 82.5mm
to
Measurement distance 200mm: 108.5mm
Measurement distance 280mm: 66.0mm
to
Measurement distance 360mm: 84.0mm
to
Measurement distance 440mm: 102.0mm
Measurement distance 280mm: 150mm
to
Measurement distance 360mm: 192mm
to
Measurement distance 440mm: 234mm
Red semiconductor laser wavelength 660 nm (visible light)
Class II Laser Product (FDA(CDRH)Part1040.10) ,
Class 2 Laser Product (IEC 60825-1: 2014)
Class 2 Laser Product (IEC 60825-1:
2014, FDA(CDRH)Part1040.10*2)
0.95 mW(FDA(CDRH)Part1040.10), 1.6 mW(IEC 60825-1: 2014)
2.8 mW
φ1.7 mm
φ1.8 mm
φ3.8 mm
φ0.9 mm
φ1.2 mm
φ2.6 mm
φ0.8 mm
φ0.9 mm
φ1.9 mm
1.1 mm x 1.1 mm
1.2 mm x 1.5 mm
2.6 mm x 2.6 mm
50 µm
150 µm
150 µm
(Indication : ‌when measuring the height between 2 different points, the typical measurement to be performed is as shown below.
IX-150: 500 μm, IX-360: 1000 μm, IX-360W: 1000 μm)
0.5 mm
1 mm
2 mm
120 ms~ (Typical example)
6 ms/11 ms (Selection type)
Monochrome CMOS image sensor
10
Red LED
Pulse lighting
0.08% of F.S./°C
0.04% of F.S./°C
IP67
0 to +45°C (No freezing)
35 to 85% RH (No condensation)
Incandescent lamp 5000 lx or less
Incandescent lamp 3000 lx or less
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axes
500 m/s2 3 different directions in 3 times
Body: Zinc diecast, Front cover: Glass, Acrylic (hard coating),
Indicator light cover: TPU, Connector ring: PBT, Connector: Zinc diecast
Approx. 190g
*8
*9
*10
*11
Approx. 300g
When mounting the head vertically at the standard distance. For line mode, when the metal block gauge is
measured by using the average filter set to four times, edge position tool without position correction. For the width
mode of the width/diameter tool, the detection guideline is twice the edge detection guideline.
The minimum step (guideline) necessary for edge detection of each model at the standard distance is as follows:
IX‑055: 0.8 mm, IX‑080: 1.0 mm, IX‑150: 2 mm, IX‑360: 4 mm, IX‑360W: 4 mm.
When the distance to target object equals the standard distance. F.S. for each device are shown as following.
IX‑055: ±10 mm, IX‑080: ±18 mm, IX‑150: ±50 mm, IX‑360: ±80 mm, IX‑360W: ±80 mm.
When mounting on a metal.
For laser source in case of initial settings.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
10-3
Specifications
0.04% of F.S./°C
Specifications
Detection range
16.4
C
B
A
14.9
10
D
G
E
H
F
I
(mm)
IX-055
IX-080
IX-150
IX-360
IX-360W
A
45
62
100
280
280
B
55
80
150
360
360
C
65
98
200
440
440
D
20.5
27
42
49.5
113
E
24.5
34
61.5
63
144
F
28.5
41
81
76.5
176
G
27.5
36.5
56.5
66
150
H
32.5
45.5
82.5
84
192
I
37.5
54.5
108.5
102
234
Specifications
10-4
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Specifications
Sensor Amplifier
Model
IX-H2000
IX-H2050
Main / Expansion
Main
Expansion
Display*1
Minimum
display
unit
Axis Z
10 µm
Axis X
50 µm
Display
range
Axis Z
±999.99 to ±999mm (4 levels available)
Axis X
±999.95 to ±999mm (4 levels available)
Scan mode
Height, Step, Average Height, Pin Height, MAX/MIN, Height Area, Monochrome Area,
Width, Calculate Step, Calculate Thickness, Position Adjustment, 1-Axis Adjustment, 2-Axis
Adjustment
(Maximum settings number) Judgment tools: 16 tools, Position Adjustment tool: 1 tool
Line mode
Height (AVE/MAX/MIN) , Step (AVE/MAX/MIN) , Edge Position, Width/Diameter, Step/Width,
Thickness, Position Adjustment, Tilt Adjustment
(Maximum settings number) ‌Judgment tools: 16 tools*10, Position Adjustment tool: 1 tool,
Tilt Adjustment tool: 1 tool
Common
ZERO/Offset, Threshold adjustment in operation, 2-point Calibration, Measurement direction,
Measure when position adjustment fails, ZERO/Offset storage, Imaging Mode (HDR),
Time + Date Info, N.O./N.C. switching, I/O Monitor, Auto Brightness Adjustment,
Lighting (ON/OFF), Total Status Conditions, NPN/PNP switching, Main/Expansion Simul
Input, Interference Prevention, Security
Tool*2
Other
functions
Scan mode
Measurement Range, Measurement Position (Small/MidSens/Large), Measurement mode,
Reduce measurement noise, Imaging Mode (HighGain), Tilt Adjustment (Fixed/Real time
adjustment is selectable), Cut Halation, Trigger input (Internal/External), Trigger Interval,
Trigger Delay, Trigger Error, Monochrome histogram function, Average Height histogram
function, Fixed Reference Area, Mask outline, Rotation Range, Height image display on the
Tool Settings screen, Scaling function
Line mode
Adjust Laser Position, Timing input, Head tilt adjustment (Fixed only),
Remove ambient influence, Hold function, Alarm Setting, Measurement Method (Ave/Max/
Min), Laser sensitivity adjustment, Average filter, Median filter, X-axis median filter
No-voltage input/voltage input is switchable
For no-voltage input: ‌ON voltage 2 V or lower, OFF current 0.1 mA or lower, ON current 2
mA (short circuit)
For voltage input: ‌Maximum input rating 26.4 V, ON voltage 18 V or higher, OFF current
0.2 mA or lower, ON current 2 mA (for 24 V)
Input
Function
8 Inputs (IN1 to IN8)
IN1: External Trigger↑↓/Timing, IN2 to IN8: Enable by assigning the optional functions
Assignable functions: ‌Switch program, Laser Shutdown, Batch ZERO/Offset ,
Reset (Error only) , Reset (Status only) , Reset (Status & Error)
Open collector output NPN/PNP is switchable, N.O./N.C. is switchable
For open collector NPN output : ‌Maximum rating 26.4 V 50 mA (20 mA when an Expansion
unit is connected), remaining voltage 1.5 V or lower
For open collector PNP output : Maximum
‌
rating 26.4 V 50 mA (20 mA when an Expansion
unit is connected), remaining voltage 2 V or lower
Output
Outputs
10 Outputs (OUT1 to OUT10)
Function
Enable by assigning the optional functions
Assignable functions: ‌Total judge result (All Tools OK / Any Tool OK/NG / Each logic),
RUN, BUSY, Error, Position Adjustment result, Tilt Adjustment result,
1-Axis/2-axis edge adjustment result, Monochrome Area/Height Area
result (OK/NG), Height/Step/MAXMIN/Width/Diameter/Average Height/
Pin Height Tool result (OK/NG/HIGH/LOW), Alarm, Logical calculation
result of each tool
Analog output voltage*3
±5V, 1-5V, 0-5V output impedance 100Ω
3
4-20mA Maximum load resistance 350Ω
Analog output current*
Numbers of programs
-
32 programs
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
10-5
Specifications
Inputs
10
Specifications
Model
IX-H2000
Measurement Statistics*1
Detection
record*5
FTP data
transfer
(FTP client
function)
Number of
storage*9
Scan mode: 100, Line mode: 500
Condition
NG only/All is selectable
Transfer
Destination
FTP server
Transfer format
bmp/jpeg//txt is selectable
4 conditions
Transfer Condition
Ethernet*6
All / Total status result (OK/NG) / Result for each tool (OK/(NG and ALM)) /
Logical operation result for each tool is selectable
Standard
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Connector
RJ-45 8 pin connector
CC-Link, DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP, EtherCAT, RS-232C, BCD output, PROFINET, PROFIBUS,
TCP/IP Non-procedural communication
Number of connections
Main unit x1, Expansion unit x1, Communications unit (DL) x1
Power voltage
Environmental
resistance
DC24V±10% (including ripple)
Maximum 1.9A or less (only main unit in use: 0.8A or less, with expansion unit: 1.9A or less)
(excluding output load)
Ambient
temperature
0 to +50°C (No freezing)
Relative humidity
10
35 to 85%RH (No condensation)
Main unit case: PC,
Power connector: PA, POM
Analog output connector: PA, POM
I/O connector: PA
Head connector: Zinc + Ni coat, PA
Ethernet connector: Copper alloy + Ni coat, PA
Radiator plate on rear main unit: Aluminum
DIN rail tab on rear main unit: POM
Nameplate: PC
Specifications
Weight
*7
*8
*9
Approx. 210g
Scan mode
FTP Client function
High resolution mode
Number of saved images in
the detection history
10-6
Approx. 190g
Can be displayed on the control panel for IX series or on the PC software.
Can be set for each program.
Select any of the following to use, ±5V, 1-5V, 0-5V, 4-20mA.
Counts when settings of Sample Hold (Edge) and Peak/Bottom/P-P hold (Level/Edge) is configured.
Saves to the inner memory of sensor amplifier.
The detection history saved in the sensor amplifier can be copied to PC as a backup by using the PC software or
the USB mounted on the control panel for IX series.
It is used to connect the control panel for IX series or the PC software. The connection to an expansion unit is via
RJ-45 connector of main unit.
When using communication unit DL series. For other interfaces, please contact our office for more information.
Includes the communication unit DL series.
The following restrictions are applied depending on the settings.
Detection mode
*10
Supplied from the Main unit
Consumption
current*8
Material
*6
-
Compatible interface*7
Rating
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
IX-H2050
Scan mode: ‌Measurement value/Matching rate (MAX, MIN, AVE), TIME (Latest value, MAX,
MIN, AVE), COUNT (OK / NG / Trigger No.)
Line mode: ‌Measurement value/Matching rate (MAX, MIN, AVE), COUNT (OK / NG / Judge
Count)
Enable
Line mode
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
50 images
80 images
70 images
100 images
When using diameter tools, up to 8 tools.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Enable
Disable
–
400 images
500 images
Specifications
IX-Navigator
Model
System
requirements
IX-H1
Interface
Equip the Ethernet (100BASE-TX) interface
OS*1
Windows 10 Home/Pro/Enterprise
Windows 7 (SP1 or higher) Home Premium/Professional/Ultimate
One of the OS must be installed.
Languages*2
English, Japanese, German, Chinese(Simplified), Italian, French, Spanish
Processor
Needs to be compliant with system requirements for OS.
Memory capacity
Needs to be compliant with system requirements for OS.
Required capacity for
installation
1 GB or more
Monitor
Resolution 1024 × 768 pixel or higher, display color High Color (16bit) or higher
Operating conditions
.NET Framework 4.5.2 must be installed*3
*1 Supports 32-bit and 64-bit versions.
*2 With IX-H2000/H2050 connected, Japanese, English, and Chinese (Simplified) only are supported.
*3 If .NET Framework 4.5.2 is not installed, it will be installed automatically when IX-H1 is installed.
10
Specifications
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
10-7
Dimensions
Dimensions
Sensor Head
IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360
20
38.4±1.2 (Minimum)
12.5
3.5
φ12
40
33
69.2
3.5
36.9
3xM4 Depth 10
φ4.8
Sensor head/amplifier
Measurement cable for IX series
distance
reference plane
60
67
30
14.9
3xφ3.2 Plate through mounting hole
32.2
(127.6)
Indicator
16.4
74.7
Center of light reception
φ4.8
20
(Minimum)
58.5
(101.3)
38.4±1.2
42.9
3xM4 Depth 10
IX-360W
(171.8)
Indicator
12.5
3.5
Ø12
32.2
43
40
33
10
20
38.4±1.2 (Minimum)
113.3
36.9
60
111.2
3xφ3.2 Plate through mounting hole
Measurement
distance
reference plane
φ4.8
Sensor head/amplifier cable
30
14.9
16.4
118.9
Center of light reception
10-8
(101.3)
20
(Minimum)
102.6
38.4±1.2
42.9
3xM4 Depth 10
φ4.8
Specifications
47.7
3xM4 Depth 10
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Dimensions
With vertical mounting bracket (OP-88343)
(IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360)
With transverse mounting bracket
(OP‑88344) (IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360)
131.3
111.3
14.2°
R3
19
38.4±1.2
20
(Minimum)
φ12
43.3
17.7°
5.8°
.8
51.3
8
17.7°
0
R3
14.2°
19.2
0.
φ12
φ4.8
Measurement distance reference plane
5.8°
3.7
Measurement distance reference plane
17.7
R2
.2
30°
4
R2.2
12
16.5
25
53
68.3
73.1
R2
.2
4.4
φ3
.2
R2
61
81.1
56.2
4.4
20
(Minimum)
19
38.4±1.2
60
30
14.9
18
10
60
14.9
30
Center of
light reception
(4.9)
φ4.8
10.4
(4.9)
Center of light reception
19.3
48.2
86.2
(106.2)
With vertical mounting bracket (OP-88343)
(IX-360W)
19
5.8°
38.4±1.2
20(Minimum)
φ4.8
105.2
121.6
30°
2
2.
R
12
48.2
4.4
16.4
φ3
4
30
Center of light reception
19
60
14.9
Measurement distance reference plane
(4.9)
19.3
10.4
Specifications
43.3
17.7°
0.9
R3
10
φ12
14.2°
R2
.2
86.1
(106.1)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
10-9
Dimensions
With transverse mounting bracket (OP‑88344) (IX-360W)
(171.7)
151.7
38.4±1.2
R3
14.2°
20
(Minimum)
0.
φ12
5.8°
51.3
17.7°
19.2
9
φ4.8
Measurement distance reference plane
40.5
(4.9)
14.9
10
30
18
60
Center of light reception
.2
56.2
2
R2
2.
4.4
R
60.7
25
53
16.4
26.5
68.3
With vertical diagonal mounting bracket (OP-88345) (IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360)
25.3
5.8°
60
14.9
Measurement distance reference plane
(14)
16.7
20
(Minimum)
12
14.7
57.3
R2.2
4.4
.2
R2
0
20°
19
Center of
light reception
67.3
87.4
10-10
φ4.8
38.4±1.2
φ4
30
Specifications
43.3
17.7°
9
0.
R3
10
φ12
14.2°
95.3
(115.3)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Dimensions
With vertical diagonal mounting bracket (OP-88345) (IX-360W)
25.3
φ12
5.8°
43.3
17.7°
0.9
R3
14.2°
Measurement distance reference plane
20 (Minimum)
φ4.8
(14)
16.7
0
12
14.7
57.3
4.4
87.4
111.5
127.9
φ4
R2
.2
20°
30
19
60
14.9
Center of light reception
38.4±1.2
R2
.2
95.3
(115.3)
With transverse diagonal mounting bracket (OP-88346) (IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360)
(131.3)
111.3
38.4±1.2
R3
20
(Minimum)
0.8
φ12
10
φ4.8
Specifications
5.8°
17.7°
87
14.2°
Measurement distance reference plane
Center of light reception
(11)
98
.2
R2
2
25
53
73.1
2.
16.5
R
20.1
4.4
30
60
18
10
14.9
3.7
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
10-11
Dimensions
With transverse diagonal mounting bracket (OP-88346) (IX-360W)
(171.7)
151.7
38.4±1.2
14.2°
0.9
R3
φ12
17.7°
87
20
(Minimum)
5.8°
φ4.8
Measurement distance reference plane
40.5
(11)
14.9
10
30
18
60
Center of light reception
R2
.2
4.4
.2
R2
60.7
25
24.1
73.1
98
53
16.4
With vertical diagonal mounting bracket (OP-88345): Attaching a vertical laser for line mode
IX-055
)
um
inim
2
IX-080
21.5
20.6
27
25.2
8
φ4.
M
20(
.8
10
)
um
inim
φ4
0(M
17.4
34
Laser emission position
42.1
51
8.5°
18°
10-12
17.8
44.4
15.3
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
11.8°
13.9
2.7
3.1
20(Minim
27.6
41.2
Laser emission position
57.9
um)
IX-360
φ4.8
14
φ4.8
IX-150
φ4.8
IX-360W
um)
inim
20(M
19.9
imum)
Laser emission position
20 (Min
21.6
1.2
0.6
Laser
emission position
24.5°
°
29.5
Specifications
22.1
33.5
27.2
Laser emission position
34.3
Dimensions
2
)
IX-080
23.1
22.2
um
inim
0(M
17.4
27.2
1.4
Laser emission position
29.8
29.7
19.9
IX-360
)
imum
in
20(M
φ4.8
41
40.6
3.6
24.5°
29.5°
21.6
Laser emission position
um)
20(Minim
φ4.8
4.2
)
22.1
33.5
6.3
7.5
IX-150
um
inim
M
20(
8
φ4.
.8
φ4
16.7
IX-055
18.5
With transverse diagonal mounting bracket (OP-88346): Attaching a vertical laser for line
mode
27.6
41.2
0.3
34
51
8.5°
18°
Laser emission position
17.8
Laser emission position
15.3
IX-360W
45.9
)
inimum
36.7
20 (M
φ4.8
10
4.2
11.8°
Specifications
32
47.8
Laser emission position
20
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
10-13
Dimensions
With adjustable bracket (OP-88347) (IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360)
129.3
109.3
φ12
12.2
38.4±1.2
20
(Minimum)
φ4.8
Measurement distance reference plane
(43.4)
21.7
20
21.7
20
14.9
Center of light reception
19.5
(67.5)
48
32.9
17.1
φ1
2
33.5
35.2
33.5
35.2
(70.4)
With adjustable bracket (OP-88347) (IX-360W)
20
38.4±1.2 (Minimum)
12.2
φ12
(171.7)
151.7
φ4.8
Measurement distance reference plane
33.5
23
21.7
Specifications
φ12
35.2
(112.9)
10-14
21.7
20
16.4
19.5
10
(67.5)
48
32.9
14.9
77.7
61.3
Center of light reception
(70.4)
35.2
(43.4)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Dimensions
Sensor Amplifier
IX-H2000
Minimum 142.8
When using an Ethernet cable
43.2
43.2
Sensor head/
amplifier cable
for IX series
Minimum 123.6
When using a LAN cable
36.8
66.9
61.5
66.1
62.2
48.2
95
(109.7)
DIN rail
LAN cable
or
Ethernet cable
I/O cable
IX-H2050
When connected
66.1
62.2
95
(47)
43.2
98.4
86.4
DIN rail
10
95
(109.7)
Specifications
Optional Parts for the Sensor
Sensor Head/Amplifier cable
19.1
yyOP-88551
(20m)
38.4±1.2
(25)
3000
8.1
7
2000 (OP-87903)
5000 (OP-87904)
10000 (OP-87905)
20000 (OP-88551)
φ4.8
φ12
38.4±1.2
yyOP-87905
(10m)
27.8
yyOP-87904
(5m)
φ12
yyOP-87903
(2m)
I/O cable (OP-87906)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
10-15
Dimensions
Vertical mounting bracket (OP-88343)
Material: SUS304
t=3.0
44.6
°
30
18
10
12
48.2
4.4
R2.2
R2.2
4.4
Transverse mounting bracket (OP-88344)
19.2° 19.2°
Adjustable bracket (OP-88347)
22.7°
R2.2
R2
.2
.2
10.8
8°
98
4.4
22.7°
R2
37.5
30
18
10
4.4
3
°
10.
25
53
73.1
Material: SUS304
t=3.0
R3
0.9
51.3
44.7
R2.2
R2.2
22.3
30°
30
19
22.3°
°
4
4.4
34.2
4
φ3
81.1
9
0.
R3
.2
R2
80.4
R
2.
2
25.8° 25.8°
3
°
10.8
.2
R2
22.7° 10.8°
43.3
36.7
22.7°
.9
Material: SUS304
t=4.0
.2
R2
34.2
°
30
R
19.2° 19.2°
Transverse diagonal mounting bracket
(OP‑88346)
4.4
56.2
4.4
Bracket
Material: Zinc die-casting
* Strut φ12 is not supplied with the OP-88347
Material: SUS304
t=4.0
25.8°
φ27
36.7
0
φ4
4.4
R2.2
5
ter
6×
bo φ20
.1
re
De φ24
pth
2
13.8
4 16.5
16.5
20
21.7
21.7
(43.4)
un
R2.2
22.3°
Co
50.9
R2.2
.4
20°
30
19
4
φ4
87.4
10-16
3.3
4.4
Material: SUS304
22.3°
34.2
°
34.2
°
R2.2
(36.9)
32.5
19.5
R2.2
12
57.3
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
60
70.4
2
φ1
Specifications
25.8°
13
25.5
Vertical diagonal mounting bracket
(OP‑88345)
9
0.
R3
10
25
53
68.3
73.1
Dimensions
Communication cables
LAN cable
yyOP-87458 (5m)
yyOP-87459 (10m)
yyOP-87950 (1m)
yyOP-87952 (5m)
47.3
44.7
13.6
yyOP-87953 (10m)
1000 (OP-87950)
3000 (OP-87951)
5000 (OP-87952)
10000 (OP-87953)
15.5
17.1
φ14.8
1000
2000
5000
10000
yyOP-87951 (3m)
44.2
15.5
yyOP-87457 (2m)
φ6.4
yyOP-87907 (1m)
φ6.2
Ethernet cable
44.2
13.6
L type Ethernet cable
yyOP-88042 (1m)
yyOP-88043 (2m)
yyOP-88044 (5m)
yyOP-88045 (10m)
13.4
φ6.4
8°
44.7
1000
2000
5000
10000
32.5
35
33.1
17.1
φ15
10
Specifications
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
10-17
Dimensions
Mutual interference area
16.4
C
B
A
14.9
10
D
G
E
H
F
I
(mm)
IX-055
IX-080
IX-150
IX-360
IX-360W
A
45
62
100
280
280
B
55
80
150
360
360
C
65
98
200
440
440
D
22
29
46
55
119
E
26
37
66
70
151
F
30
45
86
85
184
G
30
39
60
73
158
H
35
49
87
93
202
I
40
59
114
113
245
Specifications
10-18
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Appendices
Status Table......................................................................... A-2
Matching Rate for the Position Adjustment tool............ A-14
Troubleshooting................................................................ A-15
Error Messages................................................................. A-17
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with
the sensor.......................................................................... A-21
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)........ A-30
List of Factory Settings (Default Values)......................... A-32
Index................................................................................... A-40
Copyright notice................................................................ A-47
A
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-1
Status Table
Status Table
Status table (scan mode)
Sensor amplifier indicator light
Status
PWR/ERR
Waiting for a
Trigger
Switching
programs
TRIG/TIM
External
trigger
Switch
programs
Reset
(status)
OFF



*6
*6


*1
Processing
judgment
Running
OUT
Input
*4
On (green)
*7
Processing
ZERO/Offset
*5
OFF
Processing reset
Laser shutdown
Setting
Other than I/O
monitor function
I/O monitoring
*1
Blinking
(green)
OFF
*4
*8
×
×
OFF
*11
←
←
12
Trigger error
ZERO/Offset
error
Error
*
Blinking (red)
Same as normal
13

*

×
×
Startup memory
readout error
On (red)
OFF
OFF
×
System error
A
/× indicates enable/disable of the input.
ON/OFF indicates the status below. The behavior differs according to the output function ([N.O./N.C]) setting.
‌
Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
yyFor N.O. ON:
OFF: Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
yyFor N.C. ‌ON: Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
OFF: Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
*10
A-2
Displays the total status result of the previous judgment. OK: On (green), NG: Off (red)
If there is no status result, a ZERO/Offset error occurs. If there is a status result, a ZERO/Offset error does not
occur.
Outputs the status result of the previous judgment.
Links with a trigger command (internal/external) and the light turns on (one-shot).
Disregards the input. A trigger error occurs.
Processing runs after current running processes complete. If the same request is sent multiple times, the last
request is run.
Example: ‌If a request is received to switch to PRG2 and then PRG3 while switching to PRG1, the request to switch
to PRG2 is ignored and the sensor head switches to PRG3.
The indicator turns off before the process is completed. Output will turn off. The indicator shows and outputs the
previous status result until the light or output turns off. If there is no status result, analog output is output according
to the [Output During Alarm/Error] setting.
Enabled only when continuous triggers are turned off.
You cannot automatically adjust brightness, register a master or an image different to the reference setting if the
laser beam is not being emitted. Additionally, if the laser receives a signal to stop emitting during execution, the
laser will stop once the process is complete.
Links with a trigger command and outputs during automatic brightness adjustment and capturing an image for
master registration.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Status Table
Input
Reset
(error)
ZERO/
Offset

*
2
Output
Laser
Shutdown
BUSY

OFF
Judgment
Run
Error
Alert
Analog
*3
*3
*7
*7
*7
OFF
*3
*3
*3
*3
*6
*6
*2, 6
*6
ON
ON
*6
OFF
*2, 6
2

*
×
×
*9
*10
OFF
←
←
←
←
←
OFF
OFF
OFF
←
Set value
Same as normal
ON
Output
settings
during an
alarm or
error
*15
*15
*2
*
13
*14

*15
×
×
×
OFF
OFF
*11
*12
*13
*14
*15
Disable
OFF
Same as
normal
Disable
OFF
ON
Output
settings
during an
alarm or
error
While the I/O monitor function is in use, only the operation of the I/O lines is confirmed. The assigned inputs and
outputs will not operate.
If a trigger is activated, the trigger error is canceled.
Errors that are subject to error reset (trigger errors and ZERO/Offset errors) are canceled.
If the ZERO/Offset error cause is the same, the ZERO/Offset error continues. If ZERO/Offset is successful, the
error is canceled.
The NPN open collector output turns off regardless of the output function ([N.O./N.C.]) and the I/O function [NPN/
PNP]) settings.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-3
A
Status Table
Status table (line mode)
Sensor amplifier indicator light
Status
PWR/ERR
Judgment
processing
Switching
programs
Running
Processing
ZERO/Offset
Lighting
(green)
Timing
Switch
programs
Reset
(status)
*3
*4
*4



*2
*9
×
×
OFF
*12
←
←
OUT
TRIG/TIM
*1
*2
*6
Input
OFF
Processing reset
Laser shutdown
Setting
Other than I/O
monitor function
I/O monitoring
ZERO/Offset
error
Error
*8
Blinking
(green)
Blink (red)
OFF
Same as normal
13

*
×
×

Startup memory
readout error
On (red)
OFF
OFF
×
System error
A
/× indicates enable/disable of the input.
ON/OFF indicates the status below. The behavior differs according to the output function ([N.O./N.C]) setting.
‌
Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
yyFor N.O. ON:
OFF: Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
yyFor N.C. ‌ON: Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
OFF: Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
A-4
Displays the total status result of the previous judgment. OK: On (green), NG: Off (red)
The indicator turns on when the timing input is on.
Timing input can be accepted for the judgment state after processing is complete.
Processing runs after the currently running processes complete. If the same request is sent multiple times, the last
request is run.
Example: ‌If a request is received to switch to PRG2 and then PRG3 while switching to PRG1, the request to switch
to PRG2 is ignored and the sensor head switches to PRG3.
Outputs the status result of the previous judgment.
The indicator turns off before the process is completed. Output will turn off. The indicator shows and outputs the
previous status result until the light or output turns off.
If there is no status result, analog output is output according to the [Output During Alarm/Error] setting.
If there is no status result, a ZERO/Offset error occurs. If there is a status result, a ZERO/Offset error does not
occur.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Status Table
Input
Reset
(error)
ZERO/
Offset
Output
Laser
Shutdown
*4
*4
*4, 7
BUSY
Judgment
OFF
*5
ON
*6
OFF
*8
*4
*4
Run
ON
Error
OFF
Alert
Analog
*5
*5
*6
*6
*5
*5
*4, 7
7

*
×
×
*10
*11
OFF
←
←
←
←
←
*
13
*14

*15
×
×
*9
*10
*11
*12
*13
*14
*15
OFF
OFF
Disable
←
Set value
Same as normal
ON
Output
settings
during an
alarm
or error
*15
*15
×
OFF
OFF
*8
OFF
OFF
Same as
normal
Disable
OFF
ON
Output
settings
during an
alarm
or error
When the sample hold (level) function is in use: ‌If the timing input is turned off, the indicator turns off, and if the
timing input is turned on, the indicator displays and outputs the total
status result of the previous judgment process.
When the sample hold (edge) function is in use: ‌Displays and outputs the total status result of the previous
judgment process. If the hold result is finalized while laser beam
emission is stopped, the light turns off.
When the peak/bottom/P-P hold functions are in use: ‌Displays and outputs the total status result of the previous
judgment process. If the hold result is finalized while laser
beam emission is stopped, the light turns off.
Input can be performed on the Test screen.
You cannot automatically adjust brightness, register a master or a reference surface with custom settings for head
tilt adjustment if the laser beam is not being emitted. Additionally, if the laser receives a signal to stop emitting
during execution, the laser will stop once the process is complete.
Outputs during automatic brightness adjustment and capturing an image for master registration.
While the I/O monitor function is in use, only the operation of the I/O lines is confirmed. The assigned inputs and
outputs will not operate.
A ZERO/Offset error is canceled.
If the ZERO/Offset error cause is the same, the ZERO/Offset error continues. If ZERO/Offset is successful, the
error is canceled.
The NPN open collector output turns off regardless of the output function ([N.O./N.C.]) and the I/O function ([NPN/
PNP]) settings.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-5
A
Status Table
Displaying and outputting the status result (when position adjustment is not used)
Status of each tool
Indication
Status
Output
Judgment
Measurement
Value *2
Matching
Rate*3
OK
NG
HIGH
LOW
--
---.--*5
----
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Judge OK
OK
±999.99
0 to 100
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Judge NG
NG
±999.99
0 to 100
OFF
ON
Judge HIGH
NG
±999.99
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Judge LOW
NG
±999.99
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
--
---.--
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Judgment standby
state
(No judgment)*4
Judgment not
possible*11
*1
*2
*3
*4
A
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
*10
*11
A-6
----
*10
Total status conditions: Scan mode can select from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 8]. Line
mode is fixed to [All OK].
“Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-110)
In the case that the setting for the measurement value display unit is set to [0.01 mm].
“Measurement Value Display Unit” (Page 7-40)
If the display range is exceeded, "±FFF.FF" is displayed.
You can select [0 to 200]/[0 to 999] if the setting scale has been changed with the monochrome area tool or height
area tool.
The case of the width tool (scan mode) is shown below.
yyThe initial setting is [0 to 200].
yyYou can select [0 to 200]/[0 to 999] using the setting scale.
yyIf [Upper Limit] is disabled, it will be [0 to 100].
The state after the power is turned on, the program number is changed, status output is reset, and the mode is
changed from setup mode to run mode, and the main unit is not waiting for the status result.
The main unit is in a state of status standby in line mode in the following cases:
yyWhen waiting for measurement by the average/median filter data or when the result is held while waiting for
measurement by the average/median filter data (position adjustment and tilt adjustment are judged in the case of
the average filter)
yyWhen the hold function is not used and laser shutdown is input
yyThe result is held when the laser is shutdown and the sample hold function is in use
yyThe next hold result when the laser is stopped during the sampling period while the peak/bottom/P-P hold function
is in use
yyWhen reset is input while in the hold state, the mode is changed from setup mode to run mode, and programs are
switched when sample hold (level) function is in use
yyUntil the first hold result is finalized when sample hold (edge), peak/bottom/P-P hold is in use Or when reset is
input while in the hold state, the mode is changed from setup mode to run mode, and programs are switched
After running zero offset or clearing zero offset, "--" is displayed for the status result and output is turned off. The
value after ZERO/Offset is applied or cleared is output for the measurement value and the displayed value is output
for analog output.
Output according to the [Output During Alarm/Error] setting.
[Total status: OK] turns on when the total status results are OK.
[Total status: NG] turns on when the total status results are NG.
Output in accordance with the measurement value.
One of the two will turn on depending on the measurement result and set upper and lower values.
Judgment is not possible if a tool cannot perform judgment because the target is outside of the measurement range
or other reasons.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Status Table
Total status: OK*1
Total status: NG
Alert
Analog
Display
Output
Output
Output
Output
--
OFF
OFF
OFF
*5, 6
OFF
*7
*8
OFF
OFF
*9
OFF
NG
OFF
ON
ON
*6
A
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-7
Status Table
Displaying and outputting the status result (when position adjustment is used)
When the tool window does not protrude after position adjustment is successful
Judgment of each tool
Position
adjustment
result
Tool
window
protrusion
Tilt
Adjustment
result
Success
Display/output
Position
adjustment
Tilt adjustment
(scan mode)*1/
Tilt adjustment
(line mode)
Status display
OK
OK
Status output: OK
ON
ON
Status output: NG
OFF
OFF
Measurement value/
matching rate display
0 to 100
0 to 100
Status display
OK
NG
Status output: OK
ON
OFF
Status output: NG
OFF
ON
0 to 100
0 to 100
Status output: HIGH
Status output: LOW
Success
No*
3
Fail
Status output: HIGH
Status output: LOW
Measurement value/
matching rate display
A
*1
Only when tilt adjustment (scan mode) is performed using the [Real time adjustment] function in scan mode.
*2Total Status Conditions: Scan mode can select from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK], and [Logic 1] to [Logic 8]. Line
mode is fixed to [All OK].
“Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-110)
*3
The tool window is not protruding from the measurement range after position adjustment is successful.
“Setting the position adjustment tool” (Page 4-55)
“Setting the 1-Axis Adjustment Tool” (Page 4-92)
“Setting the 2-Axis Adjustment Tool” (Page 4-94)
*4
[Total status: OK] turns on when the total status results are OK. The status display is displayed as OK or NG based
on the total status result.
*5
[Total status: NG] turns on when the total status results are NG.
*6
One of the two will turn on depending on the measurement result and set upper and lower values.
*7
In the case that the setting for the measurement value display unit is set to [0.01 mm].
“Measurement Value Display Unit” (Page 7-40)
If the display range is exceeded, "±FFF.FF" is displayed.
*8
You can select [0 to 200]/[0 to 999] if the setting scale has been changed.
The default differs depending on the tool.
“List of Factory Settings (Default Values)” (Page A-32)
When using the Scaling function with the width tool (scan mode), the matching rate follows the scaling settings.
A-8
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Status Table
Judgment of each tool
Height / Step /
Average Height / MAX/
MIN / Pin Height /
Edge Position / Width/
Diameter
Output
Monochrome Area /
Width (Scan mode)
Total
status
*2
Height
Area
OK
NG
OK
NG
OK
NG
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
*4
Total
status
NG
*5
Alert
OFF
Output
based on
measurement
value
ON
Output
settings
during an
alarm
or error
*6
OFF
±999.99*7
0 to 100*8
0 to 100*8
--
OK
NG
--
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
---.--
0 to 100*8
Analog
output
NG
OFF
ON
---.--
A
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-9
Status Table
When the tool window does protrude after position adjustment is successful
Judgment of each tool
Position
adjustment
result
Tool
window
protrusion
Tilt
Adjustment
result
Success
Display/output
Position
adjustment
Tilt adjustment
(scan mode)*1/
Tilt adjustment
(line mode)
Status display
OK
OK
Status output: OK
ON
ON
Status output: NG
OFF
OFF
Measurement value/
matching rate display
0 to 100
0 to 100
Status display
OK
NG
Status output: OK
ON
OFF
Status output: NG
OFF
ON
0 to 100
0 to 100
Status output: HIGH
Status output: LOW
Success
Yes*
3
Fail
Status output: HIGH
Status output: LOW
Measurement value/
matching rate display
*1
*2
*3
A
*4
A-10
Only when tilt adjustment (scan mode) is performed using the [Real time adjustment] function in scan mode.
Total status conditions: Scan mode can select from [All Tools OK] or [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 8]. Line
mode is fixed to [All OK].
“Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-110)
The tool window is protruding from the measurement range after position adjustment is successful.
“Setting the position adjustment tool” (Page 4-55)
“Setting the 1-Axis Adjustment Tool” (Page 4-92)
“Setting the 2-Axis Adjustment Tool” (Page 4-94)
In scan mode, a warning message appears stating that the tool window is protruding.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Status Table
Judgment of each tool
Output
Height / Step /
Average Height /
MAX/MIN /
Pin Height /
Edge Position /
Width / Diameter
Monochrome
Area / Width
(Scan mode)
Height
Area
Total status*
--
--
--
NG
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
*4
*4
*4
--
--
--
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
----
----
OFF
2
Analog
output
Total status
NG
Alert
ON
ON
Output settings
during an alarm
or error
ON
ON
Output settings
during an alarm
or error
OFF
OFF
OFF
NG
OFF
OFF
---.--
A
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-11
Status Table
When position adjustment failed
Judgment of each tool
Position
adjustment
result
Fail*
3
Tool
window
protrusion
Tilt
Adjustment
result
Display/output
Position
adjustment
Tilt adjustment
(scan mode)*1/
Tilt adjustment
(line mode)
Status display
NG
--
Status output: OK
OFF
OFF
Status output: NG
ON
ON
0 to 100
----
Status output: HIGH
Status output: LOW
Measurement value/
matching rate display
*1
*2
*3
Only when tilt adjustment (scan mode) is performed using the [Real time adjustment] function in scan mode.
Total Status Conditions: Scan mode can select from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK], and [Logic 1] to [Logic 8]. Line
mode is fixed to [All OK].
“Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-110)
Judges based on each tool's settings if [Measure when PosAdj fails] is set to [ON].
A
A-12
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Status Table
Judgment of each tool
Output
Height / Step /
Average Height /
MAX/MIN /
Pin Height /
Edge Position /
Width / Diameter
Monochrome
Area / Width
(Scan mode)
Height
Area
Total status*
--
--
--
NG
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
----
----
OFF
2
Total status
NG
Alert
ON
ON
OFF
Analog
output
Output settings
during an alarm
or error
OFF
---.--
A
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-13
Matching Rate for the Position Adjustment tool
Matching Rate for the Position Adjustment
tool
Cut-off process of the matching rate
The cut-off process means the process where the outline
detection process is ended when no outline exceeding a
certain matching rate (cut-off value) below the threshold
value is found.
A matching rate which has been cut off becomes 0.
Because the cut-off value is linked to the threshold, the cutoff value is also changed when the threshold is changed.
(Cut-off value)
Current matching rate
Matching
rate
Cut-off processing range
(Range where the matching rate
becomes 0)
Threshold
A
A-14
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Symptom
The PWR/ERR indicator light of the
sensor or the PWR indicator light
of the control panel is lighting or
blinking in red.
The power of the sensor does not
turn on.
The image does not display on the
IX-Navigator. Alternatively, the image
is abnormal.
Check point
An error occurred. Check the errors
related to the lighting or blinking in
red.
Remedy
Refer to "Error Message".
A-17
Is the power cable correctly
connected?
Connect the power cable correctly.
Is the voltage or capacity of the
power source meet the specification?
Use a power source of the correct
rating.
10-2
Is the installed distance of the target
correct?
Place a target at the correct installed
distance. The installed distance
depends on the sensor type.
2-2
Is the sensor view correct?
Place the sensor in such a way that
the sensor view matches the target
size.
2-2
Is the brightness adjustment correct?
Is the light turned off?
Is the target or the sensor vibrating?
Does ambient light affect the image?
Adjust the brightness of the sensor.
4-8
5-8
Turn on the light.
4-9
5-8
Prevent the sensor or target from
vibrating, if possible.
-
Use the Measurement Ambient Light
Cut function.
5-24
Place a shield to prevent the effects
of ambient light.
-
yyStart the run mode
yyCycle power to the sensor.
6-2
Is the trigger correctly input?
If a target is to be imaged using an
external trigger, input the external
trigger. When the NPN is selected
in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a
non-voltage input circuit. When PNP
is selected in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a voltage input circuit.
Check the cables.
2-8
Are you using the hold function in
line mode?
Change the timing input from [OFF]
to [ON] and check that the next
sampling period updates.
6-4
All or part of the settings necessary
Complete the settings in Settings
for running have not been completed. Navigator.
IX-Navigator cannot be operated.
2-8
Is the system in the setting mode?
The image or the status result is not
updated.
Image update is slow.
(during operation/setting)
Reference
page
4-1
5-1
Is the network connected to the inplant LAN?
The network may be affected by the
traffic in the in-plant LAN. Configure
a local network for only the IX-H and
confirm the network connection.
-
Is the input screen for the unlock
password displayed?
The password lock of the sensor is
enabled. Input the unlock password.
7-39
The password is lost and cannot
unlock.
Contact your nearest KEYENCE
office.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
-
A-15
A
Matching Rate for the Position Adjustment tool
Symptom
The status result is not output.
Check point
The program number cannot be
changed with the input line.
A
IX-Navigator cannot be connected to
the sensor.
An alarm activated because "The
expansion unit is not operating."
with a calculation tool that used an
expansion unit tool.
A-16
Reference
page
Is the output line correctly
connected?
Correctly connect to the external
devices.
2-8
Is the output setting correctly set?
Set the output line and output
settings correctly in the Settings
Navigator.
4-107
5-79
Is the system in the setting mode?
Start the run mode
6-2
Is the threshold correctly set?
Set the threshold correctly.
6-13
Is the tool correctly set?
yySet the judgment tool correctly.
yySet the position adjustment tool
correctly.
4-20
5-27
Is the Polarity correctly set?
Set the NPN or PNP according to
the circuits of the external devices.
7-27
Are the N.O. and N.C. correctly set?
Set the N.O. (normally open) or N.C.
(normally closed) according to the
circuits of the external devices.
7-24
Is the trigger condition set to
[External]?
An external trigger cannot be input.
Remedy
Select [External] in Trigger Options.
4-8
Is the input line correctly connected?
Correctly connect to the external
devices.
2-8
Has the input setting been made
correctly?
Correctly set the input line and input
settings in [Input].
7-23
Is the Polarity correctly set?
When the NPN is selected in the
Polarity, the circuit becomes a nonvoltage input circuit. When PNP is
selected in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a voltage input circuit.
Check the cables.
7-27
Has the switching method for the
programs been correctly set?
Set the switching method for the
programs to [External IN].
7-24
Is the input line correctly connected?
Correctly connect to the external
devices.
2-8
Has the input setting been made
correctly?
Correctly set the input line and input
settings in [Input].
7-23
Is the Polarity correctly set?
When the NPN is selected in the
Polarity, the circuit becomes a nonvoltage input circuit. When PNP is
selected in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a voltage input circuit.
Check the cables.
7-27
Check the cables and settings.
Refer to “Remedy when the Monitor
cannot be Connected with the
Sensor” (Page A-16).
A-21
Is the expansion unit running?
Did the expansion unit run before the
main unit?
Run the expansion unit before
running the main unit.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
-
Error Messages
Error Messages
Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light
The causes of and remedies for an error can be checked by observing the indicator light.
PWR/ERR
indicator
status
ON
Green
Blink
ON
Red
Blink
OFF
Cause
Remedy
In operation.
--
yySetting in progress. Operation stopped. Blinks
once a second.
yyThe versions of the sensor head and sensor
amplifier do not match. Blinks every two seconds.
--
A system error occurred.
yyCycle the power of the device.
yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
A startup memory read error occurred.
yyA data abnormality occurred due to noise or
because the power switched OFF while writing
was in progress.
yyInitialize the settings.
yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
A trigger error occurred. A judgment process is not
performed.
yyIf the target is imaged using an external trigger,
the external trigger has been input while the
sensor was in the BUSY status.
yyIf the target is imaged using an internal trigger,
the trigger interval has become shorter than the
processing time of the program.
yyA ZERO/Offset error occurred.
yyA trigger error can be fixed using one of the following
procedures:
yyNext normal trigger input
yyClearing the error input.
yySwitching the program number
yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor
yyDo not input the external trigger during a BUSY status.
yySet the trigger interval of the internal trigger to a value
that is longer than the processing time.
yyAn error will not occur if the trigger is set to [Disable]
described in output assignment for the Settings
Navigator.
yyRun ZERO/Offset with the measurement value
displayed.
An FTP error has occurred. The following error has
occurred.
yyConnection with the FTP server failed.
yyTransfer to the transfer destination folder failed.
yyThe transfer speed cannot keep pace with the
sensor’s processing speed.
yyA synchronization error has occurred.
The FTP error can be fixed using one of the following
procedures.
yyClick the [OK] button on the error screen.
yyRest (Error Only) input
yyRest (Status & Error) input
yyResolve the causes of transfer failure.
yyResolve the causes of synchronization error.
yyEnable the [Time + Date Info] function (resolve the
synchronization error).
Power is not supplied to this device.
yyConnect the power cable correctly.
yyUse a power source of the correct rating.
Errors in a state that the PWR/ERR indicator light lights in red or blinks in red turn the error output ON.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-17
A
Error Messages
Confirming IX‑Navigator error messages
Message
Cause
Remedy
Output/
indicator
A system error occurred to the
sensor.
yyThe cause could be an internal
sensor error.
yyTurn on the power of the sensor
again.
yyIf the same error occurs, contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.
A startup memory read error
occurred to the sensor.
yyA data error occurred.
yyThe cause could be the impact
from noise or because the power
was switched off while writing was
in progress.
yyFollow the on-screen instructions
to initialize the settings.
yyTurn on the power of the sensor
again.
yyDo not turn off the power while
saving the settings.
yyIf the same error occurs, contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.
*1
A memory read error occurred when
the sensor started.
yyA data error occurred to program
number xx.
yyIt is conceivable that the power
was switched OFF during writing,
or noise was picked up.
yyFollow the on-screen instructions
to initialize the settings.
yyTurn on the power of the sensor
again.
yyDo not turn off the power while
saving the settings.
yyIf the same error occurs, contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.
*1
A trigger error occurred. Judgment
processing has not run.
yyIf the target is imaged using an
external trigger, the external trigger
has been input while the sensor
was in the BUSY status.
yyIf the target is imaged using an
internal trigger, the trigger interval
has become shorter than the
processing time of the program.
yyA trigger error can be fixed using
one of the following procedures:
yyNext normal trigger input
yyClearing the error input.
yySwitching the program number
yyProceeding to the settings
screen of the sensor
yyDo not input an external trigger
during a BUSY status.
yySet the trigger interval of the
internal trigger to a value that is
longer than the processing time.
yyAn error will not occur if the trigger
is set to [Disable] described in
output assignment for the Settings
Navigator.
“4. Output Assignment” (Page
4-107)
*2
Application error
happens.
An application failure occurred.
yyReinstall the IX-Navigator (IX-H1).
yyReplace the PC.
yyIf the same error occurs, contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.
Registry access
fails.
A failure of the registry information
occurred.
yyRestart the PC.
yyReinstall the IX-Navigator (IX-H1).
A system error has occurred on the
sensor.
Restart the sensor.
If the sensor does not
recover, contact your local
KEYENCE office.
Sensor internal memory
reading at startup failed.
Restart or initialize the
sensor.
Close this message to display
the initialize button.
Initialization is necessary because
the sensor program xx is corrupt.
The program xx will be initialized
by the [Initialize] button.
Trigger Error
A
A-18
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
*1
Error Messages
Message
Cause
Remedy
Network adapter not found
yyEthernet cable is not connected to
the PC.
yyThe network adapter is not
correctly connected to the PC.
Refer to:
“Remedy when the PC cannot be
connected with the sensor” (Page
A-21)
Sensor not found
Searching the sensor failed.
Data transfer to sensor fails.
Connection is not possible because
data transmission to the sensor
failed.
Communication timeout to sensor
happens.
Connection is not possible because
there is no response from the
sensor.
Network connection to sensor can
not be performed.
Connection is not possible because
the IX-Navigator is not correctly
connected with the sensor.
Network connection to sensor can
not be performed.
Connection is not possible because
the connection is not correctly nor
directly connected with the sensor.
The specified sensor
is connected to another PC or
control panel.
Cannot connect because the
specified sensor is connected to
another PC or control panel.
The sensor can only connect to one
control panel or PC at a time.
Disconnect from the other control
panel or PC and then connect to the
sensor.
Writing in file fails.
Saving the file to the specified saving
destination has failed.
yySpecify the saving destination
correctly.
yyConfirm the access privileges of
the saving destination.
Failed to access the
file or folder.
Accessing to the specified file or
folder failed.
yyConfirm the access privileges of
the saving destination.
yyChange the attribute of the readonly folder.
Disk space is insufficient.
Delete a file to make an enough
Saving is not possible because the
amount of free space in the specified space for the saving destination.
saving destination is insufficient.
There is not enough space to
perform individual program backup.
Saving is not possible because of
the insufficient free space in USB
memory.
Increase the amount of available
storage space by deleting files on or
formating the USB memory.
This file configuration data
is for xxxx.
This file is not
readable.
The setting files for a different model
of the sensors cannot be read.
Read the setting files of a sensor of
the same model.
The sensor head is not connected.
yyConnect the sensor head
yyIf the same error occurs, contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.
Output/
indicator
A
Sensor head and amplifer are not
compatible with each other. Connect
correct combination of sensor head
and amplifier.
No sensor head is connected to the
sensor amplifier.
Connect the sensor head to the
sensor
amplifier and restart the sensor
head.
If the sensor head does not recover,
contact your local KEYENCE office.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-19
Error Messages
Message
Cause
Remedy
The expansion unit amplifier could
not be recognized.
yyTurn off the power, correctly
connect the main and expansion
units, and then restart the amplifier.
yyIf the same error occurs, contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.
Load failed.
This configuration file is for
the main unit sensor amplifier.
Select the configuration file for the
expansion unit sensor amplifier.
The file to be loaded is the wrong
file.
Select a configuration file for the
expansion unit sensor amplifier.
Load failed.
This configuration file is for
the expansion unit sensor amplifier.
Select the configuration file for the
main unit sensor amplifier.
The file to be imported is not correct.
Select a configuration file for the
main unit sensor amplifier.
Cannot connect to number **.
Check the following:
•The correct sensor IP address is
specified.
•The sensor power.
•Network cables.
•Network settings for the control
panel.
Failed to connect to the sensor.
Check the following:
yyThe correct sensor IP address is
specified.
yyThe sensor power.
yyNetwork cables.
yyNetwork settings for the control
panel.
An external source is frequently
making changes to the sensor.
Operations cannot be performed on
the control panel. Once changes
have completed, this message will
automatically closed and you can
perform operations from the monitor.
Sensor settings were changed (for
example, programs were switched
from external input) three times in a
row while sensor settings were being
acquired.
Wait until sensor setting changes
have completed.
Could not confirm that the expansion
unit
amplifier has started.
Confirm that the expansion unit
amplifier
is connected and restart the sensor.
If the expansion unit amplifier does
not
recover, contact your local
KEYENCE office.
A
*1
*2
A-20
Output/
indicator
Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Lighting (red), POWER indicator light of
the monitor: Lighting (red)
Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Blinking (red), POWER indicator light of
the monitor: Blinking (red)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected
with the sensor
Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is unavailable
Status
Remedy
yyClick the [OK] button and close the message.
yyMount the network adapter correctly to the PC.
yySet any IP address for the PC. Automatic IP address acquisition
cannot be applied.
“Changing the PC settings (IP address setting)” (Page 2-20)
yySupply the power to the sensor.
Connection is not possible by clicking the [Direct
Connection (1 unit)] button in the Activation Menu.
yyConnect the sensor and the PC correctly and directly with an
Ethernet cable.
“Connecting directly (1 unit)” (Page 2-15)
Click the [Connect] button after correct connection.
yyRestart the PC and turn on the sensor power again.
If the problem is not solved using one of the above remedies, reset
(initialize) the sensor network settings.
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page A-30)
Connection became impossible after connection was
established.
yyClick the [OK] button and close the message.
yyConnect the sensor to the PC correctly and directly with an
Ethernet cable. Do not connect over a network.
“Connecting directly (1 unit)” (Page 2-15)
Click the [Connect] button after correct connection.
The network is connected to other network devices such
as multiple sensors or computers.
yyIf attempting to connect over a network, use Network Connection
to connect to the sensor.
“Connecting via a network (Direct Connection (2 units or
more)/Network Connection)” (Page 2-16)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-21
A
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor
Remedy when direct connection (2 units or more) is unavailable
Status
Remedy
yyClick the [OK] button and close the message.
yyMount the network adapter correctly to the PC.
“Connecting via a network (Direct Connection (2 units or
more)/Network Connection)” (Page 2-16)
Connection is not possible by clicking the [Direct
Connection (2 units or more)] button in the Activation
Menu.
yySet any IP address for the PC. Automatic IP address acquisition
cannot be applied.
“Changing the PC settings (IP address setting)” (Page 2-20)
yySupply the power to the sensor.
yyConnect the sensor and the PC correctly and directly with an
Ethernet cable.
“Connecting via a network (Direct Connection (2 units or
more)/Network Connection)” (Page 2-16)
Click the [Connect] button after correct connection.
yyRestart the PC and turn on the sensor power again.
If the problem is not solved using one of the above remedies, reset
(initialize) the sensor network settings.
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page A-30)
Connection became impossible after connection was
established once.
When the connection cannot be established by searching the
sensor
yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment.
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment.
“Connecting via a network (Direct Connection (2 units or
more)/Network Connection)” (Page 2-16)
The sensor was not found using the [Search Sensor]
button on the Direct connection (2 units or more) screen.
yyConfirm that the IP address of the PC does not coincide with that
of the sensor or another device. Also, reset (initialize) the network
settings for the sensor.
“Changing the PC settings (IP address setting)” (Page 2-20)
yyChange to direct connection and confirm that the IP address
of the sensor does not coincide with that of the PC or another
device. Also, reset (initialize) the network settings for the sensor.
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator (Direct
Connection (1 unit))” (Page 3-10)
“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor” (Page A-27)
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page
A-30)
A
yyThe following conditions are required for a successful sensor
search.
yyThe subnet masks of the sensor and PC are matched.
yyThe sensor network settings are not set or the IP address of
the sensor is not duplicated on the network.
A-22
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor
Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable
Status
Remedy
yyClick the [OK] button and close the message.
Connection is not possible by clicking the [Network
Connection] button in the Activation Menu.
yyMount the network adapter correctly to the PC.
“Connecting via a network (Direct Connection (2 units or
more)/Network Connection)” (Page 2-16)
yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment.
yyCorrectly connect the sensor with the network equipment.
“Connecting via a network (Direct Connection (2 units or
more)/Network Connection)” (Page 2-16)
yyClick the [Search Sensor] button and search a sensor.
“Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page 3-12)
If the control panel cannot connect correctly to the sensor, refer
to the following.
“When the connection cannot be established by searching for
the sensor” (Page A-24)
Connection is not possible by clicking the [Connect]
button in the Network connection screen.
yyInput the IP address of the sensor to be connected and click the
[Connect] button to connect.
“Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address” (Page
3-13)
If the control panel cannot connect correctly to the sensor, refer
to the following.
“When the connection cannot be established by specifying
the sensor” (Page A-25)
Connection became impossible after connection was
established once.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A
A-23
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor
Status
Remedy
When the connection cannot be established by searching for
the sensor
yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment.
yyCorrectly connect the sensor with the network equipment.
“Connecting via a network (Direct Connection (2 units or
more)/Network Connection)” (Page 2-16)
The sensor was not found using the [Search Sensor]
button on the Network connection screen.
yyConfirm that the IP address of the PC does not coincide with that
of the sensor or another device. Also, reset (initialize) the network
settings for the sensor.
“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor” (Page A-27)
yyChange to direct connection (“1 unit” or “2 units or more”) and
confirm that the IP address of the sensor does not coincide
with that of the PC or another device. Also, reset (initialize) the
network settings for the sensor.
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator (Direct
Connection (1 unit))” (Page 3-10)
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator (Direct
Connection (2 units or more))” (Page 3-11)
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator (Network
Connection)” (Page 3-12)
“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor” (Page A-27)
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page A-30)
“Assignment for IP address 192.168.10.10/11” (Page A-31)
yyThe following conditions are required for a successful sensor
search.
yyThe subnet masks of the sensor and PC are matched.
yyThe sensor network settings are not set or the IP address of
the sensor is not duplicated on the network.
A
A-24
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor
Status
Remedy
When the connection cannot be established by specifying the
sensor
yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment.
yyCorrectly connect the sensor with the network equipment.
“Connecting via a network (Direct Connection (2 units or
more)/Network Connection)” (Page 2-16)
yySpecify the correct IP address of the sensor.
yyIf the sensor IP address has not been set, establish a connection
using the [Search Sensor] button.
“Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page 3-12)
Connection is not possible by inputting the IP address into
the Network connection screen and clicking the [Connect]
button.
yyConfirm that the IP address of the PC does not coincide with that
of the sensor or another device. Also, reset (initialize) the network
settings for the sensor.
“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC” (Page A-27)
yyChange to direct connection (“1 unit” or “2 units or more”) and
confirm that the IP address of the sensor does not coincide
with that of the PC or another device. Also, reset (initialize) the
network settings for the sensor.
Also, reset (initialize) the network settings for the sensor.
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator (Network
Connection)” (Page 3-12)
“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor” (Page A-27)
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page A-30)
“Assignment for IP address 192.168.10.10/11” (Page A-31)
A
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-25
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor
Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light
Displays the link status with the network.
Status of the
LINK/ACT
indicator light
Status
Remedy
ON
Correct link with the PC or the Ethernet
switch.
Blink
Correct link with the PC or the Ethernet
switch.
Data is being sent and received.
Green
Incorrect linking with the PC or the
Ethernet switch.
Power is not supplied to this unit or the
connection target.
The cable is not connected correctly.
OFF
Link is normal.
When connection with the IX-Navigator is not possible, check
the STATUS indicator light.
Supply power to the sensor.
Supply power to the PC or the Ethernet switch of the connection
target.
Connect the cable correctly.
STATUS indicator light
Indicates the connection status within the IX-Navigator.
Confirm that the LINK/ACT indicator light is green (lighting) or green (blinking) and then check the STATUS indicator light.
STATUS
Status of the
indicator light
ON
A
Green
Blink
OFF
Status
Remedy
A connection with the IX-Navigator has
been successfully established.
The connection with the IX-Navigator
has been established by acquiring the IP
address.
Incorrect connection with the control panel
or the IX-Navigator.
The IP address of the sensor has
been acquired, but connection with the
IX‑Navigator has not been established.
A connection with the PC has not been
successfully established.
The IP address of the sensor has not been
acquired.
--
For direct connection (1 unit)
“Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is unavailable” (Page
A-21)
For direct connection (2 units or more)
“Remedy when direct connection (2 units or more) is
unavailable” (Page A-22)
For network connection
“Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable”
(Page A-23)
For direct connection (1 unit)
“Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is unavailable” (Page
A-21)
For direct connection (2 units or more)
“Remedy when direct connection (2 units or more) is
unavailable” (Page A-22)
For network connection
“Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable”
(Page A-23)
If the light is ON (red), the IP address of the sensor conflicts with other devices on the network.
yyThe communication timeout time is 1 minute.
yyDuring the communication timeout interval, if an error has occurred the screen may fail to be updated or may not
accept an operation.
yyDuring the communication timeout interval, only the PC to which the sensor was originally connected can be
connected.
A-26
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor
Other Methods of Confirming a Network
Connection
Confirming the existence of the sensor from
the PC
Whether or not the sensor is correctly connected can be
confirmed by sending a ping command from the PC to the
sensor to be connected.
1 Select [All Programs] → [Accessories] →
[Command Prompt] from the [Start] menu of
Windows.
The Command Prompt screen opens.
2
Input "ping∆(IP address of the sensor)" (∆
indicates a "space") and press the [Enter] key.
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the
sensor
Directly connect (1 unit) the sensor and the PC, and confirm
the IP address of the sensor.
After returning to the network connection, set the confirmed IP
address of the sensor and confirm whether connection with the
sensor is possible or not.
1 Directly connect (1 unit) the sensor and the PC of
the confirmation/setting target.
“Connecting directly (1 unit)” (Page 2-15)
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator
(Direct Connection (1 unit))” (Page 3-10)
2 Click the [Program] button.
3 Confirm the result of the ping command.
If correctly connected with a target sensor
zz
The response time of the sensor (input IP address) will
be displayed, and [0% loss] will be displayed.
If not connected with a target sensor
zz
A message indicating the failure of the ping command
will be displayed, and [100% loss] will be displayed.
4 After the confirmation, close the Command
A confirmation screen opens.
3 Click the [OK] button.
The IX-Navigator switches to the main screen in
[Program].
4 Click the [Advanced Sensor Settings] button.
Prompt screen.
yyNote that when the ping command is
executed to a device other than a sensor,
the confirmation will succeed if there is a
response to the ping command.
yyConfirmation is not possible for a direct
connection.
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC
yyFor details of how to check and configure the PC's IP
address, refer to:
“Changing the PC settings (IP address setting)” (Page
2-20)
yyConfirm that the IP address of the PC does not coincide
with the IP address of another PC/sensor/network device on
the network. Also, confirm that the subnet mask and default
gateway are correctly set.
A
The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.
5 Select the [Device] tab and click the [Change
Network Settings] button.
The Network Settings screen opens.
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-27
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor
6 Confirm the IP address of the sensor.
Confirming the router settings
When a router is used, confirm that the following port is
opened.
yySensor : 63010 (default value)
yyWhen the IP address of the sensor is to be changed,
set the IP address and click the [OK] button.
yyConfirm that the IP address of the sensor does not
coincide with the IP address of the PC/ another
sensor/network device on the network. Also, confirm
that the subnet mask and default gateway are
correctly set.
yyWhen the [Reset] button is clicked, the setup values
for the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Default
Gateway] will be reset and [Empty] will be displayed.
[PORT] will be 63010.
7 After confirmation/setting has completed,
click the [OK] button and exit from the network
settings.
yyConfirm on the firewall software of the PC whether
the port is available.
yyFor the setting methods of the sensor port
number, refer to:
“Network settings” (Page 7-38)
yyBOOTP is fixed as 67 or 68.
Confirming the firewall settings
yyIf the Windows Security Alert dialog appears and the IXNavigator is blocked by the Windows firewall, click the
[Allow access] button (for Windows 10).
yyConfirm that an application or a port to be used is being
enabled in the firewall software of the PC. To permit the
port number to be used, refer to:
“Confirming the router settings” (Page A-28)
8 Exit the IX-Navigator.
9 Connect the sensor and PC via a network.
“Connecting via a network (Direct Connection (2
units or more)/Network Connection)” (Page 2-16)
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator
(Network Connection)” (Page 3-12)
A
A-28
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor
Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable
Status
Remedy
yyConfirm the IP address of the FTP server and set it correctly.
yyConfirm the port number of the FTP server and set it correctly.
Moreover, confirm on the firewall software on the PC whether the port is
available or not.
Connection with the FTP server failed.
yyConfirm the user name and password for logging in to the FTP server and set it
correctly.
“FTP Client Settings” (Page 7-30)
yyAuthorization for accessing the transfer destination folder is not granted. Acquire
the access authorization of the transfer destination folder and perform the
operation again.
Data transfer to the transfer destination
folder failed.
yyConfirm that there is no file with the same name in the transfer destination folder
which has been set. If a file with the same name exists, change the file name or
change the transfer destination folder.
“Transfer Condition Settings” (Page 7-33)
yyWhen the PC was switched from the [Run] screen to the [Program] screen,
the screen is switched to the [Program] screen after the transfer of data has
finished.
If you click the [Cancel] button during the transfer, the transfer will be forcibly
finished and the Error screen will appear.
yyChange the trigger cycle of the sensor or the sampling period.
“Trigger Options” (Page 4-8)
“Measurement Adjustment” (Page 5-9)
yyConfirm the stress status of the network.
A
Data which is larger than the remaining
storage of the FTP buffer has been created
and the transfer failed.
yyEnable the [Time + Date Info] function and set the sensor using the FTP client
function to ON.
“Adding Date and Time information to the sensor (function for adding sensor
date information)” (Page 7-17)
yyConnect the control panel or PC where the [Time + Date Info] function is
enabled to the same network.
Synchronization of the time information
failed (the data are transferred).
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-29
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)
The following settings can be configured by means of the
IP reset switch of the sensor.
yyThe network settings such as the IP address can be
initialized to the factory default.
yyThe network settings such as the IP address can be
assigned with a preset value.
yyThe IP reset switch is used when joining the
sensor to a new network after being used
in another network, or when trouble occurs
during the connection process.
yyDo not initialize a correctly connected sensor.
The connection will be interrupted.
Initializing the network settings
1 Insert a long and thin pin (1 to 2 mm in diameter)
into the screw hole and press the IP reset switch
for about 3 seconds while the power is on.
STATUS indicator light
Settings after initialization
Setting Items
Communication speed
IP address setting method
IP Address
100/10Mbps automatic
switching
The STATUS indicator light will blink twice (orange) and
then turn off. The network settings are initialized.
0.0.0.0*1, *2
0.0.0.0*2
Default Gateway
0.0.0.0*2
*2
Long and thin pin
BOOTP
(Bootstrap Protocol)
Subnet Mask
*1
A
Settings after initialization
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, only the BOOTP client
function can be used.
Do not assign an IP address to the sensor from a
BOOTP server or DHCP server. Only assign an IP
address to the sensor from the IX-Navigator.
In the Network Settings screen of the sensor, [Empty]
is displayed.
“Network settings” (Page 7-38)
Connecting method after initialization
For direct connection (1 unit/2 units or more)
There is no need to set the IP address.
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator (Direct
Connection (1 unit))” (Page 3-10)
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator (Direct
Connection (2 units or more))” (Page 3-11)
For network connection
Search for the sensor to be connected. Search will be
made for a sensor without IP address, set the IP address
by following the instructions on the screen.
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator (Network
Connection)” (Page 3-12)
A-30
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)
Assignment for IP address 192.168.10.10/11
The IP address will be set to 192.168.10.10/11 after
holding down the IP reset switch for more than 10
seconds.
1 Insert a long and thin pin (1 to 2 mm in diameter)
into the screw hole and press the IP reset switch
for about 10 seconds while the power is on.
STATUS indicator light
Connection when the IP address
192.168.10.10/11 is assigned
For direct connection (1 unit/2 units or more)
There is no need to set the IP address.
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator (Direct
Connection (1 unit))” (Page 3-10)
“Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator (Direct
Connection (2 units or more))” (Page 3-11)
For network connection
Enter the IP address 192.168.10.10/11 to setup a
connection, or search for the sensor to be connected.
Set the IP address of the PC to “192.168.10.*”.
Long and thin pin
The STATUS indicator light will blink 2 times in orange
after holding down the switch for about 2 seconds. Keep
holding down the switch, it will blink 2 times in orange
again after about 8 seconds and then the IP address will
be set to 192.168.10.10 (Expansion : 192.168.10.11).
Settings when the IP address is assigned
Setting Items
Communication speed
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
*1
Set values after the IP
address is assigned
100/10Mbps automatic
switching
192.168.10.10 (Main)
192.168.10.11 (Expansion)
A
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0*1
In the Network Settings screen of the sensor, [Empty]
is displayed.
“Network settings” (Page 7-38)
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-31
List of Factory Settings (Default Values)
List of Factory Settings (Default Values)
This section outlines the settings (default values) at the
time of shipping.
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Height]
Setting Items
Scan Mode
Sensor Settings: 1 Detection Conditions
Setting Items
Default value
Point Size
Normal
ZERO/Offset Adjustment
Shift Value
0.00 mm
Limit HI
yyIX-055: 20 mm
yyIX-080: 36 mm
yyIX-150: 100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: 160 mm
Limit LO
yyIX-055: -20 mm
yyIX-080: -36 mm
yyIX-150: -100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: -160 mm
Default value
Trigger
Internal trigger
Trigger Interval
50 ms
Brightness
IX-360W: 60
Other than IX-360W: 30
Imaging Mode
HDR
Cut Halation
1
Measurement Direction
Normal
Measurement Range
Measurement Mode
IX-360W: High Sensitivity
Other than IX-360W:
High Speed
yyIX-055: ±3 mm
yyIX-080: ±5 mm
yyIX-150: ±15 mm
yyIX-360/360W: ±30 mm
2-point Calibration
Disable
Reduce measurement noise
ON
Measure when PosAdj fails
OFF
Lighting
ON
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Average
Height]
Setting Items
Sensor Settings: 2 Master Registration
Setting Items
Tilt Adjustment
A
Default value
Disable
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Step]
Setting Items
Point A Size
Point B Size
Default value
IX-360W: Small
Other than IX-360W:
Standard
ZERO/Offset Adjustment
Shift Value
0.00 mm
Limit HI
yyIX-055: 20 mm
yyIX-080: 36 mm
yyIX-150: 100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: 160 mm
Limit LO
yyIX-055: -20 mm
yyIX-080: -36 mm
yyIX-150: -100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: -160 mm
Measurement Range
yyIX-055: ±3 mm
yyIX-080: ±5 mm
yyIX-150: ±15 mm
yyIX-360/360W: ±30 mm
2-point Calibration
Disable
A-32
Default value
Window Shape
Rect
Averaging area
Standard
Detection Method
Selected Area
Reference Height Settings
OFF
Adjust ZERO/Offset
Target Value
0.00 mm
Limit HI
yyIX-055: 20 mm
yyIX-080: 36 mm
yyIX-150: 100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: 160 mm
Limit LO
yyIX-055: -20 mm
yyIX-080: -36 mm
yyIX-150: -100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: -160 mm
Measurement range
yyIX-055: ±3 mm
yyIX-080: ±5 mm
yyIX-150: ±15 mm
yyIX-360/360W: ±30 mm
2-point calibration
Disable
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
List of Factory Settings (Default Values)
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Position
Adjustment]
Setting Items
Default value
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Height Area]
Setting Items
Default value
Window Shape
Rect
Averaging area
IX-360W: Standard
Other than IX-360W: Large
Window Shape
Rect
Search region
Entire
Fine Tune Outline Sensitivity
Middle
Reference Height Settings
OFF
Eraser Width
Normal
Limit
70
Limit
70
Upper Limit
Disable
Rotation Range
±20 deg
---.--
Margin
ON
Specify Height Range Upper
Limit
Search Algorithm
High Speed
Specify Height Range Lower
Limit
---.--
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [MAX/MIN]
Setting Items
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Pin Height]
Default value
Setting Items
Default value
Measurement Method
MAX
Reference Height Settings
OFF
Window Shape
Rect
IX-360W: Standard
Other than IX-360W: Large
0.00 mm
Averaging area
Adjust ZERO/Offset
Target Value
ZERO/Offset Adjustment
Shift Value
0.00 mm
Limit HI
yyIX-055: 20 mm
yyIX-080: 36 mm
yyIX-150: 100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: 160 mm
Limit HI
yyIX-055: 20 mm
yyIX-080: 36 mm
yyIX-150: 100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: 160 mm
Limit LO
yyIX-055: -20 mm
yyIX-080: -36 mm
yyIX-150: -100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: -160 mm
Limit LO
yyIX-055: -20 mm
yyIX-080: -36 mm
yyIX-150: -100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: -160 mm
Measurement Range
yyIX-055: ±3 mm
yyIX-080: ±5 mm
yyIX-150: ±15 mm
yyIX-360/360W: ±30 mm
Measurement Range
yyIX-055: ±3 mm
yyIX-080: ±5 mm
yyIX-150: ±15 mm
yyIX-360/360W: ±30 mm
Detection Method
Area Priority
2-point Calibration
Disable
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings
[Monochrome Area]
Setting Items
Default value
Window Shape
Rect
Brightness Extraction Upper
Limit
0
Brightness Extraction Lower
Limit
0
Limit
70
Upper Limit
Disable
Advanced Brightness
Extraction Upper Limit
0
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-33
A
List of Factory Settings (Default Values)
Setting Items
Default value
Advanced Brightness
Extraction Lower Limit
0
Fixed Reference Area
Disable
Setting Items
A
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Width]
Setting Items
Default value
Edge Sensitivity Adj.
50
Limit HI
120
Limit LO
80
Upper Limit
Enable
Scale
0-200
Width Extraction Method
Mas. Wid.
Scaling
OFF
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [1-Axis
Adjustment]
Setting Items
A
Default value
Scan Direction
From left
Edge Sensitivity Adj.
50
Edge Detection
Master Direction
Default value
Scan Direction (X-Axis)
From left
Scan Direction (Y-Axis)
From top
Edge Sensitivity Adj. (X-Axis)
50
Edge Sensitivity Adj. (Y-Axis)
50
Edge Detection (X-Axis)
Master Direction
Edge Detection (Y-Axis)
Master Direction
Angle Correction
Enable
A-34
Default value
Lowest set tool number
Main unit tool then expansion
unit tool when the expansion
unit is connected
B
ZERO/Offset Adjustment
Shift Value
0.00 mm
Limit HI
yyIX-055: 20 mm
yyIX-080: 36 mm
yyIX-150: 100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: 160 mm
(Main unit sensor head)
Limit LO
yyIX-055: -20 mm
yyIX-080: -36 mm
yyIX-150: -100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: -160 mm
(Main unit sensor head)
2-point Calibration
Disable
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Thickness
Calculation]
Setting Items
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [2-Axis
Adjustment]
Setting Items
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Step
Calculation]
Default value
A
Lowest tool number set on
the main unit
B
Exp.Unit Tool 01
ZERO/Offset Adjustment
Shift Value
0.00 mm
Limit HI
yyIX-055: 20 mm
yyIX-080: 36 mm
yyIX-150: 100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: 160 mm
(Main unit sensor head)
Limit LO
yyIX-055: -20 mm
yyIX-080: -36 mm
yyIX-150: -100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: -160 mm
(Main unit sensor head)
2-point Calibration
Disable
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
List of Factory Settings (Default Values)
Sensor Settings: 4 Output Assignment
Setting Items
Default value
OUT1
Total Status: OK
OUT2
BUSY
OUT3 to OUT10
OFF
Total Status Conditions
All Tools OK
Trigger Error
Disable
ZERO/Offset Error
Enable
ZERO/Offset Tools
Tool 01 to Tool 16: ON
Logic 1 to 8
Empty
Line Mode
Sensor Settings: 1 Detection Conditions
Setting Items
Default value
Brightness
IX-360W: 60
Other than IX-360W: 30
Imaging Mode
HDR
Lighting
ON
Sampling Period
6 ms
Filter setting
Filter: Average
Data count: 4
Adjust Laser Position
Slider Center
Timing Input
Sample Hold/Latching
Adjust Head Tilt
Camera vertical
Measurement Direction
Z-Axis: Normal
X-Axis: Normal
Alarm Setting
Default
Reduce measurement noise
1
Laser sensitivity adjustment
Auto
X-Axis median filter
5
Select peak
0
Remove ambient influence
OFF
Measure when PosAdj fails
OFF
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Step]
Setting Items
A
Default value
Point A
Ave
Point B
Ave
ZERO/Offset Adjustment
Shift Value
0.00 mm
Limit HI
yyIX-055: 20 mm
yyIX-080: 36 mm
yyIX-150: 100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: 160 mm
Limit LO
yyIX-055: -20 mm
yyIX-080: -36 mm
yyIX-150: -100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: -160 mm
2-point Calibration
Disable
Averaging area for
MAX/MIN Measurement
IX-360W: Standard
Other than IX-360W: Large
(only when maximum or
minimum is selected for
Point A/B)
Hysteresis
0.00 mm
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-35
List of Factory Settings (Default Values)
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Height]
Setting Items
Default value
Setting Items
Measurement Method
Ave
ZERO/Offset Adjustment
Shift Value
0.00 mm
Limit HI
yyIX-055: 20 mm
yyIX-080: 36 mm
yyIX-150: 100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: 160 mm
Limit LO
yyIX-055: -20 mm
yyIX-080: -36 mm
yyIX-150: -100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: -160 mm
2-point Calibration
Disable
Averaging area for
MAX/MIN Measurement
IX-360W: Standard
Other than IX-360W: Large
(only when maximum or
minimum is selected for
Point A/B)
Hysteresis
0.00 mm
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Position
Adjustment]
Setting Items
Default value
Detection edge type
A
Detection method
Maximum step
A
A-36
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Edge
Position]
Default value
Detection edge type
A
Detection method
Maximum step
Adjust ZERO/Offset
Target Value
0.00 mm
Limit HI
yyIX-055: 40 mm
yyIX-080: 60 mm
yyIX-150: 120 mm
yyIX-360: 120 mm
yyIX-360W: 250 mm
Limit LO
yyIX-055: -40 mm
yyIX-080: -60 mm
yyIX-150: -120 mm
yyIX-360: -120 mm
yyIX-360W: -250 mm
2-point Calibration
Disable
Hysteresis
0.00 mm
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Width/
Diameter] (Judgment mode: Width)
Setting Items
Default value
Adjust ZERO/Offset
Target Value
0.00 mm
Limit HI
yyIX-055: 40 mm
yyIX-080: 60 mm
yyIX-150: 120 mm
yyIX-360: 120 mm
yyIX-360W: 250 mm
Limit LO
yyIX-055: -40 mm
yyIX-080: -60 mm
yyIX-150: -120 mm
yyIX-360: -120 mm
yyIX-360W: -250 mm
Width Extraction Method
Mas. Wid.
2-point Calibration
Disable
Hysteresis
0.00 mm
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
List of Factory Settings (Default Values)
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Width/
Diameter] (Judgment mode: Diameter)
Setting Items
Default value
Adjust ZERO/Offset
Target Value
0.00 mm
Limit HI
yyIX-055: 300 mm
yyIX-080: 400 mm
yyIX-150: 500 mm
yyIX-360: 500 mm
yyIX-360W: 500 mm
Limit LO
yyIX-055: -300 mm
yyIX-080: -400 mm
yyIX-150: -500 mm
yyIX-360: -500 mm
yyIX-360W: -500 mm
2-point Calibration
Disable
Hysteresis
0.00 mm
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Step/
Width]
Setting Items
A
Default value
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Thickness]
Setting Items
Default value
A
Lowest tool number set on
the main unit
B
Exp.Unit Tool 01
ZERO/Offset Adjustment
Shift Value
0.00 mm
Limit HI
yyIX-055: 20 mm
yyIX-080: 36 mm
yyIX-150: 100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: 160 mm
(Main unit sensor head)
Limit LO
yyIX-055: -20 mm
yyIX-080: -36 mm
yyIX-150: -100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: -160 mm
(Main unit sensor head)
2-point Calibration
Disable
Hysteresis
0.00 mm
Sensor Settings: 4 Output Assignment
Lowest set tool number
Main unit tool then expansion
unit tool when the expansion
unit is connected
OUT1
Total Status: OK
OUT2
BUSY
ZERO/Offset Adjustment
Shift Value
0.00 mm
OUT3 to OUT10
OFF
ZERO/Offset Error
Enable
Limit HI
yyIX-055: 20 mm
yyIX-080: 36 mm
yyIX-150: 100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: 160 mm
(Main unit sensor head)
ZERO/Offset Tool
Tool 01 to Tool 16: ON
Logic 1 to 8
Empty
Limit LO
yyIX-055: -20 mm
yyIX-080: -36 mm
yyIX-150: -100 mm
yyIX-360/360W: -160 mm
(Main unit sensor head)
2-point Calibration
Disable
Hysteresis
0.00 mm
B
Setting Items
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Default value
A
A-37
List of Factory Settings (Default Values)
Advanced Sensor Settings
FTP
Setting Items
Input
FTP Client Settings
Setting Items
yyIN1: ‌External Trigger
Rising/Timing
yyIN2 to IN8: OFF
Device Settings
Program Switch Method
Panel/PC/Comm. (DL)
Setting Items
ZERO/Offset value storage
Disable
Output
Default value
N.O./N.C.
OUT1 to OUT10: N.O.
Output Options
Latching
Device Settings
OFF
Setting Items
Default value
NPN
Main with Exp. unit operations
Setting Items
Default value
Disable
Trigger/Timing
Disable
Program Switching
Disable
Laser Emission Stop
Disable
ZERO/Offset
Disable
Reset
Disable
OFF
Disable
Z Direction
yyIX-055: 0.01 mm
yyIX-080: 0.01 mm
yyIX-150: 0.02 mm
yyIX-360: 0.1 mm
yyIX-360W: 0.1 mm
X Direction
yyIX-055: 0.05 mm
yyIX-080: 0.05 mm
yyIX-150: 0.05 mm
yyIX-360: 0.1 mm
yyIX-360W: 0.5 mm
OUT 1 to 10: OFF
Setting Items
A-38
Rotate Image 180 deg
Default value
NPN/PNP
Interference Prevention
Password Lock
Measurement Value Display
Unit (mm)
I/O Monitor
Main/Expansion Simul Input
Model numbers for the
sensor head/amplifier
Example: IX-150/1000
Security
Setting Items
A
Default value
Environmental
Device Name
NPN/PNP
Disable
Default value
Input Function
I/O Monitor
Default value
Communication unit (DL)
settings
Data Assignment
Main unit only
Output Assignment
1 to 15: OFF
Byte Swap
Disable
Output of the pin height
tool
Individual
Operation Mode
High Resolution Mode
No
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Enable
List of Factory Settings (Default Values)
MEMO
A
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-39
Index
Index
Numerics
C
1-Axis Adjustment Tool..........................................4-26, 4-92
1. Detection Setup.................................... 4-7, 5-7, 8-5, 8-10
2-Axis Adjustment Tool..........................................4-26, 4-94
2. Master Registration...........................4-14, 5-25, 8-6, 8-11
2-point Calibration....... 4-36, 4-42, 4-53, 4-63, 4-100, 4-105,
5-40, 5-46, 5-56, 5-64, 5-70, 5-76
3. Tool Settings..................................... 4-20, 5-27, 8-7, 8-12
4. Output Assignment......................... 4-107, 5-79, 8-8, 8-13
A
About.....................................................................7-49, 8-16
Achieving adequate image brightness........................... 6-20
Adding a tool.........................................................4-30, 5-34
Adding Date and Time information to the sensor
(function for adding sensor date information)................. 7-17
Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool...............................4-30, 5-34
Add Time+Date Info........................................................ 7-48
Adjustable bracket............................................................ 1-7
Adjustable bracket (OP-88347).................................... 10-16
Adjust Head Tilt.............................................................. 5-14
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment................................ 6-13
Advanced Brightness Extraction.................................... 4-83
Advanced Sensor Settings.......................... 7-49, 8-16, A-38
Advanced Settings......................................................... 7-41
Advanced Tools.....................................................4-23, 5-30
Alarm Setting.................................................................. 5-18
Analog Output...................................2-14, 4-112, 5-83, 7-25
Analog output accuracy.................................................. 7-25
Analog output response time.......................................... 9-21
Analog output update frequency.................................... 9-21
Angle Correction............................................................. 4-96
Assignment for IP address 192.168.10.10/11.................A-31
Attaching the optional mounting bracket.......................... 2-5
Average Height Tool..............................................4-22, 4-46
Averaging area for MAX/MIN Measurement..........5-41, 5-47
A
B
Backing up in a batch..................................................... 7-19
Backing up the Detection History in a Batch.................. 7-15
Backing up the program individually............................... 7-20
Backup........................................................................... 7-49
Basic configurations of IX-H............................................. 1-2
Basic IX-Navigator Operations....................................... 3-16
Basic Operation Flow....................................................... 3-8
Basic Operation for Checking Settings and
Detection History.............................................................. 8-2
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator................4-3, 5-3
Basic Tools............................................................4-21, 5-28
Batch Backup................................................................. 7-45
Batch Clearing ZERO/Offset.......................................... 6-15
Brightness Adjustment...............................................4-9, 5-8
A-40
Cables.............................................................................. 2-8
Calculation Tools...................................................4-27, 5-31
Canceling One-Shot output............................................ 9-10
Capture..................................................................7-47, 8-15
Captured image.............................................................. 3-17
Change Connected Sensor(s)........................................ 7-46
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)................. 7-4
Change saved image file location.........................7-47, 8-16
Changing display contents............................................. 3-17
Changing Over (Line Mode)........................................... 9-13
Changing Over (Scan Mode).......................................... 9-11
Changing the angle of the tool window.......................... 3-19
Changing the destination for saved images................... 7-21
Changing the displayed captured image.......................... 6-8
Switching screens with a button................................. 6-9
Switching screens with the drop-down list.................. 6-9
Changing the image history logging conditions.............. 7-16
Changing the PC settings (IP address setting)............... 2-20
For Windows 7.......................................................... 2-21
For Windows 10........................................................ 2-20
Changing the Sensor Displayed on the PC
(Change Connected Sensor Function)............................. 7-2
Changing the sensor to be displayed on a screen........... 7-3
Changing the size of the tool window............................. 3-19
In line mode.............................................................. 3-19
In scan mode............................................................ 3-19
Changing the timing of the status output........................ 9-10
Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator
light.................................................................................A-17
Checking the detection range........................................... 2-2
Checking the Package Contents...................................... 1-6
Clearing Errors............................................................... 9-14
Clearing the saved images............................................. 7-16
Clearing ZERO/Offset..................................................... 6-15
Closing the Limit Adjustment screen.............................. 6-13
Common Settings........................................................... 7-31
Communication cables..........................................1-8, 10-17
Communication unit (DL) settings.................................. 7-40
Configuring settings on
the Test image.................................... 5-42, 5-48, 5-72, 5-78
Confirming IX‑Navigator error messages.......................A-18
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC..................A-27
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor............A-27
Confirming the existence of the sensor from the PC......A-27
Confirming the firewall settings......................................A-28
Confirming the router settings........................................A-28
Confirming the saving destination of an image.............. 7-21
Confirming the Sensor Detection History....................... 8-14
Confirming the status by observing the indicator light
of the sensor...................................................................A-26
Connecting directly (1 unit)............................................. 2-15
Connecting method after initialization............................A-30
For direct connection (1 unit/2 units or more)...........A-30
For network connection............................................A-30
Connecting the cable to the sensor amplifier................... 2-9
Connecting the Ethernet cable or LAN cable................... 2-9
Connecting the I/O cable (OP-87906).............................. 2-9
Connecting the PC and multiple sensors......................... 1-3
Connecting the PC and one sensor................................. 1-2
Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable and
sensor amplifier................................................................ 2-8
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Index
Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable and
sensor head...................................................................... 2-8
Connecting the sensor to a PC...................................... 2-15
Connecting via a network (Direct Connection
(2 units or more)/Network Connection).......................... 2-16
Connection Test.............................................................. 7-30
Connection when the IP address 192.168.10.10/11 is
assigned.........................................................................A-31
Connector Specifications................................................ 2-12
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Timing Input
(Line Mode)...................................................................... 9-4
Edge operation....................................................9-5, 9-7
Level operation....................................................9-4, 9-6
Sample Hold............................................................... 9-4
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers
(Scan Mode)..................................................................... 9-2
External Trigger.......................................................... 9-2
Internal Trigger............................................................ 9-3
Copying a program........................................................... 7-8
Copying a tool.......................................................4-31, 5-35
Current Status................................................................ 7-45
Cut-off process of the matching rate..............................A-14
D
Data Assignment............................................................ 7-40
Default value.......................................................4-108, 5-80
Deleting a tool.......................................................4-32, 5-36
Deleting the software (uninstall)..................................... 2-20
Detecting objects near a wall........................................... 2-2
Detection Advanced Settings......................................... 4-78
Detection History...................................................7-49, 8-16
Detection Mode and Judgment Processing...................... 3-2
Detection range.............................................................. 10-4
Detection range (line mode; vertical head)....................... 2-3
Detection range (line mode; vertical laser)....................... 2-3
Detection range (scan mode)........................................... 2-2
Device............................................................................ 7-38
Device Name.................................................................. 7-38
Device Settings..............................................................A-38
Dimensions..................................................................... 10-8
Direct input of the extraction range................................ 4-70
Disable the password lock.............................................. 7-39
Disconnect...................................................................... 7-46
Display contents specific to each tool............................ 3-18
Displaying and outputting the status result
(when position adjustment is not used)............................A-6
Displaying and outputting the status result
(when position adjustment is used)..................................A-8
Displaying operating information.................................... 6-10
Displaying the Limit Adjustment screen.......................... 6-11
Displaying the Program Details screen............................ 7-7
Displaying the sensor detection history screen.............. 7-11
Displaying from the main screen in [Program].......... 7-12
Displaying from the main screen in [Running].......... 7-11
Display outline................................................................ 4-12
E
Edge Detection......................................................4-93, 4-96
Edge Position Tool.................................................5-30, 5-52
Edge Sensitivity Adjustment.........................4-88, 4-93, 4-95
Editing a program name................................................... 7-8
Editing a tool..........................................................4-31, 5-35
Editing the tool window................................................... 3-18
Editing Values................................................................. 3-20
Enable the password lock.............................................. 7-39
Enlarge (Zoom In).................................................7-47, 8-15
Environmental................................................................ 7-38
Error Messages..............................................................A-17
Ethernet cable.............................................................. 10-17
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)................................... 1-8
Exit.................................................................................. 8-15
Exiting............................................................................. 7-45
Exiting “Check Settings/Detection History” mode............. 8-2
Exiting the sensor settings and starting operation............ 6-2
Exit Settings/Detection history screen............................ 8-15
Extended Function of the 1-Axis Adjustment Tool.......... 4-93
Extended Function of the 2-Axis Adjustment Tool.......... 4-96
Extended Function of the Edge Position Tool................. 5-55
Extended Functions............................................... 4-10, 5-11
Extended functions for the height area tool.................... 4-71
Extended functions for the height tool...................4-40, 5-45
Extended functions for the MAX/MIN tool...................... 4-62
Extended functions for the monochrome area tool......... 4-83
Extended functions for the output assignment.... 4-110, 5-82
Extended functions for the position adjustment tool....... 4-57
Extended functions for the step calculation tool............. 4-99
Extended functions for the step tool......................4-35, 5-39
Extended Functions for the Step/Width Tool.................. 5-69
Extended functions for the thickness calculation tool.... 4-105
Extended Functions for the Thickness Tool.................... 5-75
Extended Functions of the Average Height Tool............. 4-52
Extended Functions of the Pin Height Tool..................... 4-76
Extended Functions of the Width/Diameter Tool............ 5-63
Extended Functions of the Width Tool............................ 4-89
F
[File] menu.............................................................7-45, 8-15
Finishing by completing all steps...............................4-6, 5-6
Finishing the Settings Navigator................................4-6, 5-6
Finishing without completing the steps......................4-6, 5-6
Fit Window.............................................................7-47, 8-15
Fixed Reference Area............................................4-72, 4-83
Flow in the Settings Navigator...................................4-2, 5-2
Flow of the internal process........................................... 6-21
For the processing time.................................................. 6-21
FTP........................................................................7-29, A-38
FTP Client Settings......................................................... 7-30
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-41
A
Index
H
J
Hardware........................................................................ 2-18
Height Area Tool....................................................4-23, 4-66
Height Display/Height image 1....................................... 3-17
Height image 2............................................................... 3-17
Height Tool.......................................... 4-21, 4-39, 5-28, 5-43
[Help] menu...........................................................7-49, 8-16
Hiding the operating information.................................... 6-11
How to select detection modes........................................ 3-2
How to Select the Option Settings.................................. 4-19
Hysteresis......................... 5-41, 5-47, 5-57, 5-65, 5-71, 5-77
I
A
[Image] menu........................................................7-47, 8-15
Image Tools.................................................................... 4-25
Importing a program......................................................... 7-9
Importing the individual status output of each detection
tool/logic........................................................................... 9-9
Importing the Status Output (Scan Mode)........................ 9-8
Importing the total status/total status NG output.............. 9-8
Individual Program Backup............................................ 7-45
Initialize Sensor.....................................................7-44, 7-46
Initialize/Update.............................................................. 7-44
Initializing a program...................................................... 7-10
Initializing the network settings.......................................A-30
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch).........A-30
Initializing the sensor...................................................... 3-15
Input......................................................................7-23, A-38
Input circuit..................................................................... 2-13
Input Function................................................................. 7-23
Input/Output Circuit and Electric Specifications............. 2-13
Installation destination of the software (reference)......... 2-19
Installing IX-Navigator (IX-H1)........................................ 2-19
Interference Prevention.................................................. 7-28
I/O cable........................................................................... 1-7
I/O cable (OP-87906)................................................... 10-15
I/O Monitor.............................................................7-26, A-38
IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360.......................................... 10-8
IX-360W......................................................................... 10-8
IX-H2000...................................................................... 10-15
IX-H2050...................................................................... 10-15
IX-Navigator................................................................... 10-7
A-42
Judgment processing flow................................................ 3-4
L
LAN cable..................................................................... 10-17
LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45)............................................... 1-8
Language..............................................................7-48, 8-16
Laser Sensitivity Adjustment.......................................... 5-22
Laser Shutdown/Release............................................... 9-16
Limit Adjustment............................................................. 7-45
Line Mode........................................................ 3-3, 3-5, A-35
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light............................A-26
List of Factory Settings (Default Values)........................A-32
Loading and viewing saved images............................... 7-12
Logic.................................................................... 4-113, 5-84
L type Ethernet cable.................................................... 10-17
L type Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)......................... 1-8
M
Main/Expansion Simul Input........................................... 7-28
Main Screen for “Check Settings/Detection History”........ 8-3
Main Screen for Detection Conditions...... 4-7, 5-7, 8-5, 8-10
Main Screen for Master Registration.....4-14, 5-25, 8-6, 8-11
Main Screen for the Output
Assignment......................................... 4-107, 5-79, 8-8, 8-13
Main Screen for the Tool settings......... 4-29, 5-33, 8-7, 8-12
Main with Exp. unit operations..............................7-27, A-38
Mask................................. 4-50, 4-60, 4-68, 4-81, 4-87, 5-62
Master Registration...............................................4-15, 5-26
Matching Rate for the Position Adjustment tool..............A-14
MAX/MIN Tool........................................................4-23, 4-58
Measurement Adjustment................................................. 5-9
Measurement area check............................................... 3-17
Measurement direction..........................................4-10, 5-17
Measurement mode....................................................... 4-11
Measurement Position.................................................... 3-17
Measurement Range................. 4-35, 4-40, 4-52, 4-62, 4-76
Measurement Value Display Unit................................... 7-40
Measure when Position Adjustment fails...............4-12, 5-24
Monochrome Area Tool..........................................4-25, 4-79
Mounting the IX-H2000 (Main)......................................... 2-6
Mounting the IX-H2050 (Expansion)................................ 2-7
Mounting the Sensor........................................................ 2-2
Mounting the Sensor Amplifier......................................... 2-6
Mounting the Sensor Head........................................2-2, 2-4
When mounting the sensor head diagonally............... 2-4
When screws are secured from
the mounting material................................................. 2-4
When screws are secured from the sensor head....... 2-4
Moving the tool window.................................................. 3-19
Mutual interference area.............................................. 10-18
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Index
N
P
Name and Function of Each Part..................................... 1-9
Name and function of each part of the sensor amplifier.... 1-10
Name and function of each part of the sensor head........ 1-9
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen............... 6-4
Names and Functions of the Screen................................ 8-3
Network settings............................................................. 7-38
N.O./N.C......................................................................... 7-24
No-voltage input (when NPN output is selected)............ 2-13
NPN/PNP...............................................................7-27, A-38
O
Opening file.................................................................... 8-15
Operating conditions...................................................... 2-18
Operating from the menu bar................................7-45, 8-15
Operating in the shortest cycle......................................... 9-3
Operating the image tool bar.......................................... 3-16
Operation flow when the power is turned on.................... 3-9
Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator
(Direct Connection (1 unit))............................................ 3-10
Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator
(Direct Connection (2 units or more))............................. 3-11
Operation for initial startup of the IX‑Navigator
(Network Connection)..................................................... 3-12
Operation for initial startup of the sensor....................... 3-14
Operation Mode.............................................................. 7-43
Operation of the sensor amplifier indicator light............. 1-11
Operation of the sensor head indicator light..................... 1-9
Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on...... 9-18
Operations when replacing the sensor head.................. 3-14
Operations when the image is magnified....................... 3-16
Operation when the Power is Turned on.......................... 3-9
Option............................................................................... 1-7
Optional Parts for the Sensor....................................... 10-15
OS.................................................................................. 2-18
Other connections.......................................................... 2-17
Other Methods of Confirming a Network Connection.....A-27
Output....................................................................7-24, A-38
Output Assignment Settings................................4-108, 5-80
Output circuit.................................................................. 2-13
Output Options............................................................... 7-25
Overview for Adding Sensor Date Information Function.... 7-17
Overview of detection modes........................................... 3-2
Overview of Screen and Operation.................................. 3-6
Overview of the IX-H........................................................ 1-4
Overview of the Operation Screen................................... 6-3
Overview of the program functions................................... 7-4
PC software for the IX Series........................................... 1-8
Peak/Bottom/Peak to Peak Hold...................................... 9-6
Peak selection................................................................ 5-23
Performing Batch ZERO/Offset...................................... 6-15
Performing ZERO/Offset................................................ 6-14
Pin Height Tool......................................................4-24, 4-73
Position Adjustment Tool.................... 4-22, 4-55, 5-29, 5-49
Precautions during installation......................................... 2-2
Preparing the program functions...................................... 7-4
Preparation flow.......................................................... 7-4
Preparation procedures.............................................. 7-5
Procedure to save images.............................................. 7-21
Program Details.....................................................7-49, 8-16
Program Switch Method................................................. 7-24
R
Reduce measurement noise................................. 4-11, 5-22
Reduce (Zoom Out)...............................................7-47, 8-15
Reducing the effect of ambient light............................... 6-20
Reducing the shininess of a glossy or metal surface..... 6-20
Reference Height Settings....................................4-69, 4-75
Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable....A-23
Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable.......A-29
Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is unavailable....A-21
Remedy when direct connection (2 units or more) is
unavailable.....................................................................A-22
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with
the sensor.......................................................................A-21
Remove ambient influence............................................. 5-24
Rename Tool............................ 4-36, 4-41, 4-63, 4-72, 4-85,
4-99, 4-105, 5-39, 5-45, 5-69, 5-75
Required PC Specifications............................................ 2-18
Reset Statistics............................................................... 7-46
Resetting Status............................................................. 9-15
Response Time (Line Mode).......................................... 9-20
Response time (maximum value)................................... 9-19
Sampling frequency: 6 ms........................................ 9-19
Sampling frequency: 11 ms...................................... 9-19
Rotating Image 180 deg................................................. 7-40
Rotation Range.............................................................. 4-57
Running ZERO/Offset..................................................... 9-17
Run screen....................................................................... 6-4
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-43
A
Index
S
A
Save............................................................................... 8-15
Save Image...........................................................7-47, 8-15
Save Selected History.................................................... 7-13
Saving a batch backup file/individual program
backup file........................................................................ 8-2
Saving all images from the image history individually.... 7-14
Saving images and screens displayed on the
IX-Navigator individually................................................. 7-21
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images........................ 7-19
Saving the sensor settings and the detection history..... 7-19
Scaling............................................................................ 4-90
Scan Mode...................................................... 3-3, 3-4, A-32
Search Algorithm............................................................ 4-57
Searching for a sensor to be connected......................... 3-12
Security.......................................................................... 7-39
Selecting NPN output............................................2-12, 2-13
Selecting PNP output............................................2-12, 2-13
Selecting the tool.............................................................. 6-8
Sensitivity Adjustment.................................................... 4-51
Sensor Amplifier................................. 1-6, 1-10, 10-5, 10-15
When connected..................................................... 10-15
Sensor Detection History Screen................................... 8-14
Sensor Head.......................................... 1-6, 1-9, 10-2, 10-8
Sensor Head/Amplifier cable.................................1-7, 10-15
[Sensor] menu................................................................ 7-46
Sensor’s Detection History
(Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)..... 7-11
Sensor Settings: 1 Detection Conditions.............. A-32, A-35
Sensor Settings: 2 Master Registration..........................A-32
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [1-Axis Adjustment].....A-34
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [2-Axis Adjustment].....A-34
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Average Height].........A-32
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Edge Position]...........A-36
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Height]............. A-32, A-36
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Height Area]...............A-33
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [MAX/MIN]..................A-33
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Monochrome Area]....A-33
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Pin Height].................A-33
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings
[Position Adjustment]............................................ A-33, A-36
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Step]................ A-32, A-35
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Step Calculation].......A-34
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Step/Width]................A-37
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Thickness].................A-37
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings
[Thickness Calculation]..................................................A-34
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Width]........................A-34
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Width/Diameter]
(Judgment mode: Diameter)...........................................A-37
Sensor Settings: 3 Tool Settings [Width/Diameter]
(Judgment mode: Width)................................................A-36
Sensor Settings: 4 Output Assignment................. A-35, A-37
Setting by the numerical input fields............................... 3-20
Setting by the slider........................................................ 3-20
Setting Detection Setup.............................................4-8, 5-8
[Setting] menu.......................................................7-48, 8-16
Setting on the Test screen.....................................5-58, 5-66
Settings after initialization...............................................A-30
Settings Navigator.....................................................4-2, 5-2
Settings Navigator (Line Mode)........................................ 8-9
Settings Navigator (Scan Mode)...................................... 8-4
A-44
Settings Navigator Screen and
Operation Flow........................................... 4-5, 5-5, 8-4, 8-9
Settings when the IP address is assigned......................A-31
Setting the 1-Axis Adjustment Tool................................. 4-92
Setting the 2-Axis Adjustment Tool................................. 4-94
Setting the Adding Sensor Date Information Function... 7-17
Direct Connection (2 units or more)/
Network Connection................................................. 7-17
For direct connection (1 unit).................................... 7-17
Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor............ 7-23
Setting the Average Height Tool..................................... 4-46
Setting the Edge Position Tool........................................ 5-52
Setting the height area tool............................................ 4-66
Setting the height tool............................................4-39, 5-43
Setting the MAX/MIN tool............................................... 4-58
Setting the monochrome area tool................................. 4-79
Setting the network address for IX-Navigator................. 3-12
Setting the Output Assignment............................4-109, 5-81
Setting the Pin Height Tool............................................. 4-73
Setting the position adjustment tool......................4-55, 5-49
Setting the step calculation tool...................................... 4-97
Setting the Step/Width Tool............................................ 5-67
Setting the thickness calculation tool........................... 4-103
Setting the Thickness Tool.............................................. 5-73
Setting the tilt adjustment tool........................................ 5-51
Setting the Width/Diameter Tool..................................... 5-59
Setting the Width Tool..................................................... 4-86
Setting to the Factory Default......................................... 3-15
Setting up the PC........................................................... 2-18
Shortening measurement processing time..................... 6-24
Shortening the imaging processing time........................ 6-24
Shortening the Processing Time.................................... 6-21
Shortening the processing time of each tool.................. 6-21
Shortening the Processing Time of the Average
Height Tool...................................................................... 6-21
Shortening the processing time of the height area tool.... 6-22
Shortening the processing time of the MAX/MIN tool..... 6-22
Shortening the Processing Time of the Pin Height Tool.... 6-22
Shortening the processing time of the position
adjustment tool............................................................... 6-23
Shortening the processing time of the step and
height tools..................................................................... 6-21
Show saved image file location.............................7-47, 8-16
Specifications................................................................. 10-2
Specify Height Range..................................................... 4-71
Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address.......... 3-13
Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned target position
(scan mode only)............................................................ 6-20
Processing during an operation................................ 6-20
Tool settings.............................................................. 6-20
Stabilizing measurement................................................ 6-16
Stabilizing the Average Height Tool................................ 6-17
Stabilizing the Edge Position Tool.................................. 6-19
Stabilizing the Height Area Tool...................................... 6-17
Stabilizing the Judgment Process.................................. 6-16
Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear
image of the target (scan mode).................................... 6-20
Stabilizing the MAX/MIN Tool......................................... 6-16
Stabilizing the Monochrome Area Tool........................... 6-17
Stabilizing the Pin Height Tool........................................ 6-17
Stabilizing the position adjustment tool.................6-17, 6-19
Stabilizing the step and height tools......................6-16, 6-18
Stabilizing the Tilt Adjustment Tool................................. 6-19
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Index
Stabilizing the Width/Diameter Tool................................ 6-19
Stabilizing tools in line mode.......................................... 6-18
Stabilizing Tools in Line Mode (Common to All Tools).... 6-18
Stabilizing tools in scan mode........................................ 6-16
Starting “Check Settings/Detection History” mode........... 8-2
Starting Operation............................................................ 6-2
Starting the Settings Navigator..................................4-3, 5-3
STATUS indicator light....................................................A-26
Status output response time (maximum value).............. 9-20
Filter: Average, Sampling Period: 6 ms.................... 9-20
Filter: Average, Sampling Period: 11 ms................... 9-20
Filter: Median, Sampling Period: 6 ms...................... 9-21
Filter: Median, Sampling Period: 11 ms.................... 9-21
Status Table......................................................................A-2
Status table (line mode)...................................................A-4
Status table (scan mode).................................................A-2
Step Calculation Tool.............................................4-27, 4-97
Step Tool............................................. 4-21, 4-33, 5-28, 5-37
Step tool settings...................................................4-33, 5-37
Step/Width Tool.....................................................5-31, 5-67
Supplying power to the sensor amplifier........................ 2-11
Switching programs (changing over)................................ 7-5
Switching the Run Screen Display................................... 6-6
Switching screens with a button................................. 6-7
Switching screens with the drop-down list.................. 6-7
System Configuration....................................................... 1-2
T
Terminal number and wiring color of the I/O cable
(OP-87906)..................................................................... 2-10
The reference surface is not visible on the master......... 4-19
The reference surface is visible on the master............... 4-19
The reference surface is visible on the master and
adjust every detection.................................................... 4-19
Thickness Calculation Tool..................................4-28, 4-103
Thickness Tool.......................................................5-32, 5-73
Things can be performed with the program functions...... 7-4
Tilt Adjustment................................................................ 4-16
Tilt Adjustment Tool...............................................5-29, 5-51
Timing............................................................................. 7-47
Timing Input.................................................................... 5-11
Timing Input Response Time (Line Mode)...................... 9-19
Tool Information................................................................ 6-6
Tool Name................................. 4-53, 4-77, 4-91, 5-55, 5-63
Total Status Conditions................................................. 4-110
Transfer Condition Settings............................................ 7-33
Transfer Program Settings............................................. 7-45
Transferring the backed up settings to the sensor......... 7-22
Transverse diagonal mounting bracket............................ 1-7
Transverse diagonal mounting bracket (OP-88346)..... 10-16
Transverse mounting bracket........................................... 1-7
Transverse mounting bracket (OP-88344)................... 10-16
Trigger............................................................................ 7-47
Trigger Error................................................................. 4-110
Trigger Options................................................................. 4-8
Trigger/Timing Button..................................................... 7-48
Troubleshooting..............................................................A-15
Turning on the power and starting operation.................... 6-2
Types of Settings Navigator Images..........................4-4, 5-4
Types of tools........................................................4-20, 5-27
U
Update Sensor......................................................7-44, 7-46
Upper Limit............................................................4-70, 4-82
User’s Manual.......................................................7-49, 8-16
Using the analog output function.................................... 2-11
Using the control panel (IX-CP50) for IX.......................... 1-5
Using the PC software...................................................... 1-4
V
Vertical diagonal mounting bracket.................................. 1-7
Vertical diagonal mounting bracket (OP-88345)........... 10-16
Vertical mounting bracket................................................. 1-7
Vertical mounting bracket (OP-88343)......................... 10-16
[View] menu.................................................................... 7-45
Voltage input (when PNP output is selected)................. 2-13
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-45
A
Index
W
A
What is the IX-H............................................................... 1-4
When position adjustment failed....................................A-12
When switching the program by external input................ 7-6
When switching the program in the main screen in
[Running].......................................................................... 7-5
When the tool window does not protrude after position
adjustment is successful..................................................A-8
When the tool window does protrude after position
adjustment is successful................................................A-10
When using the adjustable bracket (OP-88347).............. 2-6
When using the transverse diagonal mounting bracket
(OP-88346)....................................................................... 2-5
When using the transverse mounting bracket
(OP-88344)....................................................................... 2-5
When using the vertical diagonal mounting bracket
(OP-88345)....................................................................... 2-5
When using the vertical mounting bracket (OP-88343).... 2-5
Width/Diameter Tool..............................................5-30, 5-59
Width Extraction Method................................................ 4-89
Width Extraction Method
(Only when the judgment mode is [Width]).................... 5-63
Width Tool..............................................................4-25, 4-86
[Window] menu......................................................7-49, 8-16
With adjustable bracket (OP-88347)
(IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360)...................................... 10-14
With adjustable bracket (OP-88347) (IX-360W)........... 10-14
With transverse diagonal mounting bracket
(OP-88346): Attaching a vertical laser for line mode.... 10-13
With transverse diagonal mounting bracket
(OP-88346) (IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360).................. 10-11
With transverse diagonal mounting bracket
(OP-88346) (IX-360W)................................................. 10-12
With transverse mounting bracket (OP‑88344)
(IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360)........................................ 10-9
With transverse mounting bracket (OP‑88344)
(IX-360W)..................................................................... 10-10
With vertical diagonal mounting bracket (OP-88345):
Attaching a vertical laser for line mode........................ 10-12
With vertical diagonal mounting bracket (OP-88345)
(IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360)...................................... 10-10
With vertical diagonal mounting bracket (OP-88345)
(IX-360W)..................................................................... 10-11
With vertical mounting bracket (OP-88343)
(IX-055/IX-080/IX-150/IX-360)........................................ 10-9
With vertical mounting bracket (OP-88343)
(IX-360W)....................................................................... 10-9
X
X-Axis median filter........................................................ 5-23
Z
ZERO/Offset Error............................................... 4-110, 5-82
ZERO/Offset storage...................................................... 7-24
ZERO/Offset Tools............................................... 4-111, 5-82
ZERO/Offset when position adjustment fails.................. 6-14
Zoom.....................................................................7-47, 8-15
A-46
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
Copyright notice
Copyright notice
/*
* Copyright (C) 2010 Texas Instruments Incorporated - http://www.ti.com/
*/
/*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* Neither the name of Texas Instruments Incorporated nor the names of
* its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
* from this software without specific prior written permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
* "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
* A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
* OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
* DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
* THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
* OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*
*/
libjpeg
Copyright (C) 1991-2012, Thomas G. Lane.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
This software includes work that is distributed under the Apache License 2.0 and that was modified by KEYENCE.
A
IX-H User's Manual (PC Software)
A-47
Revision history
Revision history
Edition number
April, 2020
1st edition
June, 2020
2nd edition
October, 2020
3rd edition
Revision details
IP address assignment function is added.
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1)KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year
from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used
merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would
necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE
with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by
KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any
Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer,
including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,
misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or
outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2)KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it
is Buyer’s responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3)The Products and any samples (“Products/Samples”) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans, for
human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should
any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and
additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever
arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4)OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR
ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR
ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage
limitations may not apply.
BUYER’S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:
If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such
third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided
to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2020 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 263030GB 2100-3 956GB Printed in Japan